JP2020062563A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest of a game in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: start storage means (game control device 100) for storing information on execution of a variation display game as a start memory, on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition (start winning); and performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of executing control to display a holding image corresponding to the start memory. The performance control means, as the holding image, can display a variation holding image corresponding to the start memory (variation holding) during execution of the variation display game and a standby holding image corresponding to the start memory (standby holding) in which the variation display game has not been executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 186

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a display device (display means) capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information is provided, and a state advantageous to a player is generated according to the result of the variable display game. The possible ones are known.
In this type of gaming machine, as described in, for example, Patent Document 1, various effects including a notice suggesting a result of the variable display game and the like are provided as the effects at the time of the variable display game and the like. Done in.

JP, 2013-192622, A

By the way, in this type of gaming machine, although the productions are diversified, more entertaining productions are required.
The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with a high entertainment value.

The invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Starting storage means for storing information about the execution of the variable display game as a starting storage based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and storing a predetermined number as an upper limit.
And a production control means capable of executing control for displaying a reserved image corresponding to the starting memory,
The effect control means,
As the holding image, it is possible to display a changing holding image corresponding to the starting memory during execution of the variable display game and a waiting holding image corresponding to the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed. Is characterized in that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of entertainment.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a back view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing a control system (mainly a game control device) of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the game control control equipment. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the game control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart which shows initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing. It is a flow chart which shows output processing. It is a flowchart showing a payout command transmission process. 9 is a flowchart showing a random number update process 1. 6 is a flowchart showing a random number update process 2. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing a winning number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which shows the game machine state check processing. It is a flow chart which shows pay-out busy signal check processing. It is a flowchart showing a special figure game process. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart showing a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing transition setting processing (special figure 1 and special figure 2) during special figure change. It is a flow chart which shows processing during change in special figure. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a high probability variation frequency update process. It is the flowchart which shows the production mode information check processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing 1 during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing 1 during small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / during-interval processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the special winning opening remaining sphere processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process shift setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process shift setting process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end setting processing 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process transfer setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit fanfare middle process and a small hit middle process shift setting process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart showing a small hit operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a small hit remaining ball process and a small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3. It is the flowchart which shows the production command setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a symbol variation control process. It is a flow chart which shows distribution processing and 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows ordinary figure game processing. It is a flow chart which shows gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. It is a flow chart which shows processing during change of a figure and processing shift setting processing during a figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the processing shift setting processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart which shows normal power operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric ball remaining ball process and a universal figure end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the end process of a universal figure and the routine setting transfer process 2 of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the board radio | wireless fraud monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows external information edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows external information edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows main prize sphere signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening signal edit process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting demo setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process for customer waiting. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball lending information setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the design command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a reach start effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows SD1 change setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows motion registration processing. 6 is a flowchart showing motion data initialization processing 1 and 2. It is a flow chart which shows motion deletion processing and motion continuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows a constant weight process and a variable weight process. It is a flow chart which shows PB waiting processing and PB judgment branch processing. It is a flow chart which shows a symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the symbol back calculation substitution processing. It is a flow chart which shows change scenario switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows a repetition process and an end process. It is a flow chart which shows motion control processing. It is a flow chart which shows motion command execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows motion command execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows a bitmap addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a moving image addition process. It is a flow chart which shows one point designated object movement processing. It is a flow chart which shows effect type designation processing and effect parameter designation processing. It is a flow chart which shows object deletion processing and object change processing. It is a flow chart which shows object animation decoding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a behavior index setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the production display edit processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production display edit processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production display edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a character drawing process. It is a flow chart which shows display left design conversion processing, PB color conversion processing, and reach character conversion processing. It is a front view of the game board (the movable accessory is in a standing state). It is a figure which shows a starting mouth distribution apparatus. It is a figure explaining an operation of a starting mouth distribution device. It is a figure which shows an example of a still image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the list table for motions. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table at the time of a customer waiting demonstration. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of a normal change special figure 1. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the time of a left symbol normal fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of the left symbol fluctuation start. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship of the current symbol, the previous symbol, the next symbol at the time of normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the specific example (connection example) of the left symbol normal fluctuation time motion table. It is a figure showing an example of a scenario at the time of a push button announcement, and a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of variable display ending. It is a figure explaining a display layer. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a figure explaining the state of an image and a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure explaining the state of an image and a display layer. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a flow chart which shows reduction effect control processing. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a timing chart explaining the synchronization of the hold (starting memory) display. It is a flowchart showing a holding effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing a holding effect setting process. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a figure explaining a hold (starting memory) animation timer. It is a flowchart showing a holding effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the jackpot expectation etc. by the difference of the mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the jackpot expectation etc. by the difference of the mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the jackpot expectation etc. by the difference of the mode of a hold display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is a timing chart explaining movement (shift) of a hold display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of production display.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a mode example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and a machine frame 2 rotatably supported by a hinge portion 3 so that And a front frame 4 which can be opened and closed freely. A game board 20 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) is attached to the front frame 4. The game board 20 is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper side of the front face. It should be noted that a game area 22 to be described later of the game board 20 is visible from the front side through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be used, reference numeral is omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported on the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame (or body frame) and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame, but in the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 will be described. is doing.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
A CR unit (also referred to as a card-type ball lending control unit or a card unit) as a game medium lending device (ball lending machine) may be installed in the pachinko machine 1, but it is not shown here. The CR unit is connected to a payout controller 200 (shown in FIG. 4) described later via a card unit connection board (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is a board-shaped base material (so-called veneer) in which game nails are planted, and a substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by a guide rail 21 to allow a game area. 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area in which a game ball that has been hit is dropped from above to determine whether it is out or safe (determine whether or not a prize has been won), and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 provided in the lower portion of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as prize balls).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the edge of the front frame 4 on the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1).

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower portion of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game balls that have been discharged as prize balls or as ball rental balls before being launched. At the upper edge of the upper plate 7, a push button type effect button 9 operated by the player is provided. The effect button 9 has a built-in effect button switch (effect button SW46) described later. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 9, a touch panel 9a for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 to which the game balls of the upper plate 7 can be moved by the operation of the player, and a firing operation handle 11 (operation unit) for performing the operation of launching the game balls. . Here, the firing operation handle 11 is provided with a touch switch 11a (also referred to as a touch sensor) that detects whether or not a player's hand or the like touches (contacts) the firing operation handle 11. If the touch switch 11a detects a state where the firing operation handle 11 is touched, it can be determined that the player is playing a game (that is, a game ball is being shot). The touch switch 11a corresponds to a contact detecting means.
In addition, reference numerals 12a and 12b in FIG. 1 denote speakers that output sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12a is an upper speaker provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b is a lower speaker provided at the right end portion of the operation panel 6 (right side of the lower plate 10).

Although the touch panel 9a is provided integrally with the effect button 9 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 9a may be provided separately from the effect button 9, and for example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 9, A touch panel 9a may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.
In addition, on the right side of the production button 9, a ball lending button 16 which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button which is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 17, balance display section (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment, a player rotates the operating section (launching operation handle 11) to cause a launching device (not shown) to be supplied from the upper plate 7. Is fired toward the game area 22 on the front of the game board 20. In addition, the player operates the effect button 9 or the touch panel 9a to intervene the operation of the player in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display unit 41a (see FIG. 2) of the display device 41. It is possible to perform a performance.
Further, in FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 is a decorative lamp which uses LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the left and right of the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light source, and reference numeral 14 is a decoration lamp 13 on the right side thereof. It is a logo display portion 14 (a portion for displaying the brand of the pachinko machine) formed on the side portion of the. In addition to this, a moving light may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The moving light includes an LED as a light emitting source and a motor as a driving source. Here, if the decoration mechanism is divided by the concept of the board and frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light constitute the frame decoration device 43 (decoration device on the frame side) shown in FIG. Also constitutes a frame rendering device (frame-side rendering device) not shown.

B. Front Configuration of Game Board In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 is a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
In the game area 22, as shown in FIG. 2, the out-ball inflow port 23, the center case 24, the starting port distribution device 600 (including a special-figure 1 starting port 607 and a special-figure 2 starting port 608, which will be described later), ordinary Ordinary variable winning a prize device 26 (including start winning a prize hole 26a) as an electric accessory (genuine), variable winning a prize device 27, general winning a prize holes 28-31, universal figure starting gate 32, warp entrance 33, indicator lamp section 34, many. Game nails (not shown) and the like are provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. Note that the game nails are such that the game balls that have jumped into the upper portion of the game area 22 flow down while hitting this, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment parts such as the center case.

  The center case 24 is a member (game production structure) that surrounds the front surface of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 5) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the drawing, the center case 24 has a movable role that enhances the effect by coordinating with lamps using LEDs for light emission as a light source for effect or decoration and effect display on the display device 41. An object (an accessory having a movable portion that is operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In the case of this example, as the movable accessory, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 130, the movable accessory 700 having the decorative portion 701 having a rose flower motif, the upper movable accessory 801, and the left movable accessory. An object 802 and a right movable accessory 803 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 130, the movable accessory 700 has a substantially disk-shaped decorative portion 701 having a decoration representing a rose flower on the surface, and the decorative portion 701 is integrally provided on the tip side. The arm unit 703 is provided, and the decoration unit 701 is movable with respect to the display unit 41 a (display screen, display area) of the display device 41 (display unit). Specifically, the movable accessory 700 is provided in the lower portion of the center case 24, and the arm portion 703 can swing along the front surface of the display portion 41a by a mechanism and a drive source (not shown). At least as shown in FIG. 130, the upright state in which the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are upright, and the initial state in which the arm portion 703 and the decorative portion 701 are tilted substantially horizontally to the left when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 2 ( A normal state) and a state between these standing states and initial states (for example, a state inclined at an angle of 40 degrees) can be displaced and stopped. In the standing state, the decorative portion 701 is exposed on the front surface so as to partially cover the lower front surface of the display portion 41a (display screen, display area) (becomes visible to the player), while in the initial state, The decorative portion 701 (at least its main portion) is hidden in the lower left portion of the center case 24 and is not exposed to the front (not visible to the player).

  The upper movable accessory 801 is provided on the upper side in the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a rose flower which is the theme of the game board 20 of this example falls or rotates on the front side of the display unit 41a. It is a movable movable accessory. The left movable accessory 802 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front inside the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a vine of a rose can be moved in parallel to the front side of the display unit 41a, for example. It is a character. The right movable accessory 803 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front inside the center case 24, and a movable effect member imitating a vine of a rose is movable in parallel to the front side of the display unit 41a, for example. It is a character. It should be noted that the movable accessory such as the upper movable accessory 801, the left movable accessory 802, and the right movable accessory 803 is not limited to such an aspect, and various modifications are possible. For example, even in a mode in which the upper, left, and right movable effect members are all rotationally moved or moved in parallel so that they can be combined on the front surface of the display unit 41a (a mode in which one large rose is combined together). Good. In addition, the upper movable accessory 801, the left movable accessory 802, and the right movable accessory 803 may move in conjunction with the movable accessory 700 to express something.

  It should be noted that lamps for production or decoration are provided in a portion of the game board 20 other than the center case 24 (which may be outside the game area 22). In addition, the lamps (including the lamp of the display lamp section 34 in this example) for effect or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the effect mechanism on the board side. The decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. The movable accessory (eg, movable accessory 700, upper movable accessory 801, left movable accessory 802, right movable accessory 803) provided in the center case 24 corresponds to a board-side effect mechanism, and is a board. A rendering device 44 (shown in FIG. 5) is configured. The movable accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided in a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

Next, the starting mouth distribution device 600 and the normal variation winning device 26 are starting winning devices including a starting winning opening of a special figure as described later, and in this example, the starting mouth distribution device 600 as shown in FIG. Is arranged below the central part of the center case 24, and the normal variation winning device 26 is arranged on the upper right side of the starting port distribution device 600 (below the right side part of the center case 24).
Starting opening distribution device 600, the front surface is covered with a decorative cover 601, the game ball that has flowed in from the upper surface as described later, the special drawing 1 starting opening 607 or special drawing 2 inside (the rear side of the decorative cover 601) It is a winning device which is made to flow into the starting port 608 (shown in FIG. 131). The details of the starting port distribution device 600 will be described later. Moreover, the normal variation winning device 26 has one starting winning opening 26a.
Here, the special figure 1 starting opening 607, the special figure 2 starting opening 608, and the starting winning opening 26a function as a starting winning opening (also referred to as a starting opening or starting area) of the special drawing as described later. It is the mouth (winning area). Strictly speaking, there is a starting area (area where the game ball is detected as a start winning) inside the starting winning opening, and when the gaming ball enters the starting winning opening, it is detected as a starting winning. The game ball inlet (game ball inlet 606 described later; FIG. 131) on the upper surface of the start port distribution device 600 is always open, and the game machine that has flowed into the start port distribution device 600 from here has a special figure 1 start. Either the mouth 607 or the special figure 2 starting mouth 608 is won. The starting winning opening 26a of the normal variation winning device 26 is in a winning state (open state in which the possibility of winning a game ball is high) when the opening / closing member 26b described later is opened, and when the opening / closing member 26b is closed, the winning is made. Impossible state (closed state in which the winning probability of the game ball is lower than the open state, the winning possibility may be zero, and the winning possibility is zero in this embodiment).

  The normal variation winning device 26 is a device (so-called mini attacker) having a start winning opening 26a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 26b (opening / closing door), and is also called an ordinary electric auditor (general electric power). In the following, "opening of the normal variation winning device 26", "opening of normal electric power", "opening of the starting winning opening 26a", and "opening of the opening / closing member 26b" all mean that the opening / closing member 26b is opened. Means to do. The normal variation winning device 26 may be of a type in which the starting winning opening 26a is opened / closed by an opening / closing member that opens in an inverted C shape.

  In addition, the variable winning device 27 is provided below the normal variable winning device 26 (to the right of the starting opening distribution device 600) and has a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b (opening / closing door) in this example. It is a device (so-called attacker). This big winning opening 27a is opened on the condition that a big hit, which will be described later, has been made, so that a game ball can be won. The opening / closing member 27b is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 133 (FIG. 4). Here, as for the variable winning a prize device (special variable winning a prize device) which includes the big winning a prize, only one mode is illustrated in FIG. 2, but there may be a mode in which there are a plurality of this special variable winning a prize device. . Further, this special variation winning device may be of a type in which the special winning opening is opened and closed by an opening / closing member which opens in an inverted C shape.

The warp inlet 33 is formed on the left side of the center case 24, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the center case 24 can flow into the warp inlet 33. The game ball flowing in from the warp inlet 33 is guided to a stage 24a provided at the bottom of the center case 24 via a warp flow path (not shown) in the center case 24. The game ball guided to the stage 24a flows down from the center case 24 through the rolling on the stage 24a, and flows into the starting port distribution device 600, for example, depending on the flowing position.
The display lamp unit 34 is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps having LEDs as light emitting sources, and performs the fourth symbol of special figures 1 and 2 and a hold display (display of the number of starting winning winning memories that are held).

The display device 41 (production means, display means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually called a variable display device. As the name of the display device 41, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, an identification information variation display device, as a name of a member having a similar function. , Etc., but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (display screen, display area) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a special figure in a plurality of columns. For example, the special figures are displayed in three columns vertically on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the special figures composed of numbers and characters are displayed in a stopped state (stopped display) in each column, or in a changing state (for example, in the vertical direction). It is possible to perform display (that is, variable display) in a scrolling state.
Further, on the display unit 41a, an image for presentation such as a background image or a character image or for information notification can be displayed separately from the special figure.

Further, the display device 41 may display an image corresponding to a so-called general figure. However, when a general figure is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decorative figure. When the display device 41 is configured to display a public figure, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is the identification information (special pattern) that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the normal figure is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure hit (not the big hit). Identification information (normal pattern).
In the present example, the public view is not displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, but is displayed on the collective display device 35. The universal map displayed on the collective display device 35 is referred to as a regular universal map as described later.

In this way, the collective display device 35 (details of which will be described later) also displays a general figure in addition to the special figure, and the general figure game will be described below.
When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 32, a variable display game of the universal figure by the variable display of the universal figure (hereinafter referred to as a universal figure variation display game) is played on the collective display device 35, and the stopped universal figure is predetermined. In the case of the mode (specific display mode), a privilege called “universal figure hit” is given.
When the display device 41 is configured to display a public figure, a variable display of the general figure (decorative public figure) is performed on the screen of the display device 41. However, an independent general-purpose display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41.

When it comes to a normal figure, in the open state where the opening / closing member 26b of the normal variation winning device 26 is opened, a game temporarily held for a predetermined opening time is performed, and the game ball easily starts winning, and that much, The number of times the special display variable display game is executed increases, and the possibility of a big hit increases.
Further, during the above-mentioned general figure variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general figure starting gate 32, the display of the collective display device 35, which will be described later, displays a pending figure of the general figure starting memory, for example, 4 Up to individual pieces are stored, and after the end of the general display variable display game, the general display variable display game is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of the universal figure is set to be high, it becomes easier to hit the universal figure.
In addition, the hold display of the general figure starting memory displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is the normal figure starting memory. In addition to the collective display device 35, a unique universal figure starting memory indicator for displaying the decorative figure starting memory may be arranged in the game area 22.

Here, the time saving will be described as follows.
Time saving is an abbreviation for "time reduction". After the jackpot, the time for changing special maps and public maps is shortened compared to normal time, improving time efficiency and increasing the probability of hitting universal maps (normal variable winning device 26 ) The start winning opening 26a is opened (including the opening time of normal electric train is longer than usual) to support the winning of the starting opening, so that the player can hold the variable display game up to the predetermined number of times. This is a function to efficiently change the special map without reducing the number of balls (number of balls held). In other words, the time saving is, in a narrow sense, to reduce the fluctuation time of special maps and general maps as compared to the normal time, but it is a special process that is performed in the so-called general support state (electric support state) that enhances the probability of winning a prize. It may mean the entire control. The special control performed in the normal electric power support state is a control for changing the fluctuation pattern of the universal figure (general figure fluctuation time, general figure stop time, etc.) in the player's advantage as described above (for example, shortening the universal figure fluctuation time. Control, etc.), control for increasing the probability of hitting the universal figure, control for changing the opening pattern (opening time, number of times of opening, etc.) of the ordinary electric train to the advantage of the player (for example, control for increasing the opening time or control for increasing the number of times of opening). Any one or a plurality of the above).

Next, the collective display device 35 displays what is called a special figure or a special figure, and additionally, a special figure or a starting memory hold display (sometimes called a special figure hold display or a figure hold display) or a game. The status is displayed, for example, a plurality of indicators having LEDs as light emitting sources (for example, an indicator composed of one small lamp, or a display of 7 segments capable of displaying numbers etc. as the special figure). Container). For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 35, the one displaying the special figure 1 is arranged as the special figure 1 display and the one displaying the special figure 2 is arranged as the special figure 2 display.
In addition, the hold display of the start memory (in some cases, simply referred to as “start memory display” or “hold display”) is used to notify the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed. This is a display, and generally, it is displayed by turning on a lamp or the like for each starting memory. That is, if there are three starting memories, it is performed by turning on three lamps or displaying three figures. However, the variable display game is not limited to the start memory for which the variable display game has not been executed, and may be displayed for the start memory during execution of the variable display game. For example, in the display unit 41a (display area) of the variable display device 41 that performs the variable display of the special figure, as a kind of effect, the start memory during execution of the variable display game may also be displayed as the variable pending. This display is also a start memory display (hold display) in a broad sense.

Further, while what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is this special map or general map (formal special map or general map), the display section 41a of the variable display device 41, etc. described above. The display of the special figure and the public figure (however, when the structure for displaying the general figure is adopted in the variable display device 41) carried out in (1) is a dummy display for the player to direct. For this reason, the special display or the general drawing as seen from the player refers to this dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, it will be referred to as "decorative special drawing" or "decorative general drawing", for example.
As described above, the collective display device 35 is not intended for the player but used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. The display of the starting memory of the special drawing for the player (special drawing hold display) is, for example, the display section 41a of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps provided in the game board 20 (in the case of the present example, for example, the aforementioned display lamps). Lamp of part 34).

Next, the configuration and operation of the starting port distribution device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. 131 (a), 132 (a), and 132 (b) are front views of the starting port distribution device 600 with the decorative cover 601 removed. In addition, FIG. 131B is a top view of a distribution member 603 and the like, which will be described later, viewed from above.
In addition to the decorative cover 601 (shown in FIG. 2) described above, the starting opening distribution device 600 includes a base member 602, a distribution member 603, a base member side magnet 604, and a distribution member side magnet shown in FIG. 131 (a). 605.
The base member 602 is a box-shaped member as a whole, and a game ball inlet 606 into which a game ball (pachinko ball) can flow in from above is formed on the upper surface, and both left and right positions of the inner lower part (see the front view). A special drawing 1 starting port 607 and a special drawing 2 starting port 608 are provided side by side at the lower left and lower right positions of the minute member 603).

  The distribution member 603 is arranged at a position substantially directly below the game ball inlet 606 in the base member 602, and of the rotary shaft 603a in the front-back direction perpendicular to the game board surface (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 131 (a)). It is attached to the base member 602 so as to be rotatable about a central axis by a predetermined angle. Here, the predetermined angle is an angle range from a left-sided state to a right-sided state described later. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the distribution plate-shaped portion 610, the left guide wall portion 611, and the right guide wall portion 612 are provided on the front surface side of the distribution member 603 and on the outer peripheral side of the rotation shaft 603a. It is provided. Both sides of the distribution plate portion 610 are parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and when viewed from the front surface, extend radially from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 603a as shown in FIG. 131 (a). The distribution member-side magnet 605 is fixed to a position on the back side of the tip of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610. The game ball flowing down from the game ball inlet 606 is configured to flow down to any one of the left and right side surfaces of the distribution plate portion 610. Further, the left side guide wall portion 611 and the right side guide wall portion 612 are arranged such that the upper surfaces thereof are parallel to the front-rear direction perpendicular to the game board surface, and the game ball flowing down from the game ball inlet 606 is the left side guide wall portion 611 or the right side. The guide wall portion 612 is in contact with the upper surface of either one of them. Further, in a neutral state in which the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 is directed straight upward when viewed from the front surface, the left guide wall portion 611 is located on the lower left side of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610 (on the left side of the rotation shaft 603a). The upper surface of the guide wall portion 611 extends obliquely downward and leftward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotating shaft 603a, while the right guide wall portion 612 is positioned on the lower right side of the distribution plate portion 610 (right side of the rotating shaft 603a). However, the upper surface of the right guide wall portion 612 is configured so as to extend obliquely downward and to the right from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotating shaft 603a.

The base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 are permanent magnets, and as shown in FIG. In the neutral state, the distribution member side magnet 605 is located at a position (neutral position) facing directly in front of the base member side magnet 604 in the neutral state. The distribution member-side magnet 605 is fixed to the rear surface side of the distribution member 603 at a position separated from the central axis of the rotating shaft 603a by a predetermined dimension (a position on the rear side of the tip end of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610). Note that, in FIG. 131 (b), in order to avoid complication, only the base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 and their surroundings (including the special figure 1 starting port 607 and the special figure 2 starting port 608) are shown. Others are omitted in the figure.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b), the distribution member-side magnet 605 faces the substantially front surface of the base member-side magnet 604 as the distribution member 603 rotates with respect to the base member 602. It is configured such that it can move so as to oscillate left and right by a predetermined angle around the position (neutral position). Here, the base member side magnet 604 and the distribution member side magnet 605 are fixed in a posture such that the opposite sides have the same pole, and are configured to repel each other by magnetic force. Further, the game ball that has flowed down from the game ball inlet 606 into the starter distribution device 600 (that is, the inside of the base member 602) is at the position indicated by the symbol P in FIG. 131B (the front surface of the distribution member 603). First, it is configured to drop to a side, which is a position immediately below the game ball inlet 606).

  In the starting port distribution device 600 having the above-described configuration, by setting the detailed dimensions and positional relationship of each part, the following distribution of the game ball P can be achieved even though the configuration does not include a drive source such as a motor. Minute operation is realized. That is, in a natural state where the game ball P does not flow, the distribution member 603 is in a rightward state in which the distribution member side magnet 605 is on the right side of the base member side magnet 604 when viewed from the front due to the repulsion by the magnetic force (FIG. 131 (a)) or a state in which the sorting member-side magnet 605 is located on the left side of the base member-side magnet 604 when viewed from the front (left-right opposite to FIG. 131 (a)). It has stopped. That is, in the natural state where the game ball P does not flow in, the distribution member 603 is maintained in the state (the rightward state or the leftward state) that is not the neutral position described above due to the repulsion by the magnetic force. However, when the game ball P flows in from the game ball inlet 606 and falls, the game ball P falls to either the left side or the right side when viewed from the front surface of the distribution plate-shaped portion 610, and the left guide wall portion 611 or the right side. By contacting the upper surface of one of the guide wall portions 612 and pushing it down, rotation of the distribution member 603 in one direction (that is, rotational movement of the distribution member side magnet 605) occurs, and with this. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (a) or (b), the dropped game ball P is sorted into either the special figure 1 starting port 607 or the special figure 2 starting port 608 and flows in (prizes). Then, by the operation when the game ball P enters any of the starting openings, the distribution member 603 is switched from the rightward state to the leftward state, or conversely from the leftward state to the rightward state, and the game ball P is obtained. Every time a player enters from the game ball inlet 606 and falls, the same operation with different directions is alternately performed. That is, by such an operation of the start port distribution device 600, the game balls flowing into the game ball inlet port 606 alternately flow into the special figure 1 start port 607 or the special figure 2 start port 608. In other words, if the game ball that has flowed into the game ball inlet 606 wins the special figure 1 starting port 607, the next game ball that flows into the game ball inlet 606 will win the special diagram 2 starting port 608 and play. If the game ball flowing into the ball inlet 606 wins the special figure 2 starting port 608, the game ball flowing into the game ball inlet 606 next wins the special figure 1 starting port 607.

C. Configuration of Pachinko Machine Back Side Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the back side of the game board 20 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism of the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank (not shown), a guideway (not shown), a payout unit (not shown), a card unit connection board (not shown), and an external information terminal board 55 (see FIG. 4), the payout control device 200 (shown in FIG. 4), the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, and the power supply device 500 (shown in FIG. 4). Of these, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 as shown in FIG.

  Note that in FIG. 3, the box of the effect control device 300 is not directly directly visible, and a box for housing the substrate of the effect control device 300 is arranged in the back of the cover member (not shown). The cover member has a function of preventing game balls from entering the back surface of the game machine, and has a structure that can be opened and closed, for example, like a door. However, as shown in FIG. 3, the volume switch (volume SW) 388 and the setting confirmation LED 339 of the effect control device 300 are exposed on the back surface side of the game board 20, and are, for example, workers of a game machine manufacturing factory or a game shop. The store clerk can operate the volume SW 338 while looking at the setting confirmation LED 339. The volume switch 388 sets the volume or volume range of the sounds output from the speakers 12a and 12b, and the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on when the volume SW 338 reaches a predetermined operation position. That is, if the setting value changed by the volume SW 338 does not match the default setting value registered in the backup RAM (for example, FeRAM 327 described later) by the control (not shown) of the effect control device 300, the setting confirmation LED 339. Is turned off, and when the set value changed by the volume switch 338 matches the default set value, the setting confirmation LED 339 is turned on. In this way, the setting confirmation LED 339 lights up in the default setting, so that the operator does not need to see the small number on the scale of the volume SW 338 (or does not see this number), but the volume SW 338 is set to the default. It is extremely easy to switch to the setting.

The storage tank is used to store the balls that have not yet been dispensed. The shortage of the number of balls in this storage tank is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). The ball is replenished. The balls in the storage tank are guided by the guide path and discharged to the above-mentioned upper plate 7 by the payout unit. The payout unit is capable of discharging the number of game balls according to the rotation amount of the built-in payout motor, and the game balls paid out toward the upper plate 7 by this payout unit are payout ball detection switches (not shown). ) Is detected.
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the hall management device.

The payout control device 200 performs control (including control of the payout unit) necessary for paying out game balls (both prize ball payout and ball rental payout), and a circuit for realizing this control function in a predetermined case. The substrate is housed and configured. This payout control device 200 is connected to the game control device 100 as shown in FIG. 4, and based on a payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100, causes a predetermined number of game balls to be discharged to the upper plate 7 as prize balls. Control the payout of prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 controls a ball rental payout in which a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 as a ball rental, based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit.
The game control device 100 controls solenoids and the like arranged on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively control the progress of the game ( (Details will be described later), and a substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case.

The effect control device 300 controls the display device 41, the decorative lamp, the effect device, and the speakers 12a and 12b based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100. This control function is provided in a predetermined case. A circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit) side for lending a ball. If the wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the game ball cannot be launched.
In addition, in general, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, replace the entire pachinko machine except the card unit, or leave the frame side (including the payout control device) of the pachinko machine on the game board side (the game board and the game board). In some cases, only the main control device such as the control device is replaced).

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 5. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. In addition, in the drawings, it is difficult to illustrate when the names of the members are long, and therefore, the names may be shortened (illustrated) as appropriate.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device (not shown), and a power supply device 500 as main components of a control system.

(Game controller related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game as a whole, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal (not shown). There is. The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device or control means. The detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described later.
The inspection device connection terminal is configured to include, for example, a photo coupler 179 (shown in FIG. 4), and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the gaming microcomputer 101 to the inspection device 185 is connected. .

In the game control device 100, a first starting opening switch 120 (starting opening 1 switch in FIG. 4), a second starting opening switch 121 (starting opening 2 switch in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning opening switch 123, and a big winning prize. Detection signals from the mouth switch 124, the magnetic sensor 126, the board radio wave sensor 127, the glass frame opening detection switch 211, and the front frame opening detection switch 212 (main body frame opening detection switch in FIG. 4) are input.
Here, the first starting port switch 120 is a winning ball detection sensor that detects the game balls that have won the special figure 1 starting port 607 one by one, and the second starting port switch 121 is the starting winning port 26a or It is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the game balls that have won in the special opening 2 starting port 608 one by one. In the case of this example, the second starting opening switch 121 (starting opening 2 switch) is explained as being common to the starting winning opening 26a and the special drawing 2 starting opening 608, but the starting winning opening 26a and the special drawing 2 are shown. There may be a mode in which two are provided separately from the starting port 608 and a total of two.
The special winning opening switch 124 is a similar sensor (so-called count switch) that detects a game ball that has won the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27. When there are a plurality of special winning openings, one or two big winning openings switches 124 are provided for each, and x total is provided.
Further, the winning opening switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning openings, one is provided for each, and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each of the general winning openings, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings as a whole. The gate switch 122 is a sensor that detects the game balls passing through the universal figure starting gate 32 one by one.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and a circuit for outputting a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

Further, the magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127 are sensors provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like and detect fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensor 126 is arranged at each of the general winning openings 28, 30, 31 on the game board 20 and the large winning openings 27a of the variable winning device 27 (that is, arranged at four places), and the general winning openings 28, 30, 31, It is a sensor for detecting fraud such as stacking game balls around a large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 using a magnet so as to facilitate the winning of each winning opening. It should be noted that the magnetic sensors 126 may not be arranged at four locations as described above, but may be arranged at more locations.
When there are k magnetic sensors 126 installed, one magnetic sensor 126 is provided for each, and a total of k magnetic sensors 126 are provided. Similarly, when there are m board radio wave sensors 127, one board radio wave sensor 127 is provided, and m board radio sensors 127 are provided as a whole.
Further, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame (main frame) open detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with a proximity I / F 163 that processes signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, and 127, which will be described later in detail.

Here, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 500 is applied to the electronic components such as the game control device 100 and solenoids 132 and 133, which will be described later, driven by the game control device 100. Supplied and operational.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 that supplies a power supply voltage to a RAM (RAM 101C described later) of the game microcomputer 101 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit for the occurrence and recovery of a power failure in the game control device 100. A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal to be notified is provided.

A RAM clear switch (RAM initialization switch) 504 for initializing the RAM and the like inside the gaming microcomputer 101 is provided in the game control device 100 in this example, but this RAM clear switch (RAM initial The digitalization switch) 504 may be provided in the power supply device 500.
Further, in the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, It may be configured to be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are thus provided on the power supply device 500 or a board different from the main board. As a result, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement target when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, detects the occurrence of a power failure and changes the power failure monitoring signal (for example, turns on) when the voltage drops to 17V or less, for example. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

An initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504, and the initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on, and is a user in the gaming microcomputer 101. Information stored in a RAM area such as the work RAM 101C and a similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized.
In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeated in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer (microcomputer of the payout control device 200). Is read. The reset signal is a kind of forced read signal and resets the entire control system.

Next, the game control device 100 is connected to the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, the universal solenoid 132, the special winning opening solenoid 133, and the collective display device 35.
Further, the game control device 100 can be connected via a relay board 170 to a test shooting test device (not shown) (which is connected at the time of a test in a test organization). The test-shooting test device is used by an accredited organization to perform a test-shooting test of a gaming machine.
Further, external information of the game control device 100 is output from the game control device 100 via the external information terminal board 55 to a management device as an external device.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 by a cable and relays when external information is transmitted to a management device (not shown, for example, a device called a hall computer) as an external device.
In addition, the management device collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in a game store, and performs processing such as calculation processing and totalization display of information necessary for sales.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal for notifying a signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a big hit signal for notifying a big hit that occurs during the course of the game, a condition for rotating the symbol (special figure) The starting opening signal that notifies the winning to the starting opening, the symbol starts rotating, or the symbol fixed number signal that notifies the symbol rotation triggered by the rotation stop of the symbol, the game state is in a state advantageous to the player It is a signal to be notified to the outside such as a privilege state signal indicating (so-called probability change state, time saving state), and these are collectively referred to as a gaming machine state signal.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by serial communication. On the other hand, the payout control device 200 outputs a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, a frame radio wave incorrect signal, a payout busy signal, and a touch switch signal to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, a solenoid and the like connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
The ordinary solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26b of the normal winning / winning device 26, the special winning opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 27b of the floating winning device 27, and the collective display device 35 is a so-called universal player as described above. The display of a figure or a special figure, the hold display of the starting memory of the special figure or the general figure, and the display of the game state are performed.
Further, data (command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 and a device connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 has a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41, a sound source LSI 313 that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, and the like. However, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 corresponds to a control device and a control means.
The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command (consisting of MODE and ACTION data described later) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and controls the content of the output image of the display device 41. Alternatively, the sound source LSI 313 is instructed to reproduce a sound, and the speakers 12a and 12b are driven to produce a sound effect or the like. Execute the process. In addition, when the production control device 300 receives an error notification instruction from the game control device 100, it outputs a signal to an error notification LED (not shown) to turn it on.
Here, in the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, in addition to a single command (for example, a stop command), the effect is not started independently, and an effect is produced in a group. There is something to be done, for example, "variation pattern command + symbol designation command" at the start of special figure variation.

Explaining the main commands other than the above, there is a probability information command. This is a flag that is prepared corresponding to the special figure game mode flag (see steps S25, S30, S694, S779, A248, etc. described later) and reflects the probability state at that time.
Even if the effect control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, the command does not immediately change the screen of the display device 41, but an internal command for effecting the screen. Just change the parameters. After that, when a command that changes the screen (variable system, customer waiting demo command, etc.) is received, it is reflected as the probability state at that time.
In addition, since it is determined that the probability is low during the big hit, the internal parameters may be forcibly rewritten to the low probability when the big hit system command is received without receiving the probability information command.
The information that can be understood by the probability information command is, for example, as follows.
・ "Low probability, there is a reduction in working hours (so-called 100 rotations during working hours")
・ "High probability and time saving (so-called probability change)"
Here, the “probability information” in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only “whether or not there is a probability change” but also “whether or not it is time saving”. The state of the gaming machine is roughly classified into four types: "low probability / no time saving", "low probability / time saving", "high probability / time saving", and "high probability / no time saving". In this embodiment, three types (for example, ones excluding "low probability / no time saving") are used in the present embodiment, and the probability information command further includes information on the effect mode (described later). The probability information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In this embodiment, a serial communication system is adopted as command communication.

(Payout control device related)
Next, a configuration of the payout control device 200 and a device connected to the payout control device 200 will be described.
Although not shown, the payout control device 200 is a payout microcomputer (referred to as payout microcomputer) that controls payout of game balls (prize ball payout or ball rental payout), an error number indicator, an error release switch, It is equipped with an inspection device connection terminal. The payout control device 200 corresponds to a control device.
Here, the inspection device connection terminal is a terminal that is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and is connected to a cable for transmitting various kinds of information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer to the inspection device. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number indicator lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error canceling switch outputs a signal for canceling the error when it is operated, for example, when the process of the payout control has an error and the process is stopped.

Although not shown, devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch, a frame radio wave sensor, a payout ball detection switch, and a shoot ball out switch.
Here, the overflow switch is a switch for detecting that the game balls of the lower plate 10 are excessive, the frame radio wave sensor is provided on the front frame 4 or the glass frame 5, for example, and is a sensor for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, payout. The ball detection switch is a switch for detecting each one of the game balls (prize balls or ball rental balls) paid out toward the upper plate 7 by the above-mentioned payout unit, and the shoot ball out switch is a shoot for supplying the game balls to the storage tank described above. It is a switch that detects that there is no game ball in the.
The frame radio wave sensor is a sensor that detects fraud, such as acquiring a prescribed number or more of game balls, by preventing the sensor from reacting by radio waves when the game ball to be paid out passes through the payout ball detection switch. The frame radio wave sensor may detect other illegal radio waves.

Although not shown in the drawings as devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200, the payout motor of the payout unit, the card unit connection board, the firing control device, and the external information terminal board 55 (shown in FIG. 4). ).
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100 to perform control for paying out prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor based on a BRQ signal (rental request signal) or the like from the card unit (CR unit) connected to the card unit connection board, and pays out the ball. Take control.

Further, an operation panel board (not shown) is connected to the card unit connection board, and the operation panel board is provided with the pachinko machine 1, a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, and a return switch ( (Not shown) or the like is connected. The operation panel board receives signals from the card unit (CR unit) such as a ball lending LED and a balance indicator, and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and the return switch to the card unit (CR unit) to pay out the ball. Necessary control is performed. Here, the ball lending switch is a switch that is operated by operating the ball lending button 16 (FIG. 1) described above. The return switch is a switch that is operated by operating the above-described discharge button 17 (FIG. 1).
Although not shown, the RAM area of the payout control device 200 is also configured such that backup power is supplied from the power supply device 500 at the time of power failure.

The payout control device 200 outputs a prize ball signal (information on the number of balls paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100, to the management device as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. To do.
The external information terminal board 55 is also connected to the payout control device 200 by a cable, and relays when the prize ball signal is transmitted to the management device as an external device.

  The firing control device (not shown) receives the required power supply from the payout control device 200, and also receives the firing permission signal and the power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls the launch motor of the launch device that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device includes a touch switch 11a and a launch stop switch (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 11. The signal from is input. The firing stop switch temporarily stops the firing of the game ball and is operated by the player. The touch switch 11a is for detecting whether or not the player's hand or the like is touching the firing operation handle 11, and corresponds to a contact detecting means. In the present embodiment, the detection information of the touch switch 11a (contact detection means) is transmitted as a touch switch signal (shown in FIG. 4) from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 further effects control. It is configured to be transmitted as command data to the device 300 (see gaming machine status check processing described later). Thus, the effect control device 300 can constantly monitor whether or not the player has touched the firing operation handle 11 (operation unit).

Next, a detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device that totally controls the game, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the game control device 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a game microcomputer (that is, a game microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, and the like. It comprises a CPU 150, a data bus 153 connecting the input unit 151 and the output unit 152.

The CPU unit 150 includes a gaming microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock serving as a reference of a random number generation circuit. And a circuit 113. A signal (starting winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F 163, which will be described later, is input to the gaming microcomputer 101. The CPU section 150 is further provided with an inversion circuit including an inverter that logically inverts this signal. Good.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written at any time. The ROM 101B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 101C stores a work area of the CPU 101A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C.

The CPU 101A executes the game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, the universal electric solenoid 132, the special winning opening solenoid 133, and the collective display device 35. Is generated to control the entire pachinko machine 1.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 is a big hit random number for big hit determination of a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, a hit random number for hit determination of a general figure variation display game, etc. A random number generation circuit for hardware-based generation, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 101A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and update timing of the random number generation circuit. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives the clock.

  Here, the electronic components such as the game control device 100, the universal solenoid 132 driven by the game control device 100, and the special winning opening solenoid 133 have predetermined levels such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. DC voltage is supplied to enable operation.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control device 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161, and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first starting opening switch 120, a second starting opening switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning opening switch 123, a special winning opening switch 124, a magnetic sensor 126, a board radio wave sensor 127, a glass frame opening detection switch. 211 and the detection signals from the front frame (main frame) opening detection switch 212 are input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts the detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into positive logic signals of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 163 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the proximity switches (the above switches 120 to 124 and 127) are illegally short-circuited, the switches are removed from the connector, and the leads are read. It is possible to detect an abnormal state in which a line is cut and floated, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. In addition, the proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above. ing.

Here, a part of the output (excluding the abnormality detection signal) of the proximity I / F 163 (output from each of the switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the third input port 162, and the gaming microcomputer via the data bus 153. While being read by 101, it is adapted to be supplied from the game control device 100 as a main substrate to a test shot test device (not shown) via a relay substrate 170.
The detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 127 of the output of the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the second input port 161, and is read by the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.

Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signals of the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 101 without the inverting circuit in addition to the third input port 162. ing. It is necessary to provide an inverting circuit here, assuming that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input to the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101, and negative logic, that is, a low level (0 V) is an effective level. Is designed to be detected as. In this example, since the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 can detect positive logic as an effective level, the inverting circuit is unnecessary.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the above-described abnormality detection signal output when the proximity I / F 163 detects an abnormality in each of the switches 120 to 124 and the sensor 127 is supplied to the second input port 161, and the data is output. It is adapted to be read by the gaming microcomputer 101 via the bus 153.

Next, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 211, the front frame (main body frame) opening detection switch 212, a signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is input to the second input port 161, and a signal from the panel radio sensor 127 is input. Is input via the proximity I / F 163, and the abnormality detection signal is input from the proximity I / F 163.
In addition, when explaining the magnetic sensor 126, although the magnetic sensor 126 is shown as one in FIG. 4, this is only one input to the game control device 100, and actually there are a plurality of them. Magnetic sensors (four in this example) are mounted, and wired or connected on a relay board (existing between the sensor and the main board, not shown).
Here, the data held by the second input port 161 is asserted (valid level) by enabling the corresponding enable signal (not shown) by the gaming microcomputer 101 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 161. Can be read (change to other ports as well).

  On the other hand, a signal from the payout control device 200 and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 (initialization switch signal) are input to the first input port 160. These signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. In the signal from the payout control device 200, a frame radio wave incorrect signal, a payout busy signal, a payout abnormality status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, There is the touch switch signal described above. Here, the overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 in a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor (not shown) provided on the front frame 4 or the like. As described above, the touch switch signal is a signal output by the touch switch 11a described above when the player's hand or the like comes into contact with the firing operation handle 11.

  In addition, the payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. The payout busy signal is a signal which is basically turned on when the payout operation of the game ball (prize ball or ball rental) is executed unless an error related to the payout operation of the game ball occurs. Therefore, no error has occurred (that is, the payout abnormality status signal, the shoot ball out switch signal, the overflow switch signal, etc. are not turned on), and the game control device 100 issues a prize ball payout command. If the payout busy signal is raised (when it is ON) in a state in which the payout amount is not transmitted to 200 and the prize payout is instructed, the game control device 100 determines that the payout operation of the ball rental is executed. You can

  Further, the input section 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit (Schmitt buffer) 164 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 500 and a reset signal to the gaming microcomputer 101, and the Schmitt trigger circuit. 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal is once input to the first input port 160, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101, and at the same time, the ports of the output unit 152 (ports 175, 176, 177 described later, 180). Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 170 without passing through the output section 152, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.
Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the input ports 160 to 162 of the input section 151. The data set in each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 151 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 101.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 175, a second port 176, a third port 177, and a fourth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by serial communication via a Schmitt buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The Schmidt buffer 173 is a data signal from the game control device 100 in order to prevent the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 from inputting a signal to the game control device 100, that is, in order to ensure one-way communication. It is a unidirectional buffer that allows only to output to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300.

The first port 175 is an output port for outputting each opening / closing data of the big winning opening solenoid 133 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning a prize device 27 and the universal electric solenoid 132 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 26b of the normal variable winning a prize device 26. Is.
The second port 176 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 35.
The third port 177 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 35 are connected.
The fourth port 180 is an output port for outputting external information about the pachinko machine 1 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal. The information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collecting terminal or a management device installed in a game store. A photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal board 55, and external information is transmitted to a management device (not shown) as an external device via the photo relay 55a. Since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection, but the use of the photorelay 55a as described above has the advantage that the polarity is unnecessary and it is convenient.

  In addition, the output unit 152 is connected to the data bus 153, and outputs to the test-firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) data for informing special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a big hit through the relay board 170. The buffer 174 for performing the operation is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass product for sale) installed in a game shop. The detection signals of the switches 120 to 124 that do not need to be processed such as the starting port SW output from the proximity I / F 163 are passed through the buffer 174 by the pattern branching on the output side of the proximity I / F 163 shown in FIG. Instead, it is supplied to the test shot test device via the relay board 170.

  On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 126 and the board radio wave sensor 127 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 101 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 153 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170. The relay board 170 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170 so that the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test device. Has become.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives each open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the universal electric solenoid 132 output from the first port 175, and generates and outputs each solenoid drive signal. The second driver 178b outputs the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 35 output from the second port 176. The third driver 178c outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 35, which is output from the third port 177. The fourth driver 178d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fourth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

The first driver 178a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 500 in order to drive the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the universal electric solenoid 132 that operate at 32V.
Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 178b that drives the segment line. Since the third driver 178c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. In the collective display device 35, a current is flown into the anode terminal of a predetermined LED through the segment line by the second driver 178b that outputs 12V, and the cathode terminal of the predetermined LED is output by the third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential. By drawing a current from the LED through the segment line, the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and a predetermined LED is turned on. Further, the fourth driver 178d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photo coupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 185. The photo coupler 179 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 185 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 160 to 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the game microcomputer 101, a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC), and image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the CPU 311. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above, a sound source LSI 313 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b, and a signal conversion circuit 315. .
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) that exclusively performs video control under the control of the CPU 311 is arranged, and two CPUs are provided, and VDP is a command from the 2ndCPU. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 is performed according to the data and data, but in the present embodiment, only the CPU 311 having high performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost. ing.

The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 has a PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) 321 storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 326 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 327, a RTC (real time clock) 325, and a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 328 that can hold data are connected, and a VDP 312 is connected.
The RTC 325 is a clock element that ticks the time, and can be set to the actual time by setting, and its clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses the signal from the RTC 325, for example, It is possible to control the production of time related events such as event notifications and special productions at amusement stores.

On the other hand, the VDP 312 is connected to a VRAM 329 in addition to the image ROM 322 storing character images and video data, and the sound source LSI 313 is connected to a voice ROM 323 storing voice data. The image ROM 322 stores a plurality of moving images (movies) as video data.
Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but the scenario data defining the motion data indicating the movement information of the character and the connection of the motion data is stored in the PROM 321.
The image ROM 322 corresponds to character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the effect command (data signal output from the buffer 173) which is the control command from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control apparatus 100, determines the effect content, and outputs the display device 41. The contents of the image are instructed, the reproduction sound is instructed to the sound source LSI 313, and the processes such as the drive control of the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, and the board production device 44 are executed.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display device 41, the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the board rendering device 44, the speakers 12a, 12b, etc. constitute rendering means.

For example, when executing the variable display game, a command including data of a combination of stop symbols (result form) and data of the reach system (or variable time) from the game control device 100 (for example, a variable pattern command described later). Is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 that receives the selection selects a variation mode that satisfies the stop mode and the variation time, and displays it via the VDP 312. It is configured to control the special figure variation display game in which the predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally the combination (result mode) of the specific symbol is derived and displayed.
In addition, the mode such as the variable display of the special figure that is actually executed by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by the command from the game control device 100, but the condition given by the command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 finally selects a mode by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which the mode is selected also for the effect control device 300, and a certain degree of discretion is given). There is.

Here, as a RAM that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 311, there is also a RAM 311a inside the chip.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 313 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 313 is transmitted through the amplifier circuit 337 to the upper speaker. 12a and the lower speaker 12b.
Note that a command and data may be transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 by a handshake method. In that case, the call signal CTS and the response signal RTS are exchanged.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. Generally, by transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.
The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition to the image ROM 322 and VRAM 329 described above, a signal conversion circuit 315 is also connected to the VDP 312. Here, the VRAM 329 is an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322. The signal conversion circuit 315 is a circuit that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The VRAM 329 and the signal conversion circuit 315 may be provided in the VDP 312.

Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 315, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 315. Is displayed.
From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission / reception timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 waits for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and the command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the main control microcomputer 311 of the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for notifying is also input.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 that receives a command (data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. ing. Through this command I / F 331, the main control microcomputer 311 receives a control command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 101, such as a customer waiting demo command or a variation pattern command.

The command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 as needed.
Further, since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Has been.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the LEDs of the board decoration device 42 described above, the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the LEDs of the frame decoration device 43 described above, and the board described above. A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a motor and a solenoid of the effect apparatus 44 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 are connected to a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. A light emitting source other than the LED may be used as the light emitting source of the board decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43. Further, the glass frame 5 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a moving light or a device for effects), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. It may be.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a SW input circuit 336.
The SW input circuit 336 includes an on / off state of the effect button SW46 incorporated in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5, an operation state of the touch panel 9a provided on the glass frame 5, and a motor of the board effect device 44. Is a circuit for detecting the on / off state of the performance accessory SW (production motor SW) 47 for detecting the initial position of the above and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
The volume SW 338 described above is also connected to the SW input circuit 336. The SW input circuit 336 detects the state of the volume SW 338 described above and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
In the case of this example, the setting confirmation LED 339 described in FIG. 3 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 as one of the elements configuring the panel decoration device 42 via the panel decoration LED control circuit 332. It is configured to.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 supplies a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. 32V DC, 12V DC for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, 5V DC for the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331, and 15V DC voltage for driving the aforementioned LEDs and speakers 12a, 12b. Is configured. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. Further, the reset signal is output from the main control microcomputer 311, and is used as a VDPRESET signal to the VDP 312, a SNDRESET signal to the tone generator LSI 313 and the amplifier circuit 337, and an IORESET signal to each control circuit 332 to 334. It is supplied to each device of 300, and these devices are reset.
It should be noted that the RAM of the effect control device 300 (at least one of the RAM 311a and the RAM 326) may be configured to be supplied with backup power from the backup power supply unit 502 of the power supply device 500 in the event of a power failure.
Further, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 48 that cools each part of the gaming machine 1, and is configured to be driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.
Further, in this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board that constitutes the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board). Then, as described above, the effect control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls the speaker, the lamps, the movable part for decoration, and the like, and is the main board that constitutes the game control device 100. Controls the movable part and the like indirectly by sending a control command to the sub control board. Therefore, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same even if the model is different, and by installing the game program for each model in the gaming machine microcomputer 101, technically, the main board is modeled. You can share it with other brands.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), it is in the customer waiting state (during demonstration), and the command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is the buffer of the game control device 100 (buffer in FIG. 4). (Equivalent to 173) to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device. In the customer waiting state, the movable accessory 700 is in the initial state (a state in which the movable accessory 700 falls down substantially horizontally) as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game ball hit into the game area 22 via the guide rail 21 is any one of the special winning start winning opening (special drawing 1 starting opening 607, special drawing 2 starting opening 608, and starting winning opening 26a). ) (That is, when there is a special figure start winning), a command for instructing variable display of the special figure is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the special figure (numbers, characters) is displayed on the display unit 41a. A display (so-called variable display) in which the identification information such as a symbol, a pattern, and a pattern changes (for example, scroll) is performed, and a variable display game of a special figure (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variable display game) is performed. .

If the stop result mode (combination of special maps derived by variable display) of the special figure variable display game is a special result mode (for example, a flatter such as "3, 3, 3"), it is called a big hit. Benefits are granted to the player. Incidentally, on the control, for example, on condition that there is a start winning, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored, and the extracted and stored random number value and a preset determination value are compared and determined at the time of determination. Based on the comparison and determination result, it is previously determined whether or not a big hit is to be made, and the special figure variation display game is started in accordance with this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result modes (for example, "7,7,7" doublet), the above big hit and after the big hit game (After the special prize period to be described later), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability variation mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the big hit probability of the special figure). In some cases, so-called shortening of time (for shortening the variable display time of a special figure or the like to increase the frequency of the variable display game and make it easier to hit) is also performed.

  When the big hit occurs and the big hit state is entered, after the fanfare period (the period during which the output of the sound effect that produces the big hit is executed), the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 is set for the specified time ( For example, within a range not exceeding 30 seconds, an opening operation (big hit round) is performed in which, for example, a period of up to 10 winnings is temporarily released. Then, this opening operation is repeated for the specified number of rounds. In addition, in this big hit state, a command for instructing the big hit state and displaying a big hit screen for notifying the player of the number of big hit rounds and the like is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the display unit. At 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

It should be noted that the period of this jackpot (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) is the special prize period. Equivalent to.
As the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, usually 15 round big hits are the main big hits, but 16R big hits may be generated as a premier or other configurations (for example, 6R or 4R). There may be a two-round jackpot as a so-called sudden hit (a sudden hit change in which the jackpot probability changes via a jackpot with few balls).
Furthermore, when there is a second variable winning device, if the stop result mode of the variable display game on the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, a special eye such as "3, special symbol, 3"), a special jackpot is awarded. An opening operation (big hit round) in which a privilege called is generated and the opening / closing member of the second variable winning device is temporarily opened, for example, for a period of up to 5 winnings within a range not exceeding a prescribed time (for example, 30 seconds). Is done. Then, this opening operation is repeated for the specified number of rounds.

On the other hand, during the variation display game of the special map or during the big hit, when a game ball is further won in any of the starting winning openings of the special map, the starting memory of the special map is held and displayed on the display unit 41a or the like. For example, after the variable display game or the big hit state is finished, the variable display game of the above special figure is repeated based on the starting memory, or it returns to the customer waiting state (during customer waiting demonstration production) To do.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, it shifts to the big hit state, if the variable display game ends with a loss and there is starting memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a loss and there is no starting memory. For example, when the big hit ends and there is a starting memory, the variable display game is executed again, and when the big hit ends and there is no starting memory, the customer returns to the waiting state.

  In the present embodiment, for example, two types of special memory starting memories (special character starting memories) are displayed (special character 1 hold display and special character 2 hold display), and two types of special character change display games are displayed. The variable display game (first variable display game and second variable display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 607 occurs, the first variable display game by the variable display of the special figure 1 is played on the display device 41. Then, when the game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 607 during any of the special figure variation display game, one first starting memory (starting memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored, and On the other hand, after the special figure variation display game is finished, the first variation display game is performed by the variation display of the special figure 1 on the display device 41.

Further, when there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the start prize hole 26a (normal electric start hole) or the special figure 2 start hole 608, the special device 2 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the display device 41. A second variable display game with variable display is played. Then, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 26a or the special drawing 2 starting opening 608 during any of the special drawing changing display games, one second starting memory (starting memory corresponding to the special drawing 2 hold display) is provided. It is stored, and, on the other hand, the second variable display game is displayed by the variable display of the special figure 2 on the display device 41 after the special figure variable display game is finished.
When there are both the first start memory and the second start memory, either the first variable display game or the second variable display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the starting winning opening 26a and the special figure 2 starting port 608 is preferentially executed (that is, a mode in which the second starting memory is preferentially consumed), or two types of fluctuations There may be a mode in which the display games are played in the winning order.

On the other hand, during the game, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 32, a variable display game of the universal figure by the variable display of the universal figure on the display unit 41a or the like (hereinafter referred to as a universal figure variation display game) is executed. .. Then, if the result of the general figure fluctuation display game (stopped public figure) is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called "universal figure win" is given.
At this time, the game in which the opening / closing member 26b for opening / closing the starting winning opening 26a is opened and temporarily held for a predetermined opening time is played. This makes it easier for the game ball to start winning, and accordingly, the number of times the variable display game of the special figure is executed increases and the possibility of a big hit increases.
In addition, during the above-mentioned general figure variable display game, when more game balls are won in the general figure starting gate 32, the collective display device 35 executes a pending display of the general figure starting memory and stores up to four, for example. After the end of the general display variable display game, the general display variable display game is repeated based on the memory.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control content of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 87.
The control process executed by the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is mainly composed of the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Become.
First, the concept of the main components used in the description of the flowcharts below will be clarified.
(A) Display device of special map As described above, the special display or general map is displayed on the collective display device 35. In the following flow chart of the game control device 100, a special figure refers to the “present special figure” displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative special drawing". However, in describing the gaming machine, the "decorative special drawing" may be included if necessary.

(B) Display device of general figure When referring to a general figure in the flow chart of the game control device 100 below, as a general rule, the “general figure” displayed on the collective display device 35 is referred to. Further, when adopting a configuration in which a general display is displayed on the display device 41 and referring to a dummy display for effect for the player which is displayed on the display device 41, for example, it is referred to as “decorative general display”.
However, in the present embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a general display. It should be noted that a display device for displaying a public figure (here, a decorative figure) may be provided. When explaining the game machine, it may be explained including a device for displaying a "decorative drawing" if necessary.
(C) Hoden The device corresponding to Hoden is the normal variation winning device 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Hoden).
In addition, as mentioned above, special control that makes it easy to win the prize (such as control to shorten the fluctuation time of the map) is performed to support the starting prize. There is a thing called simply electric support.

(D) Special figure storage In the following flow chart of the game control device 100, in the case of special figure reservation (sometimes simply referred to as "holding"), special figure storage, or special figure starting storage, the collective display device 35 in principle. It points to the "Memory of this special drawing" displayed in. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as "decoration special figure reservation" or "decoration special figure storage".
(E) General figure storage In the following flow chart of the game control device 100, in the case of general figure reservation, general figure storage, or general figure starting memory, "general figure memory" displayed on the collective display device 35 in principle. Pointing towards. Further, when referring to the dummy display for effect for the player displayed on the display device 41 or the like, it is referred to as "decorative drawing reservation" or "decorative drawing memory".
However, in the present embodiment, such a general starting memory display is not displayed on the display device 41. It should be noted that a display device may be provided for displaying the start-up memory (here, a decoration general-purpose memory) of the universal figure. When explaining the game machine, it may be explained including a device for displaying the "decorative general memory" if necessary.
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a big winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 may also be referred to as a special winning device in order to distinguish it from the normal winning device 26.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, main processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main processing is started based on the forced reset of the gaming microcomputer 101. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is output from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). Is input to turn on the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101, and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. Even when the power is restored from the power failure, the reset signal is similarly turned on and then released, and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. In addition, when the operator wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like (eg RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, the power is supplied while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the game control device 100. It is necessary to turn on the switch.

  When the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer setting that sets a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like is set. A process (step S2) is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

  After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S6), and the process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the sub control device before the sub control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up before the sub control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  An initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 504 is input to the first input port 160, and initialization is performed by reading the state of the first input port 160 before the start of the standby time. The operation of the switch (RAM initialization switch 504) can be reliably detected. In other words, if the initialization switch status is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch may be operated after waiting for the standby time, or the initialization switch may continue to be operated from power-on until the standby time elapses. There is a need to. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S9). Even when the power supply delay timer is set in step S7 and the timer is in the process of counting, the power failure monitoring in step S9 is performed.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is cut off. Wait for you. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

  That is, since the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time, this causes a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed. It is possible to deal with the above, and it is possible to appropriately deal with the trouble at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM (for example, RAM101C) is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup is performed when a power failure occurs here. It is not necessary to perform the processing of. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and then the timer value is 0. It is determined whether there is any (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, when the waiting time has expired, access is permitted to the RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM, which is readable and writable (step S13). ), OFF data is output to all output ports (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0” is output: that is, a state in which there is no output is set) (step S14).
Here, in the present embodiment, the RWM refers to the RAM 101C, but is not limited to the RAM and may be used as the RWM including a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM.
Since each output port is set to off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port by software, but here step S14 is provided just in case. .

Next, a serial port (a port that is installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 101, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15). That is, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the production control device 300 and the like, the state in which the serial port is used is set.
Then, it is determined whether the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 504) has been turned on from the state of the first input port 160 previously read (step S16). This determines whether or not the initialization switch is turned on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S26, and if not, the process proceeds to step S17. .
It should be noted that the process proceeds to step S26 when the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM are normal in step S17 and step S18 described later, respectively. This is the case when it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S20 described below. For this reason, if it progresses to step S26, processings, such as initialization of the data in RWM of the game microcomputer 101, will be performed in steps S26 to S30.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S17, and it is checked whether or not the value of the power outage inspection region 1 of the RWM is the normal power outage inspection region check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah), and the check result in step S17. If it is determined that is not normal, the process jumps to step S26. On the other hand, if the check result in step S17 is normal, it is checked in the following step S18 whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 2 of the RWM is the normal power outage inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). Then, if the check result is not normal in step S18, the process jumps to step S26, and if the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S19.
In this way, if all the values in the RWM power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 are normal, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S19. On the other hand, if the values of the RWM power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 are abnormal (if not normally stored), it is determined that the power is turned on normally, and the process jumps to step S26.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S41 and 42 described later. In these steps S17 and S18, it is determined whether or not the power failure is being restored based on the plurality of check data 1 and 2 as described above, so that it is highly reliable to determine whether or not the power failure is being restored.

Next, in step S19, a checksum of the RWM data is calculated, and in step S20 the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power-off are compared to determine whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S26. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. Perform processing when it is restored.
In step S21, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The areas to be initialized here are the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2, the checksum area, and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The areas related to error fraud monitoring include, for example, the following areas.
・ External information area door / frame opening signal, security signal, game signal error status signal in test signal area / status scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
・ Front frame (glass frame) open monitoring area ・ Game frame (front frame) open monitoring area ・ Shoot ball out monitoring area ・ Overflow monitoring area ・ Payout abnormality monitoring area ・ Switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area ・ Big winning a prize illegal prize monitoring Areas / Private fraud monitoring area / Magnet fraud monitoring area / Radio fraud monitoring area / Big winning mouth fraud monitoring area / Private fraud monitoring area

  In step S21, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is set to an indefinite state indicating that it is not present. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal indicating whether or not the firing operation handle 11 has been touched is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is undefined indicating that the state is not fixed.

  After step S21, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the game state is the high probability state (step S22). If the probability is not high (step S22; NO), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. If the probability is high (step S22; YES), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and a high probability notification LED (not shown) provided on the collective display device 35 is turned on (not shown). (Lit) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). As a result, the treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed, and for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on to display the high probability state.

  Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S25), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the screen designation command (if the customer is waiting, the customer wait demo screen command, other If so, send multiple commands (such as the command on the recovery screen). Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (0) written in step S27 as an initial value, and in the present embodiment, it is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the effect mode. is there. Specific examples of these areas are as follows, for example.
<Region to be initialized>
・ Customer waiting demo flag area (used in step S472, etc.)
-Production mode transition information area (area in which production mode transition information is saved in step S529 described later)
・ Security signal control timer (used in step C68, etc.)
-Next mode transition information area (see step S778, etc. described later)
-Special figure game mode flag area (see step S759 described later)
-Special figure game mode flag save area (see step S701, etc. described later)

Next, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demo screen and display a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.
When the command for RAM initialization is transmitted, the performance control device 300 performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the performance device to the initial position, and starts the performance of notifying that the RWM clear has been performed. To do.

Now, when the process proceeds from step S25 or step S30 to step S31, in step S31, a process for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) is performed.
The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit in the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 101A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Further, the bit transposed pattern of the hard random number (here, the big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. That is, in the process of step S32, a hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and bit transposition of the jackpot random number is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern refers to a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). It is a defined pattern. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

  Next, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted and saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of various corresponding initial value random numbers ( Step S33). In the case of the present embodiment, as various initial value random numbers, the random number determining the winning symbol of the special symbol (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) initial value random number (that is, big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value) Random number), the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the figure (random number) (that is, the initial value random number), the initial value of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the figure (the symbol random number) (that is, hit) There is a pattern initial value random number). In addition, as for the random number related to the public figure, for example, "random number per public figure" may be simply referred to as "random number per hit", and the word "universal figure" may be omitted.

  Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is set to the initial value of various initial value random numbers in step S33. By setting (start value), it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers updated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Next, in step S34, interruption is permitted, and in the next step S35, initial value random number updating processing is performed. The initial value random number update process is to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers so that it is difficult to intentionally hit the big hit etc. by measuring the timing of shooting the game ball. is there.
In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process, which simplifies the main process. The advantage is that

In addition, although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number use the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A. Are configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (updated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
Further, when there are two types of special maps, the random numbers relating to the special maps may be common to the special maps 1 and 2, or may be provided separately, but in the present embodiment, they are described as being common. ing.

Next, in step S36, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read through the port and the data bus, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (for example, two times) is set, and in the next step S37, the power failure monitoring signal is set. Is turned on, and if it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S38 for the final determination of the power failure, and if not turned on, the process returns to step S35. During normal operation, steps S35 to S37 are repeated.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

Then, in step S38, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is continued for the number of checks, and if this determination result is affirmative, it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S39. If the result is negative, it cannot be determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process returns to step S37.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S39. However, with the configuration of this example, since the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is checked a plurality of times in step S38, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and momentarily due to noise or the like even though no power failure actually occurs. In that case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, when proceeding to step S39, after prohibiting the interrupt, all the outputs are turned off in the next step S40 (off data is output to all the output ports), and then the power failure information setting process is executed in steps S41 and S42. To do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S41, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S42.
After step S42, a process of calculating a checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is performed in the next step S43, and then the checksum calculated in step S44 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, after prohibiting access to the RWM in step S45, the system stands by (waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off).
In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged when the power is turned on again.
The power outage process in steps S39 to S45 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power outage.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step S51, the start address of the calculated address is set to the start address of the RWM, and in step S52, the number of repetitions is set. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM used. Next, in step S53, "0" is set as the calculated value, and in step S54, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value. In this way, the content of each address is added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculation address is updated by "+1", in step S56 the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed, and in step S57 it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 and the routine is repeated. Then, when the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES, and the routine ends.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Initial value random number update process]
Next, the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the big hit symbol initial value random number is incremented (update (+1)) (step S61), the small hit symbol initial value random number is incremented (update (+1)) process (step S62), and A process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number (step S63) and a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the random number of winning symbol initial value (step S64) are sequentially performed.
Here, as described above, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The "winning initial value random number" is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. In this way, the randomness of random numbers is enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
In this timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 101A by the processing of steps S31 and S34 in the above-described main processing to generate an interrupt (timer interrupt). Started at. When this timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 101, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S70). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S71). In step S71, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, in step S72, input processing is executed. In this input processing, the detection signal (state of each input port) of each of the above-mentioned sensors (starting opening switches 120, 121, gate switch 122, winning opening switch 123, big winning opening switch 124, etc.) is read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined for each timer interrupt cycle, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice) or more, the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. It should be noted that when it is read that one of the sensors is turned on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is detected.

Next, in step S73, an output process of setting and outputting the output data set in each step described below to the corresponding output port is executed. This is processing for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 133, universal electric solenoid 132) based on output data set in various processing.
In addition, when the signal of the emission stop is output in step S5 of the main process, the signal of the emission permission is output by performing this output process (see step S138a described later), and the state in which the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state It is said that This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the payout control device (also this is the launch permission signal). It is generated in the payout control device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, in step S74, a payout command transmission process is performed. This is a process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the gaming microcomputer 101 to the payout control device 200 in various processes.
Next, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. As will be described later in detail, in the random number update process 1, the initial value of each random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, ordinary hit symbol random number, ordinary symbol hit symbol random number) is set by the initial value random number, random number update process 2 Then, the variation pattern random number is updated by software. Among them, according to the random number update process 1, the initial value of each random number is updated by the above-mentioned “initial value changing method”. Further, according to the random number update process 2, the variation pattern random number changes every time the routine of the timer interrupt process is repeated, and the extracted value of the variation pattern random number is kept at random.

  Note that there are three types of fluctuation pattern random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this example. Among them, the variation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the latter half variation (variation after the start of the reach), and the variation pattern random number 2 is the distribution of detailed performance (for example, plus 1 frame) from the reach system. Is a random number for performing the special map or whether the special map is stopped by minus 1 frame), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the mode of the first half fluctuation (fluctuation before the start of reach). is there. Further, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all of the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, in a step S77, a winning opening switch monitoring process and a state monitoring process are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (starting opening switches 120, 121, winning opening switch 123, special winning opening switch 124 of the special drawing) set as described above, and inputs the special winning opening switch 124, for example. When the flag is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the state monitoring process includes undetected errors of the above-mentioned sensors, excessive error of discharge of prize balls, open state of the glass frame 5, and illegal prize winning except when the special winning opening 27a and the general electric vehicle 26 are open. Is a process for monitoring.

Next, in a step S78, special figure game processing is performed. In this special figure game processing, overall control of the entire variable display game of special figures is performed. That is, when the variation start condition (starting condition of the variation display game) is satisfied, the jackpot random number is determined, the process of setting the stop symbol combination of the special figure (result mode), and the process of setting the variation mode of the special figure are set. Is performed (details will be described later).
Here, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, when the starting mouth winning is started in the waiting state for the customer and the variable display game is started, the variable display game ends with a failure and the starting memory is stored and the variable display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types: when the big hit ends, there is a starting memory, and the variable display game is executed again.
Further, in the special figure game processing, processing of setting various output data relating to the variable display game of the special figure is also performed. That is, for example, the content (command data) of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is set in accordance with the game state of the variable display game of the special figure.

Next, in a step S79, a process for a general variable display game is performed. That is, a process of setting the content of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like according to the state of the variable display game of the universal figure is performed.
Next, in step S80, segment LED edit processing is executed. This is the display of the special symbol on the collective display device 35, including the symbol of the special symbol determined in the special symbol game process of step S78, the symbol of the general symbol determined in the general symbol game process of step S79, and other information. This is a process for displaying on a display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 to determine whether there is any abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is determined that a magnetic error has occurred and a predetermined process ( Preparation of command for injustice notification, etc.) is executed.

Next, in step S82, a board radio wave irregularity monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 127 to determine whether there is any abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the board radio wave sensor 127 is set, it is determined that a fraud using radio waves has occurred. , Predetermined processing (preparation of command for injustice notification, etc.) is executed.
Next, in step S83, external information editing processing is executed. This edits the data to be output from the game control device 100 to the outside.
After passing through step S83, the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (when the timer interrupt process ends), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 160 is read (step S91). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 160) are as follows.
・ Frame radio signal (bit 0)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 1)
・ Discharge abnormality status signal (bit 2)
・ Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 3)
・ Overflow switch signal (bit 4)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 5)
・ RAM initialization switch (bit 6)
・ Power failure monitoring signal (bit 7)
The bits 6 and 7 are not used in this input processing and are cleared in step S92.

Then, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93).
Next, in step S94, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 161, is prepared, and in step S95, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared.
Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.
Next, in step S96, unused bit data is prepared, and in step S97, the bit data to be inverted is prepared. For example, since the board radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, such bit data of the sensor / switch is prepared.
Unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. These data have the same name in the flowchart, but are different data for each input port. However, as a result, the data may have the same value.

Next, in step S98, switch reading processing is performed.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 161) are as follows.
・ Board radio sensor (bit 0) (reversed bit):
-Switch abnormality detection signal (bit 1): "Abnormality detection signal" in Fig. 4
・ Magnetic sensor (bit 2):
・ Glass frame open detection switch (bit 3)
・ Front frame (main frame) open detection switch (bit 4)
・ Unused (bits 5-7)

Next, in step S99, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 162 is prepared, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S100, and unused bit data is prepared in step S101. After that, the bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S102, the switch reading process is further performed in step S103, and the input process is ended.
The switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 162) are as follows.
・ Starting port 2 switch (bit 0): Second starting port switch 121
Start switch 1 switch (bit 1): First start switch 120
・ Left winning mouth switch (bit 2): Winning mouth switch 123-1
-Right winning opening switch (bit 3): winning opening switch 123-2
-Gate switch (bit 4): Gate switch 122
・ Special winning opening switch (bit 5): Special winning opening switch 124
・ Unused (bits 6 to 7)
It should be noted that the signals of the respective switches of bits 0 to 5 are subjected to a test firing test via the relay board 170 by pattern branching on the input side of the third input port 162 (the output side of the proximity I / F 163) as shown in FIG. The test signal is output to the device. That is, the signal of the starting opening 2 switch (bit 0) is the "starting opening 2 winning signal" and the "normal electric auditors product 1 winning signal 1", and the signal of the starting opening 1 switch (bit 1) is the "starting opening 1 winning signal". , The signal of the left winning opening switch (bit 2) is "normal winning opening 1 winning signal", the signal of the right winning opening switch (bit 3) is "ordinary winning opening 2 winning signal", and the gate switch (bit 4) ) Signal is a "gate passing signal 1 related to the ordinary pattern 1", and the signal of the special winning opening switch (bit 5) is a "special electric auditors product 1 winning signal 1", which is output to the test firing test device, respectively. Has become.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the switch reading process (steps S98 and S103) in the above input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S112), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S113), and then the target switch control area in the RWM is cleared. The port input state 1 is saved (stored) (step S114). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms; s represents seconds) until the second reading elapses (step S115).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the second reading of the state of the signal input to the target input port is performed (step S116). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S117), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S118), and then the port input state of the target switch control area It is saved (stored) in 2 (step S119). After that, the bit changed in the first read and the second read, that is, the signal is detected, and the definite bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, among the states of the read input port, a definite bit pattern in which the bit having the same state at the first time and the second time is set to "1" and the different bit is set to "0" is created. Then, the logical product of the confirmed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken to be the confirmed bit this time (step S121).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 0 and the bit having a different state is 0 is created in the first and second readings (step S122), and the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. Is taken as the previous holding bit (step S123). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed. Then, the current confirmed bit and the previously held bit are combined, and the current confirmed state is saved in the RWM (step S124), the exclusive OR of the previous and current confirmed states is calculated, and the rising edge is saved in the RWM ( In step S125), the switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt processing and compares it with the previous read result to change the signal. Although there is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, if it does so, it may not be possible to make a correct determination if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing. In addition, in order to slow down the speed of the game ball passing through the switch and the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for a time that is more than twice the timer interrupt period by simple calculation. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical flow path.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the period of the timer interrupt. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and the like, and avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step S73) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 4) that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 35 is turned off (step S131). Subsequently, the data to be output to the first port 175 having the function of outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 133 and the universal electric solenoid 132 is combined and output (step S132).
Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 35 is updated ((+1) is updated in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S134). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S134a). The external information synthesized here is "door / frame open signal" (that is, the open signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)) and "security signal" (during various fraud occurrences and RAM). Signal that is output for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing).
In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process means taking out the data from the ROM (ROM 101B in the game control device 100 of this example).

Then, the data combined in step S134a is output to the digit output port (third port 177) and the external information output port (fourth port 180) (step S135). The third port 177 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 35 are connected.
Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the loaded segment output data is output to the segment output port (second port 176) ( Step S137). The second port 176 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 35.
In the present application, "loading" data in the control processing, as in step S136, means extracting the data from the RAM (RAM 101C in the game control device 100 of this example).
Further, by the processing up to step S137, a predetermined LED in the collective display device 35 is dynamically turned on. The display executed by this lighting is, for example, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, or a special symbol hold. There are a display, a public figure reservation display, a round display, a game status display (time saving display, high probability display), and the like.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is combined (step S138), the combined data is further combined with the output data of the launch permission (step S138a), and the data combined in step S138a is combined with the external information. It is output to the port for outputting the firing permission signal (the fourth port 180) (step S138b). The fourth port 180 outputs information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal, and a launch permission signal from the game control device 100 via the payout control device 200. It is an output port for outputting to.
The external information to be combined here in step S138 is "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol confirmation frequency signal", "starting opening". Signal ”and“ main prize ball signal ”.

Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test device are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S139). After that, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S140).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S141). Further, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test shot test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S142). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S143), as shown in FIG. Ends the output processing of.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmitting process (step S74) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in outline, in FIG. 14, the left column (steps S151 to S161) is a process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column (steps S162 to S172) is a process of transmitting a payout command. .
In this payout command transmission processing, first, a prize number counter area 2 is provided in which a plurality of storage areas are provided as prize number counters for each number of prize balls (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the winning number counter area 2 which is the check target among the respective counters (step S151).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 (also shown in FIG. 14) is as follows, for example.
・ 3 prize ball counter ・ 10 prize ball counter ・ 14 prize ball counter Each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. Check them in order (from 3 prize ball counter).

  Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S151: NO), the address of the counter of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S152), and the count numbers of all the counters of the prize number counter area 2 are updated. It is determined whether or not the check has been completed (step S153). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks are completed (step S153; YES), the process proceeds to step S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S154), and the winning number counter area 2 is displayed. The number of payouts (for example, 3, 10, or 14) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S155).
After step S155, the value of the remaining award ball area and the number of payouts acquired in step S155 are added (step S156). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number (10 in this case) serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored. The value of the number of payouts of newly generated prize balls is added to the value in the remaining ball area. Then, the added value is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S157).

  After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S158), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO), the update of the number of remaining main prize balls is completed and the process proceeds to step S162. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S159; YES), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S160), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S160). S161), and returns to step S158.

In the process of updating the remaining number of main prize balls (mainly steps S156 to S161), an external device is generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize hole reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Set the main prize ball signal to be output to. That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the above step S160 is executed and the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is incremented by one. In addition to this main prize ball signal, an external device (a management device of a game shop, etc.) receives a prize ball every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). A signal is output, and an illegal payout can be monitored by comparing these two signals. That is, in the process of updating the remaining number of main prize balls, the award ball signal is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the external device based on the payout schedule, whereby the actual payout (the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200). ) Is a process performed to maintain consistency with.
In addition, the award ball signal is output from the game control device 100, which is the main board, at one pulse every ten payout schedules, and from the payout control device 200, which is the payout board, one pulse is output every ten payouts. ing.

Next, it is determined that all the counters in the prize number counter area 2 do not have a count number and all the counters have been checked (step S153; YES), or the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S159; NO). ), If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the timer is updated by -1 (step S162), and then it is determined whether the timer has become 0 (timed up) (step S163). If it is determined in this determination that the timer (payout command transmission timer) has timed out (step S163; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timer has not timed out (step S163; NO), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S164). Then, when it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S164; YES), the payout command transmitting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout busy signal is not busy (step S164; NO), the process proceeds to step S165 to check a prize number counter area 1 described later.
In the determination in step S164, the state of the port of the first input port 160 is not checked, but the payout busy signal flag set in the input process of FIG. 10 is checked when the ON state of the payout busy signal is detected. Is determined.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S165, each prize number counter area 1 is provided with a plurality of storage areas as prize number counters for each number of prize balls (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Of the counters, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area 1 that is the check target (step S165).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 (also shown in FIG. 14) is as follows, for example.
・ 3 award ball counter ・ 10 award ball counter ・ 14 award ball counter Each award number counter can store up to 65,535 award numbers. When checking the award number counter area 1, check the above counters from the top. Check them in order (from 3 prize ball counter). The difference between the winning number counter area 2 and the winning number counter area 1 is the storage capacity of each counter.

  Returning to the flow, when there is no count number (step S165: NO), the address of the counter of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S166), and the count numbers of all the counters of the prize number counter area 1 are updated. It is determined whether or not the check has been completed (step S167). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S167; YES), this payout command transmission processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S167; NO), the process returns to step S165 and the above process is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S165 that there is a count number (step S165; YES), the count number of the target prize number counter is subtracted (-1) (step S168), and the prize number counter area 1 is displayed. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S169), and the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S170). After step S170, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area used in steps S162 and S163 (step S171), and a request flag (payout request flag) data (payout request flag) is stored in the payout request flag area ( The information indicating that the flag has been set) is saved (step S172), and this command transmission process ends. Here, in step S172, in the game control device 100, it is possible to determine by another process that the player (game control device 100) has requested the payout control device 200 to pay out (commanding the payout operation of the prize ball). In order to do so, the data of the payout request flag is set (the flag is set).

  Through the processing in steps S162 to S171 described above, a payout number command (a type of payout command) for instructing the payout of a game ball (prize ball) corresponding to a prize is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 makes this payout. Based on several commands, pay out game balls (prize balls). As described above, the payout amount command is sent not after every timer interrupt but after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms) has passed. Further, the fact that the payout control board side can pay out the prize balls (that is, the payout busy signal is not busy) is also a necessary condition for the payout amount command to be transmitted.

The payout busy signal is turned on (busy) on condition that one or more of the following states are met.
・ During payout operation ・ During ball lending operation ・ Shoot ball out error ・ Overflow error ・ Frame radio wave illegal occurrence ・ Paid ball detection switch is abnormal (Switch for monitoring the dispensed ball is abnormal)
・ Under payout error ・ Under payout error ・ Count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of game balls)
When there is (when not equal to 0), etc.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process of FIG. .
In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S185).

  When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; NO), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191). If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S185; YES), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S186), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) (step S187). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

  When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether the hit random number for the universal symbol is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). If the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the small hitting symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next initial of the loaded small hitting symbol random number. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S193). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194).

  When the hit random number of the universal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). If the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the loaded random number of the universal figure is initialized next time. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S196). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197).

  When the hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; NO), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Moreover, when the hit symbol random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; YES), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S198), and the next initial of the loaded hit symbol random number. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S199), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2.
In the present embodiment, there are three types of fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 as described above, but as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers). There is a random number 1), and the random number update process 2 in FIG. 16 sets both as update targets, and switches the update target each time an interrupt occurs and processes. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the upper byte and the lower byte are updated at different interrupt times. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured to.

In the random number updating process 2, first, a random number updating scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of this updating process is updated (step S201). Here, it is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
・ When 0: Random pattern random number 1 (upper)
・ When 1: Random pattern random number 1 (lower)
・ When 2: Fluctuating pattern random number 2
・ When 3: Random pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S203). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.
Here, the effect random number update table has data for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks), and the details are as follows.
・ Upper limit judgment value ・ M1 counter mask value ・ Type information of random number area to be updated (details below)
1-byte random number 2-byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (lower)
-Address of update area

Subsequently, the value of the M1 counter in the gaming microcomputer 101 is loaded (step S204), and a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired from the corresponding effect random number updating table, and the value of the M1 counter is masked. (Step S205).
Since the microcomputer assumed as the game microcomputer 101 in this embodiment does not have a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register), the M1 counter is used instead. Here, the R register is a register that is used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 system microcomputer and the like, and whose value is constantly updated, and a random value is obtained each time it is read. The M1 counter is a counter whose value is updated each time a program instruction is fetched, and whose value changes each time it is read, like the R register. When the gaming microcomputer 101 has an R register, the R register may be used instead of the M1 counter. In any case, randomness can be given to the random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter or the R register.

Further, the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, in the case of updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter (or the R register, and so on), When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number.
As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is “1”. Is added as the added value (upper level), and "0" is set as the added value (lower level), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason why "1" is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is lower than the 2-byte random number or 1-byte random number (step S206; NO), the process branches to step S209 to set "0" to the addition value (upper value) and set the mask value to "1". The added value is set as the added value (lower level), and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. If it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, "0" is set as the random number value (upper level), and the value obtained by adding "1" to the mask value is set as the value of the random number area to be updated (lower level), and the process proceeds to step S212.
When the random number area is a 2-byte random number, in step S211, the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set as a random number value, and the process proceeds to step S212.

Next, in step S212, a new random number value is obtained by calculating a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random number value, and whether the random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S203. The determination is made (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit judgment value, the upper limit judgment value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random value (step S214), and then the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and step S214 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S215.
In step S215, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the 2-byte random number lower area. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the higher random number value is set to the upper side (2-byte random number (upper)) side of the random number area. Save to (step S217). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After passing through step S217, the random number updating process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), the process jumps to step S217, the process is not performed, and the random number update process 2 ends.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. As the variation pattern, as will be described later, a variation pattern of “no reach” and a variation pattern (reach variation mode) in various reach states such as “normal reach” and many “special (SP) reach” are defined. ing.
Therefore, the CPU 101A, based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area (the special drawing 1 starting opening 607, the special drawing 2 starting opening 608, or the starting winning opening 26a) of the starting opening distribution device 600 or the normal variation winning device 26. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the reach variation mode determining random number (fluctuation pattern random number) for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among the various extracted random numbers.

[Winning prize switch / Status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S77) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning a prize switch / state monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (change of the signal) from the switches provided in the various winning a prize ports, and of monitoring an error.

In the winning port switch / state monitoring process, first, the winning port monitoring table 1 (for example, detection from one of the winning port switches 124) corresponding to one of the winning ports switch 124 in the winning port (variable winning device 27) A port number to which a signal is input, data indicating a bit position in the port of the signal, and the like are stored) is prepared (step S221). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is only one special winning opening, but in the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 124 are provided, and which of the game balls has flown into the special winning opening of the variable winning device 27. Since it is detected by the special winning opening switch 124, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 124 is prepared here.
Next, while the special winning opening is not opened, the big winning opening is monitored for illegal wins, and the fraud & prize monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step S222) is executed.

After that, the prize-winning mouth monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big prize-winning mouth switch 124 in the big winning mouth (variable winning device 27) is prepared (step S223) to monitor whether there is an illegal prize and to make a normal winning. The fraud & winning prize detection process (step S224) to be detected is executed.
Thus, there are two special winning opening switches 124, and there are two special winning opening switches 124 arranged in the special winning opening 27a.
Next, a prize hole monitoring table of the prize hole switch in Poden is prepared (step S227). As the winning opening switch in the ordinary electric power, there is a second starting opening switch 121 for detecting the winning of the starting winning opening 26a of the ordinary variable winning device 26 as the ordinary electric power.
Next, while monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S228) of detecting a normal winning is executed.

  After that, a prize-winning port monitoring table of prize-winning-port switches that do not require fraudulent monitoring (for example, a list showing switches that do not require fraudulent monitoring) is prepared (step S229). Examples of the winning opening switch that does not require illicit monitoring include the first starting opening switch 120 and the winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31. As for the winning opening switch which does not need to be fraudulently monitored, since fraudulent monitoring is not carried out but winning detection processing is carried out, a winning mouth monitoring table is prepared for that processing in step S229, and the number of winnings is updated in the next step. The number counter updating process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

After the winning number counter updating process (step S230), a status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals for which an error is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is displayed. Update (“+1” update in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S231). Then, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 are set as follows corresponding to the value of the status scan counter. These are, for example, a shoot ball out switch and an overflow switch from the payout control device 200. It corresponds to a payout abnormality status signal of the payout control device 200.
(A) When 0: Switch error 1 error (connector missing, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shoot ball out error (C) When 2: Overflow error (D) When 3: Dispensing error error

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and then the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1: Front frame open (main frame open)
(G) When 2: Frame radio wave is illegal (h) When 3: Touch switch

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), and it is determined whether the status scan counter has become "0" (step S237). When it is determined that the status scan counter is "0", the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S235).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 are as follows.
(Re) 0: Switch error 2 error (connector missing, switch failure, etc.)
That is, as the types of errors monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, only those corresponding to the value of the status scan counter of "0" are set.

Next, after performing the error check of the type defined in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 (step S239) and further executing the payout busy signal check processing (step S240), the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing is ended and the timer allocation is completed. Return to the embedding process.
On the other hand, if the status scan counter is not "0" in step S237, there is no error to be monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, so the timer interrupt processing is performed without going through steps S238 and 239. To return.
The gaming machine status check processing of the table 3 in step S239 and the payout busy signal check processing in step S240 are executed only when the status scan counter is "0", that is, once in every four timer interrupts. Therefore, when the timer interrupt period is 4 ms, the monitoring by these check processes is a 16 ms period monitoring.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
Next, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process (step S222, step S224, step S228) in the above-described winning a prize switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning prize monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two big winning hole switches 124 of the special winning opening (variable winning device 27) and the second starting opening switch 121 in Hoden. With regard to the big winning opening (variable winning device 27) and Hoden (ordinary varying winning device 26), it is easy to perform fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting the game ball, and paying out the prize ball. In addition, monitor fraud.
Here, in describing the fraud & winning a prize monitoring processing in the winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table of the prepared winning a prize monitoring tables is as follows.
.Data for judging whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
-Lower address of fraud monitoring information-Lower address of fraudulent prize number area-Fraudulent prize error notification command-Upper limit of fraudulent prize numbers (number of fraudulent occurrence judgments)
・ Winning mouth switch table address ・ Notification timer update information (permit / update)

  In the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning combination switch of the error monitoring target is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the variable winning a prize device 27 is opened when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the special winning port switch 124. In addition, when the winning opening switch of the error monitoring target is the second starting opening switch 121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning a prize device 26 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary figure.

  When it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S242; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step S244), and the number of illegal prizes after addition is determined as the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target (for example, (5) or more is determined (step S245).

For example, the determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the special winning opening, and the game ball is a count switch (big winning opening). This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when a prize is won after the valid period of the switch 124) has passed or when a signal has noise, and to not easily determine an error even if it is not illegal. The number of determinations may be different for each switch.
When it is determined that the number is not equal to or more than the determined number (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250 to prepare a winning prize monitoring table (a winning prize port monitoring table) of the target winning port switch. If the number exceeds the determination number (step S245; YES), the number of fraudulent prizes is kept at the fraud occurrence determination number (step S246), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area (step). S247). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S248), a fraud prize generating flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), a prize monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S250), and a prize number counter updating process (step S251) for setting prize balls is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and it is determined whether or not the notification timer update is permitted (step S253). Then, if the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), -1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (step S254). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is not permitted when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the one special winning port switch 124, and is permitted when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the other major winning port switch 124. It This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as often with regard to the injustice notification of the variable winning device 27, and prevents the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
In other words, since error monitoring for the special winning opening (variable winning apparatus 27) is performed by the two special winning opening switches 124, if the timers of both switches are updated, double timer updating will be performed, resulting in Since the fraudulent timer expires in half of the specified time, the timer is updated only at the timing of performing the monitoring process of the other special winning opening switch 124 that performs the monitoring process later. .
In addition, when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the second starting opening switch 121 in Hoden, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255), and if the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S256), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S257). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; YES), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal prizes of interest is cleared ( In step S259), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; NO), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value in the fraud flag area (step S260).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S260; YES), the fraud & prize monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260; NO), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S261), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S262), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends.
By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an incorrect prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S230) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update processing, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing (step S271).
Here, the information defined in the winning table of the winning port monitoring tables prepared by the winning port switch / state monitoring process and the like is as follows.
・ Repeat count ・ Data to judge whether there is input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower-order address of prize-number counter area 1 ・ Lower-order address of prize-number counter area 2 (if there are multiple prize-winning switches for one table, they are defined for each switch, excluding the number of repetitions)

  Next, it is checked whether or not there is an input of a detection signal (correctly, change of input) from the winning opening switch to be monitored (step S272). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S281, and if it is determined that there is input (S272; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S273. .

In the next step S274, the loaded prize number counter is updated (+1), and in the following step S275, it is checked whether or not it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the process proceeds to step S276, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1, and then the process proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S275 that the counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and the process jumps to step S277. The maximum memory number (for example, 255 bytes for 1-byte size and 65535 items for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the provided prize number counter area. If the maximum number is exceeded, the value will return to "0" and you will have to pay. You will lose a lot of information about the number of prize balls. In order to avoid this, in step S274, the contents of the area are not updated immediately, but the contents are updated after checking whether (+1) outside of the area will result in "0".

After proceeding to step S277, in steps S277 to S280, the same processing as steps S273 to S276 is executed for the winning number counter area 2. That is, first, in step S277, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded, in the next step S278, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and in the subsequent step S279, it is checked whether or not it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S279; NO), the process proceeds to step S280, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2, and then the process proceeds to step S281.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S279 that the counter overflow has occurred (S279; YES), the process skips step S280 and jumps to step S281.
In step S281, the table address of the winning hole monitoring table is updated to the address of the next record, and then it is determined in step S282 whether or not the monitoring processing of all the switches is completed, and if it is completed (step S282; YES). Terminates the input number counter updating process, and if not finished (step S282; NO), returns to step S272 and repeats the above process.

By the above processing, the prize ball according to the winning is set.
Specifically, according to the processing of the first half (steps S273 to S276), the value of the prize number counter for winning balls (transmitting the payout command) (that is, the value of the prize number counter area 1) is updated. This counter size is 2 bytes and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.
Further, according to the processing of the latter half part (steps S277 to S280), the value of the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal (that is, the value of the winning number counter area 2) is updated. This counter size is 1 byte and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The value of the winning number counter area 2 is used for the main prize ball signal, for example, in step S155 described above.

[Game machine status check process]
Next, the gaming machine status check processing (step S233, step S236, step S239) in the above-described winning prize opening switch / status monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine status check process, first, a game corresponding to a status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals for which an error is to be monitored is to be monitored this time. The machine status monitoring table is acquired (step S301).
The information defined on the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is as follows.
(A) Lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area (b) Lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored (c) Mask data that extracts only the bit of the target signal (ni) ) Signal on judgment data (e) Status off command (in the case of error system, the meaning of the error notification end command)
(F) Status ON command (in the case of error type, the meaning of the error notification start command)
(G) Status off monitoring timer comparison value (h) Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored (including the switch state) is on (step S302). Here, “the signal is on” means an error (abnormal or illegal) state with respect to the error system, and the state of the person who is touching with respect to the touch switch signal (the player's hand on the firing operation handle 11). Are in contact with each other). In addition, “the signal is off” means that the error system is not in an error state (normal), and the touch switch signal is in a non-touch state (the player's hand is attached to the firing operation handle 11). (Not in contact).
Then, when the switch is not on (step S302: NO), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S303), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S304). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S302: YES), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, if the shoot ball is out, the shoot ball out switch detects that there is no game ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank and turns it on. If so, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, the target state on command is prepared (step S307). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S309).

  When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S309; YES), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the timer for determining whether or not error processing is necessary is determined. Then, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (reference value for determining that error handling or the like is necessary) ( Step S313). If the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S309; NO), that is, if the signal state has changed, it is determined that error processing is not yet necessary and the target signal is determined. The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S310), the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and the target state monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. When the value of the target status monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the comparison value -1 (step S314) and prepared. The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target status monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the signal status (error occurrence or cancellation status in the case of an error system) is determined. Become. However, for example, in the case of an error system, there may be a situation where the error occurrence is confirmed when the error has already occurred, or the error cancellation is confirmed when the error is not occurring. After the processing, in step S315, the prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area to check whether the state of the signal confirmed this time is the same as the state of the current error flag.

If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S315; YES), it means that the signal state (error situation in the case of an error system) has not changed. , It is determined that no action (corresponding to the change in the signal state) is necessary, and the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (if the state flags are not the same) (step S315; NO), the signal state has changed (changed to a new error state). Alternatively, since the touch switch signal has changed from off to on or from on to off), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the signal state confirmed this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, command setting processing is performed to set a command corresponding to the state of the signal confirmed this time. That is, the process of transmitting either the state off command or the state on command prepared above is performed. As a result, the action corresponding to the signal state this time is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, an error display for notifying it is notified or the notification is canceled. After step S317, the gaming machine status check processing is ended.
In this way, when a signal such as an error is turned on, a corresponding state on flag is set to prepare a state on command, and when a signal such as an error is turned off, a corresponding state off flag is set to set a state off command. Be done. In particular, in this gaming machine state check processing, not only is the signal ON (error occurrence or hand contact with the firing operation handle 11) monitored, but the signal OFF (error release or firing operation). The processing is shared by also monitoring the operation / state of releasing the hand from the handle 11.
The above-mentioned gaming machine state check processing is the same for other errors such as opening of the glass frame and opening of the front frame.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S240) in the above-described winning prize switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, first, the state of the above-described payout busy signal from the payout control device 200 is checked by a corresponding flag to determine whether the payout busy signal is on (step S285).
Then, if the payout busy signal is not on (step S285: NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S285), and a prescribed OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S285). (S286), the value of the busy signal status region is compared with the current signal status (step S287).

  On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (step S302: YES), the busy state flag is prepared as the state flag (step S285a). Then, a prescribed ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S286a), and the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the current busy signal state (step S287). In this step S287, it is checked whether the same state continues for a plurality of interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal status area and the current busy signal status match (step S287; YES), that is, if the busy signal status has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290). It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the set monitoring timer comparison value (the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value) (step S291).
When the value of the busy signal state area and the current busy signal state do not match (step S287; NO), that is, when the signal state changes, the current busy signal state is saved in the busy signal control area. (Step S288) Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S289), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S290), and the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the set monitoring timer comparison value. It is determined whether or not (step S291).

When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291; NO), the payout busy signal check process is ended. Further, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S291: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the value of the comparison value -1 (step S292) and prepared. The state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S293), and it is determined whether the prepared state flag indicates the busy state (step S294).
Here, when it is determined in step S291 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, the state of the busy signal has been determined.

When the prepared state flag does not indicate the busy state (step S294; NO), the payout busy signal check process is ended. If the prepared state flag indicates a busy state (step S294; YES), it means that the busy signal has changed from off to on. Therefore, the change is the player's ball lending operation (ball lending button). The process proceeds to step 295 in order to determine whether it is due to the operation of pressing 16).
In step S295, the data of the payout request flag (saved in the above-mentioned payout command transmitting process) is loaded and then cleared (step S295), and the loaded payout request flag data is the request flag (that is, the flag is It is determined whether or not it is standing (step S296).

Then, if the data of the payout request flag is the request flag (step S296; YES), the payout control device 200 is executing the prize ball payout operation requested by itself (the game control device 100), and thus is in a busy state. Therefore, the pay-out busy signal check process is terminated without executing steps S298 and S299 described later.
On the other hand, if the payout request flag data does not include the request flag (step S296; NO), it is possible that the player has performed a ball lending operation. Is checked (step S297).

If an error in which the busy signal is turned on is occurring (step S297; YES), it is determined that the busy state occurs because the error is occurring, and therefore steps S298 and S299, which will be described later, are not executed. The pay-out busy signal check process ends.
On the other hand, when the error that the busy signal is turned on is not occurring (step S297; NO), it is determined that the player has performed the ball lending operation (the busy signal has been turned on by the player's ball lending operation). Since it is possible, a ball lending button pressing command (a command indicating that the ball lending button 16 has been pressed and the ball lending operation has been performed) is prepared (step S298), and the rendering command for transmitting this command to the rendering control device 200. The setting process is executed (step S299), and then the payout busy signal check process is ended.

When the payout busy signal turns on (busy), it is as described in the explanation of the payout command transmission process. Except for the time when an error or abnormality occurs, the prize ball is being paid out or the ball is lended. It is one of the inside (during the payout operation of the rental ball). For this reason, it is necessary to check the status of the payout request flag and whether the busy signal is turned on (whether a shot ball out error, an overflow error, or the payout abnormality status signal is on). You can judge whether it is busy due to lending.
Therefore, according to this pay-out busy signal check processing, the state of the pay-out busy signal received from the pay-out control device 200 is checked, data of a predetermined flag is set according to the state, and the pay-out busy signal Based on the state, it is judged whether or not the player lends the ball (the ball lending operation by pressing the ball lending button 16), and the ball lending is made every time the player lends the ball. A button press command will be transmitted to the performance control device 300.

[Special game processing]
Next, the special figure game process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game processing, the input of the first starting opening switch 120 and the second starting opening switch 121 is monitored, the entire processing relating to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the display of the special drawing is set.
In the special figure game processing, first, in step S321, a starting opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning of the first starting opening switch 120 and the second starting opening switch 121 is performed.
In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if there is a winning game ball in the special drawing 1 starting opening 607, the special drawing 2 starting opening 608, or the starting winning opening 26a, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted to win the winning. Before the special figure variation display game based on the game result is pre-judged to determine the game result based on the winning. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 124 provided in the variable winning device 27.

Next, in step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure game processing number is referred to in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the game number. A diagram game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 22) is set in a register (step S325), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S326). . Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step S328).
The special figure game processing timer sets a timer value to a predetermined value in each processing (steps S329 to S339: processing number = 0 to processing number = 10) after branching by a processing number described later. Yes, the special figure game processing timer is set so that it is time to execute steps S329 and thereafter when the time is up. As a result, at the time when step S323 is executed, when it is time to execute step S325 and thereafter, the determination result of step S324 becomes affirmative, and step S325 and thereafter (including steps S340 to S343) are executed. . Then, at the time when step S323 is executed, if it is not the timing to execute steps S325 to S339, the determination result of step S324 becomes negative, and only steps S340 to S343 are executed.

  In the subroutine call by the process number in step S328, process number 0 to step S329 (special process normal process), process number 1 to step S330 (special process changing process), process number 2 to step S331 (special process displaying). Processing), processing number 3 to step S332 (fanfare / interval processing), processing number 4 to step S333 (large winning opening opening processing), processing number 5 to step S334 (large winning opening remaining ball processing) , Process number 6 to step S335 (big hit end process), process number 7 to step S336 (small hit fanfare medium process), process number 8 to step S337 (small hit medium process), process number 9 to step S338 ( To the small hit remaining ball process), the process proceeds to step S339 (small hit end process). In the customer waiting state (during demonstration), the process number is 0.

The specific contents of each process executed by the subroutine call in the process number are as follows.
In step S329 (normal process of special map), when the number of special map reservations (the number of special map start memories which are held due to the non-execution of the special map change display game) is zero and the special map change display game is not being executed, the customer A process for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. In the special figure normal process, a process for starting the next special figure variation display game (special figure variation start process) is performed. In this special figure variation start processing, the starting memories of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are monitored, and if any of the special figure starting memories is present, the corresponding variation display (first or second variation display) is started. Is executed (such as the setting of the variation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300), the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. When the number of reserved special figures is zero and the next special figure variable display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the processing number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (special figure changing process), a process for displaying the special figure is changed until the change time set in the special figure changing start process elapses. Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, after executing a process of transmitting a command (symbol stop command) for stopping the symbol of the special figure to the effect control device 300, the process number is returned as 2.
Further, in step S331 (during special figure display processing), processing for displaying the variable display result of the special figure for a fixed time (1 to 2 seconds) is performed. If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. Set the information necessary to perform. If it is a big hit, the process number is set to 3, if it is a small hit, the process number is set to 7, and if it is not hit, the process number is set to 0 and the process is returned.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / inter-interval processing), fanfare processing of outputting fanfare sounds or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and displaying the interval period or the like during the big hit interval period. The interval process is executed, and the process number is set to 4 at the timing of opening the special winning opening of the variable winning device 27. Further, here, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening is set.
Next, step S333 (processing during the opening of the special winning opening) is processing while the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning apparatus 27 and the second variable winning apparatus 33 are open. In addition, here, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball process is set. . When the special winning opening is completed, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (special winning opening remaining ball processing), processing for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and processing for ending the big hit if the big hit round is the final round. Set necessary information. Specifically, for example, a process of waiting for a certain period of time is performed in order to surely count the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 immediately before the end of the opening of the special winning opening, and after this fixed time has elapsed. , The process number is set to 3 when the big hit round remains, and the process number is set to 6 when no big hit round remains, and the process returns.
Next, in step S335 (big hit ending process), information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, in step S336 (small hitting fanfare middle processing), the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hitting middle processing are performed.
Next, in step S337 (processing during small hit), an ending command is set and information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing is set.

Next, in step S338 (small hit remaining ball processing), in order to perform processing for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during small hit processing and small hit end processing. Set necessary information.
Next, in step S339 (small hit end process), information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when any one of the above processes corresponding to the process number ends, the process proceeds to step S340, and a table for controlling the display on the collective display device 35 of FIG. (1 fluctuation control table) is prepared, and in the next step S341, control processing (symbol fluctuation control processing) for the fluctuation display of the present Toku-zu 1 is performed.
Next, in step S342, a table (special figure 2 variation control table) for controlling the display (display of this special figure 2) on the collective display device 35 of special figure 2 is prepared, and in the next step S343, this table is prepared. The control process (symbol fluctuation control process) for the variable display of this special figure 2 is performed, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, in step S324, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step S324; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S340 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

  Incidentally, the small hit is a result mode in which the condition device is not operated, and the big hit is a special result in which the condition device is operated. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure variation display game. When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device is set (the accessory continuously operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in the present specification. It may be used as a term having a meaning.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the starting opening switch monitoring processing (step S321) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a winning monitoring table (starting port 1 winning monitoring table) of the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) is prepared (step S351), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S352) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting opening (step S353). Here, the determination of the presence or absence of the start winning in step S353 is performed based on the information set in step S376 described later, for example.
When it is determined in step S353 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step S353; N), the process proceeds to step S359 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step S353, when it is determined that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step S353; Y), the special figure is shortened (during normal electricity support; low probability or high probability does not matter). ) Is determined (step S354).

When it is determined in step S354 that the special drawing is not shortened (step S354; N), the process proceeds to step S357 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that the special drawing is being shortened (step S354; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step S355), and effect command setting processing (step S356) is performed. . That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step S355) and effect command setting processing (step S356) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the starting opening (the special drawing 1 starting opening 607, the special drawing 2 starting opening 608) of the starting opening distribution device 600 does not win unless the player hits left, and the normal variable winning device 26 No prize is awarded to the starting opening (starting winning opening 26a) unless it is right-handed. Therefore, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting, but when there is a winning in the first starting opening (special figure 1 starting opening 607) during the time saving operation (that is, the time saving state When left-handed inside), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the player to right-hand.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on the hold by the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) (step S357), the special figure starting port switch common processing (step S358) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table (starting opening 2 winning monitoring table) of the second starting opening (starting winning opening 26a, special figure 2 starting opening 608) is prepared (step S359), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S360) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening (step S361). Here, the presence / absence of the start winning combination in step S361 is determined based on, for example, the information set in step S376 described later. When it is determined in step S361 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step S361; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S361 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step S361; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal electric auditors product is operating, that is, the normal variation winning device 26. It is determined whether or not the opening / closing member 26b is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step S362), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step S362; Y), step The process shifts to S364, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step S362; N), it is determined whether or not the normal electric wire illegality is occurring (step S363).

  If it is determined in step S361 that there is a winning in the normal winning combination, it is determined that there is a winning in the starting winning opening 26a, the number of illegal winnings in the starting winning opening 26a Is more than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that fraud is occurring. In the case of the present example, the normal variable winning device 26 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can win the game ball only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number thereof is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than the predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred. If it is determined in step S361 that there is a winning, if the winning is the special opening 2 608 of the starting mouth distribution device 600, the determination result of the step S363 is unconditionally unlawful It is not in the middle (step S363; N).

  In step S363, if it is determined that the normal power denial is not occurring (step S363; N), after preparing the table for setting the information on hold by the second starting opening (starting winning opening 26a, special figure 2 starting opening 608) (Step S364), the special figure starting port switch common process (step S365) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. Further, when it is determined in step S363 that the illegal attempt to generate a universal communication is occurring (step S363; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps S352 and S360) in the above-described starting opening switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, the monitoring target of the first starting opening (special opening 1 starting opening 607) and the second starting opening (starting winning opening 26a, special opening 2 starting opening 608) No winning information of the starting opening is set (step S371), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored of the starting opening 1 switch 120 and the starting opening 2 switch 121 (step S372). . Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step S372; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S372; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step S373), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step S374). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S374; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step S374; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register to be prepared (step S375). Then, the winning information with respect to the start opening to be monitored among the first start opening and the second start opening is set (step S376), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.
The extracted values of the jackpot random numbers prepared in step S375 are used in the special figure starting port switch common processing executed after returning.

[Special processing for common opening switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process (steps S358 and S365) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 120 and the starting port 2 switch 121 are input.

  In the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 120 and the starting port 2 switch 121 is provided to the external management device of the gaming machine 1. The number of times the starting port signal is output, which is the number of times of output, is loaded (step S381), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step S383). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S383; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step S384), and the process proceeds to step S385. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (step S383; Y), the process proceeds to step S385. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows. Therefore, here, the configuration is such that step S384 is skipped and the data is not saved if it is looped due to the update and becomes "0".

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 120 and the starting port 2 switch 121 is less than the upper limit value (step S385). If the number of reserved special figure to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step S385; N), a start opening over winning command corresponding to the target start opening switch is prepared (step S399), and the effect command setting process (step S398). Then, the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended. If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (step S385; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1 ( In step S386), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (step S387). Then, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch and the special figure holding number to be monitored is calculated (step S388), and the big hit random number prepared in step S375 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step S389). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step S390), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S391). The extracted values of the big hit symbol random numbers prepared in step S390 are used in the special figure reservation information determination process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) (step S392).
If it is determined in step S392 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step S392; N), the process proceeds to step S395.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S392 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step S392; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step S393), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step S394). The extracted value of the small hit symbol random number prepared in this step S393 is used in the special figure reservation information determination processing.

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step S395), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step S396) is performed.
Next, a start-up switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step S397), effect command setting processing (step S398) is performed, and special figure starting mouth switch common processing is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 101C), the start winning area of the starting port distribution device 600 (special figure 1 starting port 607, special figure 2 starting port 608) and the starting variation area of the normal variation winning device 26 (starting). Based on the inflow of the game balls into the winning opening 26a), a predetermined winning number is extracted and a starting winning prize storing means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory which becomes the right to execute the variable display game is formed. Further, the starting winning prize storing means (game control device 100) makes a first start of various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening (special figure 1 starting opening 607) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Stored as a memory, various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening (starting winning opening 26a, special figure 2 starting opening 608) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. .

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure holding information determination processing (step S396) in the common figure starting port switch common processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step S387 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether the winning is to the first starting opening (special opening 1 starting opening 607). Is determined (step S401).
If it is determined in step S401 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step S401; N), the process proceeds to step S404.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the winning is the first start opening (step S401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time saving is in progress (step S402).

When it is determined in step S402 that the special figure is being shortened (step S402; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S402 that the special drawing is not shortened (step S402; N), it is determined whether the big hit is in progress or the small hit is in progress (step S403).
When it is determined in step S403 that the big hit is in progress or the small hit is in progress (step S403; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S403 that the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (step S403; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. The big hit determination process (step S404) is performed. When the determination result is a big hit (step S405; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch is set (step S406), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step S390 is set. The stop symbol information is acquired (step S407), and the process proceeds to step S414.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting port (special figure 1 starting port 607) (step S408).
When it is determined in step S408 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step S408; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the winning is to the first starting opening (step S408; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value, which means that the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step S409) for determining whether or not is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step S410; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step S413), and the process proceeds to step S414.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step S410; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step S411), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step S393 is set. After acquiring (step S412), the process proceeds to step S414.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step S414), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S415). Next, a special figure information setting process (step S416) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step S416). S417).

  After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step S418), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S419), the special figure reservation information determination process ends. The special figure information setting process in step S416 and the variation pattern setting process in step S417 are similar to the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

  By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading object, and a pre-reading variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Determines whether or not) forms a pre-determination means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the above special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (variable winning device 27) is being opened (step S421). When the processing during the opening of the special winning opening is not being performed (step S421; NO), it is determined whether or not the processing of the residual winning ball of the special winning opening is being performed (step S422).
When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step S422; NO), it is determined whether or not the small winning medium processing is being performed (step S423).
When the small hitting process is not being performed (step S423; NO), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball process is being performed (step S424). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step S424; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step S421; YES), the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step S422; YES), and the small hitting winning process is being performed (step S423; YES). , And when the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step S424; YES), the process proceeds to step S425.
Here, each of the determinations in steps S421 to S424 is checked by the value of the special figure game processing number. Since the processing number does not move to the next until the special figure game processing timer becomes 0, the progress state of the game can be checked.

Next, 0 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening, which is added in the present special winning opening switch monitoring processing (step S425). The winning a prize counter is a counter provided for counting the balls entered by opening one round of the special winning opening and adding it to the special winning opening count in the process of step S437 described later.
Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the special winning opening switches 124) (step S426).

When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step S426; YES), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step S427), effect command setting processing (step S428) is performed, and the winning counter is incremented by 1 ( Then, the process proceeds to step S429) and step S430. When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step S425; NO), the process proceeds to step S430.
In step 430, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 124) (step S430). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step S430; YES), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step S431), effect command setting processing (step S432) is performed, and the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S433), and proceeds to step S434. When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step S430; NO), the process proceeds to step S434.

  At step 434, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S434). When the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S434; NO), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S435). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step S435; NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step S436). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step S436; NO), the value of the winning prize counter is added to the special winning opening count (step S437). This is because a command indicating that a prize has been won is transmitted to the payout control device 200 at the time of winning a ball into the special winning opening, and the prize counter is used to count (steps S429 and S433). This is to be added to the special winning opening count in step S437. Here, for the special winning opening switch 1 or the special winning opening switch 2, the value of the winning prize counter is added to the special winning opening count number.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning prize counter is 0 (step S434; YES), during the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step S435; YES), and during the small hit remaining ball processing (step S436; YES). ), The special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
Next, after passing through step S437, it is determined whether or not the number of special winning opening counts exceeds an upper limit value (corresponding to the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 9) (step S438).

When the number of special winning opening counts is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step S438; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step S438; YES), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step S439), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step S438). (S440), it is determined whether or not during the small hitting process (step S441).
When the process during the small hit is not in progress (step S441; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the processing is in the midst of the small hit (step S441; YES), the value of the end of small opening operation is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (step S442), and the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and one round will be completed.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step S329) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure normal process, first, it is checked whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved number is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserved number (first starting memory number) is 0 (step S466). Then, if it is determined that the number of reserved special characters 1 is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step S471), and if the customer waiting demo is not started (step S471; NO) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S472).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S473), effect command setting processing (step S474) is performed, special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step S475) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended. . On the other hand, in step S471, if the customer waiting demo has been started (step S471; YES), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. Details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in step S461, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” (step S461; NO), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S462) is performed, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is executed. A hold number command is prepared (step S463), and effect command setting processing (step S464) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process shift setting process (step S465) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended.
In addition, in step S466, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” (step S466; NO), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S467) is performed, and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is executed. A hold number command is prepared (step S468), and effect command setting processing (step S469) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process shift setting processing (step S470) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

  In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, if the special figure 2 pending number is not "0", the special figure 2 variation start process (step S462). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step S475) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, "0" is set as the process number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure ordinary process is prepared, and the process number "0" relating to the special figure ordinary process is set in the table). Is set), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, and in step S484 the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. After step S484, the special figure normal process shift setting process 1 is ended.
As a result, various data for shifting to special figure normal processing, for example, a process number "0" related to special figure normal processing is set, and a flag (special winning mouth fraud monitoring information) defining the special winning opening fraud monitoring period is set. The setting process is performed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step S467) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, The special map 1 variation flag showing (FIG. 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step S491), and the deviation information and the big hit are included in the big bonus flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S492) for setting information is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process in step S492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step S494) is performed to prepare the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the variation pattern setting of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step S495). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step S496) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step S497) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.
The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S493, the special figure information setting process in step S494, the variation pattern setting process in step S496, and the variation start information setting process in step S497 will be described later.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step S462) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, 2) The special map 2 variation flag showing FIG. 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step S491a), and the deviation information and the big hit are included in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big hit. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step S492a) for setting information is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process in step S492a will be described later.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step S494a) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495a). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step S496a) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step S497a) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step S501), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step S502). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (step S503), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. Yes (step S504). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step S505) of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S505) is a jackpot (step S506; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step S502 (step S507). ), And ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505) is not a big hit (step S506; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. The small hitting determination process (step S508) is performed.

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is a small hit (step S509; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step S501. (Step S510), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step S508) is not a small hit (step S509; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed with the deviation information saved in both the big hit flag 1 region and the small hit flag region. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “outfall”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step S492a) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step S502a). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S503a), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. Yes (step S504a). After that, a jackpot determination process (step S505a) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S505a) is a jackpot (step S506a; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step S502a (step S507a). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S505a) is not the big hit (step S506a; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination process executed in steps S505 and S505a in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a process of setting a lower limit judgment value for big hit judgment is performed in step S511. Then, in step S512, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the value of the big hit random number read in steps S503 and S503a is the lower limit value of the hit judgment value of the big hit random number. Check if less than.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, the process branches to step S517, a deviation (meaning other than big hit) is set as the judgment result, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, and it is determined whether or not the probability is high. This is to determine whether or not there is a high jackpot probability due to probability variation, that is, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation state). It is a judgment. If the probability is high, a process of setting the upper limit determination value for the jackpot determination in the high probability is performed in step S514, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
If it is determined in step S513 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S515 to perform a process of setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the low probability, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value in high probability and low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), it will be a big hit. You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (exceeds the upper limit determination value), and it is determined in step S516 that the value of the big jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S516 If YES, it can be determined that the jackpot is not a big hit, so the flow advances to step S517 to set a deviation as a determination result, and the process returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target jackpot random number is less than or equal to the upper limit determination value (does not exceed the upper limit determination value) (step S516; NO), the value of the target jackpot random number is the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. It is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot is set as the determination result in step S518, and the process returns.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process executed in step S508 and the like in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, "step A" is used as the step number.
In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11). In addition, the small hit determination is performed using the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit random number). That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11; Y), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as a determination result (step A13), and the small hit determination processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A11; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A12).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A12; Y), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as a determination result (step A13), and the small hit determination processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A12; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A14), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S521), and if it is a big hit (step S521; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for) (step S522). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step S523), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S524). Here, as the information defined on the special figure 1 big hit symbol table, there is the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
-Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Further, the stop symbol number is to set the stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, 7 segment special symbol 1 display device on the collective display device 35).

  After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step S525), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step S527), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is performed. It saves in the data area (step S528), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step S529). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts when the hit occurs, and the destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes depending on the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). Further, if a particular big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in the special figure 1, it is dedicated that the effect mode of the transfer destination is determined as the probability variation depending on whether the game state is in the probability variation or not. It is determined whether or not the production mode is set to the production mode, or the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether it is the probability change or not. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S521; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step S530), and when it is a small hit (step S531; Y), the special figure 1 small hit A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step S531). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol design table is set (step S532), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S533).
After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S534), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step S535). Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S538).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step S530; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S536), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped in the stop symbol pattern area. It saves (step S537) and prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S538). For example, there are 11 kinds of decorative special drawing commands, and the special drawing type in the effect control device 300 can be discriminated by the difference in the kinds. By the above process, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S539), and effect command setting processing (step S540) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S541), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step S542), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (step S543), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S493a) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S551), and if it is a big hit (step S551; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for) (step S552). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step S553), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step S554). Here, as the information defined on the special figure 2 big hit symbol table, there is the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
-Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value Further, the stop symbol number is to set the stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, 7 segment special symbol display device on the collective display device 35).

  After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step S555), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step S556). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the number-of-rounds upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the number-of-rounds upper limit value information area (step S557), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is performed. Save in the data area (step S558), save the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step S559). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a special effect mode in which the probability change is confirmed regardless of which big hit symbol. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step S551; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S560), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, (step S561), a decoration special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S562). By the above process, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S563),
The effect command setting process (step S564) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S565), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step S566), and the special figure 2 The stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting opening (special figure 1 starting opening 607), and the second starting opening (start winning opening 26a, the variable display game execution means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the special figure 2 starting opening 608). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game on the basis of the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing executed in steps S494 and S494a in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time saving) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes is set in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first-half variation group selection pointer table is set (step S571), and the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S572).
Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step S573), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stopped symbol pattern is acquired (step S574).
Next, the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S575), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step S576). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 area saves the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened when there are a large number of holdings only in the case of the deviation, so that in the cases other than the deviation, as a result, the holding number does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations. It should be noted that the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns.When determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the second half variable group selection pointer table is set (step S577), and the second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step S578).
Next, the latter half variation group selection offset table is set (step S579), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S580).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step S581), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step S582), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 area saves the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. The variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, since the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending calls is large), as a result, in cases other than failure, the number of pending calls will be distributed in the latter half of the fluctuation. Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting processing executed in steps S496 and S496a in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start processing and Toku-zu 2 variation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation which is a variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half fluctuation pattern is set after the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first.

  In this variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step S591), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step S592), and the target The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) and prepared (step S593). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and for deviating. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the hit occurrence rate, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of a hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is off (step S594), and if it is off (step S594; Y), the 2-byte allocation process (step S595) is performed, and the result of step S597 is determined. Move to processing. If it is not out of alignment (step S594; N), a distribution process (step S596) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S597.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, prepared (step S597), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step S598). Then, the distribution process (step S599) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (step S600). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step S601), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step S602). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S603), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1), and preparation is performed. Yes (step S604). After that, the distribution process (step S605) is performed, the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half variation number area (step S606), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing executed in steps S497 and S497a in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step S611). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step S612), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step S613). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step S614), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step S615).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step S616), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S617). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step S618), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step S619), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S620). ). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step S621), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step S622). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step S623), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step S624), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

  By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the starting storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory. In addition, in steps S621 to S624, in the special figure reservation (special figure starting memory) of the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag, the oldest (starting winning order is Due to the execution of the special figure variation display game relating to the special figure hold 1 (the earliest), the special figure hold 2 which is on hold after the special figure hold 1 (the special figure hold with the earliest starting winning order) is held. Processing for raising the ranks of 4 to 1 one by one (processing for so-called holding shift; shift processing) is performed. By this processing, for example, the values for the special figure reservation number 2 to the special figure reservation number 4 of the special random number random storage area are changed from the special figure reservation number 1 to the special figure reservation number 3 of the per random number storage area. It will be moved. Then, the value for the special figure reservation number 4 in the hit random number storage area is cleared, and the special figure reservation number is decremented by one. In other words, among the pending starting memories, as the variable display game corresponding to the oldest starting memory (starting memory for the earliest starting prize) is executed, the order of the remaining starting memories (starting prize) This is a turn, and the process of advancing one by one) is performed and the special figure reservation number is changed to a value smaller by one. This shift processing is executed for each type of special figure (that is, separately for the starting memory of the special figure 1 and the starting memory of the special figure 2).

  Then, these pieces of information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game are later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information regarding a pattern and a stop information command including information regarding extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S470) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to special figure changing processing) is set as the processing number in step S631, and the processing number (here "1") in the special figure game processing number area is set in step S632. To save. Next, in step S633, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S634, the signal related to the start of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S634, the special symbol 1 changing signal is turned on.
Next, in step S635, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area, and in step S636, the blink control timer (special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35 is displayed in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of the container is saved, and the routine ends.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process is performed for the special figure 1.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, details of the special figure change processing transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S465) in the above-described special figure normal process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to special figure changing processing) is set as the processing number in step S641, and the processing number (here "1") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S642. To save. Next, in step S643, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S644, the signal related to the start of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area. By this step S644, the special symbol 2 changing signal will be turned on.
Next, in step S645, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S646, the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display which is the LED segment in the collective display device 35 is displayed in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of the container is saved, and the routine ends.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process is performed for the special figure 2.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step S330) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step S651), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S652). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time.
Next, the special figure displaying process transition setting process (step S653) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process transition setting process (step S653) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the processing during special figure display) is set as the processing number in step S661, and the processing number (here "2") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S662. To save. Next, in step S663, the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation ending process is saved in the test signal output data area (that is, the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation is turned off), and the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation ending process is tested in step S664. Save in the output data area (that is, turn off the special symbol 2 changing signal).
Next, in step S665, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area. Then, in step S666, the special figure 1 variation control flag area is specially designated as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator (special figure 1 indicator which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35). The stop flag relating to the variable stop on the display of FIG. 1 is saved, and the stop flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area in step S667, and the routine is ended.
In this way, the processing for shifting to the special figure displaying processing is performed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step S331) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.
In the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step S681), and the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step S681). S682) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step S683), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step S684). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S685), and if it is a big hit (step S685; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special big hit 2 big hit) is started. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 per signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S688), A round number upper limit value table is set (step S689).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S685 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step S685; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step S686) and the jackpot is a jackpot (step S686). If it is determined to be S686; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is turned on, a character continuously operating device operating signal is turned on, which is related to the start of the big hit of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 big hit), The signal per special symbol is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step S687), and the processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step S689) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step S689), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Is saved in the round number upper limit value area (step S690). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step S691).

  Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step S692), and effect command setting processing (step S693) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S694), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S695) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S696), and the effect command setting process (step) S697) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening information indicating the big hit pattern and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a hit result in the general figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S698). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S698, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a payout (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called sudden jackpot, etc.). When the information is the special winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, and turned off otherwise.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit, and is OFF when the big hit is not a big hit.
The special winning opening opening information will be described later in the description of the fanfare / interval processing.

  After that, the big winning opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) that corresponds to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the universal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game. After setting (step S699), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S700). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S701). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 27) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step S702), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information is awarded. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step S703). After that, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step S704) is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step S686 (step S686; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step S725).
When it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is the small hit (step S725; Y), the high probability variation number update process (step S726) and the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step S727). ) Is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S728).

If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step S728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step S729) to set the effect command. A process (step S730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step S731), an effect command setting process (step S732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S733.
If it is determined in step S728 that the special figure is in the high probability (step S728; Y), the process proceeds to step S733. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S733). After that, the small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing 1 (step S734) is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step S725; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process (step S735), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step S725). S736) is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step S737), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step S738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
In step S738, if it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step S738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step S741) is performed to display the special figure. Medium processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step S738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S739), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step S740), special figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step S741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability variation number updating process executed in steps S726 and S735 in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the high probability variation number update processing, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability) (step S751). The update process ends.
On the other hand, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step S751; Y), the high probability variation count is updated by -1 (step S752), and it is determined whether the high probability variation count is "0" (step S753). The number of times of high probability variation means the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed during the high probability of special figure (that is, during the probability variation mode) (the number of rotations of the special figure during the probability variation of special figure). An initial value (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of times of high probability variation in jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 described later.
When the number of times of high probability variation is not “0” (step S753; N), the updating process of number of high probability variations is ended.

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step S753; Y), the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step S754), and a signal related to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step S755). To do. In this step S755, specifically, two jackpot signals are turned off.
Then, a signal relating to the end of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (step S756). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is off, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is off, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. The high-probability mode has a state of “high probability & time saving” (special map with high probability and normal power support) and “high probability & short time” (special map with high probability without normal power support).

Subsequently, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step S757), the universal figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step S758), and the special figure game mode flag area is stored. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step S759), and the signal related to left-handed instruction (turning off the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S760).
After that, in order to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting, the number for left hitting is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step S761), and the high-probability variation number updating process is terminated.

  By the above high probability change count update processing, the high probability change count update (update that reduces the high probability change count by 1 every time the special figure change display game is performed) is performed, and when the high probability change count becomes "0". Various settings are made to end the probability variation mode. For this reason, the special figure probability variation ends even if a big hit does not occur, for example, when the special figure turns 100 times, and the ordinary electric power support (general time shortening) performed at the same time as the special figure probability variation ends with the special figure probability variation. However, the probability variation mode ends when a big hit occurs. As can be seen from the above high-probability fluctuation number update processing, the game state of the special map is switched (at least the jackpot probability state of the special map is switched), and the game state of the general map is switched (a state in which normal electric power support is performed). And switching to the state in which the universal communication support is not performed) are performed in conjunction with each other in the present embodiment.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process executed in steps S727 and S736 in the above-described special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect mode information check processing, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a code without update (step S771). When the next mode transition information is the code without update (step S771; YES), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, when the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special figure variation display games executed, for example, in the high probability state, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected. is there.

  If the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (step S771; NO), the production remaining rotation speed, which is the executable number of the special figure variation display game until the production mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step S772). Then, it is determined whether the remaining rotational speed for rendering has become 0 (step S773). When the effect remaining rotation speed becomes "0" (step S773; YES), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step S774), and The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step S775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area of the RWM (step S776), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the new effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area. Then (step S777), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S778).
After that, a probability information command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S779), and it is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step S780). When the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step S780; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. This is to prevent the command from being sent to the effect control device 300 if the probability state does not change, and to simplify the operation.

On the other hand, when the prepared command is not the same as the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step S780; N), the command prepared at step S779 is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step S781), and the rendering command The setting process (step S782) is performed to prepare an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining speed (the effect remaining speed newly set at step S777) in the new effect mode to be shifted (step S783). Command setting processing (step S784) is performed.
Next, following step S784, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number (which has been updated as necessary in the high-probability variation number update processing executed in steps S726 and S735) is prepared (step (S785), effect command setting processing (step S786) is performed, and it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step S787). If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step S787; N), the effect mode information check process ends.

Then, when the new effect mode is a mode for left-handing (step S787; Y), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step S788), and the effect command setting process (step S789) is performed to obtain the effect mode information. The check process ends.
In this way, by managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, it is possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in the specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step S704) in the above-described special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S801, and the processing number (here, "3") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S802. To save. Next, in step S803, a signal regarding the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, a signal regarding the end of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S803, specifically, one big hit signal (a big hit + a small hit signal that turns on) and four big hit signals (a big hit signal that turn on) are turned on. Further, in step S804, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, an ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is turned off, and ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off. This is because during a big hit (during a special game state), the special map is in a normal state (not in the high-probability mode), and is also in a state in which normal electric power support is not performed (general diagram is also a normal state).

Next, in step S805, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared, and in the following step S806, the number of the low probability (the number without time saving) is saved in the gaming-state display number area. Then, in step S807, the universal figure low probability & no time saving (no universal telephone support) flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area.
Next, in step S808, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, in step S809 the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the high probability state display, and in step S810 the special figure game mode flag. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the area, and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery in step S811. Next, in step S812, the high-probability variation frequency region for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high-probability mode is cleared. As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are set. In other words, since the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting process 1 is a process executed when a big hit occurs, if the high probability mode that makes the big hit probability of the special figure a high probability before the big hit occurs, the big hit occurs. This ends the high-probability mode, and the game state of the special figure returns to the normal state (low-probability state). In addition, in conjunction with this, when the universal communication support such as time saving of the universal figure is performed (normal electrical support state), this universal communication support is also ended by a big hit, and the game state of the universal figure is Return to the normal state (the state where Fuden support is not performed).

Then, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step S813), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S814). This is to be cleared once because the game control device 100 (main board) manages the effect mode.
Then, the code without update is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S815), and the signal regarding right-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the game state is displayed. The right hitting number is saved in the number 2 area (step S817), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing 1 ends. As a result, with the occurrence of the special game state, the information on the effect mode is once cleared (that is, becomes the initial value of the default state).
Note that step S817 is a process for turning on the display LED that is being hit to the right.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 (step S734) in the above-described special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "7" (corresponding to the processing number relating to the small hit fanfare processing) is set in step S831, and the processing number (here "7") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S832. To save. Next, in step S833, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, in step S834 a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S835. The signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area.
Here, in step S834, specifically, one big hit signal (big hit + small hit) is turned on. Further, in step S835, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S836, the special winning opening fraudulent prize number area is cleared, in step S837, the fraud monitoring outside flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area, and in step S838, a signal regarding right-handing instruction (launch position designation). The signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area in step S839, and the small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.
Through the above processing, various settings are made when a small hit occurs. Note that step S839 is processing for turning on the display LED that is being right-handed.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S332) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, "step A" is used as the step number.
In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is updated by +1 (step A31), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A32), and a production command A setting process (step A33) is performed.

After that, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A34), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A35), and the number of rounds in the special game state to be started is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the open switching determination value (step A36).
Here, the special winning opening operation determination table has, for example, the configuration shown in the middle part of FIG. 48, and the opening switching determination value (the number of rounds corresponding to the special winning opening opening information, “0”, “ 16 "," 4 ", etc.) are set. The open switching judgment value is a value indicating the number of rounds for opening the special winning opening from long opening (long opening) to short opening (shorter opening than long opening). The opening operation is performed with the long opening before and the short opening thereafter.

When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A36; Y), the special winning opening time for short opening (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A39.
When the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A36; N), the special winning opening time for long opening (29 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then (step A38), the process proceeds to step A39.
In step A39, a special winning opening opening process transition setting process (step A39) is performed, and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 48, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, special winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening opening information 2 (All open long), (3) 16R, big prize opening information 3 (1-4R long open, 5-16R short open), (4) 4R, big winning opening information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, large winning opening information 5 (all long opening), (6) 16R, large winning opening information 6 (1 to 8R long opening, 9 to 16R short opening), (7) 16R, large The winning opening opening information 7 (long opening for 1 to 4R, short opening for 5 to 16R) is set.

Therefore, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 48, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0” are set to the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value. “16” is the special winning opening opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, the special winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the special winning opening opening information 5 data. The opening switch judgment value “16” is stored with the special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching judgment value “8” being associated with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching judgment value “4”. ing. A long opening operation is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, and a short opening operation is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.
Then, the special winning opening opening information is information indicating which of various kinds of big hit patterns as described above, and is set in step S698 of the special figure displaying process.

[Transition setting process during the process of opening the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A39) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of setting processing during opening of the special winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during opening of the special winning opening (step A41), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A42). After that, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditors 1 working signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A43), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the mouth count area (that is, the special winning mouth count) is cleared (step A44). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 27) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A45), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step S333) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of opening the special winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value of the RWM round number upper limit area. Yes (step A61). If it is not the final round (step A61; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A62), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A63), and the present It is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A64).

When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for short closing) (1.4 seconds in this embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It saves (step A65), prepares an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A66), and shifts to the processing of step A67.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A64; N), the remaining ball processing time (for long closing) (1.9 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A71), prepares an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A66), and shifts to the processing of step A67.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A61; Y), the remaining ball processing time (for the last time) (in this embodiment, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A69), An ending command for ending the big hit state is prepared (step A70), and the process proceeds to step A67.
Then, when the process proceeds to step A67, the effect command setting process (step A67) is performed to transmit the prepared command, the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A68) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is performed. To finish.

[Prize winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A68) in the above-described processing for opening the special winning opening will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A81), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A82). After that, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning a prize device 27, OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A83), and the big winning opening remaining ball The process shift setting process ends.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning prize]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (step S334) in the above special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round reaches the upper limit value (final. It is checked whether or not it is a round (step A101).
When the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A101; NO), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired. Then, (step A22), an interval time (normal) (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A104), and it is determined whether the current round number is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105).

Then, if the number of rounds is not larger than the obtained open switching determination value (step A105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A106), and the number of rounds is determined. When it is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A105; Y), the process proceeds to step A109.
Here, the value of the rank down effect system means the special winning opening opening information (the big winning opening opening information 3, 6, 7 in the lower part of FIG. 48) corresponding to the big hit pattern in which the round in the middle is switched to the short opening. ..

When the special winning opening opening information is the value of the rank down effect system (step A106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A107), When the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank down effect system (step A106; N), the process proceeds to step A109.
When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time (rank down effect) (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A108), and the process proceeds to step A109. On the other hand, if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A107; N), the process proceeds to step A109.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A109, the set interval time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A108), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A110) is performed, and the big winning hole remains. The sphere processing ends.
Here, when the step A108 is executed, the setting of the previous step A104 is canceled, so that it is before the opening switch (switching from the long opening to the short opening) when it is not the final round. When the special winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down production system (step A106; Y) and the number of rounds is a value of the special production round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time. (Rank down production). As a result, a time period during which the rank down effect immediately before the switching of the opening (switching from the long opening to the short opening) can be realized is set.
Even when it is not the final round, whether it is after opening switching (switching from long opening to short opening), whether the special winning opening opening information is a value of rank down production system (step A106; N), or the number of rounds is When the value is not the value for the special effect round (step A107; Y), the interval time saved in step A109 is the interval time (normal) set in step A104. Also, in the case of the final round, there is no interval period (period between rounds), so it is not necessary to save the interval time.

On the other hand, if the current round is the final round (step A101; Y), the game mode flag (saved in step S701) is saved from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the probability state when the special result is derived. Data) is loaded (step A111). Then, the loaded flag, the special winning opening release information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are set (step A112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area ( Step A113), big hit ending processing shift setting processing (step A114) are performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.
In this way, the ending time is set based on the stop symbol information, the special winning opening opening information, and the game mode flag at the time of a big hit.

The ending time is not limited to the above, and may be set based on, for example, the special winning opening information and the game mode flag at the time of a big hit, instead of the symbol information.
In addition, the period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state (big hit state) (this may be referred to as the ending period) is from the end of the final round to the processing time of the large winning hole remaining ball (for example, 1.9 seconds). ) Has elapsed, and the period from the lapse of the special winning opening remaining ball processing time to the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 3.8 seconds in total). Then, during the period in which the ending time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time are combined (sometimes referred to as ending period), the ending effect can be performed on the display device 41 or the like.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 2 (step A110) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number "3" relating to the fan-fare / interval processing is set (step A211), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A212).
Next, a signal regarding the end of opening the special winning opening (variable winning device 27) (the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A213), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting is set. The process 2 is ended.

[Big hit end processing migration setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit ending process shift setting process (step A114) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this big hit ending process transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit ending process (step A221), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A222). After that, the signal related to the end of opening the special winning opening (the special electric auditors product 1 in-operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A223).

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A224), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A225). ), The information of the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A226). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A227), and the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A228), and the big hit ending process transition setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step S335) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit ending process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is time saving operation data (that is, whether there is a time saving when the universal communication support is performed) (step A241). In the present embodiment, 100% probability variation is entered after the big hit ends (the special figure always becomes the probability variation mode after the big hit ends), so it is not necessary to determine whether or not the special figure is in the high probability state.
When it is not the time saving operation data (step A241; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A242), and when it is the time saving operation data (step A241; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A242; N). A243). After step A243 or step A242, the effect mode information address table is set (step A244), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired ( Step A245).

  Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A246). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A247), and the mode next to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A248).

  After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A249), the command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A250), and effect command setting processing (step A251) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information of “high probability / with time saving” or “high probability / no time saving”, and further information of effect mode. In the case of the present embodiment, since the probability change state is always produced when the big hit ends (so-called ST state), the probability information commands are “high probability / with time reduction / production mode A” and “high probability / with time reduction / production mode B”. , "High probability / with time reduction / production mode C" and "High probability / without time reduction / production mode A" are not used in this process, but in addition, "Low probability / without time reduction / production mode A", " There are low probability / no time saving / production mode B ”and“ low probability / no time saving / production mode C ”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A252), and effect command setting processing (step A253) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A254), effect command setting processing (step A255) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a time saving state will occur after the end of the big hit (step A256). .
When the time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A256; Y), the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit end process ends.
In addition, when the time saving state does not occur after the big hit ends (step A256; N), a left-hand instruction command notification command is prepared (step A257), and after effect command setting processing (step A258), the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 is performed (step A259), and the big hit ending process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (step A242) in the big hit end process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state (for example, turning off two jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A271), and a signal relating to the start without the high probability state and the time saving state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off, the ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the ordinary electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (step A272).

  Next, save the number without the time saving state in the game state display number area (step A273), save the universal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A274), and obtain the special figure game mode. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step A275). After that, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation frequency area (step A276), and a signal related to left-handed instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A276). A277), in order to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting, the number for left hitting is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A278), and the jackpot end setting process 1 ends.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A243) in the big hit end process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (for example, jackpot 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A281). Since the signal related to the start of the time saving state is output from during the big hit, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation Save the time shortened state signal to ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal to ON, the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal to ON, the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal to ON) in the test signal output data area ( Step A282).

Next, save the number with time saving state in the game state display number area (step A283), save the universal figure high probability & time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A284), and obtain the special figure game mode. The flag indicating that there is a high probability of special figure & time saving in the flag area is saved (step A285). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A286), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from during the big hit, the right hitting setting process 2 is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.
Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (step A259) in the above-described big hit ending process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure normal process shift setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A291), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A292). ).

  After that, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal of the big hit is turned off, 3 signals of the big hit are turned off, 4 signals of the big hit are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A293), and a signal related to the end of the big hit (eg, The condition device operating signal is OFF, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A294). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A295), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A296), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A297). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A298), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A299), and the special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, details of the small hitting fanfare processing (step S336) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
In the small hitting fanfare processing, the small hitting processing transfer setting processing (step A311) is executed, and the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit mid processing shift setting processing (step A311) in the above small hit fanfare mid processing will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hit mid-game transfer setting process, first, the process number is set to "8" related to the small hit mid process (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A322). After that, the small hit opening time (example: 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A323), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is turned on). Is stored in the test signal output data area (step A324), the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A325), and information of the special winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the special winning opening is stored. (That is, the special winning opening count number) is cleared (step A326). Then, the small hitting operation initial value "0" is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area (step A327), and the small hitting middle processing shift setting processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the small hit medium process (step S337) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hitting medium process, first, a small hitting medium control pointer (pointer whose initial value is set in step A327) is loaded (step A341), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (eg, “6”). It is determined (step A342).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hit operation end value (step A342; N), the big winning opening due to the small hit is not yet finished, so the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A343), and the small hit operation is performed. The shift setting process (step A344) is performed, and the small hit medium process is ended.
If the loaded value is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step A342; Y), the big winning opening due to the small hit ends, so the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A345). It is determined whether or not this flag is within the special figure high probability (step A346). Here, it is determined whether there is a small hit in a high probability and the time saving state does not matter.

When the flag is not in the high probability of special figure (step A346; N), the process proceeds to step A349. When the flag is in the high probability of special figure (step A346; Y), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A347), effect command setting processing (step A348) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A349.
When the processing advances to step A349, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A) is performed, and the processing during small hitting is completed.

[Small hit movement setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A344) in the small hit medium process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the control pointer during small hit is checked, and branching is performed according to the value of this pointer (step A361). That is, if the value of this pointer is any of "0", "2", and "4", the process proceeds to step A362, and if it is "1", "3", or "5", the process proceeds to step A364.
When the process proceeds to step A362, the wait time (for example, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A362), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A363). The small hit operation transition setting process ends.
In step A364, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A364), and the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A364). A365), and the small hit movement transition setting process is ended.

  By the control processing of the present embodiment including the above-mentioned small hit operation transition setting processing, for example, a small hit operation (a big winning opening opening operation at the time of small hit) as shown in the small hit timing chart in the lower part of FIG. 60 is realized. . Here, the small hit fanfare time is the above step S833, the special winning opening opening time 200 ms is the above step A364, the wait time 1500 ms is the above step A362, and the small hit remaining ball time is the following step A373. Are respectively set in step A403 described later.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transfer setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A349) in the small hit mid processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "9" relating to the small hit remaining ball processing (step A371), and this processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A372). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A373). After that, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 133 is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A374), and the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. The migration setting process ends.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step S338) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
In the small hit remaining ball process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A391) is executed, and the small hit remaining ball process is ended.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit ending process transition setting process (step A391) in the small hit remaining ball process described above will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
In the small hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "10" for the small hit end process (step A401), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A402). After that, the small hit ending time (example: 0.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A403), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric auditor 1 working signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the special winning opening count area is cleared (step A405), the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (cleared to 0) (step A406), and the small hit ends. The process shift setting process ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit ending process (step S339) in the above special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this small hit ending process, first, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A421), and it is determined whether or not the value of this flag is within the special figure high probability (step A422).
Then, when it is in the special figure high probability (step A422; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure high probability (step A422; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A423), and it corresponds to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol). The address of the table to be processed is acquired (step A424).

  Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the small hit operation is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A425). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the completion of the small hitting operation is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A426). The shift information is acquired and saved in the next mode shift information area (step A427).

Then, prepare the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number (step A428),
It is determined whether the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A429). When the prepared command is the same as the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A429; Y), the process proceeds to step A439.
On the other hand, when the prepared command is not the same as the value in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A429; N), the prepared command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A430), and the effect command setting process ( Step A431) is performed.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A432), and effect command setting processing (step A433) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A434), effect command setting processing (step A435) is performed, and it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode ( Step A436). If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A436; N), the process proceeds to step A439.

When the new effect mode is a mode for left-handing (step A436; Y), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A437), effect command setting processing (step A438) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A439. move on.
When the process proceeds to step A439, the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A439), and whether the value of this flag is in the special figure short time (state in which the special figure variation time is shortened). Is determined (step A440).
If the special drawing is being shortened (step A440; Y), the process proceeds to step A443.
On the other hand, if it is not during the special drawing time saving (step A440; N), a signal relating to the left-handing instruction (for example, turning off the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A441), and the right-handing is being performed. In order to turn off the display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A442), and the process proceeds to step A443.
When the process proceeds to step A443, the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 is performed (step A443), and the small hit ending process is ended.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A443) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure normal process shift setting process 3, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A461), and this process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A462). ).

  After that, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is off) to the external information output data area (step A463), and the end related signal of the small hit (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A464). Then, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A465), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A466). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A467), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A468), and the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 is performed. To finish.

[Production command setting process]
Next, the effect command setting process executed in a number of steps such as step S262 in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A481), and it is determined whether this transmission buffer is full (step A482). If the transmission buffer is full (step A482; Y), the process returns to step A481 to repeat the processing.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A482; N), the prepared command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written in the production serial transmission buffer (step A483), and the process proceeds to step A484.
When the process proceeds to step A484, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A484), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step A485). If the transmission buffer is full (step A485; Y), the process returns to step A484 to repeat the processing.
On the other hand, if the transmission buffer is not full (step A485; N), the prepared command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written in the production serial transmission buffer (step A486), and the production command setting process is ended.

  In this way, by transmitting the command to the production control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the load on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. In addition, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to take in the command in the strobe, and the load can be reduced. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 by serial communication, the same effect can be obtained.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control processing (steps S341 and S343) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol. In the symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the special figure variation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) of the first special figure and the second special figure is changing ( Step A501).
When the special figure changing flag is changing (step A502; YES), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). A503).

Here, the fluctuation control table prepared in step S340 of the special figure game processing has a structure as shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, for example, and the information defined on this table is as follows.
-Lower-order address of fluctuation control area-Address of display table 2 (for stop) -Address of display table 1 (for fluctuation) And in the case shown in the lower part of FIG. Based on the address "D_TZ1_LED1" of the display table 1 above, the "special figure 1 display table 1 (for change) (D_TZ1_LED1)" shown below the "special figure 1 variation control table" in FIG. 66 is acquired.
Next, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the blinking control timer relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A504), and the value of the timer is 0, That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A505).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A505; NO), the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A508). When the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step A505; YES), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the control target blink control timer area (step A506). In the second special figure, the variable symbol number related to the special symbol to be controlled (for example, the first special symbol) is updated by +1 (step A507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired. (Step A508). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control process ends.
Here, in step A508, for example, in the case shown in the lower part of FIG. 66, when the value of the variable symbol number area (that is, the symbol number 1 of the special symbol 1) is “0”, the acquired “special symbol 1” is obtained. The display data “C_SEG1_OFF” corresponding to the special figure 1 symbol number “0” on the display table 1 (for fluctuation) (D_TZ1_LED1) ”is acquired.

On the other hand, if the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A502; NO), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step A510). . Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is obtained (step A511), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A509), and the symbol variation control processing is ended. Here, the processes of step A510 and step A511 are also performed based on, for example, the fluctuation control table having the configuration shown in the lower part of FIG. In this case, the "special figure 1 display table 2 (for stop) (D_TZ1_LED2)" is acquired in step A510 and used in step A511.
By the above processing, the special figure display device (for example, special figure 1 display device) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device which are the LED segments in the collective display device 35 is the symbol number. The special map corresponding to will be displayed.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation process (step S595) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A521). ). Here, the latter half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half variation pattern group, but defines only the latter half variation pattern group in which the latter half variation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of a variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), since distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is defined at the beginning. ing.

  If the first data in the second half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A522; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A527), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the data at the beginning of the second-half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A522; NO), one distribution value first specified in the second-half variable group table is acquired (step A523).

  Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A523 is subtracted from the random value loaded in step S593 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (step A524). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A525; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A526), the process proceeds to step A523, and the subsequent processes are performed. To do. That is, in step A523, the distribution value defined next in the variable group selection table is acquired, and then in step A525 the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random value, and a new random A numerical value is calculated (step A524). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A525 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. If it is determined in step A525 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A525; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (step A527), and the 2-byte sorting process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (steps S596, S599, S605) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
In the distribution process, based on the variation pattern random number 2, the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group), or based on the variation pattern random number 3, the first half variation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half variation selection table (selection table) or first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). (Step A541). Here, like the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one of the latter half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not have a distribution table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

  If the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A542; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A547), and the distribution is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not the code without distribution (step A542; NO), the one distribution value initially specified in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A543).

  Subsequently, after the distribution value acquired in step A543 is subtracted from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in step S598 or S604, a new random number value is calculated ( In step A544), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A545; NO), the address is updated to the next distribution value (step A546), and then the process proceeds to step A543 and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step A543, the distribution value defined next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, and then the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A545. , And a new random number value is calculated (step A544). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A545 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table. When it is determined in step A545 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A545; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A547), and the distribution process ends. To do.
The above-mentioned distribution processing and the above-mentioned 2-byte distribution processing are basically the same in configuration. Since the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes, the program instructions for calculation are different.

Next, moving to a description of the flowchart related to the universal figure game process, here, “step B” is used as the step number.
[Public game processing]
First, the details of the universal figure game process (step S79) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the public figure game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a normal electric prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) of monitoring the input from the second starting opening switch 121 is performed. The details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (step B4).
When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the universal figure referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting a game sequence branch table (a specific example is shown in the upper right of FIG. 68) in a register (step B5), and a process of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the universal figure game process number using the table. (Step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number (step B8).

In step B8, if the game process number is "0", the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the general figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation midway processing are performed. The ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B9) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed.
The details of the normal / universal process (step B9) will be described later.
If the game process number is "1" at step B8, the general figure changing process (step B10) is performed to set information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process.
Note that details of the universal figure changing process (step B10) will be described later.
In step B8, if the game process number is "2" and the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, it is determined whether or not the regular variation winning device 27 is in the universal communication support (during a time saving state). The universal figure displaying process (step B11) is performed to set the universal communication opening time according to the setting, and to set information necessary for performing the universal figure hitting process.
It should be noted that details of the general figure displaying process (step B11) will be described later.

If the game process number is "3" in step B8, the process of hitting the normal figure hits is continued (or the process of hitting the normal figure hits is performed to set the information necessary for performing the remaining ball of the normal electric charge) ( Perform step B12).
The details of the per-universal figure hitting process (step B12) will be described later.
When the game process number is "4" at step B8, the normal electric ball remaining process (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the per-universal-game end process.
The details of the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13) will be described later.
If the game process number is "5" at step B8, a per-universal-university-end process (step B14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the general-university-universal process (step B9).
The details of the per-universal-drawing end process (step B14) will be described later.
After that, after preparing various tables for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), control of variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display (collective display device 35) The symbol variation control process (step B16) is performed, and the universal figure game process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described general-university game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). Then, when it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; YES), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (step B22). If it is in the game state of hitting to the right (step B22; Y), the process proceeds to step B25. If the game state is not right hitting (step B22; N), a right hitting instruction command is prepared (step B23), effect command setting processing is performed (step B24), and the process proceeds to step B25.
Here, there are the following in the gaming state of hitting to the right.
・ Large hit middle ・ Small hit ・ Special time saving

  In step B25, the number of reserved universal figures is acquired and it is determined whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (step B25). When it is determined that the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (step B25; YES), a process (step B26) of updating (+1) the number of reserved universal figures is performed.

After that, after performing the process (step B27) of calculating the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved universal figures, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B28). , The hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B29), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.
Also, if it is determined in step B21 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or if it is determined in step B25 that the number of universal figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value ( Step B25; NO), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Prize winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned universal figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process, first, the ordinary figure variation display game is in a hit state and the ordinary variation winning device 26 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) (whether or not the ordinary figure is winning). ) Or not (step B31). Then, when it is determined that the normal drawing is in progress (step B31; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the second starting opening switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input to the second starting opening switch 121 ( If it is determined to be YES in step B32, a process (step B33) of updating (+1) the count number of the general electric counter is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated count value of the general electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 6) (step B34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B34; YES). Then, the value of the operation end (for example, "4") is saved in the control pointer area during the universal figure hit (step B35), the universal figure game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B36), and the prize winning switch monitoring process is performed. To finish.
In other words, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or higher in the hit state of the universal figure, the value of the end of hit is saved in the process control pointer area during the universal figure hit, and the hit state of the universal figure is halfway. Try to finish.

  Further, in step B31, it is determined that the normal drawing is not in progress (step B31; NO), or in step B32 it is determined that there is no input to the second starting opening switch 121 (step B32; NO). ), Or when it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B34; NO), the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B9) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that when simply referred to as "hit random number", it means a random number per ordinary figure, and when simply called as "hit symbol random number", it means a symbol random number per ordinary figure.
In the general / universal figure ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved universal figures is “0” (step B41), and if it is determined that the number of reserved universal figures is “0” (step B41; YES), After shifting to B62 and performing the ordinary figure normal process transition setting process 1, the ordinary figure normal process is ended. The ordinary figure normal process transition setting process 1 is a process for repeating the ordinary figure normal process next time, and the details will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the number of reserved universal figures is not 0 (step B41; NO), a random number storage area per regular figure of RWM (for the number of reserved 1) and a random number storage area for symbols per universal figure (for the number of reserved 1) ) From each of the random numbers (step B42), and then clear the random number storage area per ordinary figure (for the number of reservations 1) and the random number storage area per design figure (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (step B43), step Go to B44.
In step B44, it is determined whether or not the probability of a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal, that is, the state is a time saving state (universal support state) (step B44). ). In the present embodiment, the universal map support state is in the high probability probability of the universal figure, and the special map is also in the high probability state (high probability mode). In this embodiment, the game state of the universal figure is the normal state (a state in which special control such as increasing the hit probability of the universal figure is not performed, that is, a normal state when the universal communication is not supported). The hit probability is zero (for example, 0/251), and the hit probability of the universal figure in the normal power support state is, for example, 250/251, which is a probability setting with a large difference between the normal state and the high probability state. . Thereby, it is possible to increase the attractiveness of the player by increasing the attractiveness of being in a high-probability state (that is, a probability change) while suppressing the payout in the normal state.

If it is not at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B44; NO), a low probability lower limit determination value (for example, "251") is set (step B45), and it is determined whether the loaded random number is equal to or higher than a prescribed upper limit determination value. (Step B47). On the other hand, in the case of the universal figure high probability (step B44; Y), the high probability lower limit judgment value (for example, "1") is set (step B46), and the loaded random number is equal to or higher than the specified upper limit judgment value. It is determined (step B47). The upper limit determination value is a value that is common in both the high probability of universal figure (universal support state) and the normal state (normal state of universal figure), and is, for example, “251”.
When the loaded hit random number is not more than the upper limit judgment value (step B47; N), it is judged whether the loaded hit random number is less than the set lower limit judgment value (step B48).
If the loaded random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (step B47; Y) and if the loaded random number is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B48; Y), it is out of the ordinary. , Save the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B49), set the deviation stop symbol number (step B50), and save the deviation symbol information corresponding to this stop symbol number in the normal figure stop symbol information area (step B51), and proceeds to step B55.

  If the loaded hit random number is not less than the set lower limit judgment value (step B48; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B52) because it is a hit symbol (step B52), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (step B53), and the stop symbol information corresponding to this stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information storage area (step B54), and the process proceeds to step B55. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols of a general figure.

Next, when proceeding to step B55, the set stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B55), and the set stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B56). The universal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the state of the graphical game mode (for example, normal time; 700 ms, supporting regular electric vehicle; 500 ms (short due to time saving)) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B57).
Next, the random number storage area per figure is shifted (step B58), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B59), and the figure retention number is updated by -1 (step B60). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game related to the oldest universal figure reservation number 1, the processing of advancing the ranks of the universal figure reservation numbers 2 to 4 which are suspended after the universal figure reservation number 1 one by one. I do. By this processing, the values for the number of reserved figures for public figures of 2 in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of reserved figures of four figures for general figures are moved from one for the number of retained figures of general figures in the random number storage area for each figure to three for the number of reserved figures Will be done. Then, the value for the figure hold number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure hold number is decremented by one.

Next, after passing through step B60, the process for setting transition during normal figure change processing (step B61) is performed, and the normal day routine process ends.
When the gaming state of the universal figure is the normal state (the gaming state of the special figure is also the normal state (low probability state) in this embodiment), both the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value are “251”, for example. Since the values are the same, the determination process of steps B47 and B48 always proceeds to step B49, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in the normal state in this embodiment is zero.

[Purpose normal processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step B62) in the above-described normal figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the ordinary figure normal processing) is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary figure normal processing in step B71, and the processing is performed in the ordinary figure game processing number area in step B72. Save the number (here "0"). Then, in step B73, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal telephone fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, next time, the processing shifts to the normal processing of normal figure.

[Usage change process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process of setting transition to normal figure process transition processing (step B61) in the normal figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing of changing the figure) is set as the processing number in step B81, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the figure game processing number area in step B82. To save. Next, in step B83, a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the universal figure (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B84 the flag during fluctuation is saved in the universal figure change control flag area. Then, in step B85, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the public figure display (the general figure display LED of the collective display device 35), is saved in the general figure blink control timer area. , The process transition setting process during the universal figure change ends. As a result, the process shifts to the universal figure changing process next time.

[Processing during fluctuations in general figure]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B10) in the aforementioned routine figure game process will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B91 a general-university-display-in-process shift setting process is performed. This is for making settings for shifting to the process of displaying a general figure, which will be described in detail later. After this process, it returns.

[Process shift setting process during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the processing for transition to general figure display processing setting processing (step B91) in the above-described processing for changing general figure will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number related to the general figure display processing) is set as the processing number in step B101, and the processing number (here, "2") is set in the general figure game processing number area in step B102. To save. Next, in step B103, the universal figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area, and in step B105, a signal relating to the end of universal figure fluctuation (for example, the normal symbol 1 varying signal is turned off) is output as a test signal. Save to the data area. Next, in step B106, the stop flag is saved in the universal figure variation control flag area and the process returns. As a result, the process proceeds to the process of displaying a general figure next time.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B11) in the above general figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or off information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B111), and the process of clearing the hit flag area of the RWM (step B112) is executed. To do.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is a hit (step B113), and when it is determined that the hit flag is not a hit (step B113; NO), the process branches to step B122, and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (Explained in FIG. 72) is performed, and the process of displaying the universal figure is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is a hit (step B113; YES), a process (step B114) for determining whether or not the universal communication support (during a time saving state) is performed.
Then, when the general electric power is being supported (step B114; YES), the hit process setting table is set (step B115), and the hit start pointer value (initial value of the control pointer, details (To be described later) is acquired, and this is saved in the control pointer area during the universal figure (step B116), and the universal electric opening time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired, Is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B117), the general figure hit / during process shift setting process (step B121) is performed, and the process of displaying the general figure is ended.

  On the other hand, when the normal power support is not in progress (step B114; NO), the hit start pointer value for normal time (initial value of the control pointer) is set and this is saved in the normal hit hit control pointer area (step B119), sets the normal electric power release time (for example, 100 ms) for normal time, saves it in the general electric figure game processing timer area (step B120), and performs the general electric figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 of FIG. 72. (Step B122), the process of displaying the universal figure ends.

It should be noted that a specific example of a general-purpose operation timing chart (a specific example of the general-purpose opening pattern) in the present embodiment is shown in the lower part of FIG. 78. In the case of this specific example, there are three types of hit symbols of the general figure, "hit symbol 1", "hit symbol 2", and "hit symbol 3".
Then, when the hit symbol 1 is hit, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the ordinary figure of 600 ms (the time set in the step B104) has passed, 500 ms (set in the step B117) The regular electric power is released for the regular electric current opening time), and then the regular electric current opening pattern is provided in which the ordinary electric power remaining ball processing time of 600 ms (the time set in step B158 described later) is provided. ..

Next, when the hit symbol 2 hits, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of 600 ms of the universal pattern has passed, the normal time of 1700 ms (normal power release time set in the step B117) The power is released, then the wait time of 200 ms (the time set in step B152 described later) is passed, the second 1700 ms of normal power is released, and then 600 ms of normal power remaining ball processing time is set. It will be a two-fold open electric train opening pattern.
Next, when the hit symbol 3 hits, as shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, after the display time of the general figure of 600 ms has passed, the general electric train of 1700 ms is released, and then the wait time of 200 ms is set. After that, the 2nd opening of the 1700ms POD was performed, followed by the 200ms wait time, the 3rd opening of the 1700ms POD, and then the 600ms POD remaining ball processing time was set 3 times. It will be an open, open train pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, although the universal figure hit occurs during the universal communication support (during high probability), the ordinary figure hit (general figure hold) is common. When the power is released at a time other than during normal power support (normal state) (that is, when the process proceeds to step B119 via step B114 above), the normal power release pattern is independent of the hit pattern, It is configured to be opened once for 100 ms (universal electricity opening time set in step B120) (that is, the opening time of the opening operation of the winning symbol 1 is shortened). This is related to the configuration of this embodiment in which the probability of hitting a universal figure is set to zero when the game state of the universal figure is the normal state. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the game state of the universal figure is the normal state, the probability of the universal figure per hit is set to zero, so that the advantage of the universal support state is significantly increased, and The interest in the support state (which is also the high probability state of special maps in this example) is increased and the interest is improved. Then, as the opening pattern of the starting area opening / closing means (that is, the opening pattern of the general electric train), the opening pattern when the game state of the general state is the support state (for example, the one shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78) In addition to the above), a dedicated opening pattern (100 ms × 1) is provided when the game state of the universal figure is the normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unexpected number of prizes from being generated (a game design being confused) in a normal state where the player does not want to win a prize. This is because the normal pattern does not hit in the normal state (probability per common pattern is zero), so the open pattern in the normal state is not prepared. For example, if the open pattern in the high probability is used, Since the time is extended or the number of times of opening is increased, a considerable number of unexpected start winnings occur in the normal state where the player does not want to win the prize, and the game design is confused. However, if it has a dedicated ordinary electricity release pattern in the normal state, it is possible to suppress or avoid the above-mentioned unexpected start winning a prize by setting a specification that makes winning difficult as this dedicated ordinary electricity release pattern. You can do it.

In the present embodiment, in order to realize a total of four types of normal electric power releasing operation as described above, a control pointer for normal electric power opening control (a middle processing control pointer for general electric current) also shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78. As shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78 in each opening pattern, the value of this control pointer has a value corresponding to the time when the open / closed state changes after the end of the first opening operation. It is changing.
The hit start pointer value in steps B116 and B119 means the first value (initial value) of such control pointer values. Therefore, in the case of the specific example shown in the lower chart of FIG. 78, in step B116, "4" is obtained in the case of the winning symbol 1, "2" is obtained in the case of the winning symbol 2, and "0" in the case of the winning symbol 3. Is saved as the hit start pointer value. Further, in step B119, as in the case of the winning symbol 1, "4" is saved as the winning start pointer value.

[Purpose hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the processing for setting processing during middle-of-universal figure transfer setting processing (step B121) in the processing during middle-aged figure display described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the ordinary figure hit processing) is set as the processing number in step B131, and the processing number (here, "3") in the universal figure game processing number area is set in step B132. To save. Then, in step B133, a test signal output data of a signal related to the start of the universal figure (for example, a signal during normal symbol 1 hit is ON) and a signal related to the start of universal electric operation (for example, a signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation is ON) Save to area. Next, in step B134, the ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area, and in step B135, the ordinary electric count number area for storing the number of winnings for the normal variation winning device 26 is cleared. Clear the Poden fraudulent prize number area that stores the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 26 during the monitoring period, and in step B137, in the Hoden fraud monitoring period flag area, the flag outside the fraud monitoring period (illegal monitoring of the normal variable prize device 26). Save the flag that specifies outside the period) and return. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the process of hitting a normal figure.

[Public processing during processing]
Next, details of the during-universal-game hitting process (step B12) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the ordinary figure hitting medium process, first, after loading and preparing the figure figure hitting medium process control pointer (step B141), the loaded value of the figure figure hitting medium control pointer is in the figure figure hitting medium control pointer upper limit value area. It is determined whether or not the value (the value of the end of hit: for example, "4") has been reached (step B142).
Then, if the value of the control pointer during hitting the universal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer during hitting the universal figure (step B142; NO), the control pointer during hitting the universal figure is updated by +1 (step B143), The normal operation shift setting process (step B144) is performed, and the process of hitting a universal map ends.
Further, when the value of the universal figure hitting control pointer reaches the value of the universal figure hitting control pointer upper limit value area (the value of the hit end) (step B142; YES), the ordinary figure hitting process control pointer in step B143. Instead of performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation shift setting process (step B144) is performed, and the normal communication hit process is ended.

[Uden operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric power operation shift setting process (step B144) in the above-described general-universal-acting normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
For the time control of the normal electric power releasing operation, the hitting processing time value table whose concrete example is shown in the middle part of FIG. 78 is used. The hitting process time value table is in the hitting process setting table set in step B115 in the normal figure displaying process. As shown in the middle part of FIG. 78, the hit-time processing time value table indicates the value of the control pointer and the normal power operation (normal power open or normal power block) of the normal power operation after each time point during the normal power operation corresponding to the value. The duration value is recorded in association with each other. The mid-hit processing time value table in the middle row of FIG. 78 controls the normal power opening pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 3 shown in the lower chart (normal power operation timing chart) of FIG. In steps B152 and B154, which will be described later, the time corresponding to the value of the control pointer is saved by referring to the hitting processing time value table.

The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 26, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, the control pointer is branched at step B151. Here, the process branches in accordance with the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B141. Specifically, if the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2 in step B151, the process moves to step B152 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 26, and thus the normal variation corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time after the winning device 26 is closed (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B152), and OFF data is stored in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the universal electric solenoid 132 in step B153. Is set, and the normal power operation shift setting process ends. As a result, the closing time after the opening of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the wait time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is closed during that period.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 26, and thus the normal variable winning device 26 corresponding to the control pointer. The normal power release time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the open time, is saved in the universal graphic game processing timer area (step B154), and the ON data is output to the common power solenoid output data area to turn on the power distribution solenoid 132 in step B155. Is set, and the normal power operation shift setting process ends. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned normal electric opening time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is opened during that period.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer is 4 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156 to end the open control of the normal variation winning device 26 and perform the normal electric remaining ball process (step B13). "4" is set as the number (step B156). Next, at step B157, the processing number (here, "4") is saved in the universal figure game processing number area. Next, in step B158, the normal electric power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general electric figure game processing timer area, and then, in step B159, OFF data is output to the normal electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 132. Save and finish the normal power transfer setting process.

[Universal residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above general-university game process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG. 79.
When the routine starts, in step B161, a universal figure end process transition setting process is performed. This is a setting for shifting to the per-universal-drawing end process, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Usage diagram end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing end process transition setting process (step B161) in the above-mentioned normal electric remaining ball process will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG. 79.
When the routine is started, "5" (corresponding to the processing number related to the ending processing per universal figure) is set as the processing number in step B171, and the processing number (here "5") in the universal figure game processing number area is set in step B172. To save. Next, in step B173, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area, and in step B174, a signal regarding the operation end of the normal variation winning device 26 (for example, a normal electric auditor product 1 in-operation signal is transmitted). OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B175, the ordinary electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the control pointer area during the per-universal-drawing collision is cleared, and the per-universal-drawing end processing transition setting processing ends. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the end process per universal figure.

[Usually end processing]
Next, details of the per-universal-drawing end process (step B14) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B181, the normal / universal process / normal process shift setting process 2 is performed. This is for making settings for shifting to the ordinary figure normal processing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Purpose normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the normal / universal process / normal process shift setting process 2 (step B181) in the above-described normal / universal-game end process will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG. 80.
When the routine is started, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal figure normal processing) is set as the processing number in step B191, and the processing number (here "0") is set in the general figure game processing number area in step B192. Save. Then, in step B193, a signal related to the end of the normal figure (for example, the signal during the normal symbol 1 hit is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, the flag for the fraud monitoring period (the flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 26) is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area and the process returns. As a result, next time, the processing shifts to the normal processing of the normal figure.

The flowchart relating to the universal figure game process has been described above. Next, the subroutine of step S80 and subsequent steps in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described.
Here, “step C” is used as the step number for description.
[Segment LED editing process]
First, details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LEDs provided in the collective display device 35. As described above, the collective display device 35 displays a general drawing or a special drawing, and further, a special drawing or a general drawing. The starting memory hold display (special figure hold display, general figure hold display) and the game state are displayed.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a 7-segment indicator) using LEDs as light emitting sources. More specifically, for example, a special figure 1 hold indicator, a special figure 2 hold indicator, a general figure hold indicator, a first game status display section, a second game status display section, an error display section, a round display section, etc. The segment LED editing process is configured by the segment LEDs having a function, and the settings relating to their driving are performed.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step C1), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step C2). This judgment is made based on whether the specific bit of the timer is 1. In this example, a blink cycle of 128 ms is created by looking at bit 5.
If it is the output on timing (step C2; Y), the universal figure reservation number display table 1 is set (step C3), and the process proceeds to step C5. If it is not the output on timing (step C2; N), the universal figure holding number display table 2 is set (step C4), and the process proceeds to step C5.
If the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the display data is the same regardless of which table is used for displaying the number of holdings of the universal figure.

In step C5, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures is acquired based on the set number-of-universal figures display table 1 or 2, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C5) to determine whether it is the output on timing. (Step C6). If it is the output on timing (step C6; Y), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 1 is set (step C7), and the process proceeds to step C9. If it is not the output on timing (step C6; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C8), and the process proceeds to step C9.
By saving the display data in a predetermined segment area, the corresponding LED of the collective display device 35 is turned on or off.

  In Step C9, the display data corresponding to the number of the reserved numbers of the special figure 1 is acquired based on the set special figure 1 reserved number display table 1 or 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C9), which is the output on timing. It is determined whether or not (step C10). If it is the output on timing (step C10; Y), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step C11), and the process proceeds to step C13. If it is not the output on timing (step C10; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C12), and the process proceeds to step C13.

In Step C13, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 or 2 is acquired based on the set special figure 2 pending number display table 1 or 2, and saved in the segment area (step C13) to set the round display table. Then, the display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired from this table (step C14) and saved in the segment area (step C15).
Next, the gaming state display table 1 is set (step C16), the display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired from this table, and saved in the segment area (step C17). In addition, in the game state display, it is informed whether it is during special time saving (during normal power support). For example, one LED is used, the light is turned off to indicate normal operation, and the light is used to express special time saving (during normal power support).
Next, the game state display table 2 is set (step C18), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area (step C19), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In addition, in the game state display 2, it is informed whether or not the game state is right-handed. For example, one LED is used, and when the LED is turned off, a normal hit (left hit) is indicated, and when the LED is turned on, a right hit is indicated. In the case of this example, as described above, the right-hand hitting period is during the big hit, during the small hit, and during the normal electric power support.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is checked to determine whether there is any abnormality, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.
In the magnet irregularity monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 126 is turned on, that is, a state in which abnormal magnetism is detected, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and input to the second input port 161 (input port 2). It is determined (step C21).
When the magnetic sensor 126 is on (step C21; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step C22), and the timer is updated. Determines whether the time has expired (step C23).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C23; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step C25). Then, a command for notifying magnet fraud is prepared (step C26), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, a period corresponding to eight interrupts, that is, an interrupt cycle of 4 ms × 8 = 32 ms), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. There is.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (step C30). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step C23; NO), the process proceeds to step C29.

If the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet irregularity monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the injustice notification period has ended or the injustice notification has been issued from the beginning. If it has not been performed, a command for ending the irregular magnet notification is prepared (step C31). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C33).

Then, when the prepared magnet injustice flag matches the value in the magnet injustice flag area (step C33; YES), the command for the relevant state has already been transmitted to the effect control device 300, and thus the magnet injustice monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet injustice flag is saved in the magnet injustice flag area (step C34), and the effect command setting is performed in order to transmit the command regarding the state to the effect control device 300. The process is performed (step C35), and the magnet fraud monitoring process ends.
Here, in FIG. 82, the arrow indicates the processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no magnet malfunction and is normal. That is, in a normal case, the processing route of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33, and RET is performed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
Next, details of the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing (step S82) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The board radio wave fraud monitoring process is for determining whether or not there is an abnormality based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 127 and setting the start or end of the fraud notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 127 is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the second input port 161 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 163. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C41). When the radio wave sensor is on (step C41; YES), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C42).

  Then, a radio wave fraud notification command is prepared (step C43), a radio wave fraud flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area. (Step C49). That is, in the case of radio wave irregularity, unlike the case of magnet irregularity, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not turned on (step C41; NO), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio fraud notification time is updated by -1 if not 0 (step). C45). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the radio wave injustice monitoring process ends. In addition, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period ends, or the injustice notification occurs from the beginning. If it has not been performed, a command to end the radio wave irregularity notification is prepared (step C47), a radio wave irregularity release flag is prepared as the radio wave irregularity flag (step C48), and the prepared radio wave irregularity flag indicates the value in the radio wave irregularity flag area. Is determined (step C49).

Then, when the prepared radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the radio wave irregularity flag area (step C49; YES), the command regarding the state has already been transmitted to the effect control device 300, and thus the panel radio wave irregularity monitoring process is ended. . If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step C50), and a production command for transmitting a command regarding the state to the production control device 300. The setting process is performed (step C51), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, in FIG. 83, the arrow indicates the processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no radio wave fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the processing route of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, and RET is performed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing process]
Details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.
In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S74), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S77), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S82) are used as the monitoring results. Based on this, processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the external information editing process, first, in step C61, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring. In this process, the open of the glass frame 5 (door) is not directly monitored based on the signal of the glass frame open detection switch 211, but is determined based on the monitoring result in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. I do. That is, it is determined whether or not the glass frame opening error is occurring based on whether or not the error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "game machine state check process" of FIG.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring, the process proceeds to step C62 and it is determined whether or not the front frame (main body frame) opening error is occurring. Also in this process, the determination is performed based on the monitoring result in the "game machine state check process" of FIG.

If the front frame (main frame) opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65. If the glass frame opening error is occurring at step C61, the process also goes to step C65.
That is, if the glass frame opening error is occurring or the front frame opening error is occurring, the process proceeds to step C65, the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C65, and then the game is played in step C66. The ON data of the machine error status signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the routine proceeds to step C67.
On the other hand, when the front frame (main frame) opening error is not occurring (step C62; N), the process proceeds to step C63, in which the OFF data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area, and step C64 Then, the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C67.

  In step C67, if the security signal control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C67), and then it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer has become 0 (step C68). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. The security signal control timer is a timer whose timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S29 of the main processing, and when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, the security signal is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) at the shortest. It is for output.

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 in step C68, that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and the process proceeds to step C70 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, in step C68, if the security signal control timer has already timed up or timed up after updating "-1", the process proceeds to step C70 and thereafter.

  Proceeding to step C70, in steps C70, 71, 72, 73, 74, magnet fraud is occurring, board radio wave fraud is occurring, frame radio fraud is occurring, general electricity fraud is occurring, or a special winning opening fraud occurs. Determine whether each is inside. In these processes, determination is performed based on the monitoring result and the like in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not each of the above frauds is occurring based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "game machine state check process" of FIG. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the fraud has occurred, based on the flags in the fraud flag area (the magnet fraud flag area, the board radio fraud flag area) saved in the fraud monitoring processing of FIGS. 82 and 83.

If any one or more fraud occurs, the process proceeds to step C78, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is further tested in the step C79. Save in the output data area and proceed to step C80. As a result, a fraudulent or gaming machine error state is output to the outside.
In the case of this example, the security signal is turned on not only at step C69 but also at step C78, so it is not turned off unless the security signal control timer times out and no error occurs. That is, if the security signal control timer has timed out and no error has occurred, the security signal is turned off by the processing of step C64.

  On the other hand, if NO in step C70, NO in step C71, NO in step C72, NO in step C73, NO in step C74, that is, when all of steps C70 to C74 are NO, the process branches from step C74 to step C75. After saving the off data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area, the process proceeds to step C80.

When the process proceeds to step C80, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and then a starting opening signal editing process (step C81) for editing the winning signal of the starting opening is performed. . Subsequently, if the symbol determination frequency control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated (step C82), and then it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer becomes 0 (time is up) (step C83). ). The symbol determination number control timer is a timer for controlling the ON time of the symbol determination number signal.
If the symbol determination frequency control timer is not up (step C83; NO), the process proceeds to step C85 to save the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area and return. Then, the routine is repeated, and when it is determined in step C83 that the symbol determination frequency control timer has timed out (step C83; YES), the process proceeds to step C84 in which OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. The external information editing process ends.
In this way, each time the symbol of the special figure ends changing, the symbol determination frequency signal is output as external information.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C80) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The main prize ball signal editing processing outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize to a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) to an external device. Processing.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs updated in step S160 is 0 (step C103).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step C103; NO), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
When the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is 0 (step C103; YES), the OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S103). C108), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106; YES), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step C106; NO), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
In this way, from the game control device 100, the main prize ball signal of 1 pulse is output to the external device (for example, the management device of the game store) for every 10 planned payout numbers of prize balls. The payout control device 200 outputs one pulse of the prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, a management device).
That is, the main control unit 100 (main board) updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for each 10 payout schedule (each time the payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then updates ( The main prize ball number signal is output for the set number of output times. Then, as described above, in response to the main prize ball signal output for every 10 payout schedule, the payout control device 200 (payout board) transmits the prize ball signal when 10 payouts are actually made. By matching the schedule with the result, it is possible to deal with illegal payout.

In addition, the main prize ball signal allows the management device or the like as an external device to determine when the prize has been generated, which helps the policy in the hall business.
Specifically, it is possible to judge whether the prize is generated during the big hit or the prize is generated during the normal game. For example, if there are a lot of prizes during a big hit, it's not strange, but if there are a lot of prizes during normal games, it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device and there is only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the ball is out during the big hit and the payout is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to determine when the prize has been generated, for example, when the supply is delayed and is paid out after the jackpot.
Therefore, if the supply was delayed and was paid out after the jackpot was over, there would have been a large amount of prizes (payouts) during the normal game, which could lead to incompleteness in the sales data. There is a nature.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both the main award ball signal and the award ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main award ball signal is output immediately after winning the prize. The defect disappears.

The ON / OFF pattern of the main prize ball signal generated by the main prize ball signal editing process is as shown in the timing chart of the lower side of FIG. 86, for example. That is, the pattern has a time period (for example, 128 ms) in an on state (for example, high level) and a time period (for example, 64 ms) in an off state (for example, low level). Here, since the value of the output control timer represents 4 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, as one unit, "48" corresponds to 192 ms and "16" corresponds to 64 ms.
The starting opening signal generated by the starting opening signal editing process described later also has the same pattern as the main prize ball signal.

[Starting gate signal editing process]
Details of the starting opening signal editing process (step C81) in the above-described external information editing process will be described below with reference to FIG.
The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121 are input.
In the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output count updated in step S382 is 0 (step C113).

Then, if the number of times of starting port signal output is not 0 (step C113; NO), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated by -1 (step C114), and the starting port signal output control timer initial value is set in the starting port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is the sum of the time (for example, 128 ms) in the on state (for example, high level) of the starting port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) in the off state (for example, 64 ms) of the starting port signal. For example, it is 192 ms). Then, the ON data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
If the number of times the starting port signal is output is 0 (step C113; YES), the OFF data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118). , The starting port signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (step C112; NO), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C116). The fact that the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). When the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step C116; YES), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start-port signal output control timer is not in the output-on section (step C116; NO), the OFF data for turning off the start-port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( (Step C118), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 129.
Here, “step D” is used as the step number for description.
Note that the special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for the effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control apparatus 300 is the special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special map).

Further, in general, the “character” means a character or character, or a character or animal having the character or character, and may be a character as a computer term. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, particularly in the description of the image display control using the VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of decorative patterns (decorative design of special figure and fourth pattern), characters A cohesive still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, in the case of display control, an object means an object of display control with cohesion, and display elements (background image, image of decorative design of special figure, image of notice character). , Images with a hold display, etc.). For example, in the case of this example, the decorative symbols of the special symbols are distinguished by the difference in the variable display area (reel) of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. There is a distinction that the display position of the previous symbol in the scroll direction is different. That is, for example, for the left symbol, there are a current symbol of the left symbol, a next symbol of the left symbol, and a previous symbol of the left symbol, and when viewed in detail, each of them is one object. However, in the control process, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a scenario table (also referred to as a scenario data table) is used when performing an effect on the display device 41 or the like. In this scenario table, data (data specifying which motion table is executed at what timing) is set for controlling the flow of a particular effect.
In the above motion table, there is motion data (that is, image data to be displayed and data to specify the display position, etc.) of each effect (mainly effect display) that is made into a block (partized), and the motion is a block. It means a directed rendering action. That is, the motion table is a control table for executing each blocked effect, and is also called a motion control table. The data of the motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like by commercially available application software that can be executed by a PC (personal computer), and the production control device 300 can produce each blocked production. It is stored in the PROM 321 in advance.

Further, in this embodiment, the concept of a scenario layer is used in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display device 41 and the like. The scenario layer means each layer in a method of controlling the effect display and the like by dividing it into a plurality of layers. In this example, a scenario table is set for each scenario layer as needed, and the entire effect is realized by combining the effects of each scenario layer.
The “scenario management area” is a storage area having a structure including an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area) and an area for storing the scenario table address (scenario data table area). is there. Then, there are scenario management areas of the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer for the scenario layers, and in this example, there are eight scenario layers, so there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .
The “address area of the scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the scenario management area.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 88.
This main process starts when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the interrupt is first prohibited in step D1, the CPU 311 is initialized in step D2, the VDP 312 is initialized in step D3, and then the interrupt is generated in step D4. to approve. Next, after sequentially executing steps D13, D15, and D19, the process proceeds to step D20.

In step D13, generation of display data is permitted. This is a process for permitting a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM 329 and generate display data.
In step D15, a random number seed is set. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, as the argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine may be used. Good.
In Step D19, power is turned on to an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 326) of the effect control device 300 (for example, a flag area for effect (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). Save the initial value of time.

Next, when proceeding to step D20, steps D20 to D32 are sequentially executed.
In step D20, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
In step D21, effect button input processing is executed. This is a process of editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) or the touch panel 9a is activated. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the process of sensing the input of the button may be performed within this process (that is, within the main loop process described later), or within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). You can go.

In step D22, hall / player setting mode processing is performed in which the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 is set, and the operation of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player is changed. .
In step D23, random number update processing is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using the rand function, for example. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, it is sufficient to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control device 100).
In step D24, a received command check process (described later) is executed.
In step D28, a scenario setting process is executed. This is a process for analyzing a scenario based on the received command from the game control device 100 (details will be described later).
In step D30, motion control processing is executed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28 (details will be described later).

In step D31, effect display edit processing is executed. This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 on the drawing content on the display device 41, and the details will be described later. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) described later.
In step D32, drawing command preparation end setting is executed, and the flow advances to step D33. The process of step D32 is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 has been completed.

  When it proceeds to step D33, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing, and if it is the frame switching timing, steps D34 to D38 are sequentially executed, and if it is not the frame switching timing, this step D33 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The generation period of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and V blank interrupts occur twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of frame switching timing is twice the cycle of V blank interrupts (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

  By the processing of this step D33, the subsequent processing (steps D34 to D38 and subsequent steps D20 to D32) is executed at the above frame switching timing in each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed on a frame-by-frame basis (that is, on a processing cycle basis). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames are 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

Next, in step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D35, a sound control process for performing a process related to the volume of the sound from the speaker (upper speaker 12a, lower speaker 12b) is executed.
In step D36, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs and the like of the board decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43 is executed.
In step D37, a movable body control process for controlling a movable body including various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
In step D38, a firing information control process is executed. In the launch information control process, launch related information (described later) is set based on the launch state flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (ie, a predetermined number of lent balls)) The mode of the effect is corrected according to. Here, the firing state flag is information indicating whether or not the player is firing a game ball, and the firing touch information received from the game control device 100 in a firing touch information setting process (step D233) described later. This is the information saved in the firing state flag area based on the command informing.
After executing this step D38, the process returns to step D20, and the same processing as in the case of proceeding to step D20 is repeated. That is, steps D20 to D38 form a loop process (which may be referred to as a main loop process in some cases) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

  Note that the control processing of steps D35 to D37 is performed within these steps in which operation switching is executed in processing cycle units in order to match the effect on the screen. The process of actually outputting data (particularly signals for controlling various LEDs and motors, etc.) to the port is performed in a timer interrupt of a short cycle (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case in which a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (step D24) in the above-described main process will be described below with reference to FIG. The command from the main board is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and these are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data forming a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

  The command reception process from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). In other words, in the serial communication of this example, hardware transmission (by the function of the CPU itself) is automatically performed, and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) occurs and informs. Although it is only necessary to retrieve from the buffer, in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities before the command The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by 1 by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term “storing” simply means readable and storable in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (same below). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or the RAM 326, and so on) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or larger than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

When this received command check processing routine is started, first, at step D151, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the command reception number, then at step D152 it is determined whether the command reception number is zero, and if not, step After sequentially executing D153 to D155, the process proceeds to step D156, and if zero, returns. In the present application, “loading” data in the control processing as in step D151 means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).
In addition, the command reception counter is decremented and basically cleared to 0 in the next step D153 of this routine executed at each frame switching timing, and as a result, for one frame (1/30 seconds) (as described above). The command reception counter area of the RWM (RAM 326 or RAM 311a) is used to count the number of commands received during one processing cycle (1).

In step D153, the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions.
Note that, where A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D151. Then, immediately after the execution of step D153, it is a normal movement that "A = A-B = 0", but in the mode of this example, the effect control device interrupts the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given instead of the prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. Therefore, if the process of step D153 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is deviated, so that the subtraction process "AB" is performed in step D153. Is going. However, when serial communication is used to send and receive a command from the main board as in the present embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D151 and the processing of step D153. By doing so, the processing content of step D153 may be “A ← 0”.

In step D154, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, which may be simply referred to as the command buffer below) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer) is stored in the command area (if Command storage area). The command area is a storage area in, for example, the RAM 326 or the RAM 311a that constitutes a so-called FIFO format (first in first out format) buffer.
In step D155, since the data in the command buffer has been read, the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31, for example. The range of 0 to 31 corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, 32).

  When the process proceeds to Step D156, it is determined whether or not the command for the number of received commands has been copied (that is, whether steps D154 and D155 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands), and if not completed, Step D154. Returning to step D154, the process is repeated from step D154, and if completed, the process proceeds to step D157.

When the processing proceeds to step D157, the contents of the command area (the first stored data of the data that has not been read yet in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) is loaded (that is, reading), With respect to the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command of this time), a received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D158, and then the process proceeds to step D159.
When the process proceeds to step D159, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D160, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D157 to D159 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands), and if not completed, the process returns to step D157. Then, the process is repeated from step D157, and if completed, the process returns.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Details of the received command analysis process (step D158) in the received command check process described above will be described below with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is separated into MODE and the lower byte is stored into ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D172. . In the case of a variation-type command instructing the variation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the latter half variation pattern. It is a thing.

In steps D172 and D173, it is determined whether the MODE value and the ACT value separated in step D171 are in the normal range, and if only one of them is not in the normal range, the process returns and both of these values are in the normal range. If so, proceed to Step D174. The value of MODE is not defined and there is a value that is not used. When such a value is not used, it is determined in step D172 that it is not within the normal range.
The determination in step D173 as to whether or not the ACT value separated in step D171 is within the normal range is performed as follows, for example. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective ACT value are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D173, the upper and lower limits are separated. It is checked whether the ACT value set is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be within the normal range (the missing tooth check cannot be performed at this point).

In step D174, it is determined whether the separated ACT value and the separated MODE value are the correct combination. This determination is made using, for example, a match check table. The coincidence check table is a table in which all valid ACT values (ACTION values) for the MODE value are registered in order from the head address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it is determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. Judge as not a combination.
In the process of step D174, it is checked whether or not the MODE has a normal ACT combination (including missing tooth check). There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not necessarily continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth). Is being compared and confirmed whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is confirmed by comparing each of them which one of them matches.
If the determination result in step D174 is NO, the value of ACT is abnormal, so that it is determined that the command is abnormal, and the process returns without executing steps D175 and thereafter. If the decision result in the step D174 is YES, the process advances to the step D175.

In step D175, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the variable command range, and if it is within this range, variable command processing (described later) is executed in step D176 and returns. If it is outside this range, step D177 is executed. move on. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D171 (the same applies to step D177 and the like described later). Further, the variation system command (also sometimes referred to as variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing the variation pattern of the special figure, and the range of data of this variation command is the variation system command range.
When the process proceeds to Step D177, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the big hit system command range. If it is within this range, the big hit system command process (details omitted) is executed at Step D178 and the process returns, and if it is outside this range. It proceeds to step D179. The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the big hit medium production, and the range of data of the big hit system command is the big hit system command range.

When the process proceeds to step D179, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range, and if it is within this range, the symbol system command process (described later) is executed in step D180 and the process returns, and if it is outside this range, the step is executed. Proceed to D181. Design-related commands (sometimes referred to as design commands or decorative special drawing commands) are commands for instructing information related to special design designs (for example, what to do with the special design stop design), and this design command The range of data that can be taken is the symbol type command range.
In step D181, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the single-shot system command range. If it is within this range, single-shot system command processing (described later) is executed in step D182, and the process returns. If it is outside this range, the process returns to step D183. move on. It should be noted that, unlike commands that make sense by combination such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that stand alone are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold number commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model designation commands, and the like. The range that the data of this single-shot command can take is the single-shot command range.

When the process proceeds to step D183, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch symbol system command range for the prefetch effect, and if it is within this range, the prefetch symbol system command process (details omitted) is executed in step D184, and the process returns. If it is out of this range, the process proceeds to step D185.
When the process proceeds to step D185, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the pre-reading variable system command range for the pre-reading effect, and if it is within this range, the pre-reading variable system command process (details omitted) is executed at step D186, and the process returns. If it is out of this range, the received command analysis process is terminated and the process returns.

  Here, the look-ahead effect (also called a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a starting winning memory (a starting winning memory is held or simply held) for which the variable display game of the special figure is not executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not it will be a big hit (or what variation pattern will be) when it is executed with a predetermined degree of reliability, a hold display of the starting winning award memory etc. is performed in a manner different from usual It is a production such as. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command, and pre-reading pattern system command) is a command that informs beforehand the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the hold of the starting winning prize memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect, and the game at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Single command processing]
Details of the one-shot system command processing executed in step D176 in the received command analysis processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92.
When this routine is started, first in step D201, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (the upper byte data separated in the above-mentioned step D171, the same applies hereinafter) is the one for which the model is designated (model designation command data). If the model is to be designated, the model setting process (omitted from the description) is executed in step D202 and then the process returns (ends this single-shot system command process). If the model is not designated, the process proceeds to step D203.

  When the process proceeds to step D203, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for notifying the RAM initialization (power-on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on) (RAM initialization command data). If it is for notifying the initialization, the process returns after executing the RAM initialization setting process in step D204, and if it is not for instructing the RAM initialization, the process proceeds to step D205. The RAM initialization command is a command (also referred to as a power-on command) that informs the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM, and is transmitted in step S30 described above. This RAM initialization command is sent in order to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform RWM clear notification (an operation of displaying that the RWM has been cleared on the display device 41, for example). The process is the RAM initialization setting process in step D204.

When the process proceeds to Step D205, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for notifying the power failure recovery (command data at the time of power failure recovery), and if it is the power failure recovery, after executing the power failure recovery setting process in Step D206 When the process returns and does not instruct to restore the power failure, the process proceeds to step D207. The power failure recovery setting process of step D206 is for displaying a message such as "restarted game" on the display device 41 or blinking lamps in a predetermined manner to notify the player of power recovery. Processing, and includes scenario data setting processing therefor.
As will be described later in detail, the scenario data setting process will be executed in the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is the process of setting the scenario control data for production. Further, the scenario control data is data set in the above-mentioned scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area in order to control the flow of a specific effect (for example, a scenario data table to be written in the scenario management area (scenario Table) address etc.).

When the process proceeds to step D207, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing the customer waiting demo (data of the customer waiting demo command), and if it is for instructing the customer waiting demo, after sequentially executing steps D208 and D210. When the process returns, and the customer waiting demonstration is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D211. The customer waiting demo is a customer waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. In the customer waiting demonstration effect, the effect is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and the effect on the other display devices, lighting of lamps (including blinking), or output of voice may be performed.
In step D208, a customer waiting demo setting process (details will be described later) for setting scenario control data for performing the customer waiting effect is executed.
Next, in step D210, a character position confirmation process (explanation omitted) is executed, and then the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step D211, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is to inform the value of the special figure 1 hold number (data of the hold number command of the special figure 1), and if it is to inform the value of the special figure 1 hold number. For example, the process proceeds to step D212, and if it does not notify the value of the special figure 1 holding number, the process proceeds to step D215.
When the process proceeds to step D212, it is determined based on the MODE data whether the number of holdings of special figure 1 (the number of starting memory of special figure 1) has increased by one, and if it is increasing, the start mouth winning command is received in step D213. After the number is incremented by 1, the process proceeds to step D214, and if not increased, step D213 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D214. In step D214, the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (explanation omitted) is executed, and then the process returns. In addition, since the number of reception of the winning opening winning command is also updated by +1 in step D217 and step D220, which will be described later, any one of the starting winning openings (special drawing 1 starting opening 607, special drawing 2 starting opening 608, starting winning opening 26a). Corresponds to the number of game balls entered (that is, the number of starting prizes), and is used to determine the special figure rotation state in the firing information control process of step D38.

When the process proceeds to step D215, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is to inform the value of the special figure 2 reserved number (data of the special figure 2 reserved number command), and if it is to inform the value of the special figure 2 reserved number. For example, the process proceeds to step D216, and if it does not notify the value of the special figure 2 holding number, the process proceeds to step D219.
When the process proceeds to step D216, it is determined based on the MODE data whether the number of holdings of special figure 2 (the number of starting memory of special figure 2) has increased by one, and if it has increased, the start mouth winning command is received in step D217. After the number is incremented by 1, the process proceeds to step D218, and if not increased, the process proceeds to step D218 without executing step D217. In step D218, the special figure 2 hold information setting process (explanation omitted) is executed, and then the process returns.
In order to simplify the description, in the steps D213 and D217, the prize balls at the first starting opening (special opening 1 starting opening 607) and the second starting opening (special opening 2 starting opening 608, starting winning opening 26a). Although the common starting mouth winning command reception number area is set to +1 with the same number, the areas may be divided into different numbers of prize balls. In that case, the firing information control process of step D38 also changes accordingly.

  When the process proceeds to step D219, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is data for informing the start opening over winning (data of the start opening over winning command prepared in step S399 described above), and if it is the start opening over winning notification. For example, in step D220, the number of received start port winning command is updated by +1 and then the process proceeds to step D221. If it is not to notify the start port over winning, the process proceeds to step D222. In Step D221, the process for returning the winning opening over the starting opening (the description of which is omitted) is executed, and then the process returns. In addition, the starting mouth over winning means a starting winning exceeding the upper limit value of the special figure reservation number (starting memory number).

When the process proceeds to step D222, it is determined whether the MODE data is the one for reporting the probability information (probability variation information command data), and if it is the one for reporting the probability information, the probability information setting process is executed at step D223 and the process returns. If the probability information is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D224.
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for switching the screen at the end of the probability change when the probability change occurs after the big hit (when transitioning from the high probability state to the normal state with low probability), and the scenario for that It may also include data setting processing.
When the process proceeds to step D224, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is an error / incorrection notification data (for example, error notification command data). (Omitted) is executed and the process returns, and if it is not a command for error / incorrectness, the process proceeds to step D226.

  When the process proceeds to step D226, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is an instruction for effect mode switching (data for effect mode switching command), and if it is an instruction for effect mode switching, an effect mode switching setting process is performed in step D227. After (details omitted) is executed, the process returns, and if the effect mode switching is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D228. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching command, and includes a scenario data setting process therefor.

When the process proceeds to step D228, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is a command to stop the symbol of the special figure (that is, a symbol stop command). If it is not a command to stop the symbol of the special figure, the process proceeds to step D232.
In step D229, it is determined whether the command corresponding to the MODE data is a normal command, and if it is not normal, the process returns. If it is normal, steps D230 and D231 are executed, and then the process returns.
In step D230, the stop setting of the corresponding special drawing (of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, which is designated by the data of the symbol stop command) is executed.
In step D231, the normal state is set as the content of the gaming state flag (information indicating the state of the gaming machine (P machine state)). Here, the normal state indicates that neither the big hit of the special figure, the small hit of the special figure, the changing of the special figure, or the waiting state of the customer (waiting state for the customer) is present. Further, after being set to normal here, for example, the special figure is changing or waiting for a customer in response to the next command from the main board.

Proceeding to step D232, the MODE data indicates the firing touch information (the state off command or the state on command relating to the touch switch signal prepared in step S304 or S307 and transmitted in step S317 (hereinafter, a firing command). Data)), and if it is to notify the firing touch information, it returns after executing the firing touch information setting process in step D233, and if it is not to notify the firing touch information, proceeds to step D234. .
In the firing touch information setting process, a firing state flag indicating a firing state (a state in which the player is in contact with the firing operation handle 11 and playing a game) is set according to the data of the received firing command. And so on. That is, in the firing touch information setting process, it is determined whether the received MODE data is a normal touch-on command (a state-on command prepared for the touch switch signal and transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step S307), If it is a normal touch-on command, a firing flag is prepared, and if it is normal but not a touch-on command, a touch-off command (a touch switch signal is prepared in step S304 and transmitted to the effect control device 300). State off command), prepare the firing stop flag, and if the prepared flag data is different from the data already saved in the fire state flag area, the prepared flag data is set in the fire state flag area. Perform processing such as saving.

When the process advances to step D234, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is data for notifying that the ball lending button is pressed (data of the ball lending button pressing command prepared in step S298 and transmitted in step S299), and the ball lending button is pressed. If it is for notifying that the pressing of the ball lending button has not been performed, it returns after executing the ball lending information setting processing (described later) in step D235.
Note that this single-shot command processing includes steps that are not shown and described. For example, the processing for responding to the reception of another non-variable command is omitted. In addition, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error command indicating opening of the frame is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed and the scenario control data is not set.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Next, the customer waiting demo setting process executed in step D208 of the one-shot system command process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this customer waiting demo setting process, first, the process proceeds to step D241, it is determined whether the data of the current command loaded in step D157 is normal, the process proceeds to step D242 if normal, and the process returns if abnormal.

When the process proceeds to step D242, it is determined whether the state of the P machine (state of the pachinko machine) is the customer waiting demo, and if it is the customer waiting demo, the process returns. If it is not the customer waiting demo, steps D243 and D244 are sequentially executed and then the return To do.
In step D243, a customer waiting scenario data setting process (described later) is executed to perform a customer waiting effect. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the scenario control data means data set in the scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In this step D243, scenario control data for performing customer waiting production is set.
In step D244, the customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state. The customer waiting effects include a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (without sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

[Customer waiting scenario data setting process]
Next, the customer waiting scenario data setting processing executed in step D243 of the customer waiting demo setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In this customer waiting scenario data setting process, steps D251 to D274 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.
In step D251, the scenario layer number 0 is prepared. Here, “preparing” means temporarily storing and holding data in a predetermined storage area for subsequent processing (the same applies to other steps described later). The scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of production. The scenario layer number is a number given to each scenario layer, and is 0 to 7 in this example. In this example, the scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as scenario layer 0) is mainly used for controlling the display of the background image, and the scenario layer 1 is used for controlling the display of the left pattern. The control target is basically assigned. However, the customer waiting effect uses only scenario layer 0, and the motion information such as the design for the customer waiting effect is also managed in the scenario layer 0.

In step D252, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table is prepared. A data table for a scenario (also simply called a scenario table) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a particular effect (data for specifying which motion table is executed at what timing) is set. It is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 for each effect. The customer waiting scenario data table is a scenario table for customer waiting effect, and has a structure shown in FIG. 136, for example. Further, in the scenario table of this example, as shown in FIG. 136, the data (scenario data) of the operation code and the operand is set in each row (each record).
In step D253, a scenario data setting process, which will be described later, is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the immediately preceding steps D251 and D252.

In step D254, scenario layer number 1 is prepared. In step D255, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. At step D256, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared at the immediately preceding steps D254 and D255.
In step D257, scenario layer number 2 is prepared. In step D258, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D259, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D257 and D258.

In step D260, scenario layer number 3 is prepared. In step D261, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D262, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D260 and D261.
In step D263, scenario layer number 4 is prepared. In step D264, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D265, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D263 and D264.

In step D266, scenario layer number 5 is prepared. In step D267, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D268, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D266 and D267.
In step D269, scenario layer number 6 is prepared. In step D270, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. In step D271, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D269 and D270.

In step D272, scenario layer number 7 is prepared. In step D273, the address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared. At step D274, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared at the immediately preceding steps D272 and D273.
The scenario layers 1 to 7 for preparing the address (NULL) in steps D255, D258, D261, D264, D267, D270, and D273 are scenario layers in which the scenario data table is not set, that is, uncontrolled scenario layers.

[Scenario data setting process]
Next, details of the scenario data setting process executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274 in the above-mentioned customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step in which the scenario data setting process is executed is another routine (for example, step D453 of reach start effect setting process described later). There are many. The steps described as "scenario data setting processing" are all shown in FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D281, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D252, D255, etc.) is NULL, and if it is NULL, then step D287 is executed. The process returns, and if not NULL, steps D282 to D286 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.

  In the customer waiting scenario data setting process described above, when this routine is executed in step D253, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table that is not NULL is prepared in step D252 immediately before, so step D281 The result of the determination is NO and steps D282 to D286 are executed. If this routine is executed in other steps D256 or the like, NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D255 or the like. The determination result of D281 is YES, and step D287 is executed.

  In step D282, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D251, and so on) is set. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a or the RAM 326 of the effect control device 300 is provided with a storage area for scenario management called an "address area of the scenario management area" and a "scenario management area". Among these, the scenario management area is an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area), an area for storing the value of the PB timer (push button timer), and a PB detection area. The structure includes an area (PB detection flag area) for storing the value of a flag (push button detection flag) and an area (scenario data table area) for storing the address of the scenario data table. Further, there are scenario management areas of the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer for the scenario layers, and in this example, there are eight scenario layers, so there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .. In step D282, in order to specify one of the plurality of scenario management areas as described above, the start address of the scenario management area (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding scenario management area) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is set. is doing.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. Since there are eight scenario layers in this example, eight start addresses (scenario It consists of eight areas for respectively storing the layer 0 address to the scenario layer 7 address.
Next, in step D283, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D282 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

Next, in step D284, 0 is written (that is, the value is cleared) as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area.
Next, in step D285, 0 is written as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared). The value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may be cleared, but it may be cleared when necessary (when the PB detection is started). Therefore, the value of the PB detection flag is set here. Absent.
Next, in step D286, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in step D252) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area.
On the other hand, in step D287, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

According to the above-described scenario data setting process, the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is used for the performance to be executed. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the customer waiting scenario data setting process described above, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D253, D256, D259, D262, D265, D268, D271, and D274, so that the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is executed. The start address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the layer 0 address, and NULL is set from the remaining scenario layer 1 address to the scenario layer 7 address. Further, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D252 is set in the scenario data table area of the scenario management area 0. As a result, the customer waiting effect control is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Ball lending information setting process]
Next, the ball lending information setting process executed in step D235 of the single shot command process will be described with reference to FIG. 96.
In the ball lending information setting process, first, it is determined whether the ball lending button pressing command determined in step D234 described above is a normal command (step D361). When the command is not a normal command (step D361; N), the ball lending information setting process ends. On the other hand, if the command is normal (step D361; Y), the unit amount information is set based on the ball lending unit number information set in the ball lending unit number setting process (step D362), and the set unit amount information is set. Is added to the value of the ball lending usage amount information area (step D363), and the ball lending information setting process is ended. Here, the ball lending unit number setting process is a process executed in the hall / player setting mode process (step D22) in the case of the hall setting mode, and "ball lending unit number setting" by a hall clerk or the like. Is a process for realizing the setting change of. The number of ball lending units corresponds to an increase in the amount of ball lending by one payout operation of the ball lending (payout operation by one pressing operation of the ball lending button 16). The hall setting mode is a mode that starts when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. The hall setting mode start condition includes that there is an operation input to enter the hall setting mode (for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 9 twice with the glass frame 5 opened), and a customer waiting demonstration is being performed. Including the condition of. That is, for example, when the production button 9 is pressed twice while the glass frame 5 is open during the customer waiting demonstration, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied, and the number of ball lending units is set and the volume is set by the hall clerk. Is possible.

Through the above processing, each time the player performs a ball lending operation (pressing the ball lending button) while the game is continuing, the ball lending usage amount information increases by that amount (that is, the total amount of ball lending is performed). ).
Here, the ball lending unit number information is information corresponding to information on the amount of money used by pressing the ball lending button once (unit price information) (information for which unit price information can be obtained from the information, unit price information itself). It may be). The ball lending unit number information corresponds to an increase in the amount of lent balls by one payout operation of lent balls. The registered value of the increase in the amount of lent balls (that is, information on the number of lent units of balls) can be rewritten by the game shop (hall) in the above-mentioned hall setting mode.

[Design command processing]
Next, details of the symbol-based command processing executed in step D180 in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D371, the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure corresponding to the MODE data (the upper byte data separated in step D171 described above, the same in step D372 described later)). 2 information). For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special drawing 1 is set as the special drawing type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special drawing 2 is set as the special drawing type. As described above, since it is possible to determine whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is based on the MODE data, in this step D371, the special figure type is determined from the MODE data and set.

Next, in Step D372, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved, and then the process returns (that is, the symbol command processing is ended).
In step D372, specifically, first, the symbol type setting table corresponding to the MODE data is set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining a symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (for example, a category such as an outlier symbol, a 16R certainty variation jackpot symbol, a 2R certainty variation jackpot symbol, an 11R normal jackpot symbol, ...), It is a table in which the correspondence between the data of ACTION of the symbol command (for example, there are 11 types of 11h to 1Bh) and the symbol type is defined. Since the symbol ratios change between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (probability variation rate is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and in step D372, first, from a plurality of symbol type setting tables, MODE is selected. Select and set the one corresponding to the data of.

Next, in step D372, based on the set symbol type setting table, the symbol type corresponding to the ACT data (the lower byte data separated in step D171 described above) is acquired and saved as symbol type information.
In addition, the special symbol type and the symbol type information set in steps D371 and D372 in response to the symbol command in this way will be described later with respect to the variable command which is a set received after the symbol command (or before the symbol command). It is used in the processing of steps D401 and D402. Even if the special figure type information is used for the determination in step D401, the data previously set in step D371 is stored and held until step D371 is newly executed. Further, the information of the symbol type is configured such that, even after it is used in step D402, the data previously set in step D372 is stored and held until step D372 is newly executed.
As described above, according to this routine, the special symbol type and the symbol type are set each time the symbol system command is received.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable system command processing executed in step D176 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D401 whether or not the special figure type is undetermined, and if not, the process returns. If not, that is, if the special figure type is set, step D402. Then, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked and the process proceeds to step D403. The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in the above-described step D371 of the symbol command processing.

When the process proceeds to step D403, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent. If they are not inconsistent, the process returns. If they are not inconsistent, the process returns after executing steps D404 to D408.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a deviating symbol and 16R probability variation big hit symbol as described above. In addition, the inconsistency in the above step D403 is inconsistent in performing the production, such as when receiving a variation command (variation pattern command) out of alignment but receiving a symbol command of 16R probability variation big hit symbol. It means that it is a combination (combination of variable command and symbol type). That is, in step D402, a consistency check is performed to see if the variation pattern command matches the stop symbol, and the result branches to step D403.

Then, in step D404, the variation pattern type (which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure and is determined by the variation pattern type data) according to the received command is determined.
In step D405, a variation effect setting process (described later) is executed in order to perform an effect according to the variation command.
Further, in step D406, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine). Here, "changing the special map" means that the special map is being changed (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare).
In step D407, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, a process of updating the number of pre-reading effects by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) is executed. Here, the reason why the prefetch effect count is updated by -1 is that step D407 is executed when a valid variation system command is received (the variation of the special figure is started from now on, and the number of pending start winning memory is 1). This is because when it decreases). The number of prefetching effects is set based on the latest pending information when a prefetching notice is given in a prefetching lottery process (a subroutine called and executed in the prefetching variable system command process of step D186) not shown. For example, if the number of reservations is four, it is set to four times, and if the number of reservations is three, it is set to three times. The number of prefetch effects is updated in step D407 and is used in step D729b described later.
Then, in step D408, the number of special figure fluctuations described above (the counter used in the firing information control process of step D38) is updated by +1. Since this step D408 is executed every time the special figure variation display is started, the special figure variation number for counting the number of executions of the special figure variation display is updated by +1 here. The special figure fluctuation frequency updated here is used to determine the special figure rotation state in the firing information control process.

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, details of the variation effect setting processing executed in step D405 in the variation system command processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100.
When this routine is started, first in step D421, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type data determined in step D404 of the variation system command processing is reachless variation, and if it is reachless variation, steps D422 and D423 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to step D426, and if there is no reach-free variation, steps D424 and D425 are sequentially performed, and then the process proceeds to step D426.
In step D422, the launch related information (which will be described later) set at that time, the model code, the special figure classification, and the first half notice distribution group address table (not shown) corresponding to the presentation mode at that time are set. In addition, when the process proceeds to step D422, there is no reach variation, and the symbol type is always an outlier symbol. Therefore, in step D422, the symbol type does not need to be particularly referred to.
The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (the command for the game mode is also sent from the game control device in the present embodiment), and naturally varies depending on the model. This effect mode (game mode) is related to the effect theme of the game machine, such as a military mode or a battle mode, and is corrected according to the special figure rotation state in the firing information control process (step D38). Different from the production mode.

The first-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the first-half notice distribution group table, which will be described later, and the address data of the first-half notice distribution group table is arranged in a matrix. In this first-half notice distribution group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to the same MODE value (data specifying the first-half variation pattern). When the change pattern type is change without reach, each column of the first-half notice distribution group address table has the same number of holdings (the number of starting winning memory in which the change display game of special figure is not executed). Corresponding data is placed. That is, in the first-half notice distribution group address table in the case of fluctuation without reach, the parameter that determines the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter that determines the column is the number of reservations. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is other than the reachless variation, data corresponding to the same variation pattern type is arranged in each column of the first-half notice distribution group address table. That is, in the first-half notice distribution group address table other than the reach-free variation, the parameter that determines the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter that determines the column is the variation pattern type.
As a result, in the case of this example, the lottery contents of the notice productions that appear during each variation (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice production mode) change according to the number of holdings only when there is no reach variation. become. For example, in the case of fluctuations that are not reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases.

In step D423, based on the first-half notice distribution group address table set in step D422, the addresses of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and special figure classification pending numbers are acquired.
Specifically, the row address corresponding to the MODE value (the value separated in step D171, and so on) is calculated as the row address of the set first-half notice distribution group address table. Next, as the address of the column of the set first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the column corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure classification at that time is calculated. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first-half notice distribution group address table.

On the other hand, in step D424, the launch related information (which will be described later) set at that time, the model code, the special figure type, the symbol type, and the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the presentation mode at that time are set. .
Next, in step D425, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired based on the first-half notice distribution group address table set in step D424.
Specifically, the row address corresponding to the MODE value is calculated as the row address of the set first half notice distribution group address table. Next, as the column address of the set first half notice distribution group address table, the column address corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type at that time (the data determined in step D404, and so on) is calculated. Then, based on these calculation results, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first-half notice distribution group address table.

When the process proceeds to step D426, the notice lottery process (lottery of notice effect by random number) is executed for the first half change using the first half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in the immediately preceding step D423 or D425. According to the notice lottery process, the distribution result is selected in advance for all the notice distribution types set in the first-half notice distribution group table, and various kinds of information designating the effect contents according to the distribution result are prepared in advance. It will be stored in each predetermined storage area.
According to the processes up to step D426, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table is selected, and the notice lottery process (first-half change notice lottery process) of step D426 is performed based on the selected first-half notice distribution group table. To be executed. Here, the first-half notice distribution group table is a table in which a plurality of addresses of one notice distribution table and one address of the result area of one effect distribution result corresponding to the address are arranged in the same row. Is. The notice distribution (lottery for determining the presence or absence of the notice effect and the mode) performed for one variable display game is executed in a very large number depending on the variation pattern, and accordingly, the notice distribution group table The number of lines will be huge.

  Here, the firing-related information referred to in steps D422 and D424 includes at least the above-mentioned firing state flag information (a firing flag indicating a touch state on the firing operation handle 11 or a firing stop state indicating a touch-off state). Flag information), continuous touch state flag information (information saved in the process in the firing information control process of step D38), and ball lending usage amount information (information updated in step D363). There is. The continuous touch state flag indicates whether or not the contact with the firing operation handle 11 is continuous for a continuous touch specified time (for example, 3 minutes) or more (may be continuous including a non-contact state for less than the unfired specified time). This is a flag, and the player's game continuation state can be known from this flag.

  Then, in steps D422 and D424, the first-half notice distribution group address table to be selected is changed based on the launch-related information including these pieces of information. As a result, the effect changes according to the establishment of the predetermined effect changing condition (for example, the frequency of occurrence of special notice effects increases). For example, in the present embodiment, after the player has played the game (touching the firing operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or longer, the production change condition including the condition (first condition) of releasing the hand from the firing operation handle 11 (touching off) is satisfied. Then, the effect is changed, and the condition (second condition) that the ball lending usage amount exceeds the specified amount is included in the effect changing condition. In addition, the condition (third condition) that there is only one remaining special figure reservation (memory for winning a special figure starting prize) corresponding to a special figure change (a special figure change that is about to start) for which the effect is to be changed, It may be included in this production change condition. In the table selection of steps D422 and D424, the table to be selected is changed depending on whether or not such a condition (for example, all of the second condition and the third condition in addition to the first condition) are satisfied, and as a result, the effect is produced. The contents are changed. As a result, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation and making the player motivated to continue the game, and the effect of having a wide range of effects can be obtained without lowering the game efficiency. . That is, when the player who has been playing the game for a specified time or longer releases the handle, the effect is changed by the effect control device 300, and in the effect change by the effect control device 300, the reach occurrence rate controlled by the game control device 100 is changed. Since time is not included, the time efficiency does not decrease, and the player tries to continue the game by operating the steering wheel again.

  The condition that the player releases the hand from the firing operation handle 11 (touches off) after playing the game (touching the firing operation handle 11) for a predetermined time or more can be determined by the firing state flag and the continuous touch state flag. That is, when the firing state flag is the firing stopped flag and the continuous touch state flag is the continuous touch condition establishment flag, the firing operation handle 11 is in a touch-off state at this moment when there is no contact with the player's finger or the like. That is, the firing operation handle 11 has been contacted until a predetermined time (within a time shorter than the above-mentioned unfired prescribed time). Therefore, in steps D422 and D424, if the firing state flag is the firing stopped flag and the continuous touch state flag is the continuous touch condition satisfaction flag, the above-mentioned first condition is satisfied, and the remaining second condition and If the third condition is satisfied, the table is selected so that the effect contents are changed. The production change condition may be a mode in which success or failure is determined only by the first condition (a mode without the second condition or the third condition), or a mode in which success or failure is determined by the first condition and the second condition. However, it may be a mode in which success or failure is determined by the first condition and the third condition, or a mode in which another condition is further added.

Next, after passing through step D426, steps D427 to D429 are executed.
Steps D427 to D429 are processes for drawing the notice effect of the latter half variation. The latter half of the variation display game of the special figure is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation in a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. This is a variable display in a state where the display is stopped and the variable display is performed only in the specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the variable display game of the special figure is the variable display until the reach action is started.
In step D427, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the launch-related information, model code, special figure type, symbol type, and presentation mode set at that time is set, and the process proceeds to step D428. .
Here, the latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter notice distribution group table, and the data of the address of the latter notice distribution group table is arranged for each variation pattern type. That is, in the latter half notice distribution group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to each variation pattern type.

In step D428, the address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired. Specifically, the address of the latter half notice distribution group table is acquired from the position of the row corresponding to the change pattern type at that time point in the latter half notice distribution group address table set in the immediately preceding step D427.
Next, in Step D429, a preliminary drawing lottery that appears during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed. That is, the notice lottery process (lottery of notice effect by random number) is executed for the latter half change using the latter half notice distribution group table of the address acquired in step D428.
According to the notice lottery process, the distribution result is selected in advance for all the notice distribution types set in the latter half notice distribution group table prepared in step D428, and the effect contents according to the distribution result are selected. Various types of information to be designated are stored in advance in predetermined storage areas.

  According to the processing from step D427 to step D429, the address of the latter half notice distribution group table is selected, and the notice lottery processing of step D429 based on the selected latter notice distribution group table (the notice lottery of the second half change) Processing) is executed. Then, when the latter half notice distribution group address table is selected in step D427, the above-mentioned launch-related information is referred to in the same manner as in the case of the first half change, and the change of the production due to the establishment of the effect change condition described above also applies to the second half change. Will be realized.

Next, after passing through step D429, the process proceeds to step D431.
When the process proceeds to step D431, the basic BGM number (tune number of the basic BGM) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp (LED) etc.) corresponding to the effect mode are set, and then the process proceeds to step D432. The BGM and the decoration that are normally changing are changed for each effect mode. In step D431, defaults for each mode are set first. If it is changed to a special BGM or decoration by a notice or the like, the scenario table is changed.

When the process proceeds to step D432, it is determined whether or not the first-half variation type determined in the processing up to this point (particularly step D426) is normal variation, and if it is normal variation, the process proceeds to step D433. Then, the process proceeds to another process step (not shown) (process of various fluctuations when the first-half fluctuation type is not normal fluctuation).
The first-half variation type is a variation notice type distributed by the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, 12-second first-half normal variation). In order to avoid complication, here, only the manner of notice distribution when the first-half variation type is normal variation is described in the flowchart (FIG. 100). Then, the processing of various fluctuations (including pseudo-coupling etc.) when the first-half fluctuation type is not a normal fluctuation is performed in steps after the flow in which the determination result in step D432 is NO (not shown by dashed lines in FIG. 100). It is executed, but after the processing after this flow is executed, the processing advances to step D437.

When the process proceeds to step D433, it is determined whether the notice type (data in the effect distribution result area; notice data) determined by the processing up to this point (particularly steps D426, D429, and so on) specifies the reach start effect. , If it is not the reach start effect, the process proceeds to a process (not shown by a wavy line in FIG. 100) when another notice effect is selected, and then proceeds to step D437. If it is the reach start effect, the reach start is performed at step D434. After performing the effect setting process (described later), the process proceeds to step D437.
Note that the reach start effect is an effect including a display as shown in, for example, FIGS. 145 and 146 (described later) as a specific screen display example (not only the display but also the sound output for the effect, etc. It may be included). This effect may be executed as a special notice effect (for example, an appearance rate is low or an appearance rate is zero in the normal state) performed when the effect change condition described above is satisfied, or the effect change condition described above is used. The mode may be selected and executed independently.

When the process proceeds to step D437, it is determined whether or not the special drawing type is the special drawing 2, and if the special drawing is 2, the steps D438 and D439 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D442. In the case), after executing steps D440 and D441, the process proceeds to step D442.
In step D438, the special figure 2 reservation scenario table information corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations is set.
In step D439, the fourth symbol (special figure 2 variation) scenario table information is set.
In step D440, the special figure 1 pending scenario table information corresponding to the number of special figure 1 pending is set.
In step D441, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 variation) scenario table information is set.
In these steps D438, D439 or D440, D441, scenario control data relating to an animation whose holding (special figure starting memory) is reduced is set.

Next, in step D442, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half variation pattern data) separated in step D171 commands a normal fluctuation, and if it commands a normal fluctuation, the procedure advances to step D443. If it is not a command for normal fluctuation, the process proceeds to other steps omitted in broken lines in FIG.
In addition, after the flow in which the determination result of step D442 is NO (a part not shown by a wavy line), the same processing as that of steps D443, D444, etc. is executed for the variable display effect when the data of the MODE is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and the process returns.

When the process proceeds to step D443, the notice type (data of the effect distribution result area; notice data) determined in the processing so far is to specify SD1 which is one of the effects performed in the SD (super deformed) mode. If it is not SD1, the process proceeds to step D445, and if it is SD1, the SD1 variation setting process is executed at step D444 and then the process returns.
In addition, the SD1 is output for not only the display but also the display including the display as shown in, for example, FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) (described later) as a specific screen display example. May be included)) is performed. This effect may be executed as a special notice effect (for example, an appearance rate is low or an appearance rate is zero in the normal state) performed when the effect change condition described above is satisfied, or the effect change condition described above is used. The mode may be selected and executed independently.
When the process proceeds to step D445, it is determined whether the ACT data (second half variation pattern) separated in step D171 commands the "deviation", and if "deviation", the deviation setting process is executed in step D446 and the process returns. , If it is not “out”, the process proceeds to other steps omitted from the dotted lines in FIG. The outlier setting process is a process including a scenario data setting process for performing a second half variation effect of “outward”. Although there are actually a plurality of types of "off" (such as "normal-1 out" and "normal + 1 out"), detailed description is omitted here.
In addition, after the flow in which the determination result of step D445 is NO (a part not shown in the figure by a wavy line), steps D445 and D446 are performed for other reach effects in the case of normal fluctuation (for example, fluctuation display effects in the case of a big hit). The same processing is executed, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and the process returns.

[Reach start performance setting process]
Next, the reach start effect setting process executed in step D434 of the variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, steps S451 to S459 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
First, in step D451, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared, in step D452, a scenario table for the left symbol reach start effect (for example, that shown in the upper part of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D453, scenario data setting processing is performed on the prepared scenario table. After that, the process proceeds to step D454.
Next, in step D454, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared, in step D455, the scenario table for the right symbol reach start effect (for example, the one shown in the middle of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D456, the scenario data setting process for the prepared scenario table is performed. Is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D457.
Next, in step D457, the scenario layer number 4 is prepared, in step D458, the scenario table for the starting production of the Torataro reach (for example, that shown in the lower part of FIG. 148) is prepared, and in step D459, the scenario data setting process for the prepared scenario table is performed. And then return.

As described above, the scenario data setting process is going to be executed in the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number. This is processing for setting scenario control data for production.
In steps D451 to D459, scenario control data for executing the reach start effect is set.
In addition, the fact that the "tiger taro reach start production scenario table" is prepared and set in step D458 does not mean that the character appearing in this reach start production is limited to "tiger taro". The “scenario table for the start of production of the Tiger Taro reach” is merely a name given to the scenario table for convenience of explanation in the present specification.
Further, in this example, the scenario layers of scenario layer numbers 1, 2, and 4 are used for the reach start effect as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the scenario table for the starting production of the Torarou reach may be set in the scenario layer of scenario layer number 5.

[SD1 fluctuation setting process]
Next, the SD1 variation setting process executed in step D444 of the variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, steps D461 to D477 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D461, for example, a stop symbol setting process (details omitted) of setting a stop symbol of the decorative special figure based on the symbol type saved in step D372 and storing it in the stop symbol area is executed.
The stop symbol area exists for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and is used in the symbol stop process described later. Further, the variation of SD1 of the present embodiment may be a big hit, and in the step D461, a deviating symbol or a big hit symbol is set based on the symbol type saved in the step D372.

In Step D462, the address of the scenario table of SD1 (the name of the scenario table) corresponding to the ACT and the first half variation type is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM 311a (or RAM 326) of the production control device 300 for temporarily storing the address of the scenario table of the symbol variation to be used from now on, for the left symbol area and the right symbol. The area is divided into a medium symbol area, and each symbol area is further divided into 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half), and a total of 9 areas for storing one scenario table address. There are (= 3 × 3) pieces. On the other hand, in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, a table for selecting a scenario table for pattern change according to the command received from the game control device and the first half change type (or further the effect mode or the notice type) (hereinafter , A symbol variation list table) is registered for each command (for each ACT data). In the step D462, for example, first, the symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is selected, and then the setting pattern corresponding to the first half variation type or the like is selected from a plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table. Then, the address of the scenario table of the selected setting pattern is saved in the pattern variation scenario table area. In the above step D462, a combination of scenario tables for performing the variation effect of SD1 in the SD mode is selected and saved. However, naturally, different combinations (at least 3rd (second half (A different combination of scenario tables for) is selected and saved.
Here, the symbol fluctuation list table, for each set pattern, for each symbol of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, of each scenario table for 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (latter half) This is a table in which addresses are registered.

  In the present application, the period in which the symbols start to move within the first-half variation time is defined as "early stage" (1st), and the remaining period within the first-half variation time is defined as "first half" (2nd). The pattern starts to move even during the same first-half fluctuation time, but there are cases where it scrolls down as it is or when it hops up once (a type of notice). It is configured as. Then, the latter half fluctuation time is set to the “second half” (3rd). Further, in this embodiment, in this way, the effect contents at the time of special figure change are set respectively for each period obtained by temporally dividing the effect, and the entire effect at the time of special figure change is set as a combination of the effect contents of each period. It is a combination type. This has the advantage of reducing the total amount of data that must be stored in the non-volatile memory for storing control data (PROM 321 in this example). That is, for example, if all the tables are prepared for each effect content whose movement is slightly different, the amount of data becomes enormous, but this combination type solves such a problem.

In step D463, the scenario layer number 0 is prepared.
In step D464, the address of the background scenario table for SD1 corresponding to the ACT or the like is prepared.
In step D465, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D463 and D464.
In step D466, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In Step D467, the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) region in the left symbol region described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table region described above.
In step D468, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D466 and D467.

In step D469, scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D470, the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) region in the right symbol region described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table region described above.
In step D471, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D469 and D470.
In step D472, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In Step D473, the medium symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) region in the medium symbol region described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table region described above.
In step D474, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D472 and D473.

In step D475, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D476, the address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared.
In step D477, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D475 and D476.
According to the above-described routine (SD1 variation setting process), the scenario layers (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, 7) for which scenario control data needs to be set when SD1 variation production is performed are performed. As the scenario table, for example, the combinations shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 described later (the scenario table for controlling the fourth symbol is omitted) are selected.

[Scenario setting processing]
Next, details of the scenario setting process executed in step D28 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D551 to D566 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.
In step D551, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared, and in the next step D552, scenario analysis processing (described later) is executed based on the preparation of step D551. . Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Similarly, in step D553, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared, and the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D554 based on this preparation.
In step D555, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D556.
At step D557, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed at next step D558.
At step D559, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed at the next step D560.
In step D561, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D562.
In step D563, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D564.
In step D565, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D566.

  In this example, there are eight scenario layers and the scenario layer numbers 0 to 7 as described above. And, of these eight scenario layers, basically, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for left design, scenario layer 2 is for right design, scenario layer 3 is middle design The scenario layer 4 is for the notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is for the notice 2, the scenario layer 6 is for the hold, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

  However, it is not limited to this mode. For example, in the present embodiment, the flowchart has eight scenario layers, but the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the number of layers used for the background and advance notice increases and decreases depending on the model specifications, and this embodiment will be described with the number limited to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the above embodiment, and various allocations can be made. For example, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for left design, scenario layer 3 is for right design, scenario layer 4 is for middle design. Yes, the scenario layer 5 is for holding, the scenario layer 6 is for other notice, and the scenario layer 7 may be for the fourth symbol.

Further, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer as described above, and when there is something to control, the corresponding scenario management area X (X = 0 to 7) If the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D283 and D287 described above). . For example, since the hold display is not performed during the movie waiting for customers, the address (the address of the scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (the scenario management area 0 address area), but the hold area is set. NULL is set in (the address area of the scenario management area 6).
Further, the allocation of the control target of the scenario layer is basically basic, and for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the pattern (decorative special drawing) may be controlled by the scenario layer 0 for the background.

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis processing executed in step D552 and the like in the above-described scenario setting processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105.
When this routine is started, first, in step D571, the value of brk (data used for repeating the processing described below) is set to 0, and then in step D572, the prepared address area of the scenario management area X is set. After loading the set data (data of the address of the scenario management area X or NULL), the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the "address area of the prepared scenario management area X" means, for example, when this routine is executed in the above-mentioned step D552, the address area (scenario (The address area of the management area 0), and when this routine is executed in the above-mentioned step D554, it is the address area prepared in the step D553 immediately before that (the address area of the scenario management area 1), and the like. The case is also prepared in the previous step.

When the process proceeds to Step D573, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in Step D572 is NULL. If the data is NULL, control is not necessary and the process returns. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to Step D574.
When the process proceeds to step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572 is read, and it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is smaller than 0. If it is 0 or more, step D575 is executed and the process proceeds to step D576. The value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in step D284 each time the scenario control data is set. However, since 0 is the lower limit, it is determined to be abnormal if it is smaller than 0. In step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, update is performed by reducing the scenario timer value by 1.
In step D576, it is determined whether or not the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the time has not yet expired and the process returns. If it is less than 0, the process proceeds to step D577.

  According to these steps D574 to D576, timer management for wait is performed. That is, for the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, "the operation of delaying the progress of control of the scenario table" means weighting the progress of the scenario table (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table. Continue producing at that time). . For example, in the 20th line (// 19) of FIG. 136, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (300), the line stays in this line for the time corresponding to 300 frames, and after the time elapses, the next time The operation progresses to the line, but this operation corresponds to the “operation for delaying the control progress of the scenario table”. In the scenario table, between the line in which a code between the wait time value and the wait time value (a line in which a constant wait code or the like (including the PB wait code) is set and a line in which a constant wait code or the like is set next) All the opcodes in the line) are executed at the same time. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed up. Therefore, in order to proceed the control processing of the target scenario table, step D576 and step D577 are executed. It is configured to proceed to. However, the control processing of the target scenario table (after step D584) is executed after the processing of timer management for the PB valid time described later.

That is, in step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is read to determine whether the value of this PB timer is greater than 0. , If it is greater than 0, it means that the time has not yet expired, so the routine proceeds to step D578, and if it is less than 0, it means that the timer has expired, so that the routine proceeds to step D583.
When the process proceeds to step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set, the process proceeds to step D579. If the PB operation flag is not set, the target PB timer is set at step D582. After updating the value of is decreased by 1, the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when the pressing operation of PB (push button 9) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 of the above-described main process.

When the process proceeds to Step D579, the value of the target PB timer at this time (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time at the time when the PB is pressed) is stored as the PB effect addition time, and then the target PB is added at Step D580. The value of the timer for use is set to 0, and then in step D581, a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set) is set. In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB is pressed, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB is operated. The PB detection flag indicating that it has been set is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
Then, in step D583, it is determined whether or not the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, the PB operation is not detected and the time has not yet expired. Since the PB operation has been performed or the time has expired, the routine proceeds to step D584.

According to steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when a PB timer value greater than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), the PB timer value corresponds to this value. The operation for delaying the control progress of the target scenario table (scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) to set the PB valid time is realized by the time. Here, "the operation of setting the PB valid time by delaying the progress of the control of the scenario table" means that the value of the target PB timer becomes 0 (that is, the PB timer expires) or the PB is pressed. Until that is done, it means that the progress of the scenario table is weighted (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table. Continue producing at that time). For example, in the 28th line (// 27) of FIG. 136, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (30), the line stays in this line for the time corresponding to 30 frames, and after this time elapses, the next Although the operation proceeds to the 29th line, the operation according to the 28th line is the "operation for delaying the control progress of the scenario table" by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, in the next 29th line (// 28), since the PB wait code is set and the valid time value is (2970), this valid time value (2970) is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB pressing operation, the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames stays in this line, and if there is a PB pressing operation within this effective time, it immediately advances to the next line. In this way, the timer for PB is set. The operation of waiting for the pressing operation of the PB for the effective time (PB effective time) to be performed corresponds to the “operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table and providing the PB effective time”. Then, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D582 without any PB operation, and the PB timer times out, or the PB valid time until the PB timer times out. If PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581. In this case, the determination result of step D583 becomes NO (PB timer is 0) and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, when the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control immediately proceeds ( In this case, the PB valid time is 0 (none)). Since the PB valid time is provided in the case of a notice effect, etc., in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and the PB valid time is not provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, control processing of the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
When the process proceeds to step D584, the process from step D584 to step D623, which is the loop end, is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, in step D623, which is the rear loop end, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and repeats the processing from the next step D585.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D584, first, steps D585 to D588 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D589.
In step D585, the scenario table address is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area. For example, in the case of the scenario layer number 0 during the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is loaded in this step D585.
In step D586, the operation code of the specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired. As described above, in the scenario table, as shown in, for example, FIG. 136, FIG. 137, etc., operation code and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the "motion continuation code" which is the data of the operation code of the first line of the scenario layer 0 in the uppermost row is used. Is acquired in step D586. Further, in the case of FIG. 136, if the designated line is the first line, for example, the “motion 1 deletion code” (specific data, for example, “51h”) that is the data of the operation code of the first line is determined in step D586. To be acquired. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 136, for example, when the designated line is the 16th line, the “motion 10 registration code” (specific data, for example, “4Ah”) which is the data of the operation code of the 16th line is acquired in step D586. To be done.

In step D587, the operation code obtained in the immediately preceding step D586 is separated into upper bits and lower bits to be prepared. For example, when the operation code data is the above-mentioned "51h", the upper bit "5" and the lower bit "1" are separately prepared. The upper bit and the lower bit of the operation code have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, in "51h" which is the "motion 1 deletion code", the upper bit "5" means the motion deletion, and the lower bit "1" is the target (in this case, the motion deletion target) motion. It means that the layer of is motion 1.
In step D588, the operand of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired and prepared. For example, in the case of FIG. 137, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the data of the operand of the first line of the scenario layer 0 at the top is “motion index No. . (51) ”is acquired and prepared in step D588. Further, in the case of FIG. 136, if the designated line is the 16th line (opcode is "motion 10 registration code"), the "motion index No. (-1)" which is the data of the operand of the 16th line is determined in step D588. Get and prepare.

When the process proceeds to step D589, the prepared opcode upper data (data separated and prepared in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if the data is the data (motion registration code) for instructing motion registration, the motion registration process (step D601) ( After executing (described later), the process proceeds to step D621, and if the data is not the data for instructing motion registration, the process proceeds to step D590.
When the procedure proceeds to Step D590, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data (motion deletion code) for instructing to delete the motion, the motion deleting process (described later) is executed at Step D602, and then the procedure goes to Step D621 to delete the motion. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D591.

When the operation proceeds to step D591, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data (motion continuation code) for instructing the motion continuation, the motion continuation process (described later) is executed at step D603 and then the operation proceeds to step D621 to continue the motion. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D592.
When the process proceeds to step D592, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for commanding the constant weight (constant weight code), the constant weight process (described later) is executed at step D604, and then the process proceeds to step D621 and the constant weight is determined. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D593.

In step D593, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is data (variable weight code) for instructing variable weight, variable weight processing (described later) is executed in step D605, and then step D621 is performed to set variable weight. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D594.
When the process proceeds to step D594, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing PB wait (PB wait code), the PB wait process (described later) is executed at step D606 and then the process proceeds to step D621 to wait for the PB wait. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D595.

When the operation proceeds to Step D595, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the PB determination branch (PB determination branch code), the PB determination branch processing (described later) is executed at Step D607, and then the processing proceeds to Step D621. , PB determination branch is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D596.
When the process proceeds to step D596, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data (stop symbol set code) for instructing the symbol stop, the symbol stop process is executed in step D608 and then the process proceeds to step D621 to instruct the symbol stop. If it is not data, the flow proceeds to step D597.

When the process proceeds to Step D597, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and it is the data for instructing the symbol reverse calculation replacement (symbol reverse calculation replacement code), and the step after performing the symbol reverse calculation replacement process (described later) in Step D609. The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not the data for instructing the symbol back calculation replacement, the process proceeds to step D598.
When the process proceeds to step D598, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data (fluctuation scenario switching code) for instructing the variation scenario switching, the variation scenario switching process is executed at step D610, and then the process proceeds to step D621, where the variation scenario switching is performed. If it is not the data for instructing, the process proceeds to step D599.

When the operation proceeds to Step D599, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data (repetition code) for instructing the repetition, the iterative process is executed at Step D611, and then the operation proceeds to Step D621. Proceed to Step D600.
When the operation proceeds to step D600, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data (end code) for instructing the end, the end processing is executed at step D612, and then the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to other steps not shown. Note that other steps (not shown) (steps indicated by the broken line in FIG. 105) determine the contents of the prepared opcode upper data, and the determination result is the same as in steps D589 to D612 described above. The processing corresponding to the case of the type of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step D621. When the prepared operation code upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), it is returned. Has become.

Next, proceeding to step D621, the data set at this point is read in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, and it is judged whether this data is NULL. If it is NULL, then in step D622 brk Value is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step D623. If it is not NULL, step D622 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D623.
Then, in step D623, as described above, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585, and if the value of brk is not 0. This routine ends and returns.

Therefore, in any of the processes of steps D601 to D612, the value of brk is set to a value other than 0, or NULL is set to the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing in which steps D584 and D623 are the loop ends is ended and the process returns. Until the loop processing is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address that specifies the scenario table and its row) is changed as appropriate, and the above loop processing is repeated. The effect control is executed.
Note that the above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and may vary depending on the specifications of the model.

Here, the motion index will be described.
The motion index identifies the motion control table (motion table). For example, the “motion index No. (51)”, which is the data of the operand in the first row of the scenario table of the uppermost scenario layer 0 in FIG. , The motion index data is “51”. The data of this motion index specifies a specific row of the motion list table as shown in FIG. 135, for example, thereby specifying the motion control table (motion table).

Note that FIG. 135 is an example of a motion list table stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device. The motion list table is a data list of a motion table in which data regarding a large number of motion tables is arranged in each row (each record). The data in each row of the motion list table table is data related to one motion table. In each row of the motion list table, there are the number of frames, the number of motion commands, the motion table name, the number of behaviors, and the behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
The number of frames (the number of display frames) indicates how many frames of motion data (data forming the motion table) is defined in the motion table.
-The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
-The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
-The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table that defines the behavior (processing address) at the time of motion control.
If the number of behaviors is 0, naturally the behavior table is unnecessary.

Here, the behavior is a function of setting the operation of the object (display element). In this example, the basic image data (character data) mainly defined on the motion table is used for changing according to the situation.
Also, on the right side of the motion list table in FIG. 135, the display content corresponding to the value of the motion index is shown. For example, the value of the motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (special figure 2 variation) is 62. Further, the value of the motion index for specifying the motion control table for the fourth symbol (variation of special figure 1) is 61.

[Motion registration processing]
Next, details of the motion registration processing executed in step D601 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D631 and D632 are sequentially executed first, and then the process proceeds to step D633.
In step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address that specifies the next row in the table). This is an update process for advancing the specified line to the next line when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time. By performing this update process, the specified line of the target scenario table is changed to the next line. Then, the above loop processing (steps D584 to D623) is repeated.

  In step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code separated in step D587 to prepare for it. In the case of the present example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is provided with a storage area for motion management, which is an "address area of the motion management area" and a "motion management area". Of these, the motion management area, the display number is the number of objects (maximum number) that display control (not necessarily displayed on the screen) (for example, in the case of the left symbol, next symbol, current symbol, previous symbol) Area (the number of display areas), the area that stores the frame number that indicates how many frames the processing has progressed (the frame number area), and how many lines of the motion table the processing has progressed. Area for storing the command position (command position area) and area for storing the address data (corresponding to the motion index) indicating which table is used among the multiple motion list tables (motion list) (Table area) and display information areas for the number of displays.

Also, the motion management areas of the same structure exist corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, there are motions 0 to 13), and there are 14 motion layers in this example. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Further, in this example, there are 14 address areas (motion 0 address to motion 13 address) corresponding to this motion management area. Here, since the address area of the motion management area is an area for storing the address of the motion management area, it is provided for each motion management area (that is, for each motion layer), and there are 14 in this example.
Then, in step D632, in order to specify one of the plurality of motion management areas as described above, the motion management area corresponding to the layer number of the motion designated by the data of the operation code lower bit (hereinafter referred to as corresponding motion management area). The head address of the area) is read from the corresponding address area of the motion management area and prepared. In this application, the layer number of the motion (0 to 13 in this example) is abbreviated as the motion number, or is used as a motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). There are cases.

  There are a plurality of display information areas in the motion management area for the number of displays (the number of objects), and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of a display upper left point, and a display upper left point. Y coordinate of, display upper right point X coordinate, display upper right point Y coordinate, display lower left point X coordinate, display lower left point Y coordinate, image index, background color, foreground color, IPicture (I picture) only video It includes an area for storing each data of time frame count and behavior index.

  Here, the display type is the type of the object (information indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image (movie), and information indicating the type of movie (whether it is an I picture or the like)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing such as imparting transparency) added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency in the case of having transparency). The X-coordinate and the Y-coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron) has three points of the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point. There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or a movie. The frame count for a moving image with only IPicture is data indicating which frame of data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). It should be noted that the behavior (replacement of symbols) replaces only the character (still image or moving image) at the same size and the same display position, and is different from the cut-in character replacement in which the characters and the like appearing in the effect display are replaced. In the cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of the character displayed can also be changed. Note that the cut-in character replacement process is performed, for example, in a subroutine (advance notice effect setting process 1) that is called and executed in the above-described variation effect setting process, but this subroutine is omitted from the drawings and description thereof is also omitted. .

Next, proceeding to step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded at step D632 is NULL. If it is NULL, the procedure proceeds to step D635. If it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 (described later) is performed at step D634. After executing, proceed to Step D635.
In step D635, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code separated in step D587 is set and prepared, and the flow advances to step D636.
In step D636, the head address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code, and the flow advances to step D637.

  In any of these steps D632 to D636, finally, in step D636, the start address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code separated in step D587 is set to the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, when the data of the address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, the motion data initialization processing 1 (for setting the opening of the expansion area used for moving image expansion, etc. This will be executed in step D634 because it will be necessary).

Next, proceeding to step D637, it is determined whether or not the operand data prepared in step D588 is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, steps D638 to D640 are sequentially executed and then returning, and if it is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). For example, steps D641 to D643 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D638, the operand data (operand data prepared in step D588, and so on) is prepared as a motion index.
In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set in the area for storing the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower operation code (hereinafter referred to as the in-use motion index area). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing, for each motion number, data of a motion index (in-use motion index) that specifies a row to be controlled in the motion list table, and is provided for each motion number. There is. In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, saved) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bit of the operation code separated in step D587.
In step D640, a motion data initialization process 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

On the other hand, in step D641, the data of the motion index corresponding to the lower operation code is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared. Note that the motion index area includes, for example, a storage area (SU1 cut-in area, SU2 cut-in area, SU3 cut-in area) in which the motion index data is saved in the advance notice effect setting process 1 (not shown). . In this step D641, among the plurality of motion index areas in the RAM as described above, the motion index specified by the lower bit of the operation code separated in step D587 and the current state of the game machine (whether or not the probability is changing). Prepare the motion index data by extracting it from the area.
Next, in step D642, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower operation code.
Then, in step D643, a motion data initialization process 2 (described later) for initializing the data such as the display number is executed.

  Among the steps D637 to D643 described above, the determination result of step D637 is YES (operand is 0 or more) and the route to execute steps D638 to D640 is NO, and the determination result of step D637 is NO (operand is less than 0). Therefore, it differs from the route for executing steps D6412 to D643 as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the value (fixed value) of the motion index set in the scenario table stored in ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in RAM. This route uses the motion index value (not a fixed value) for control. When you want to change the motion index to be used according to the state of the gaming machine (whether it is during probability change, etc.), a negative value (eg "-1") is set as the value of the operand and the latter route is executed. It is configured to be.

[Motion data initialization processing 1]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 1 executed in step D634 (or step D674 described later) in the above-described motion registration process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and frame numbers stored in the motion management area.
When this routine is started, first, step D651 to step D655 are repeatedly executed until the final value (final value = display number-1) is increased while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by the increment 1, and then to step D656. move on. That is, in step D651, the variable i is set to 0 immediately after the start of the routine, and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, returning to step D651, the value of the variable i is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step D652. The value of the closing price is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as the target motion management area) corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code separated in step D587. . That is, in this routine, the loop processing of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for this number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step D656.

In step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set, and then step D653 is executed. In this step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the display information areas existing in the number corresponding to the number of displays is set in the target motion management area.
In step D653, the display type data in the display information area in which the address is set in the immediately preceding step D652 is read to determine whether this display type is a moving image. If the display type is a moving image, the expansion area (area used for expanding the compressed moving image data) is set to be released in step D654, and then the process proceeds to step D655. If it is not a moving image, step D654 is executed. Otherwise, it proceeds to step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656.

  Next, when proceeding to step D656, a process of initializing the parameter of the target motion management area is performed at steps D656 to D658, and then the process returns. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D656, the frame number is set to -1 in step D657, and the command position is set to 0 in step D658.

[Motion data initialization processing 2]
Next, details of the motion data initialization processing 2 executed in steps D640 and D643 (or step D689 and the like described later) in the above-described motion registration processing will be described with reference to the right side of FIG. 107.
When this routine is started, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is first performed in steps D661 to D663, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D661, the frame number is set to -1 in step D662, and the command position is set to 0 in step D663.
At step D664, the address (motion list table and its row) corresponding to the motion index in use (for example, the data set at step D639 or D642) is specified in the motion list table area in the target motion management area. Address) and then return.

[Motion deletion processing]
Next, details of the motion deletion process executed in step D602 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D671 and D672 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D673.
In step D671, similar to step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address that specifies the next row of the table).
In step D672, similarly to step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the target motion management area address area to be prepared, and the flow advances to step D673.

Next, when proceeding to step D673, it is judged whether the address of the motion management area loaded at step D672 is NULL. If it is NULL, the procedure proceeds to step D675. After that, the process advances to step D675.
In step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the flow advances to step D676.
In step D676, the in-use motion index data corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, and so on) is cleared, and then the process returns.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is ended, and thereby the motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area or data in the motion index area in use) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, details of the motion continuation processing executed in step D603 in the scenario analysis processing described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D681 and D682 are sequentially executed first, and then the process proceeds to step D683.
In step D681, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address that specifies the next row of the table).
In step D682, the data of the motion index in use corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code is loaded.

When the processing proceeds to step D683, it is determined whether the data of the motion index in use loaded in step D682 matches the operand acquired in step D588. If they match, the processing returns, and if they do not match, the processing from step D684 is executed. To do. Here, it is determined whether the motion currently being controlled and the motion specified in the scenario table are the same, and if they are the same, the motion currently being controlled should be continued as is, so return without processing anything, If they are not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed to register a new motion.
Then, in step D684 and thereafter, the same processing as the above-described motion registration processing (route using the values in the scenario table) is performed.
That is, in step D684, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the target motion management area to prepare for it, and the flow advances to step D685.

Next, proceeding to step D685, it is determined whether or not the address of the motion management area loaded at step D684 is NULL. If it is NULL, the procedure proceeds to step D687. If it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed at step D686. After that, the process advances to step D687.
When the procedure advances to Step D687, the head address of the target motion management area is set and prepared, and the procedure advances to Step D688.
In step D688, the head address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the flow advances to step D689.
In step D689, the motion data initialization process (motion data initialization process 2 described above) is executed.
In step D690, the data of the operand is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code, and then the process returns.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently controlled, the process continues as it is, and if it is different, a process for newly registering is executed. As a result, for example, if the background that is normally changing is a reach or the like and the background does not change, the movie continues over a plurality of changes, but if a reach occurs, new playback starts from the head.

[Constant wait processing]
Next, details of the constant wait process executed in step D604 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D691, the same updating process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, at step D692, the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in Step D693, the value of brk is set to 1, and the routine returns.
According to this routine, a time value or the like when waiting for the designated fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 20th line (// 19) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136, this routine is executed because the operation code is a constant wait code, and the wait time of the operand is (300). Therefore, in step D692 above. 300 (10 seconds = 300 × 1/30) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Then, since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above ends.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, details of the variable wait processing executed in step D605 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D695, the same update processing as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time (the value set in step D579) to the data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in Step D697, the value of brk is set to 1, and the routine returns.

  In this routine, a time value or the like for waiting for a variable time when the effect time is changed by the button operation (PB operation) by the player is set. As a result, the earlier the button is pressed after the button is instructed, the longer the effect to be performed thereafter, and the operation in which the effect is performed only for a short time when it is pressed at the end of the effective time is realized. For example, in the case of the 11th line (// 10) in the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, this routine is executed because the operation code is a variable wait code, and the effective time value of the operand is (55), the above steps are executed. In D696, 55 + PB effect addition time is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes a larger value as the player performs the PB operation earlier after the effect for prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see the step D579). Therefore, the faster the PB operation is performed by the player, the longer the effect to be performed thereafter.

[PB wait processing]
Next, details of the PB waiting process executed in step D606 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D701, the same updating process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D702, the data of the operand is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D703, the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is cleared.
Next, in step D704, the value of brk is set to 1, and the process returns.

  In this routine, the setting for starting the push button effect is performed. For example, in the case of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, first, the motion deletion process of the motion 9 is executed in the first line (// 0), and then the motion registration process of the motion 8 in the second line (// 1) (see FIG. After the motion index "70" corresponding to the motion table "MDat0070" of the push button ON / OFF effect shown in 135) is executed, the operation code of the next third line (// 2) is the PB wait code. Therefore, this routine is executed, and since the valid time value of the operand is (90), 90 is set as the value of the timer area in step D702, and the push button effect for 3 seconds (= 90 × 1/30) is started. To be done. In step D703, in order to start the push button effect, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) has been operated is initially set to OFF (state where the flag is not set).

[PB determination branch processing]
Next, details of the PB determination branch processing executed in step D607 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D711, it is determined whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set), and if it is set. If it is not set (if the PB detection flag is off), the process proceeds to step D712.
When the process proceeds to step D712, the same update process as in step D631 is executed and the process returns.
Upon proceeding to step D713, the same updating process as that at step D631 is executed and then proceeding to step D714.
When the process proceeds to step D714, it is determined whether the address update process of step D713 has been completed by the amount of the operand data prepared in step D588. If completed, the process returns, and if not completed, the process returns to step D713 to perform the process. repeat.

  This routine is executed when the PB timer that counts the valid time without pressing the push button in the above-mentioned push button effect times out, or when the PB is pushed within the valid time and the timer is forced to 0. It is a process that is performed. Then, when the time is up without pressing PB, the process proceeds to step D712 via step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table advances to the next line and returns. If PB is pressed within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 via step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table jumps by the amount designated by the operand.

  For example, in the case of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142, when the control up to the third line is finished as described above, this routine is executed because the operation code on the next fourth line (// 3) is the PB determination branch code. Since the number of skipped tables in the operand is (3), if PB is pushed within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result of step D714 becomes NO until step D713 is executed three times. As a result, the next designated line in the scenario table jumps to the seventh line (// 6). Then, when the player jumps to the 7th line, the effects of the 7th and subsequent lines (in the case of the upper side of FIG. 142, the effect of the character of the military commander appearing on the display screen as motion 8 and outputting the voice of the dialogue) are started. On the other hand, even when this routine is executed as described above, if PB is not pushed within the effective time, step D712 is executed once and the process returns (this routine ends). The designated line on the upper side becomes the next 5th line (// 4), the motion deletion process of the motion 8 is executed by this 5th line, and the end process described later is executed by the 6th line, and the above-mentioned push is executed. The button production simply ends (the warlord character does not appear).

[Symbol stop processing]
Next, the details of the symbol stop processing executed in step D608 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D721, the same updating process as in step D631 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D722.
When the process proceeds to step D722, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code specifies the left symbol, and if the symbol is the left symbol, the process returns after executing step D727, and if it is not the left symbol, the process proceeds to step D723. In step D727, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (left).
When the process proceeds to step D723, it is determined whether or not the data of the lower bit of the operation code specifies the right symbol, and if it is the right symbol, the process returns after executing step D728, and if it is not the right symbol, the process proceeds to step D724. In step D728, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (right).

When the process proceeds to step D724, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code specifies a middle symbol, and if it is a medium symbol, step D729 is executed and then the process proceeds to step D729a. If not, the process proceeds to step D725. In step D729, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (middle) (for example, the value set in step D461 described above) is set as the current symbol (middle).
When the process proceeds to step D729a, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect is being executed. If it is being executed, the process proceeds to step D729b, and if it is not being executed, the process returns. Whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed is determined by determining that the pre-reading effect is being executed if the pre-reading effect executing flag is set.
When the process proceeds to step D729b, it is determined whether or not the number of prefetch effects is zero, and if it is zero, the prefetch effect is completed, so the process returns after clearing the prefetch effect in-execution flag in step D729c. If it is not zero, the prefetch effect is still continued. Return without executing D729c.

Note that the number of pre-reading effects refers to the number of pre-reading executions, and when the pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice) is performed in the pre-reading lottery process (not shown) that is a subroutine executed in the pre-reading variable command processing of step D186 described above. Is set to -1 and is updated by -1 at the start of special figure fluctuation at step D407.
The pre-reading effect execution flag is a flag set when the pre-reading effect (pre-reading notice) is performed in the pre-reading lottery process (not shown). In the case of this example, the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped in the order of left → right → middle, so the prefetch effect execution flag is cleared at such a place (that is, a place at the timing of stopping the middle symbol on the flowchart). Processing (steps D729a to D729c described above) is included. That is, in the state where the pre-reading effect is being set with the pre-reading effect executing flag being set, when the pre-reading effect count becomes zero, the pre-reading effect executing flag is cleared at the timing when the middle symbol is stopped. In the case of a model in which the stop order of the special figure variation is different, similarly, the process of clearing at the timing when the last stopped symbol is stopped may be performed.
Although omitted, processing such as checking for the end of the number of times of fluctuations with high speed and high probability is also in the same portion on the flowchart (the portion that is executed when the determination result in step D724 is YES).

  When the process proceeds to step D725, it is determined whether the data of the lower bit of the operation code specifies the special figure 1 fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1), and if the special figure 1 fourth symbol executes step D730. After that, the process returns, and if it is not the special symbol 1 fourth symbol, the process proceeds to step D726. In step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 1 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 1 4th symbol).

When the process proceeds to step D726, it is determined whether the data of the lower bit of the operation code specifies the special figure 2 fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the special symbol 2), and if the special symbol 2 fourth symbol symbol, the step D731 is performed. After execution, it returns, and if it is not the special symbol 2 fourth symbol symbol, it returns. In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 2 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 2 4th symbol).
This routine is a process at the time of stopping the variable display of symbols such as decorative special maps, and steps D727, D728, D729, D730, and D731 are processes for setting the symbols to be stopped. For example, when the sixth line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated line, the operation code is the stop symbol set code (left symbol), so this routine is executed and the determination result of step D722 is YES. The step D727 is executed to set the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special figure.

[Design reverse calculation replacement process]
Next, the details of the symbol reverse calculation replacement process executed in step D609 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 112.
When this routine is started, first in step D741, the same updating process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in Step D742, it is determined whether or not the lower bit data of the operation code specifies the left symbol. If the symbol is the left symbol, the steps D743 and D744 are executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D745. move on.
In step D743, the remainder (operand mod9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D744, the result of subtracting the frame difference (the value set in step D743) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (negative value), and if less than 0, step D746 is executed and then step D747 is executed to return. If the step D746 is not executed, the process returns after executing the step D747.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D747, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D744, and if negative, the value adjusted in step D746) is set as the current symbol (left).

Next, proceeding to step D748, it is determined whether or not the data of the lower bit of the operation code specifies the right symbol, and if the symbol is the right symbol, steps D749 and D750 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D751. If it is not the right symbol, step Proceed to D754.
In step D749, the remainder (operand mod9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D750, the result of subtracting the frame difference (the value set in step D749) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D751, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set in step D750 is less than 0. If it is less than 0, step D752 is executed and then step D753 is executed to return. If it is not less than 0, step D752 is executed. After executing step D753 without executing it, the process returns.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
At step D753, the value of the symbol number (set at step D750, and if negative, the value adjusted at step D752) is set as the current symbol (right).

Next, proceeding to step D754, it is judged whether or not the data of the lower bit of the operation code designates a medium symbol, and if it is a medium symbol, steps D755 and D756 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D757, otherwise it is a return. To do.
In step D755, the remainder (operand mod9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D756, the result of subtracting the frame difference (the value set in step D755) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (middle) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D757, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set in step D756 is less than 0. If it is less than 0, step D758 is executed and then step D759 is executed to return. If it is not less than 0, step D758 is executed. The process returns after executing step D759 without executing the process.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D759, the value of the symbol number (set in step D756, and if negative, the value corrected in step D758) is set as the current symbol (medium).

The symbol reverse calculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing the symbol with a symbol that is a few frames before the symbol to be stopped (a symbol before the symbol feed number), such as the moment when the slowdown occurs after the high-speed fluctuation ends.
For example, if the third line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated line, the operation code is the left symbol reverse calculation replacement code, so this routine is executed and the determination result in step D742 is YES, and the above Steps D743 to D747 are executed and the current symbol (left) is set. In this case, the operand is data indicating the number of symbol feeds, and in the third line of the MS_LZ100, the operand is the number of feed frames (2), so in the step D743, the remainder of division by 2 ÷ 9 2 Is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in step D744 using the value of the frame difference. For example, if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (= 7-2) is set as the symbol number. Then, if the symbol number set in this step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a rounded value (for example, if -1, 8 = -1 + 9. Is changed to), and then in step D747, the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left).

  The above operation is the same for the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Further, "9" in step D743 and the like represents the number of symbols on each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may be a different value for each reel.

[Variation scenario switching process]
Next, details of the variable scenario switching processing executed in step D610 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D761, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is a left symbol scenario 2nd (a command to switch to a left symbol variable display 2nd (first half)), and a left symbol scenario. If it is 2nd, it returns after sequentially executing steps D762 to 765, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd, proceeds to step D767.
In step D762, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left pattern.

In step D763, the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in step D462, scenario tables for various symbol variations (1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half) scenario tables, The addresses of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol exist respectively) are stored, and in this step D763, the address of the scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol is prepared.
In step D764, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D762 and D763.
In step D765, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, the address area of the scenario management area prepared in step D553 or the like), and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D767, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (which instructs switching of the variable display of the right symbol to 2nd), and if the right symbol scenario 2nd, steps D768 to 771 is sequentially executed and then returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D772.
In step D768, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right pattern.

In Step D769, the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the second symbol for the right symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D770, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D768 and D769.
In step D771, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D772, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is a medium symbol scenario 2nd (which instructs switching of the variable display of the medium symbol to 2nd), and if it is the medium symbol scenario 2nd, steps D773 to After sequentially executing 776, the process returns, and if it is not the middle symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D777.
In step D773, a scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium pattern.

In step D774, the address of the medium symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for the medium symbol 2nd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D775, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D773 and D774.
In step D776, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D777, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is a left symbol scenario 3rd (a command to switch to 3rd (second half) of variable display of the left symbol), and if the left symbol scenario 3rd After sequentially executing steps D778 to 781, the process returns, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D782.
At step D778, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left pattern.

In step D779, the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (3rd (left half) scenario table for the left symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D780, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779.
In step D781, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D782, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (which instructs switching of the variable display of the right symbol to 3rd), and if the right symbol scenario 3rd, steps D783 to After sequentially executing 786, the process returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D787.
In step D783, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right pattern.

In Step D784, the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for 3rd symbol for the right symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D785, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D783 and D784.
In step D786, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D787, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is a medium symbol scenario 3rd (which instructs switching of the variable display of the medium symbol to 3rd), and if it is the medium symbol scenario 3rd, steps D788 to 791 is sequentially executed and then returned, and when it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd, it returns.
In step D788, a scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium pattern.

In Step D789, the address of the medium symbol scenario 3rd table (3rd scenario table for medium symbols) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D790, the above-mentioned scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789.
In step D791, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the variation scenario switching process described above, the scenario is switched in the above-described symbol variation section, that is, the scenario is switched from 1st (early stage) to 2nd (first half) or 2nd (first half) to 3rd (second half). Is done. That is, in the variation display effect of the decorative special map, one variation is usually divided into three sections, "early, first half, second half", and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this routine. For example, when the 9th line (// 8) of the last line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 137 is the designated line, the operation code is the variable scenario switching code, and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd, so this routine Is executed and the determination result in step D761 is YES, steps D762 to D765 are executed, and a new scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol (for example, MS_LZ300 shown in FIG. 137) is controlled. It is set as a scenario table, and the setting for executing this scenario table is made.
Note that the time values of the "early, first half, and second half" divisions differ depending on the type of fluctuation. There are also fluctuations without 3rd (second half) (variations without reach, etc.).

[Repeat processing]
Next, details of the iterative processing executed in step D611 in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG. 114.
When this routine is started, first in step D795, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (the address that specifies the previous row of the scenario table).
Next, in step D796, it is determined whether the table address has been returned to the previous record by executing step D795 by the number of operands acquired in step D588, and if the operands have been returned, return is made, and if the operands have not been returned. To return to step D795, the process is repeated.

  The repeating process described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, when the 52nd line (// 51) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 136 is the designated line, this routine is executed because the operation code is the repeat code and the operand is the return number (22). When the step D795 is executed 22 times, the determination result of the step D796 becomes YES and the present routine is ended. As a result, the designated line of the scenario table is the 22nd line 30th before (// 29). Return to. The 30th line of the scenario table shown in Fig. 136 is a line (operation code is motion 0 registration code, operand is motion index No. (13)) for starting a movie for customer waiting demonstration, and this customer waiting demonstration production is performed. Following the movie, the table structure is such that the design of the customer waiting demonstration production is displayed. Therefore, after that, the movie display and the symbol display as the customer waiting demonstration production are repeated, and the data for one loop (the data from the 30th line to the last line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 136) is prepared. It will be done.

〔End processing〕
Next, details of the ending process executed in step D612 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, in step D798, NULL is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area and the process returns. As a result, the setting of the target scenario management area is lost and the scenario ends.
For example, if the 15th line (// 14) of the last line of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 142 is the designated line, this routine is executed because the operation code is the end code, and the target scenario management area in step D798 is executed. The address area is set to NULL, and the scenario ends. Thus, this routine is executed when the series of scenarios are all completed.

[Motion control processing]
Next, details of the motion control process executed in step D30 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the loop processing of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the end condition of this loop processing (control for all motion management areas 0 to 13) is executed. Is completed), the process returns. That is, at the start of this routine, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0) in step D801, the process proceeds to step D802, and the processes after step D802 are executed. The number of the management area is incremented by 1 (that is, X = X + 1), and it is determined in step D818 whether the above end condition (X = 14) is satisfied. If yes, the process returns, and if not, step D801. Then, the procedure returns to step D802.

Hereinafter, step D802 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, in the case of this example, any of 0 to 13).
In step D802, the initialization flag used in this routine is cleared, in the next step D803, the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X, and then the processing proceeds to step D804.
When the process proceeds to step D804, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D803 is NULL. If it is NULL, control is not required for the motion X (motion layer corresponding to the motion management area X), so the process proceeds to step D817. If not, the process proceeds to step D805.

In step D805, the data in the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, the motion list table to be controlled this time and the data specifying the row) is loaded and prepared based on the address loaded in step D803, It proceeds to step D806.
When the process proceeds to step D806, the display frame number data in the row of the motion list table (hereinafter referred to as the designated row) designated by the data loaded in step D805 is read, and this display frame number (the number of frames for executing a certain motion is read. Is 0 or less, it is abnormal and the process proceeds to step D817. If it is not 0 or less, it is normal and the process proceeds to step D807. If, for example, the first row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated row, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is “1”, so the determination result in step D806 is NO and step D807. Proceed to. If the fourth line in the list table is the designated line, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is "216", so the determination result in step D806 is NO and the process proceeds to step D807. As described above, since the period to be executed differs for each motion, the corresponding display frame number is defined on the motion list table, and the display frame number should be defined for at least one frame. If the definition value of the number of frames on the motion list table is 0 or less, it is abnormal.

  In step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read, and it is determined whether the value of this frame number is less than 0. If it is less than 0, it means that the motion is newly registered (when the motion is registered). After executing step D808 (setting of initialization flag), the process proceeds to step D809, and if it is not less than 0, it is not at the time of motion registration and the process proceeds to step D809 without executing step D808. The frame number is set to "-1" at steps D657 and D662 in the motion data initialization processing 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration. Therefore, at the time of motion registration, the initialization flag is set at step D808. It The initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and determined in step D812 described below.

In step D809, it is determined whether the value of the frame number in the motion management area X has reached the final frame number (that is, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display frame number described above) or more, and if it is less than the final frame number, step D812. If it is equal to or more than the final frame number, steps D810 and D811 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D812.
In step D810, the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 is executed, and in step D811, the initialization flag is set as in step D808.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) has reached the final frame number means that control of the target motion table has been completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result of step D809 is YES (the frame number has reached the final frame number), the motion data initialization process 1 and the initialization flag are set to perform the same process as in the motion registration. It is configured to execute the motion table again from the beginning.

In step D812, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is set, and if it is set, steps D813, D814, and D815 are executed to execute the target motion table from the beginning, and then the process proceeds to step D816. If the initialization flag is not set (that is, if it is cleared), step D819 is executed and then the process proceeds to step D816.
In steps D813, D814, and D815, the frame number, the display number, and the command position value in the motion management area X are set to 0, respectively.
In Step D819, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is updated by increasing it by 1. The process proceeds to step D819 when the initialization flag is not set (that is, when the target motion table is being executed), and therefore the frame number needs to be sequentially increased.

  The value of the display number set to 0 in step D814 (the value indicating the number of objects under control) is added or deleted by the object in the motion command execution processing described later (for example, in step D881 described later). If it is done, it is updated (+1 or -1). Further, the value of the command position set to 0 in step D815 (the value indicating the line of the motion table) is also updated in the motion command execution processing described later (for example, in step D880 described later). The value 0 at the command position indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. Further, the value of the display number is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (patterns, notice characters, etc.) actually displayed on the screen at the same time.

Next, when proceeding to Step D816, a motion command execution process (which will be described later) for controlling the target motion table is executed, and then proceeding to Step D817.
In step D817, the address of the address area itself of the motion management area is updated. That is, the update is executed by increasing the value of the number X in the motion management area by 1. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (motion layer is motion 1) is the control target before the execution of step D817, the motion management area 2 (motion layer is the motion 2) is control target after the execution. .
When step D817 is executed, the process proceeds to step D818, and returns if the above-described end condition (in this example, the number X = 14 is satisfied) is satisfied, otherwise returns to step D801. The process is repeated from step D802.

[Motion command execution processing]
Next, details of the motion command execution processing executed in step D816 in the above-described motion control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117.
When this routine is started, first in step D821, the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as a motion list table) from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area) (that is, The motion list table to be controlled this time and the data specifying the row are loaded, and the process proceeds to step D822.

  In step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). Value) or more, and if it is more than the number of motion commands, all commands (all rows of the target motion table) have been executed, so return, and if it is not more than the number of motion commands, the target The process advances to step D823 to execute the motion table of No. 1 for the next one frame. For example, assuming that the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated row, the number of motion commands is “1830”, so in step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is “1830”. Whether or not it is determined to be above, and if it is not "1830" or greater, the process proceeds to step D823. Further, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658 and D663 in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2, and each row (command) of the motion table is described in step D845 described later. Is incremented every time is executed, so if this value is equal to or greater than "1830", all rows of the target motion table have been executed, and the structure is returned.

In step D823, the address of the motion table (motion table name) is acquired from the specified line of the target motion list table (specified line of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). Go to step D824. For example, if the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 135 is the designated row, the motion table name is “Mdat003”, and thus “Mdat003” is acquired as the address of the motion table (from ROM (PROM321). Take out). In the motion list table area of the RAM (RAM 311a), the address of the leftmost column (position of the number of frames) of the motion list table (which indicates the address of the table in the ROM) is stored. At step D821, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. Then, in step D823, the value of the "motion table name (address)" indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM.
In this example, since the motion table address and the motion table name correspond to each other, if the motion table name is acquired, the motion table address is acquired.

  Further, the motion table is a control table for executing each blocked display effect, as described above, but the details will be described here. In the present application, an example of the motion table at the time of advance notice of the push button is shown on the lower side of FIG. 142 described above, and an example of the motion table at the start of the left symbol normal fluctuation is shown in FIG. 138, and others are also shown. Many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM 321 in this example). As shown in these figures, in each line of the motion table, a command code is set at the beginning, and subsequently, parameters corresponding to the command are set. However, there may be no parameters.

  For example, a command "additional 1 code" and a parameter "character No. (design" 2 ")" are set in the first line of FIG. 138, and a command "behavior code" is set in the second line. Parameters "object index (0)" and "behavior index (0)" are set, and in the seventh line, a command "move 1 code" and "object index (0)" and "X coordinate (0)" are set. , "Y coordinate (-493)", "Image width data (296)", "Image height data (490)" are set. On the 10th line, only the command "end code" is set. It is set. Here, the object index is a number assigned to each object in order to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order registered by the additional code. For example, the symbol “2” additionally registered in the first line of FIG. 138 becomes the object index (0), the symbol “1” additionally registered in the third line becomes the object index (1), and the fifth line The additionally registered design “9” becomes the object index (2), and the value of the object index increases based on the number of characters (the number of objects) to be displayed.

Then, the smaller the value of the object index, the more the display layer is displayed at the back of the screen as the context of the display layer. That is, when the display positions overlap, an object having a large object index value is preferentially displayed on the screen.
Further, although three characters have appeared in the example of FIG. 138, the total number of characters in all other categories (such as notices) used at the same time is managed to be 128. That is, in the VDP 312 of this example, 128 characters can be simultaneously displayed and controlled. Since characters can be arranged outside the screen, the number of characters is not limited to 128 inside the screen.
In addition, the example of FIG. 138 is data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol. The delimiter up to the end code is data for one frame. For example, the first to tenth lines are data for the first one frame. Numerical values such as coordinate data and size data may be data including information below the decimal point, only the values that are meaningful in this embodiment are described. Actually, it is a 16-bit signed fixed decimal (2's complement of sign bit, integer part 13 bits, decimal part 2 bits) data.
Further, when the same state as the previous frame is continued, only the end code needs to be defined.

The types and meanings of motion table commands in this example are as follows.
・ "Additional code": A command to add (register) an object. There are additional 1 code, additional 2 code, and additional 3 code depending on the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle).
"Insert code"; a command to insert an object as a specific object index. Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are an insert 1 code, an insert 2 code, and an insert 3 code. By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index of the already registered object is deviated.
・ "Movement code": A command that specifies the display position and display size of an object. There are a move 1 code and a move 2 code depending on the designation method (1 point designation, 3 point designation).
・ "Effect code": A command to instruct an effect that processes the image such as transparency. There are an effect 1 code that specifies an effect type, an effect 2 code that specifies an effect parameter (eg, transparency value (%)), and an effect 3 code that specifies an effect color.
-"Deletion code"; a command that commands the deletion of an object.
-"Change code"; a command for instructing a change in which the character of the object (pattern, character, etc.) continues to move in the middle of the movement and is replaced as it is.
"Decode code": a command for instructing the decoding (decoding) of moving image data.
"Replacement code": a command for instructing replacement of objects (for example, control for replacing the characters of object index 0 and object index 1).
-"Behavior code"; a command for instructing replacement of the character of the object.
"Copy code": a command for cutting out a part or the whole of the image (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle) of the existing object registered by the additional code or the insertion code, copying (copying), and displaying. In this embodiment, there is a copy 2 code for cutting out a moving image into a rectangular shape. In addition, for example, there may be a copy 1 code for cutting out a bitmap which is a still image, or a copy code for cutting out in a triangular shape or a circular shape instead of a rectangular shape.
"Inverted code": a command for displaying an image obtained by inverting the image (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle) of the existing object registered by the additional code or the inserted code. In this embodiment, there is an inversion 2 code that inverts a moving image in the left-right direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction). In addition, for example, there may be an inversion 1 code for inverting a still image bitmap in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, X coordinate direction), or inversion for inverting in the vertical direction (vertical direction, Y coordinate direction). There may be a code.
"End code": a command indicating the end of data for one frame.
The commands in the motion table are not limited to those described above, and commands other than the above commands may be included, or any of the above commands may be deleted. For example, there may be a "rotation code" as a command that specifies the display angle of an object. Specifically, a rotation 1 code that specifies an angle of rotation along the display surface (rotation about an axis orthogonal to the display surface) and a mode in which the rotation 1 code is inclined with respect to the display surface (the image is stereoscopic in the front-back direction). The rotation 2 code or the like for designating the angle of the rotation (rotation about an axis parallel to the display surface) in a manner inclining to (2) may be settable.

Next, the processes after step D823 will be described.
After step D823, the process advances to step D824, and the loop processing with steps D824 and D846 as loop ends is repeatedly executed until the end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration or the like, the command position k of the target motion management area X is set to 0 (the value designating the first row of the motion table) by the steps D658, D663, and D815 described above (k = 0), each time the loop processing of steps D824 to D846 is repeated, the value of the command position k of the motion management area X is incremented by 1 (k = k + 1) in steps D845, D880, etc., which will be described later, and the above end condition is determined in step D844. It is determined whether (the command at the command position k is an end command) is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process returns via step D846, and if not satisfied, the process returns via step D846 to step D824 to proceed to step D825. Has become.

Hereinafter, step D825 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the value of the command position of the target motion management area X is k.
Proceeding to step D825, the row corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (motion table of the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first row if k = 0, the second row if k = 1, If k = N, the command of the (N + 1) th line) is acquired, and then command determination is sequentially executed for these commands in steps D826 to D843, and any command determination result becomes YES. Then, the corresponding process (one of steps D851 to D868) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D846.

That is, in step D826, it is determined whether it is the additional 1 code, and if YES, the bitmap addition process (the process of adding a still image as an object, which will be described in detail later) is performed in step D851, and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, step D827. Proceed to.
In step D827, it is determined whether it is the additional 2 code, and if YES, the automation addition process (the process of adding a moving image as an object, which will be described in detail later) is performed in step D852, and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D828.
In step D828, it is determined whether it is an additional 3 code, and if YES, a single-color rectangle adding process (a process of adding a single-color rectangular image that does not use the data in the character ROM (image ROM 322) as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D853. After that, the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether it is the insertion 1 code, and if YES, the bitmap insertion processing (processing for inserting a still image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D854, and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D830. move on.

In step D830, it is determined whether it is the insertion 2 code, and if YES, the moving image inserting process (the process of inserting the moving image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D855, and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether the code is the insertion 3 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D846 after performing the monochrome rectangle insertion process (the process of inserting the monochrome rectangle image as an object, details are omitted) in step D856. Proceed to D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether or not the movement is one code, and if YES, then in step D857, the one-point designation object movement process (the process of setting the display position and the display size of the object by the one-point designation method, which will be described in detail later) is performed. If NO at step D846, the process proceeds to step D833.
If it is YES in step D833, if YES, a 3-point designation object movement process (process for setting the display position and display size of the object by the 3-point designation method, details will be omitted) was performed in step D858. After that, the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether or not it is the effect 1 code, and if YES, an effect type designation process (described later) is performed in step D859, and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D835.
In step D835, it is determined whether or not it is the effect 2 code, and if YES, then effect parameter specifying processing (described later) is performed in step D860 and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D836.
In step D836, it is determined whether it is the effect 3 code, and if YES, the effect color designation processing (processing for setting the effect color, details are omitted) is performed in step D861 and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether or not it is a deletion code, and if YES, object deletion processing (processing for deleting an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D862, and then the processing proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the processing proceeds to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether or not the code is a change code, and if YES, object change processing (processing for changing an object, which will be described later in detail) is performed in step D863, and then the processing proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the processing proceeds to step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether or not the code is a decode code. If YES, then in step D864 the object moving image decoding process (described in detail later) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D846. If NO, the process proceeds to step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether it is a replacement code, and if YES, object replacement processing (processing for replacing objects, details are omitted) is performed in step D865, and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether the code is a behavior code. If YES, the behavior index setting process (which will be described later in detail) is performed in step D866 and then the process proceeds to step D846, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D842.

  In step D842, it is determined whether it is a copy 2 code, and if YES, a rectangular copy process (process for cutting out and displaying a part of the object (moving image), details are omitted) is performed in step D867, and then the process proceeds to step D846, NO. If so, the process proceeds to step D843. When this rectangular copy process is executed, a part of the image of one frame of the target object (moving image) designated by the parameter associated with the copy 2 code in the line at the command position k will be described later, for example. It becomes a designated image in the character drawing process of step E58, which is drawn in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer of VDP 312) in step E76 described later. It should be noted that such a copying process is also possible when the object is a still image.

In step D843, it is determined whether the code is an inversion 2 code, and if YES, in step D868, the horizontal inversion processing (processing for vertically inverting the object (moving image) (horizontal direction) to display the image (details omitted)) If NO at step D846, the process proceeds to step D844. It should be noted that when this horizontal inversion processing is executed, a setting processing (for example, step E71 of FIG. 128 which will be described later) with horizontal flip is executed for one frame image of the target object (moving image). (For example, the X coordinate values of the display upper left point and the display upper right point are exchanged so that the width data calculated in step E65 of FIG. 128, which will be described later, has a negative value). The image in which the one-frame image of the object (moving image) is horizontally inverted is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later. It should be noted that such inversion processing can be similarly performed even when the object is a still image.
Further, the direction of the reversal processing can be the vertical direction (vertical direction). Set a code (motion command) to invert the vertical direction, and if it is this code, perform vertical inversion processing (processing to invert the object vertically (up and down) for display, details omitted) May be executed. When this vertical inversion process is executed, it is set to execute the setting process (for example, step E75 of FIG. 128 described later) that indicates that there is vertical flip for the image of the target object (for example, described later). The Y coordinate values of the display upper left point and the display lower left point are exchanged so that the height data calculated in step E66 of FIG. 128 has a negative value), whereby the image of the target object is vertically aligned. The image which has been inverted to is drawn in the virtual drawing space in step E76 described later.

Next, in step D844, it is determined whether the code is an end code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D845, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D845.
In step D845, the update of increasing the value of the command position k by 1 is executed, and the process advances to step D846.
In step D846, if the decision result in step D844 is YES, the process returns, and if NO, the process returns to step D824 to execute the process after step D825 for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing of steps D824 to D846 will be described below in the case of FIG. 138.
That is, first, since the command position k = 0 and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is obtained in step D826 and the bitmap addition process of step D851 is executed to execute this 1 The symbol “2” on the line is registered as the object index 0.
Next, when k = 1, the second line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and the object index 0 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, so YES is determined in step D841 and the behavior of step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 0 (that is, the design “2”).

Next, since k = 2 and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is obtained in step D826 and the bitmap addition process of step D851 is executed, and this is the third line. The symbol “1” is registered as the object index 1.
Next, when k = 3, the fourth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and the object index 1 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, so YES is obtained in step D841 and the behavior of step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 1 (that is, the symbol “1”).

Next, since k = 4 and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is obtained in step D826 and the bitmap addition process of step D851 is executed, and this is the fifth line. The symbol “9” is registered as the object index 2.
Next, when k = 5, the 6th line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and the object index 2 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, so YES is obtained in step D841 and the behavior of step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 2 (that is, the design “9”).

Next, when k = 6, the 7th line in which the move 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 0 etc. is set as a parameter, so YES is determined in step D832 and 1 point designation in step D857 is performed. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 0 (that is, the pattern “2”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data on the seventh line.
Next, when k = 7, the 8th line in which the move 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 1 etc. is set as a parameter, so YES is determined in step D832 and one point is designated in step D857. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 1 (that is, the design “1”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data on the eighth line.

Next, when k = 8, the 9th line in which the move 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 2 and the like are set as parameters, so YES is determined in step D832 and one point is designated in step D857. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 2 (that is, the design “9”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data on the ninth line.
Next, k = 9, and the 10th line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is obtained in step D844 and the loop process is terminated and returns in step D846.
Thus, the first one frame shown in FIG. 138 (a) is completed. It should be noted that the same processing is performed for each frame cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 seconds) even after the three frames shown in (b), (c), and (d) in FIG.

[Bitmap addition processing]
Next, details of the bitmap addition processing executed in step D851 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a still image character as a display object.
When this routine starts, first in step D871, the address of the motion list table (that is, the motion list table to be controlled this time and the data designating the row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then, the process proceeds to step D872.
When the process proceeds to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or larger than the maximum display element number. If there is, steps D873 to D881 are sequentially executed and the process returns. Here, the maximum number of display elements is a limit value of the number of displays (the number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled in one motion in consideration of the hardware limit of the VDP 312 and the capacity of the VRAM 329 (area for developing a moving image, etc.). , 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2), for example. However, 18 is only an example and is not limited to this.

  In step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set. For example, when an object is added for the first time, the number of displays is 1, so the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. To give a specific example, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (motion management area for the left symbol) is 3 for the first next symbol, the second current symbol, and the third previous symbol. There is an individual. Then, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left pattern), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position is k = 0, the command on the first line that is the designated line is This routine is executed because it is the additional 1 code, but in this case, of the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the display information area for the first next symbol corresponding to the display number 1 is displayed. Since the data of the object (character No. (symbol "2")) designated by the parameter on the first line is set, the address of the display information area for the first next symbol is set in step D873. Is set. Similarly, if k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the character No. 3 in the third line is displayed in the second display information area for the current symbol corresponding to the display number 2. By setting the data of (symbol “1”), the address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set, and k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line) corresponds to the display number 3. The character No. on the 5th line is displayed in the third display information area for the previous symbol. The data of (symbol “9”) is set, and the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set.

  The “display number” set (saved) in the motion management area basically represents the MAX number of objects to be displayed (that is, the number of all objects set as control targets). In this case, since the number of objects is increased in the additional processing, the “display number” is changed by +1 (for example, it is updated in step D881 described later). The displayed number indicates the MAX number of displayed objects.

Next, in step D874, each data of one display information area (hereinafter referred to as target display information area) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to 0. This is because once the values in the target display information area are all set to 0, the initial values are set in the necessary areas. It should be noted that 0 is cleared here only in one display information area corresponding to the number of displays.
Next, in step D875, an undefined value (for example, "-1") is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area. This is because the behavior is not set as an initial value. In this example, even if the value of the behavior index is 0 (behavior index 0 is designated like the parameter on the second, fourth, and sixth lines in FIG. 138), there is no behavior (replacement of symbols etc.). is there.

Next, in step D876, the still image information is saved as the data of the display type in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, in step D877, the address of the motion table (motion table name) is acquired from the designated line of the target motion list table (the designated line of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D871). This is the same processing as step D823 described above.

Next, in step D878, the still image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the still image index is a registration number of a still image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the still image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 133, for example. . Now, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left pattern), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 138, and the command position is k = 0, then it is specified in the first line that is the specified line. The object is the character No. Since it is (symbol “2”), in step D878, “1” is acquired as the value of the still image index designating the row corresponding to the symbol “2” in the table of FIG. 133.
Next, in step D879, the value of the still image index acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index. The image index is information indicating a specific character (image such as a still image or a moving image) to be displayed, and is information used in step E51 and the like in the effect display editing process described later.

Next, in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record. That is, the value k at the command position is updated by incrementing it by 1. This is because when the motion command execution processing is executed in the next cycle, control is performed with the next row of the motion table as the designated row.
Next, in step D881, since an object has been added by this routine, updating is performed to increase the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1, and then the process returns.

The contents of each parameter of the still image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 133 are as follows.
Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address where palette data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. In this example, the characters described use the same palette, so all are 0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the palette may be changed according to the need of the character. Different offset values are used for parts that use different palettes.
-Width and height of image: Indicates the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixel. In this example, the size is the same because only the design and the character of the push button at the time of normal variation are used, but in reality, the values are different for each character. Also, even in the normal design, the size of the person drawn in the design may be slightly different and the appearance size may be different, but the size of the character is changed in the transparent part to make it easier to handle with internal control. The character size is adjusted so that characters of the same category have the same size.

-Width on VRAM: Indicates the width when the character is expanded in VRAM. In this example, since the compression type uses only "reversible compression 32-bit image", the width is the same as the original image. The size becomes smaller if lossy compression is used or the number of bits in the color palette is reduced.
Image compression type: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. Examples of this compression type include the following types 0 to 6. There may be types other than these.
0: No 32-bit full-color image compression 1: No 8-bit full-color image compression 2: No 4-bit full-color image compression 3: Reversible compression 32-bit full-color image 4: Reversible compression 8-bit full-color image 6: Lossless compression 4-bit full-color image 6: Non-reversible compression image / image Size after compression of: indicates the capacity of image data (character data) after compression. It is used as a parameter when data is transferred from the character ROM 322 to the VRAM 329.
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example.
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition processing]
Next, details of the moving image adding process executed in step D852 in the above-described motion command executing process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a moving image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D891, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded, and the flow advances to step D892.
In step D892, similarly to step D872, it is determined whether or not the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or larger than the maximum display element number, and if the display element number is equal to or larger than the maximum display element, the process returns and is less than the maximum display element number. If so, steps D893 to D897 are sequentially executed, and the process advances to step D898.

In step D893, as in step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set.
In step D894, as in step D874, each data in one display information area (target display information area) specified by the address set in step D893 is cleared to 0.
In step D895, as in step D875, an undefined value (for example, "-1") is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area.
In step D896, as in step D877, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D891).

  In step D897, the moving image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the moving image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 134, for example. Then, assuming that the parameter of the object in the designated row of the target motion table (data set in the column next to the additional 2 code) is, for example, the animation symbol “1”, in step D897, the table of FIG. In "," "0" is acquired as the value of the moving image index that specifies the line corresponding to the animation pattern "1".

  Next, in step D898, the data of the encoding type (described later) in the designated row of the moving picture ROM member list table corresponding to the value of the moving picture index acquired in step D897 is read, and the encoding of the moving picture to be added is performed based on this data. It is determined whether the type is an I-picture moving image. If it is an I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D899. If it is not the I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D904. In the case of FIG. 134, if the encoding type data is “0”, it is an I-picture moving image. Therefore, if this data is “0”, the process proceeds to step D899, and if it is other than “0”, the process proceeds to step D904. Become. The I picture means frame data of an image that can be independently decoded without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I picture moving image means a moving image composed of only I pictures.

Next, when proceeding to Step D899, Steps D899 to D901 are sequentially executed, and then the procedure proceeds to Step D902.
In step D899, the initial value "-1" is set as the data of the I-picture frame count number (frame count when moving pictures of only I-pictures) in the target display information area. If "-1" is set as the initial value, the I picture frame count number starts from "0".
In step D900, the I-picture moving image information is saved as the display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I-picture moving image is set.
In step D901, the value of the moving image index acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D904, steps D904 and D905 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D906.
In step D904, the loop reproduction flag is set to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image. Note that it is also possible to set not to loop.
At Step D905, a moving picture decoding area securing process for securing a storage area of the RAM 311a for decoding the moving picture data is executed.
In step D906, it is determined whether or not the area is correctly allocated as a result of the moving picture decoding area securing process. If YES, steps D907 and D908 are executed, and the procedure proceeds to step D902. If NO, the procedure returns. It should be noted that when the area cannot be properly secured due to the capacity excess or the like, the result is NO.
In step D907, the normal moving image information is saved as the data of the display type in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving image (that is, not an I-picture moving image) is set.
In step D908, the index value of the area allocated by the moving picture decoding area securing processing is saved as an image index.

Next, when proceeding to step D902, steps D902 and D903 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.
In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In step D903, as in the case of step D881, the display number in the motion management area X is updated by increasing it by one.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 134 are as follows.
-Movie address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
-Width and height of moving image; represents the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixel. As with still images, adjust the transparent areas so that movies in the same category have the same size.
-Number of frames of a moving image; indicates how many continuous pictures the movie is composed of. In the present embodiment, 1 second = 30 frames is controlled, so a movie is created with this in mind. If the control is executed so as to be 60 frames per second, double speed reproduction will be performed. The reverse is also true.

.Alpha. Value setting; information indicating whether or not the movie includes alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha is present. If there is alpha, the transparency of the movie can be changed. If not, only opaque.
-Encoding type: Indicates how the movie is structured. There are the following types 0 to 2.
0 = Construction of I picture only 1 = Construction including I picture and P picture of one reference (the P picture is created by referring to the past I picture or P picture)
2 = In addition to 1 described above, a configuration that includes a P picture that refers to 2 pictures (I picture P that is one past and I picture or P picture that is two past is made to create the P picture)
However, the encoding type is not limited to the above, and the configuration may include, for example, a B picture.
The category setting of the moving picture ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[1 point designated object move processing]
Next, details of the one-point designation object moving process executed in step D857 in the motion command executing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D911 to D924 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D911, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D912, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D911).

In step D913, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D912. For example, if FIG. 138 is the target motion table and k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), this routine is executed because the command is the move 1 code, but in this case, the 7th line Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D913.
In step D914, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D913 is set. For example, in the case of k = 6 in FIG. 138 (the designated line is the 7th line), the object index 0 is the symbol “2” (next symbol) added in the 1st line, and therefore the first symbol corresponding to the next symbol. The address of the display information area is set.

In step D915, the X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D916, the X acquired in step D915 is set as the X coordinate of the upper left display point and the X coordinate of the lower left display point in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D914, the same in this routine hereafter). Save the coordinate data.
In step D917, the Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D918, the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is saved as the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area.

In step D919, the image width data and the image height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired.
In step D920, the image width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915, and in the next step D921, this addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area. .
In step D922, the image height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917, and in the next step D923, the addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area. To do.
Then, in step D924, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  According to steps D915 to D923, the following operation is realized. For example, when k = 6 in FIG. 138 (the designated line is the 7th line), the X coordinate data is “0”, the Y coordinate data is “−493” (minus indicates a position outside the screen on the upper side of the screen), image The width data is “296” and the image height data is “490”. Therefore, "0" is acquired in step D915, "-493" is acquired in step D917, and "296" and "490" are acquired in step D919. The addition result of step D920 is "296" (= 0 + 296), and the addition result of step D922 is "-3" (= -493 + 490). Therefore, in step D916, "0" is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the display lower left point, in step D918, "-493" is saved as the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the display upper right point, and in step D921. In step D923, "296" is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point, and in step D923, "-3" is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point. Thereby, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol “2”) is set as the coordinates of three points (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point). In this case, the position of the upper left corner on the screen is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the Y coordinates set as described above are all negative values, so the object of the next symbol is , The display position is set outside the screen on the upper side of the screen, and the image of the next symbol is not yet visible on the screen.

As described above, according to this routine, although one point is designated, three points are designated as a result. This is because the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, so if there are upper left reference point coordinates and the height and width data of the object, the upper right point and lower left point will be determined as in steps D920 and D922. This is because the coordinates are obtained. As described above, the display information area in the motion management area has areas in which the coordinate values of the three points determined in this way are entered, and in steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, registration in each area is performed. .
The detailed description of the three-point designated object moving process executed in step D858 in the above-described motion command execution process will be omitted, but this process is also substantially the same as the one-point designated object moving process described above. To be done. However, when three points are designated, since each coordinate data has a structure in which each coordinate data is present on the motion table, the addition processing such as steps D920 and D922 described above is unnecessary, and each coordinate data acquired from the motion table is all as it is. The content of the processing is simply saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type designation processing]
Next, details of the effect type designation processing executed in step D859 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D931 to D940 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
At step D931, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D932, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D931).

In step D933, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D932. For example, when Mdat0041 (motion index No. 41) on the lower side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line), this command is executed because the command is the effect 1 code. However, in this case, since the object index of k = 4 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D933.
In step D934, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D933 is set. For example, in the case of the lower side of FIG. 149, the object index 0 is the moving image “Torataro movie 1” added at k = 0 (first line), and the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In step D935, the effect type data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D936, the data acquired in step D935 is saved as the effect type in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D934, the same as in this routine).
For example, when k = 4 on the lower side of FIG. 149, the effect type is (1), so this is acquired in step D935 and set in the target display information area in step D936.
Next, in steps D937, D938, and D939, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared.
Then, in step D940, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  In the present routine described above, for example, the type of blending method for displaying a plurality of objects in a superimposed manner is set. That is, for example, the above-mentioned effect type (1) is a kind of effect that imparts transparency (transparency), and the effect that imparts transparency is the same as the image of the rear (back side) layer at the same display position and the front. It can be said that the image of the layer is mixed (blended), and this routine sets the type of the blend.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, details of the effect parameter designation processing executed in step D860 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG. 121.
When this routine is started, steps D941 to D947 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D941, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D942, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D941).

In step D943, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D942. For example, if the lower motion table in FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 5 (the designated line is the sixth line), this routine is executed because the command is the effect 2 code. In this case, k = 5. Since the object index of is 0, the object index of 0 is obtained in step D943.
In step D944, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D943 is set. For example, in the case of the lower side of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is the moving image “Tora Taro movie 1” added at k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set. .

In step D945, the effect parameter data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D946, the data acquired in step D945 is saved as an effect parameter in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D944, the same as in this routine).
For example, when k = 5 on the lower side of FIG. 151, the effect parameter is (64), and thus this is acquired in step D945 and set in the target display information area in step D946.

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of transparency (darkness) of the object when blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in this example, data obtained by converting the transparency percentage into the numerator of “P / 255” is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is a normal display (no transparency), the parameter P when displaying with a density of about 10% is 25 (≈255 × 10/100). On the contrary, when the value of the parameter P is 64 as in the above-described specific example, the transparency is about 25% (= 100 × 64/255), which means that it is considerably thin. However, when displaying 100%, the above-mentioned effect type designation processing and the effect parameter designation processing which is the present routine are not executed.
Next, in step D947, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

[Object deletion processing]
Next, details of the object deletion process executed in step D862 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first in step D951, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
Next, in step D952, it is determined whether or not the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less. If it is 0 or less, there is no display number (that is, there is no object to be deleted), and the process returns and 0 If not, proceed to Step D953.
When the procedure advances to Step D953, Steps D953 to D955 are sequentially executed, and then the procedure advances to Step D956.
In step D953, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D951).

In step D954, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D953. For example, if the lower side of FIG. 142 is the target motion table and k = 12 (the designated line is the 13th line), this routine is executed because the command is a deletion code. In this case, k = 12 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D954.
In step D955, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D954 is set. For example, when k = 12 on the lower side of FIG. 142, the object index is 0, and therefore the address of the display information area corresponding to the object index 0 is set at this point.

In step D956, it is determined whether or not the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information, and if it is normal moving image information, the moving image decoding area opening process (details omitted) is executed in step D957, and then the step If it is not normal moving image information (that is, if it is an I-picture moving image), step D957 is not executed and step D958 follows.
When the processing advances to step D958, the processing returns to after executing steps D958 to D960 sequentially.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index is shifted (moved) forward. That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted by one to the previous display information area. As a result, the data in the display information area of the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to this deleted data is deleted.
In step D959, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record.
Then, in step D960, since the object has been deleted by this routine, update is performed by reducing the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1.

[Object change processing]
Next, details of the object changing process executed in step D863 in the motion command executing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D961 to D967 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D961, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D962, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D961).
In step D963, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D962.

In step D964, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D963 is set.
In Step D965, the index (the still image index or the moving image index) of the changed character (the changed character) corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table is acquired.
In step D966, the index value acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index. This implements an object change in which only the image (characters such as designs and characters) changes.
Then, in step D967, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, details of the object moving image decoding processing executed in step D864 in the above-described motion command execution processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D971 to D974 are sequentially executed first, and then the process proceeds to step D975.
In step D971, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D972, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D971).

In step D973, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D972. For example, if the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 3 (the designated line is the fourth line), this command is executed because the command is a decode code. Since the object index of k = 3 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D973.
In step D974, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D973 is set. For example, when k = 3 in the table on the upper side of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is the moving image (tiger movie 1) added at k = 0 (first line), the display information area corresponding to this moving image is displayed. Address is set.

In step D975, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is I-picture moving image information. If it is I-picture moving image information, steps D977 and D978 are executed, and then the process proceeds to step D979 to display I-picture moving image information. Otherwise, it proceeds to step D976.
In step D977, the address of the area of the I-picture frame count number (the frame count when moving the I-picture only) in the target display information area (the display information area whose address has been set in step D974, the same in this routine hereafter) To set.
In step D978, based on the address set in step D977, the data of the I picture frame count number in the target display information area is incremented by 1 and updated.

In step D979, it is determined whether the I-picture frame count updated in step D978 is greater than or equal to the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to the image index data at this point), and the number of moving image frames or more is determined. If so, the process proceeds to step D983 after executing step D980, and if it is not the number of moving image frames or more, the process proceeds to step D983 without executing step D980.
In step D980, since the moving image specified by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) has been displayed up to the last frame, the frame count for the I picture in the target display information area is restarted to restart the moving image from the beginning. Set the data to 0 (start value).

In step D976, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If it is normal moving image information, steps D981 and D982 are executed, and then the process proceeds to step D983. Returns as abnormal.
In step D981, the data registered as the image index at this time (in this case, the moving image index data) is loaded.
In step D982, a moving image decoding process (details omitted) of decoding (decoding) one frame of the moving image corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is executed.
Then, proceeding to step D983, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In the case of the I-picture moving image, the picture of each frame exists independently, so the number of frames may be managed. When instructing the internal register of the VDP 312 later, the count (frame count for I-picture) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting process]
Next, details of the behavior index setting process executed in step D866 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D991 to D997 are sequentially executed first, and then the process returns.
In step D991, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D992, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D991). Note that, as shown in the example in FIG. 135 described above, a behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated line of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

In step D993, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D992. For example, if the upper side of FIG. 149 is the target motion table and k = 1 (the designated line is the second line), this routine is executed because the command is a behavior code, but in this case, when k = 1 Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D993.
In step D994, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D993 is set. For example, in the case of the upper side of FIG. 149, since the object index 0 is the moving image (tiger movie 1) added at k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this moving image is set.

In step D995, the behavior index data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D996, the data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D994, the same in this routine hereinafter).
For example, when k = 1 on the upper side of FIG. 149, the behavior index is (0), and thus it is acquired in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
Then, in step D997, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  The behavior table is a table (a data table registered in the PROM 321) including rows in which processing addresses of behaviors (character replacement) are set, and a specific row (designated row) is designated among these rows. Is the behavior index. Therefore, when the values of the behavior table and the behavior index are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined and the content of the behavior is specified. This routine performs a control process for designating the contents of such behavior. For example, in the upper part of FIG. 149, the second line with k = 1 instructs the object with the object index 0 (tiger movie 1) to execute the behavior (character replacement) specified by the behavior index 0. Therefore, the target information display area is set accordingly. The behavior specified by the behavior index 0 is, for example, changing the color of the notice character "tiger Taro" appearing in the movie to notify the jackpot reliability, or changing the type of the notice character from "tiger Taro" to " The control is such that it is replaced with "tiger tiger" (see FIGS. 146 (b) and 146 (c) described later).

[Production display editing process]
Next, details of the effect display editing process executed in step D31 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 125, 126, and 127. Below, step E is used as a step number. As described in the main processing, this effect display editing processing is processing for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 on the drawing content on the display device 41. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed for the number of motion management areas, and then the process returns. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop processing A, the processing is executed from step E2 for the motion management area X (that is, the motion management area 0 first) with X = 0 at the beginning, and when the process proceeds to step E49, the address area of the motion management area is updated (that is, , X = X + 1), and in the next step E50, it is determined whether the loop processing A has been completed for all motion management areas (in this example, X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is YES. When the condition is satisfied (that is, when the ending condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the process returns, and if NO, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the processes after step E2 will be described.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL. If the data is NULL, control is not required for the motion management area X, so the process proceeds to step E49. If not, steps E3 to E5 are sequentially performed. After execution, go to step E6. When it is determined to be NULL (YES) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following process including the loop process B and the loop process C is naturally not executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared.
At step E4, all the blend information areas are cleared. The blend information area is an area in the RAM 311a for storing information on the parameters of the internal register of the VDP 312 for old / new comparison. That is, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that specify fixed pixel-to-pixel calculation values for blending for effects. Then, the RAM 311a is provided with an area for storing the setting information of this time and the setting information of the previous time for each of these four types of parameters, and this is a blend information area.
In step E5, inter-pixel calculation parameters (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal register of the VDP 312) are set.

  Next, when the process goes to step E6, the loop process B is started. In the loop processing B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed until the final value (final value = display number-1) is increased while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by the increment 1, and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, the variable i is set to 0 immediately after the start of the loop, and the process proceeds to step E7. At step E48, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E6, and if the variable i is not less than the closing price, the process goes to step E49. Then, returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step E7. The value of the final price is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area X. That is, in this loop processing B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for the number of display, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

The processing after step E7 will be described below.
When the process goes to step E7, steps E7 to E9 are sequentially executed, and then the process goes to step E10.
At step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of the VDP 312 is set to correspond to the α value.
At step E8, the α flag used for the process described later is set to “with α”.
At step E9, the address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as the target display information area) corresponding to the variable i in the motion management area X is loaded.
Next, in step E10, the value of the behavior index in the display information area of the address loaded in step E9 is read, it is determined whether any index data other than NULL is set, and some behavior index data is set. If it is (YES), the process corresponding to the behavior index is executed in step E11 and then the process proceeds to step E12. If NO, the process does not execute step E11 and proceeds to step E12.

The processing corresponding to the behavior index executed in step E11 is to execute the behavior (replacement of image data) specified by the behavior index for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. The process is the process specified by the process address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the above-described behavior table.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the process (display left symbol conversion process) of the flowchart shown on the left side of FIG. 129 described later is executed in step E11. In the present application, a specific example of the process executed in step E11 is also shown on the right side of FIG. 129, but these details will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the data of the image index is changed immediately before the display, and, for example, the basic pattern is replaced with a predetermined pattern to be displayed, or the image color of the push button (PB) is changed from the basic color. It may be replaced with a predetermined color (for example, a specific color representing the jackpot reliability) according to the gaming state. The display pattern of the character defined on the motion table is fixed, so basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to respond to different notice symbols etc. due to different stop patterns and distributions for each change. . Therefore, in this example, a behavior is embedded in a necessary portion and a process of replacing a character is performed so that a flexible correspondence can be performed.

  When the process proceeds to step E12, the effect type data set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined in steps E12, E13, and E14 whether this is the basic blend, the additive blend, or the subtractive blend. If it corresponds to the blend type of No. 1, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any of the blend types, steps E15 to E18 are skipped and the process proceeds to step E21.

In step E15, the value of the effect parameter set in the target display information area is loaded and applied to the color parameter, and then the process proceeds to step E16.
When the process proceeds to step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area whether the drawing designation is the normal moving image non-transparent reproduction. If YES, the process proceeds to step E17. Go to E21.
When the process proceeds to step E17, it is determined whether or not the target moving image (which is determined to be the normal moving image non-transparent reproduction in step E16) is registered without α, and if YES, the α flag is set to no α in step E18. After setting and proceeding to step E21, if NO, the process proceeds to step E21 without executing step E18.

Next, in step E21, the effect type data set in the target display information area is read, and it is added blended, subtracted blended, multiplied blended, screen blended, difference blended, or compared (dark ) It is determined in steps E21 to 27 whether the blending or the inversion blending is performed, and if any of the blend types is satisfied, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing in steps E31 to E37) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E39. If it does not correspond to any of the blend types, the process proceeds to step E28.
Here, step E31 is processing executed in the case of addition blending (processing for setting addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is processing executed in the case of subtraction blending (setting subtraction type drawing effect). Processing), step E33 is processing executed in the case of multiplication blending (processing for setting a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is processing executed in the case of screen blending (screen type drawing effect). Step E35 is a process executed in the case of difference blending (process of setting a difference type drawing effect), and step E36 is a process executed in the case of comparison (dark) blending (comparison). (Processing for setting a (dark) type drawing effect). Is a process executed when a command (processing for setting the drawing effect of inverting type).

Next, in step E28, it is determined whether or not the α flag is set to α. If α is not set, a drawing effect without α is set in step E29, and the process proceeds to step E39. , .Alpha.), A drawing effect of the .alpha. Type is set in step E38, and the flow advances to step E39.
In step E29 and steps E31 to E38, various parameters (four types in this example) for blending are set in the corresponding blend information area according to the setting of the effect type of the target information display area. There is.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E39, the loop process C is started. In the loop processing C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the final value (final value = 3) is increased while increasing the variable j corresponding to the above-mentioned four types of blend information areas by an increment of 1 from the initial value 0, and then the step Go to E44.
That is, at step E39, the variable j is set to 0 immediately after the start of the loop, and the process proceeds to step E40.
When the process proceeds to step E40, it is determined whether the blend information area corresponding to the variable j is changed, and if it is changed, steps E41 and E42 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step E43. If not changed, step E41, The process proceeds to step E43 without executing E42. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining that the previous data and the current data in the corresponding blend information area do not match, and determine that they have changed, and if they do match, determine that they have not changed.
Further, in step E41, the pixel-to-pixel fixed value of the registration parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of the VDP 312, and in step E42, the current blend information is set as the previous blend information.

Then, when the process proceeds to step E43, the process returns to step E39 when the variable j is less than the closing price, and exits the loop processing C when the variable j is the closing price and proceeds to step E44. Then, when the process returns to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E40.
There are four variable j ranges because, as described above, there are four types of parameters of the internal register that instruct the VDP 312 of the fixed value between pixel calculations at the time of blending. Further, areas (blend information areas) corresponding to the respective registers are provided for the previous time and for this time, and the setting processing of step E41 is performed only when the old and new data in the blend information areas are compared and coincident with each other. This is because the value is set in the register of the VDP 312 only when the value to be changed changes (for efficiency of the setting process to the VDP).

Next, in step E44, the data of the display type (display type) set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined whether the data is a still image, a normal moving image, an I-picture moving image, or a monochrome rectangle. Each of the determinations is made in E44 to 47, and if any of the display types other than the monochrome square is applicable, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing of steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step E58, and if it is a monochrome rectangle, the process proceeds to step E59. If it does not correspond to any display type, the process proceeds to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image. In step E51, the image index data is loaded, and in step E52, the attribute of the still image data is set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E52, the flow advances to step E58 to execute a character drawing process (described later) based on the data loaded in step E51 and the setting in step E52.

Further, steps E53 and E54 are executed in the case of a normal moving image. In step E53, the image index data is loaded, and in step E54, the attribute of the normal moving image data is set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E54, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the setting in step E54.
Steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I-picture moving image. In step E55, the image index data is loaded, and in step E56, the I-picture frame count from the target display information area (for I-picture moving images only) is loaded. (Frame count) data is loaded, and in step E57, processing such as setting attributes of I-picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After step E57, the flow advances to step E58 to execute a character drawing process (described later) based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the setting in step E57.
Step E59 is executed in the case of a single-color quadrangle, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (image of a single-color quadrangle) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, attaching a sprite of the rectangular image to the virtual drawing space). Processing).
After step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

Next, in step E48, it is determined whether the variable i of the loop processing B has reached the final value (display number -1), and if it has reached, the process exits the loop processing B and proceeds to step E49 to reach it. If not, the process returns to step E6 to repeat the loop processing B.
Then, when the process proceeds to step E49, an update is performed to increase the number X of the target motion management area by 1, and then at step E50, it is determined whether or not X has reached the final price (14 in this example) of loop processing A, If yes, the process exits the loop process A and returns. If not, the process returns to step E1 to repeat the loop process A from step E2.

  In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, a process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 322) to the VRAM 329 is also performed at the same time. However, if the same VRAM already exists, this data transfer is not performed. Further, in the case of a single color quadrangle, the data in the character ROM is not used, so this data transfer is not necessary. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, an α mode, a color mode (how many colors are displayed, etc.), a character size, a color palette designation, and the like.

[Character drawing process]
Next, the details of the character drawing process executed in step E58 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step E61, data of the X coordinate of the upper left display point and the X coordinate of the lower left display point are displayed from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. It is read and it is determined whether or not they match. If they match, the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step E77.
When the process proceeds to step E62, the data of the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, it is determined whether they match, and if they match, the process proceeds to step E63. If not, the process proceeds to step E77.
If the image is a quadrangle (rectangle), the determination results of steps E61 and E62 are YES, and the process proceeds to step E63. However, if the image is a triangle character (triangular image), either determination is NO. Then, the process proceeds to step E77.
When the process proceeds to step E77, the triangle character drawing process (the description is omitted) is executed and the process returns.

Next, in step E63, steps E63 to E67 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E68.
In step E63, the data of the X coordinate of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the upper left base point X coordinate of the character.
In step E64, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the Y coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E65, the data of the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference (= X coordinate of the display upper right point-X of the display upper left point) is read. (Coordinates) as the width data of the character.

In step E66, the data of the Y coordinate of the lower left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper left display point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference (= Y coordinate of the lower left display point-Y coordinate of the upper left display point) is read. (Coordinates) as the height data of the character.
At step E67, no horizontal flip (horizontal inversion) and no vertical flip are set. Here, the horizontal flip means image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and the vertical flip means image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

When it proceeds to step E68, it is determined whether the width data set at step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If it is not less than 0, there is no horizontal flip, and steps E69 to E71 are not executed and the process proceeds to step E72.
In step E69, the data of the X coordinate of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the width data (negative value) set in step E65 to this is the upper left base point X of the character. Update and set as coordinates.
In step E70, the width data (negative value) set in step E65 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data.
At step E71, the presence of horizontal flip is set (the setting at step E67 is changed).

When the process proceeds to step E72, it is determined whether or not the height data set at step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value), and if it is less than 0, vertical flip is present. Therefore, steps E73 to E75 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E76. , If it is not less than 0, there is no vertical flip so that steps E73 to E75 are not executed and the process proceeds to step E76.
In step E73, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the height data (negative value) set in step E66 is added to this and the addition result is the upper left base point of the character. Update and set as Y coordinate.
In step E74, the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data.
At step E75, the presence of vertical flip is set (the setting at step E67 is changed).
Then, when the process proceeds to step E76, the image of the predetermined character corresponding to the data of the image index loaded at any one of the steps E51, E53, and E55 based on the setting by the processing so far (steps E63 to E75). Is executed as a designated image in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined character in the virtual drawing space), and then the process returns.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, the details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display edit process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 129.
When this routine is started, steps E81 to E83 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E84.
In step E81, image index data (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded.
In step E82, the data of the index (symbol number) of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (for example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded. In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the data of the index (symbol number) of the symbol (decorative symbol of special symbol) is any value from 0 to 8.

  In step E83, the current symbol (left) index data set in the image index loaded in step E81 is added to the current symbol (left) index data loaded in step E82, and the addition result is updated. Set as an index. For example, when the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is 0, and the index data of the current symbol (left) to be replaced loaded in step E82 is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the value of the update index.

Next, when proceeding to step E84, it is determined whether or not the data of the update index set at step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example), and if it exceeds, the process proceeds to step E86 after executing step E85. If it does not exceed, the process proceeds to step E86 without executing step E85.

In step E85, the value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the value of the update index, and the result of this subtraction is set as the value of the new update index. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the symbol upper limit, the value of the update index is updated to a value that makes a round.

When it proceeds to step E86, the left symbol index conversion table is set, and the routine proceeds to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the update index, and the value of the image index of the left symbol to be displayed in the designated row is set.
In step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row designated by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86, and the process proceeds to step E88.
Then, in step E88, the value acquired in step E87 is saved as a new image index value in the image index area (area for saving the image index), and then the process returns.
Although the display left symbol conversion processing has been described above, the same processing is performed for the right symbol and the middle symbol (details are omitted).

[PB color conversion processing]
Next, details of the PB color conversion processing executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the upper right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps E91 to E94 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.
In step E91, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area (the area in which the distribution result (previous notice type) determined in steps D426 and D429 described above is stored).
In step E92, the PB index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E93. The PB index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the PB color area and a value of the image index of the PB (push button) image to be displayed in the designated row is set. .

In step E93, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the line designated by the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92, and the process proceeds to step E94.
Then, in step E94, the value acquired in step E93 is saved in the image index area as a new image index value, and then the process returns.
Since only the button character that is the default color is registered as the push button advance notice motion control data (particularly the image index data), when changing the color from the default color to notify the jackpot reliability, etc. This routine (PB color conversion processing) is executed.
In addition to the push button notice, the basic character that appears (for example, "Tora Taro") may be changed to another character (for example, "Torasuke" or "tiger lock") that corresponds to the distribution result in the effect distribution result area. There is also processing such as conversion (replacement) by behavior.

[Reach character conversion processing]
Next, details of the reach character conversion processing executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing processing will be described with reference to the flowchart on the lower right side of FIG. 129.
When this routine is started, steps E101 to E103 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E104.
In step E101, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E102, the reach character index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E103. The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a line is designated by the distribution result saved in the reach character area and the value of the image index of the reach character image to be displayed in the designated line is set.
In step E103, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the line designated by the distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102. Although not shown, the value acquired in step E103 is also saved in a predetermined image index area as a new image index value.

Then, in step E104, it is determined whether or not the reach character index acquired in step E103 is a value indicating “no character”. If YES, the size of the character (image) of the reach character is set to 0 in step E105. If the answer is NO, the process returns without executing step E105.
Note that in this example, motion control data (especially, "reach!" Displayed at the moment when the reach occurs and reach characters such as "tactical", "victory", "reach", and "daze ~!" (Image index data) is configured to display the default character, and is displayed by the behavior as necessary (that is, by setting the reach character conversion process in step E11 as necessary) immediately before the display. Change the characters and replace each character with a different color.
In the reach character conversion processing described above, for example, when the reliability of the big hit announcement fluctuates with a low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105 so that the reach character actually exists in the control. Is controlled so that it cannot be seen. However, the method of not displaying is not limited to this configuration, and, for example, a configuration in which reach characters are not displayed may be used.

[Specific example of performance control data table and performance display]
Next, a specific example of the data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above, a specific example of the effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen, display area) of the display device 41 by the control, and the like are shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to 133 to 192.
First, FIG. 133 is a specific example of the still image ROM member list table, which has already been described in the above step D878 of the bitmap addition processing.
Next, FIG. 134 is a specific example of the moving image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D897 and the like of the moving image adding process.
Next, FIG. 135 is a specific example of the motion list table. The motion list table has already been described in the description of the scenario analysis process (specifically, the description of the motion index).

Next, FIG. 136 is a specific example of the scenario table (during customer waiting demonstration), which has already been described in the step D585 of the scenario analysis processing, the constant wait processing, the repetition processing, and the like.
Next, FIG. 137 is a specific example of the scenario table (when the special figure 1 normally changes), which has already been described in step D586 of the scenario analysis processing.

Next, FIG. 138 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of starting the left symbol normal variation), which has already been described in step D823 of the motion command execution processing.
In the control of the motion table, the process returns to the top when the row of the table reaches the bottom unless the motion deletion process or the new motion registration process is executed for the target motion layer. That is, in the motion control processing (step D30), when the control of the target motion table is completed up to the final frame (the frame number reaches the final frame number), the same motion table is registered as in the motion registration. Is configured to be executed from the beginning again.
Next, FIG. 139 is an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG. 138.
As shown in this figure, the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the vertical direction is the Y-axis direction. Therefore, the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0, the Y coordinate is 767. Since the left-right direction is the X-axis direction on the display screen 41a, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a has X coordinate = 1023 and Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a has X coordinate = 1023 and Y. The coordinates are 767. Note that the specific numerical values of such coordinates are merely an example.

  139 (a) of FIG. 139 corresponds to the first frame (a) of the motion table. The symbol “2” including the image of the tiger character is the next symbol (object index 0), the symbol “1” is the current symbol (object index 1), and the symbol “9” is the previous symbol (object index 2). ), These objects are additionally registered by the first to sixth lines of the motion table, and their behaviors are set. Further, the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the 7th to 9th lines of the motion table, respectively, whereby the display shown in (a) of FIG. 139 is performed. However, the next symbol is actually invisible outside the entire screen, and the previous symbol is only partially visible.

  139 (b) of FIG. 139 corresponds to the second frame (b) of the motion table. The pattern and behavior of each object remain the same as in the first frame (a), and the display position and size of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th lines of the motion table. The display shown in (b) is performed. In this case, the value of the Y coordinate is changed by all -8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the current symbol of the object index 1 has the value of the Y coordinate changed from 7 to -1), and thereby each The design is slightly moved up on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement to hop once in the operation of scrolling (changing) downward after each symbol temporarily hops (slightly increases) at the start of variation. The Y coordinates of the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) of the motion table (FIG. 138) are sequentially changed by -8.

Next, the upper side of FIG. 140 shows the state of the initial position of each symbol (the state at the top except for the above-mentioned hopping operation), and the display is the same as that of (a) of FIG. 139 described above.
The lower side of FIG. 140 shows a state in which each symbol is scrolled to the bottom of the movement range.
The movement (scrolling) of the display position as the variable display of each symbol is performed within the range of the two states described above.
For example, when the current symbol reaches the bottom of the movement range, next, the symbol number is updated (+1), and the initial value of the movement range is restored. In this example, the three symbols (not the symbol numbers but the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol) are only repeatedly moving within each narrow effective range. When returning to the top, the symbol number is incremented by 1 (that is, for example, since the symbol “1” is switched to the symbol “2”), the same symbol appears to be scrolling from the upper screen outside to the lower screen outside.

Then, when the y coordinate fluctuates at a speed that is incremented by 100, the current symbol is fluctuated and controlled by the values of 7 → 107 → 207 → 307 → 407 → 7 → 107 → .... When the number becomes 7, the symbol number displayed is incremented by 1. The same applies to the previous symbol of the left symbol and the next symbol, and the same for the current symbol, the previous symbol and the next symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol.
The merit of this method is that it is easy to determine how many symbol numbers are currently the center of control. In the example of FIG. 140, the symbol number “1” is the center, the previous symbol is “9” immediately before it, and the next symbol is “2” after one, which can be relatively calculated. When the coordinates return to the top, the control object can be narrowed down to one such as "2" in the central pattern, so that the structure can be made simple.
If this is a method of moving the same symbol from top to bottom, instead of the way of dividing "current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol", there will be three independent symbols, so the reference symbol is Since it does not exist, there is a problem that it is difficult to control when replacing symbols, and it is necessary to manage all, but in the present example, such a problem is solved.
In addition, the above range division is a case of normal fluctuation. This is not the case during the reach (during the reach action), etc., as the position of the design may change. However, the idea of classification of the current symbol, the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc. remains even during the reach.

  Next, FIG. 141 is an example of connecting motion tables when the left symbol is normally changed. The motion table is linked by the scenario table described above. First, in the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 0 is set by the 20th line (// 19) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later. It is set by designating the first line (left symbol stop). Then, with this motion table (Mdat0000), the symbol "1" is registered as the object index 0 (first line), and then this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). ) It is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position designated in the third line. In a motion table such as this motion table (Mdat0000), even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, only one set of the same movement is registered, and the basic character is registered on the table. The character with the lowest number in control (for example, the character with the lowest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in this case, is the stop symbol "1"). According to this configuration, the lowest number in internal control is used as a reference, so it is easy to calculate the difference value such as character replacement due to behavior (change processing), easy to control, and perform efficient control. It is possible to do it, and there is an effect that development efficiency is also improved. In addition, since the motion tables are registered only one by one for the same movement, there is also an effect that it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity.

  Next, in the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 3 is set by the first line of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, whereby the four lines of the motion list table of FIG. 135 are set. It is set by specifying the eye (normal left fluctuation (first half)). Then, with this motion table (Mdat0003), similarly to the case described with reference to FIG. 138, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are respectively registered, and the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol is displayed. The middle part of FIG. 141 and FIG. 138 show the same motion table (Mdat0003).

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 141, for example, the motion index 4 is set by the 4th line of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 137, whereby the 5th line of the motion list table of FIG. 135 is set. It is set by specifying the eye (// 4 left normal fluctuation (second half)). Then, with this motion table (Mdat0004), the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are respectively registered, and the normal fluctuation (latter half) of the left symbol is displayed.
Although only the left symbol has been described above, the same applies to the right symbol, the middle symbol, and other objects.
In this way, the scenario table can easily compose a series of long productions by freely combining a plurality of motion tables that specify blocked display productions.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the scenario table (when a push button is announced), which has already been described in the variable wait process, the PB wait process, the PB determination branch process, and the like.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 142 is a specific example of the motion table (when a push button is announced), which has already been described in step D823 of the motion command execution processing and step D954 of the object deletion processing.

Next, FIG. 143 is an example of a scenario table used at the ending of the variable display effect of the special figure.
Here, in order to prevent the next symbol fluctuation from suddenly starting at the same time as the ending movie ends, a symbol display period of a predetermined time is provided during the ending period. In this example, a constant wait code is set on the 27th line (// 26) and the wait time value is set to 30 (that is, 1 second). As a result, the left, right, and middle stop symbol displays registered in motion on the 20th line (// 19), the 22nd line (// 21), and the 24th line (// 23) are displayed for a predetermined time (this example Then, it continues for 1 second), and at the same time as the ending movie ends, the next symbol fluctuation does not start suddenly.

  Further, in the background setting on the 18th line (// 17) in FIG. 143, the value of the motion index is set to (−1), so the result is NO in step D637 of the motion registration process described above, and the motion index in the RAM is set. The region value is used as the motion index. This must match the background displayed after the ending, but at this point the probability information command has not been received, so predict from the information such as the already received pattern command, fanfare command, ending command, etc. This is because it is necessary to select the background. Further, even if a pattern command of the probability variation pattern is sent from the game control device, there is a possibility that the effect control device side will perform the effect of pretending to be a normal pattern (non-probability variation pattern), so not only the command This is because it is necessary to use the internal information of the performance control device. Although the probability information command is sent at the end of the ending scenario, if there is no problem with the displayed contents, it may be continued as it is, and if there is a problem, it is switched to the background corresponding to the command ( Because the command from the game control device has the highest priority).

  Next, FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a display layer. Here, the display layer means a virtual layer (layer) that determines the context (display priority) of whether to display the front side or the back side on the screen. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned motion layer corresponds to a basic display layer. As described above, the motion layer of this embodiment has a total of 14 from the motion 0 for the background to the motion 13 for the fourth symbol, and the images overlap the same position (position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate). In this case, the larger the motion number is, the more preferentially it is displayed. That is, when the images are overlapped at the same position, the one with the smaller motion number (the one with the smaller motion number) becomes the one with the larger motion number in the overlapped part unless the one with the larger motion number is transparent or semi-transparent. It is displayed so as to be hidden and disappears. FIG. 144 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the display layers corresponding to the motion layers.

In the case of the present embodiment, the display priority order of motion layers is actually determined by the above-described effect display editing process (FIG. 125 to FIG. 127). In the above-described effect display editing processing, as described above, the processing is performed in order from the smallest (younger) motion layer number (that is, the motion number), and each image is processed in this order in the virtual drawing space of the VDP 312. This is because it is drawn in (frame buffer).
Also, although FIG. 144 shows only the basic classification of display layers corresponding to motion layers, it is considered that display layers differ more finely in the same motion layer due to the different object indexes described above. be able to. As described above, the smaller the value of the object index, the more the display layer is displayed at the back of the screen (that is, when the display positions overlap, the object with the larger object index is given priority). It is displayed on the screen).

Next, in FIGS. 145 and 146, with respect to the image of the decorative design (that is, the design of the decorative special image; the identification information), the image of the production information different from this (information for production different from the identification information) is on the rear side or An example of a reach start effect is shown as a specific example of a series of effect displays overlapping on the front side. It should be noted that, somewhere on the screen 41a, usually the fourth symbol is always displayed, and depending on the case, a starting memory hold display (including a special effect display by prefetching notice) is displayed. Illustration is omitted to avoid complication.
In this effect example, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), "7" as the left symbol KTL and "7" as the right symbol KTR of the decoration special image are displayed large on both sides of the center of the screen 41a. Thereafter, the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR are gradually reduced to a small size on the screen, and after the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), and then the state shown in FIG. 145 (c), shown in FIG. 146 (a). The display moves to the state. The dotted line with an arrow shown in FIG. 145 (a) shows the subsequent movement loci of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (the locus of moving to the upper corner after turning), and actually the screen 41a. (However, this may also be displayed as an effect).

  Then, when the images of the left symbol KTL (identification information) and the right symbol KTR (identification information) start moving, an image of the face of "tiger Taro" as the character C7 (image of effect information) appears on the screen 41a, and this is the screen. The display moves from the upper right side to the lower left side. At this time, in the state of FIG. 145 (b), the character C7 is displayed as if it is on the front side of the right symbol KTR by partially overlapping the right symbol KTR, and in the state of FIG. 145 (c), the left symbol KTL and the right symbol. It is displayed so as to be on the side (back side) opposite to the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR by partially overlapping the symbol KTR, and a dynamic effect display is realized. The dotted lines shown in FIG. 145 (b), FIG. 145 (c), and FIG. 146 (a) indicate the movement trajectory immediately before the character C7, and are not actually displayed on the screen 41a (however, this is also the case. It may be displayed as an effect).

  Further, in the state of FIG. 145 (c) in which the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR and the character C7 are gathered in the center and overlap with each other (the player is gazing at the center), the advance notice lottery process (for example, the above-mentioned steps D426 and D429). ), The color of the character C7 changes temporarily (or continuously thereafter) as shown in FIG. 146 (b), or the character C7 differs as shown in FIG. 146 (c). By temporarily (or continuously thereafter) changing to the character C6, for example, a notice effect that suggests the reliability of a big hit is performed. In this way, if the reliability suggestion is made by the display content or display mode of the character or the like in the state where the image of the special pattern (identification information) and the image of the character (effect information) overlap, the reliability suggestion is made by the player. It is extremely unlikely that the (notice) effect will be overlooked, and an effective notice effect display can be realized.

Note that the notice production that suggests the reliability is, for example, the contents of the data table of the notice distribution (lottery of notice contents of notice) used in steps D426 and D429 described above, for example, when a big hit occurs, the character C7 is displayed by a behavior or the like. The color may be changed (or changed to a specific color) with a high probability. By doing so, the player empirically feels that the color of the character C7 changes (or changes to a specific color), it is easy to hit the jackpot. Therefore, the change of the color of the character C7 causes the jackpot reliability to change. Can be suggested. The same applies to the other notice productions.
Further, even if there is no change in the color of the character C7, the series of reach start effects themselves shown in FIGS. 145 (a), 145 (b), 145 (c), and 146 (a) themselves are a big hit. It may be given as a notice of the degree. Also in this case, for example, if the reach start effect is easily executed in the case of a big hit, if the contents of the data table for lottery of the effect contents are set, the player is a big hit when the reach start effect is executed. Can be estimated to be prone to (i.e., the jackpot reliability can be suggested to the player).

Next, FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining one aspect of the state of each image and display layer in the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.
In the effect display, the effect control device 300 displays the character C7 on the front side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the specific example, the case of FIG. 145 (b)), as shown in FIG. 147 (a). The image (effect image) of the movie M1 which is a moving image of C7 as described above is arranged in the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). At the same time, an image GM1 obtained by copying a part including the image of the character C7 (effect information) in the image of the movie M1 is displayed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR. The characters are arranged and controlled so that the display positions (positions of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) of the character C7 in these images on the back side and the front side match. That is, the character C7 is drawn at the same position on the display layer before and after the design of the decorative special drawing (display layers are motions 5 to 7), and the character C7 is double drawn as a whole, but the front side is the back side. I used a copy of a part of the image. Since a part is copied, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and the image on the back side (for example, the image of the left design KTL and the right design KTR) can be used without making it semi-transparent. There is an effect that the visibility of decorative special drawings can be secured without unnecessarily covering up.

  In addition, in the effect display, when the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 at the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the specific example, in the case of FIG. 145 (c)), as shown in FIG. 147 (b). , The image of the movie M1 (image for production) is left on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information), and the left symbol KTL and the right symbol are left. The character C7 is not displayed on the display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the KTR. That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the decorative special drawing design (display layers are motions 5 to 7).

Next, FIGS. 148 and 149 are examples of the scenario table and motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 147.
Of these, the upper part of FIG. 148 is a scenario table used for the left symbol KTL in the scenario layer 1 (left symbol reach start effect), and the middle part of FIG. 148 is the scenario table used for the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2. (Right pattern reach start effect), and the lower part of FIG. 148 is a scenario table (Torataro reach start effect) used for the character C7 in the scenario layer 4.
Also, the upper part of FIG. 149 shows a motion table “Mdat0040” for controlling the image of the movie M1 (the image arranged at the back side), and the lower part of FIG. It is a motion table “Mdat0041” for controlling the image arranged on the side.

Hereinafter, each line of the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of "motion 5 registration code" is set as the operation code, and the data of "motion index No. (30)" is set as the operand. As a result, in the above-described motion registration processing in the scenario analysis processing of the scenario layer 1, the display by the motion table (not shown) designated by the data of the operand is performed (the display in which the left symbol KTL moves as described above). Is processed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of "constant wait code" is set as the operation code, and the data of "wait time value (60)" is set as the operand. As a result, the above-described constant wait processing is executed, and the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by the time (2 seconds) corresponding to 60 frames is realized. This is to wait until the display of the left symbol KTL moving to the upper corner of the screen ends.

Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of the "variable scenario switching code" is set as the operation code, and the data of the "left symbol scenario 3rd" is set as the operand. As a result, the variation scenario switching process is executed, and the scenario is switched from the first half variation to the second half variation (reach action) not shown.
Numerical values such as the wait time value and motion index in the table shown in FIG. 148 are merely specific examples for explanation, and are not necessarily the same as actual numerical values. The same applies to the tables in the other figures.
Next, since the scenario table (right symbol reach start effect) in the middle of FIG. 148 is the same as the scenario table (left symbol reach start effect) in the upper part of FIG. 148, the description for each line is omitted. However, here, since it is the right pattern, the scenario layer number is 2, and the motion number of the registration code in the first line is 6.

Next, each row of the scenario table (tiger Taro reach start effect) in the lower part of FIG. 148 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), the data of "motion 4 registration code" is set as the operation code, and the data of "motion index No. (40)" is set as the operand. As a result, in the above-described motion registration process in the scenario analysis process of the scenario layer 4, the display (the character C7 moves as described above) by the motion table (“Mdat0040” shown in the upper part of FIG. 149) designated by the data of the operand. A process for performing (display on the back side) is performed.
Next, in the second line (// 1), the data of "motion 8 registration code" is set as the operation code, and the data of "motion index No. (41)" is set as the operand. As a result, in the above-described motion registration processing in the scenario analysis processing of the scenario layer 4, the display (the character C7 moves as described above) by the motion table (“Mdat0041” shown in the lower part of FIG. 149) designated by the data of the operand. Processing for performing (display on the near side) is performed.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of "constant wait code" is set as the operation code, and data of "wait time value (30)" is set as the operand. As a result, the above-described constant wait processing is executed, and the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by the time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to be in a state of overlapping the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR at the center of the screen (state of FIG. 145 (c)).
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), the data of "motion 8 deletion code" is set as the operation code and "NULL" is set as the operand. As a result, the display in the motion 8 is stopped, the display of the character C7 on the front side disappears, and only the display control of the character C7 on the back side is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the character C7 is displayed. A display that appears to be on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR is realized.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), the data of "constant wait code" is set as the operation code, and the data of "wait time value (30)" is set as the operand. As a result, the above-described constant wait processing is executed, and the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table by the time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames is realized. This is to wait for the character C7 to move to the lower left side (the state of FIG. 146 (a)).
Next, in the sixth line (// 5), the data of "motion 4 deletion code" is set as the operation code, and "NULL" is set as the operand. As a result, the display of the motion 4 is not performed, and the display of the character C7 on the back side also disappears.
Next, in the seventh line (// 6), "end code" is set as the operation code and "NULL" is set as the operand. As a result, the effect control based on this scenario table ends.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to this motion table "Mdat0040", first, "Tiger Taro Movie 1" as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 in the first line (// 0), and then in the second line (// 1). , The image of "Tora Taro Movie 1" is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (that is, it is replaced according to the result of the advance notice lottery described above), and in the third line (// 2), It is displayed at the display position designated as the movie M1.
In this way, for example, when the character with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered in the motion table as a basic character and the character is changed (however within the range of the same kind of character) as the production progresses, By using the behavior (function to change the image data (character data) of the object (display element)) to change the basic character to another one in the control program, one motion table can support various display modes. Thus, for example, data (motion table) that can be used in common both when the player is out and when it is a big hit is used, so that the data capacity can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In the 4th line (// 3), a command "decode code" and a parameter "object index (0)" are set. This is the movie M1 with the object index 0 (basic " This is for executing the above-mentioned object moving image decoding process for decoding the "Torarou movie 1" or another movie replaced by a behavior) as needed. It is also possible to display the effect information of the character C7 or the like by still image data instead of a moving image. In this case (that is, when the object 0 registered in the first line is a still image), the fourth line is displayed. Is unnecessary.

Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 149 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0041”, first, “Tiger Taro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 on the first line (// 0), and then on the second line (// 1). , The image of "Tora Taro Movie 1" is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), this movie M1 (by the basic "Tora Taro Movie 1" or behavior A part of the image of the replaced (other movie) is copied and displayed at the display position designated as the image GM1. However, in the case of this example, the command "effect 1 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect type (1)" are set in the 5th line (// 4), and the 6th line Since the command “effect 2 code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “effect parameter (128)” are set in (// 5), the above-mentioned effect type designation processing and effect parameter designation processing are performed. The image that is executed and displayed as the image GM1 is controlled in a semi-transparent state with a transparency (darkness) of about 50% (= 100 × 128/255). However, the semitransparent state is not always necessary, and the mode such as the commands of the fifth to sixth lines may not be set.
Further, in the fourth line (// 3), "decode code" and "object index (0)" are set similarly to the motion table "Mdat0040".

  This motion table "Mdat0041" has the above-mentioned fifth and sixth lines for making the image semi-transparent, and the command on the third line is "copy 2 code" instead of movement code, so the motion is described above. Different from the table "Mdat0040", the numerical values of the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) and the size (width, height) of the display image on the third line are also different from the motion table "Mdat0040". . This is because the display by the motion table "Mdat0040" (display of the image of the movie M1 in the motion 4 on the back side) is "tiger Taro movie 1" (or another movie replaced by a behavior) in this case. While the entire image is displayed on the entire display screen 41a, the display by the motion table "Mdat0041" (the display of the image GM1 in the front motion 8) is "Tiger Taro Movie 1" ( Alternatively, only a part (a part including effect information of the replaced character C7 or the replaced character C6) of the image of the other movie replaced by the behavior) is located at a predetermined position on the display screen 41a (the character C7 in the motion 4 on the inner side). This is because it is displayed at the same display position as the image of. Therefore, the parameters in the third line of the motion table “Mdat0041” are, for example, “X coordinate (823)”, “Y coordinate (200)”, “width (200)”, and “height (200)”. There is. Since it is “width (200)” and “height (200)”, the image GM1 is a small rectangular image of 200 × 200. On the other hand, in the case of this example, the image of the movie M1 has the size of the entire screen of 1023 × 767. It should be noted that the numerical values such as these display positions are merely numerical examples for explanation, and are not necessarily actual numerical values.

The configuration of the scenario table and the like for realizing the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 to 147 is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 148 and 149, the character C7 (or another replaced character) is controlled using the scenario layer 4, but the scenario of scenario layer 1 or 2 in the upper part of FIG. 148 or the middle part of FIG. In the table, a line in which a code for registering the motion table “Mdat0040” or “Mdat0041” is set is added, and only the scenario layer 1 and the scenario layer 2 have a pattern (identification information) and a character (production information). ) Can also be controlled. On the contrary, in the scenario table of scenario layer 4 in the lower part of FIG. 148, the motion index No. (30) and No. It is also possible to add a line for executing motion registration etc. of (31) and control both the design and the character only with the scenario layer 4.
Further, when the motion layers are different, the motion layers in which the character C7 and the like are arranged are not limited to the motion 4 and the motion 8, and any motion can be used as long as it is before and after the motions 5 to 7 which are the symbol display layers. Can be a layer. That is, in principle, the image of the character C7 or the like placed on the back side of the design (identification information) may be placed in any of the motions 0 to 4, and the character C7 placed on the front side of the design (identification information). The images such as "" may be arranged in any of the motions 8 to 13.

  Further, in this example of production, in order to arrange the character C7 or the like (effect information) on the back side or the front side of the design (identification information) of the decorative special figure, the motion layer of the character C7 or the like is made different from the left pattern KTL or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display priority may be set by changing the object index according to the order of arrangement before and after. That is, for the movie M1 on the back side, the same as in FIG. 147 (a) by arranging in the same motion 5 as the left symbol KTL and setting the object index to a value smaller than the left symbol KTL. The context (display priority) can be realized. Also, with regard to the image GM1 obtained by copying the movie M1 on the front side, it is arranged in the same motion 6 as the right symbol KTR, and the object index is set to a value larger than that of the right symbol KTR. The same context as in (a) can be realized. However, in this case, as the configuration of the table, for example, the motion index No. registered in the first row in the upper part of FIG. In the motion table designated by (30), in addition to the left symbol, an object such as the character C7 (which is arranged on the back side) is registered and controlled, and the motion index registered in the first line in the middle of FIG. 148. No. In the motion table designated by (31), in addition to the right pattern, an object such as the character C7 (arranged on the front side) is registered and controlled, and the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 148 is unnecessary.

  In addition, in the present production example, the production information is arranged and displayed on the front side or the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, which are identification information, and is added to the identification information as shown in FIG. Although the additional information such as the character C7 “Toro Taro” is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. The production information other than the above additional information may be used, or an inanimate object (for example, "rose flower", "flame", a specific figure, etc.) may be displayed as the production information instead of the person or creature such as "tiger Taro". Good.

Next, FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining a state (another aspect) of each image and display layer that realizes the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. As shown in FIG. 150, the effect display shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 can also be realized by the following configuration.
That is, in the effect display, when the effect control device 300 shows the character C7 to the front side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the specific example, the case of FIG. 145 (b)), as shown in FIG. 150 (a). , The image of the movie M1 (effect image), which is the moving image of the character C7 as described above, is displayed on the display layer (motion 4; notice 4) on the back side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR (identification information). Along with the arrangement, the same image of the movie M1 is made semi-transparent, and is arranged in a display layer (motion 8; notice 5) on the front side of the left symbol KTL and the right symbol KTR, in the images on the back side and the front side. The configuration may be such that the display position of the character C7 (the position of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate) matches. That is, in this alternative mode, the character C7 is drawn at the same position on the display layer before and after the design of the decorative special drawing (the display layers are motions 5 to 7), and the character C7 is drawn double as a whole. The side uses the same semi-transparent image as the back side. Since the images are the same, the original data (image data registered in the image ROM 322) can be used, and the semi-transparent shape can ensure the visibility of the decorative special drawing on the back side.

  Further, when the character C7 is shown on the back side of the right symbol KTR or the like (in the specific example, the case of FIG. 145 (c)), as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the image of the movie M1 (production image) ), The left design KTL and the right design KTR (identification information), the display layer on the back side (motion 4; notice 4) is left, and the display layer (motion) on the front side of the left design KTL and the right design KTR (motion). 8: The character C7 is not displayed in the notice 5). That is, the character C7 is drawn only on the display layer on the back side of the decorative special drawing design (display layers are motions 5 to 7). This is the same as FIG. 147 (b).

Next, FIG. 151 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146 with the configuration of FIG. 150. Note that the same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, since the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 151 is exactly the same as that in the upper part of FIG. 149, description thereof will be omitted.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 151 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0041”, first, “Tiger Taro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 on the first line (// 0), and then on the second line (// 1). , The image of "Tora Taro Movie 1" is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), this movie M1 (by the basic "Tora Taro Movie 1" or behavior The entire image of the replaced movie) is displayed on the specified screen. However, the command "effect 1 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect type (1)" are set on the 5th line (// 4), and the "effect 1 code" is set on the 6th line (// 5). Since the command "effect 2 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect parameter (64)" are set, the above-mentioned effect type designation processing and effect parameter designation processing are executed, and the movie M1 The image displayed as an image is controlled in a semi-transparent state with a transparency (darkness) of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

  The motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 151 differs from the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 149 in that the command on the third line is a movement code, and the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) on the third line is further different. The numerical values of the parameters of the size (width, height) of the display image are the same as those of the motion table “Mdat0040”. This is because the display by the motion table "Mdat0041" in this case is the same as the display by the motion table "Mdat0040", and the entire image of the "tiger Taro movie 1" (or another movie replaced by the behavior) is displayed on the screen. This is because it is displayed on the entire 41a. Even when the entire image of the movie M1 is displayed, it is not limited to the mode in which it is displayed in the entire display screen 41a, and there may be a mode in which it is displayed in the limited area of the display screen 41a depending on the effect contents.

Next, FIG. 152 is a modification of the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 145 to 146.
First, in FIG. 152 (a), the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the back side differs from the display position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) of the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the front side. This is a mode in which two images appear with a shift, and for example, the display position shifts while moving. The display position may be temporarily shifted at a specific timing, and may be one effect display that does not shift except at a specific timing.
Next, in FIG. 152 (b), the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the back side is different from the image of the character C7 or the like displayed on the front side in a reversed state (only one side is reversed), This is a mode in which two characters C7 and the like appear symmetrically and move, for example, in different inverted states. The reversal state may be temporarily different at a specific timing, and may be one effect display that does not change except at a specific timing.

  According to the effect display shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the shift of the display position and the difference in the inversion state make the player looking at the display screen 41a feel uncomfortable, and thereby the novelty. A highly attractive presentation display is realized. Note that other effect displays are similar, but the effect displays shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b) suggest the reliability such as whether or not a big hit or whether or not there is a probability variation. It can be performed as a notice production. For example, in the case of a big hit, the contents of the table used in the lottery are set so that the player can easily perform the lottery in the manner of the effect display shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b). When appears, it can be empirically understood that it is easy to make a big hit, and the reliability can be suggested.

Next, FIG. 153 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. Note that the same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, in the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 153, only the “end code” is set as a command in the first line, the second line, and the third line. It is exactly the same as after the eyes.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 153 is exactly the same as the motion table in the lower part of FIG. 151.
As described above, since the display control for one frame is ended by the “end code”, if the “end code” is set in the first three lines only in the motion layer on the back side, For 3 frames, nothing is displayed by the motion table of the display layer on the back side, and the display of the movie M1 on the back side starts with a delay of 3 frames (0.1 seconds) from the front side. Will be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the display positions of the images of the effect information on the front side and the back side are displaced.

Next, FIG. 154 is an example of a motion table for realizing the effect display (reach start effect) shown in FIG. 152 (b). Note that the same scenario table as in FIG. 148 can be used.
First, the motion table “Mdat0040” in the upper part of FIG. 154 is exactly the same as that in the upper part of FIG. 149.
Next, the motion table “Mdat0041” in the lower part of FIG. 154 will be described.
According to this motion table “Mdat0041”, first, “Tiger Taro Movie 1” as the movie M1 is registered as the object index 0 on the first line (// 0), and then on the second line (// 1). , The image of "Tora Taro Movie 1" is appropriately replaced by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0, and in the third line (// 2), this movie M1 (by the basic "Tora Taro Movie 1" or behavior The image of the replaced other movie) is inverted in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and in this case, it is displayed on the entire display screen 41a. Also in this example, the command "effect 1 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect type (1)" are set in the fifth line (// 4), and the sixth line ( Since the command "effect 2 code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "effect parameter (64)" are set in // 5), the image of the movie M1 displayed on the front side has transparency ( The density is controlled to be a semi-transparent state with a density of about 25% (= 100 × 64/255).

This motion table "Mdat0041" has the above-mentioned fifth and sixth lines for making the image semi-transparent, and the command on the third line is the "reverse 2 code" instead of the movement code. It is different from the table "Mdat0040". Thereby, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the display positions of the image of the effect information on the front side and the image on the back side are symmetrical.
It should be noted that the direction of reversal may be the vertical direction instead of the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), or may be the relationship in which the positions are converted so as to be point-symmetrical.

  Next, in FIGS. 155 to 158, an image of a plurality of effect information different from the design (identification information) of the decoration special image is displayed in an area different from the variable display area of the decoration special drawing on the screen 41a of the display unit (display device 41). In the SD mode, which includes a notification effect for displaying the mode or the result (in the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the reach action) of the variable display game of the special figure by the combination of the displayed effect information among the plurality of effect information. It shows an example of. However, FIG. 155 (a) shows a display example of normal fluctuation for comparison. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed somewhere on the screen 41a, and in some cases, a starting memory holding display for special maps (including a special effect display by prefetching notice) is displayed, but this display is complicated. In order to avoid

First, FIG. 155 (a) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a display example of normal fluctuation. In this case, the entire display screen 41a is a variable display area for variably displaying the decorative special figure (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC). In this case, there are nine types of symbols (identification information) that make up the decorative special map, from "1" to "9", and as shown in FIG. 155 (a), effect information is added to each as additional information (corresponding Attached). For example, "6" is a picture of the face of Tiger Skull C6 and its name, "7" is the picture of the face of Tiger Taro C7 and its name, and "8" is the Tiger Lock C8. The face picture and the characters representing the name are added respectively, and some effect information (not shown) is also added to the other "1" to "5" and "9". Needless to say, the effect information to be added is not limited to a character having a tiger motif, and may be a person, an animal, a plant, a fictitious creature, or an inanimate creature.
It should be noted that in the drawings of the following display examples, the description of the symbols (including the leader line) of characters such as C6 to C8 may be appropriately omitted.

  Next, FIG. 155 (b) and subsequent figures, which are the first example of the SD mode effect, will be described. Here, "SD" means super deformation. Deformation is generally a transformation and distortion of an object. The SD mode is a mode in which a character used for additional information of a decorative special figure is actually highly deformed and appears, but in the drawings of the present application, the diagram is simplified and easy to see. For securing and the like, the characters are illustrated in the same manner regardless of the presence or absence of deformation. Note that the SD mode effect of this example is performed in a normal state that is not the probability variation mode (the special jackpot probability is a low probability state), but is performed in the probability variation mode (the special figure jackpot probability is a high probability state). Good.

  When this SD mode effect (first example) is started, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), the variable display area H1 of the decorative special figure is displayed as a small rectangular area in the upper right corner of the screen 41a, and thereafter. In the variable display area H1, the decorative special drawing (left symbol KTL, right symbol KTR, middle symbol KTC) is variably displayed, and the area excluding the variable display area H1 on the screen 41a (hereinafter referred to as the main screen area). Then, effect display is performed using a plurality of effect information different from the identification information (in this case, the numbers “1” to “9”). In FIG. 155 (b), the display of each image of the sky C10, the ground C11 including a road, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 (sun or moon) is started in the main screen area. Here, the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 all correspond to a kind of effect information different from the identification information, and in terms of effect contents, form a background of a character such as "tiger taro" that appears later. It is also the background information to do.

Of these, the sky C10 is a light blue image that is displayed on the deepest side of the displayed objects, for example, on the entire screen and represents, for example, a blue sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b). The ground C11 is an image of the ground including the road displayed at the bottom of the screen and extending from the front side to the back side of the screen, and is displayed so as to appear to move (scroll) to the back side. In the case of this example, the peripheral scenery C12 is, for example, an image of a coniferous forest displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the screen, and is also displayed so as to appear to move (scroll) to the back side. The celestial body C13 is the sun that appears in the sky at the time of FIG. 155 (b), and at this time, the celestial body C13 is displayed so as to gradually move so as to rise from the left side of the screen corresponding to the east side of the sky.
Here, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are images in which the viewer feels a perspective as the road on the ground C11 extends from the front to the back. Specifically, it is an image in which the vanishing point (infinity point) in perspective is located near the upper end position of the center of the road displayed in the lower center of the screen.

Then, as indicated by a dotted line with an arrow in FIG. 155 (b), the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are displayed as if they are moving toward this vanishing point, so that the location is moving toward the front side. The display that looks like is started. The ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 that are displayed so as to move in this way are background information that realizes a first parameter indicating the passage of time (a first parameter that makes the player viewing the display feel the passage of time). .
In addition, the brightness and color of the sky C10 are displayed so as to change thereafter in accordance with the movement of the celestial body C13 described above, whereby time changes of morning, daytime, evening, and night are expressed. That is, the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are background information that realizes the second parameter indicating the passage of time (the second parameter that makes the player viewing the display feel the passage of time). At the time of FIG. 155 (b), the sky C10 and the celestial body C13 represent morning.

In the drawings of the following display examples, reference numerals (including the leader line) of the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, the celestial body C13, etc. may be omitted as appropriate.
Further, it goes without saying that the concrete mode of the effect information and background information such as the sky C10, the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 is not limited. For example, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are not limited to the coniferous forest, and may be, for example, an image of a rose garden, a building street, or any other type.
Further, the dotted line with an arrow shown in the drawing of the display example shows the movement of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12, and when it is moving, it is also described in the following figures, but in reality, It is not displayed on the screen 41a (however, this may also be displayed as an effect).

In the SD mode effect (first example), after the display shown in FIG. 155 (b) described above is first performed for a short time, then, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), the character as effect information near the vanishing point. Appears in the left and right adjacent positions. In the example of FIG. 155 (c), a tiger lock C8 and a tiger taro C7 (a state where there is a body in addition to the face) have appeared. Here, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), these characters are displayed in a small size near the vanishing point so that they appear to be on the far side (far side) of the ground C11 on the road. Is displayed in a mode (for example, a limb state) that seems to be moving forward (walking, running, etc.) from the front to the front. That is, the display (that is, the variable display) in which the image of the character such as the Tiger Taro C7 displayed near the vanishing point moves (scrolls) toward the front side is started. This movement of the character toward the front side is relatively more realistic due to the display such as the movement toward the back side of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12.
The left and right characters may not appear at the same time but may appear with a time difference, or may be displayed so that there is a difference in front and back positions. In addition, at the time of FIG. 155 (c), the state (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 is a state representing daytime. In particular, the image of the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state of rising to a high position in the sky.

Next, after going through the state of FIG. 155 (c), the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taroo C7 are gradually displayed larger at the bottom of the screen, thereby further advancing toward the front side, and FIG. 156 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 156 (b), the tiger lock C8 and the tiger tarro C7 have moved to the foremost side and stopped for a moment and then disappeared. In the case of this example, the tiger lock C8 and the tiger taro C7 are not in a state in which a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (production information)) are in a predetermined combination (in a state where they are aligned). It is not an alarm.
At the time of FIG. 156 (a), the states of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are still in the state of representing daytime. However, the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state in which it is slightly lower than the one shown in FIG.
Next, after the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the following two characters (in this case, tiger skeleton C6 and tiger taro C7) are on the far side (far). Is displayed as if it were

After that, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a mode in which these tiger skates C6 and tiger taro C7 appear to be moving (walking, running, etc.) from the back side toward the front side ( For example, while being displayed in the state of the limbs), the display is gradually enlarged at the bottom of the screen to move forward.
Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), the presence or absence of the reach is notified by the tiger lock C8 and the tiger tarro C7 moving to the foremost side and stopping for a moment. In the case of this example, since the tiger skeleton C6 and the tiger taro C7 are in a state where a plurality of characters (in this case, two characters (effect information)) are in a predetermined combination (in a state where they are aligned), a reach occurrence notification is given. Become. In this case, "reach!", Which is the line C15 of the tiger skeleton C6, and "daze ~!", Which is the line C16 of the tiger taro C7, are displayed to surely notify the player of the reach occurrence. Although not shown in the figure, if no reach is generated, a dialogue image such as “reach” or “failure” may be displayed. In any case, the image of the dialogue may or may not be present, and the presence / absence of the reach may be notified only by the combination of the character types.

  According to the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b) described above, a plurality of effect information that is not identification information is displayed in an area different from the variable display of the identification information, and the effect information displayed is displayed. In order to perform the notification effect to notify by the combination, effect information having a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character used for additional information of a pattern having a low appearance rate such as "tiger Taro C7") also appears in the notification effect. Also, it is possible to cause effect information that is not the additional information of the decoration special figure to appear, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced, and an easy-to-understand and dynamic notification effect becomes possible. In particular, as in this embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), a variable display area H1 for performing variable display of identification information (design of decorative special drawing) is arranged at the corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining area in the screen is In a mode in which the effect information for the notification effect is displayed in the area (main screen area) having a larger area than the variable display area H1, the notification information can be more easily understood and dynamic.

The number of types of characters (effect information) displayed in the main screen area as the notification effect is the number of symbols in the decorative special drawing (the number of types of identification information; 9 in this embodiment, "1" to "9"). The number may be the same as, the number may be more or less than that. That is, even in a mode in which all the additional information of the decorative special drawing (in the specific example, the characters such as "tiger skeleton C6", "tiger taro C7", "tiger lock C8" ...) appears in the notification effect. Good, a mode in which a part of the additional information appears (for example, a mode in which the additional information is divided into groups, only a specific group of a plurality of groups is appropriately selected, and only the characters of the selected group appear) ), The form in which effect information other than the additional information appears in addition to the additional information, or the form in which only effect information other than the additional information appears.
In the effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 157 (b), the effect information to be displayed in the main screen area is displayed in the variable display area H1 of the decorative special map in the variable display direction (vertical direction). ) Is displayed in a different direction (front-back direction), the effect is that dynamic and entertaining production with various movements is realized on the entire screen.

Here, as described above, the variation display in the front-back direction from the back side to the front side of the character, in which a plurality of characters (effect information) appear from the back side, move to the front side, and disappear, is not limited to twice. It may be performed three times or more times. Further, the switching of the type of character (effect information) may be performed while the character is moving from the back side to the front side. For example, at or before and after the time point of FIG. 157 (a), the tiger rake C6 on the left side is instantly changed to the tiger tarro C7, and at the time point of FIG. It is also possible to have a predetermined combination.
Further, in this display example, the variable display of the character in the front-rear direction is repeated until the state of the celestial body C13 and the state of the sky C10 are switched to the state representing night, as described later, but the present invention is not limited to this pattern. For example, the fluctuation display of the character in the front-rear direction ends before night (or before noon), and then the game moves to the reach, or the fluctuation display game of the special figure ends without reach (out). There may be patterns.

  In addition, at the time points of FIGS. 156 (b) and 156 (c), the states (display position, display color, brightness, etc.) of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 are in a state of representing the evening. In particular, in FIG. 156 (b), the sun as the celestial body C13 is displayed in a state of being moved to a position lower than that at the time point of FIG. 156 (a), and at the time point of FIG. 156 (c), the sun as the celestial body C13 is further displayed. Displayed just before moving and sinking to the horizon. Then, at the time of FIG. 157 (a), the state of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (display form, display position, display color, brightness, etc.) becomes a state representing night. In particular, an image of the moon is displayed as the celestial body C13 instead of the sun, and thereafter, in FIGS. 157 (b) and 157 (c), the moon is displayed in such a state that the movement of the moon is sequentially advanced. In this way, the second parameter indicating the lapse of time is realized by the image change of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10. Particularly, in this example, the second parameter (the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 (background information) is used for the expression. (Elapsed time elapsed) is switched from the evening to the night, for example, a new appearance from the back side of the character (switching of the type of the character (effect information) that is variably displayed) is not performed after that, and the front side at that time. If the moving characters are not arranged in a predetermined combination, the reach is not generated. In other words, although it is background information, the image of the celestial body C13 and the sky C10 is in the state of representing the night, so that it is possible to inform the player that it is the last chance of the reach generation, that is, the reach generation effect period is over. Has become.

In this way, by changing the image of the background information, it is possible to suggest or notify the period of some performance or the start, progress, end, etc. of the game state.
It should be noted that such an image change of the background information can realize a notice effect that suggests reliability (reliability occurrence reliability, or jackpot reliability, reliability that becomes a high probability after a jackpot, etc.). For example, if the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the second parameter will advance to night is high, and if it is outside, the probability that the variable display of the character in the front-rear direction will end before the second parameter becomes night is high. If the contents of the table used for the effect lottery (preliminary lottery) are set, the player will recognize that the image of the background information is a hot effect at night and is likely to be a big hit.
Further, the notice effect suggesting the reliability can be realized also by the presence / absence of other effect information appearing in the reach occurrence notification effect described above and the image change (other than the image change of the background information). For example, it is also possible to suggest the reliability by the type of combination of characters that have notified the occurrence of reach (for example, a combination of tiger Taro C7 is likely to be a big hit).

Next, the display example shown in FIG. 157 (c) is an example of the reach action started after the state of FIG. 157 (b), and the movable accessory 700 on the lower side of the screen (with respect to the display screen 41a of the display means) is displayed. This is an example of an accessory-linked effect that is linked with a movable accessory that can be moved. In this case, the movable accessory 700 swings to a position at an angle of 40 degrees, and a rope C17 (an interlocking image that changes in association with the movement of the movable accessory) pulling the movable accessory 700 is newly displayed on the screen 41a. For example, the image of the tiger skeleton C6 disappearing, and the tiger taro C7 holding the end of the rope C17 and pulling the movable accessory 700 to the upright state (an interlocking movement that changes in association with the movement of the movable accessory) is displayed. Image) is also displayed. At the same time, in the variable display area H1 of the decorative special diagram, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped together in the same symbol, and only the middle symbol is varied (in this case, scrolling vertically), the reach action of the symbol (identification information) is performed. Be seen. As a result, it becomes possible to produce a reach action related to the accessory and display, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.
It should be noted that the accessory-linked effect as described above is a notice effect that suggests (announces) some degree of reliability (reliability of reach, reliability of big hit, or reliability of high probability state (probability change)). Can be done as
Further, in the present application, "linked to a character" means that the character is linked to the motion of the character, and "preliminary character-related notice" or "characteristic-linked effect" means the motion of the character and display contents (display). Not only this, but may also include a sound or the like that is output for presentation). Further, in the present application, “interlocking” means changing with some relation, and does not necessarily mean synchronization. “Synchronized” also includes a mode in which the motions are not synchronized, for example, a related motion is delayed by a predetermined amount, and a motion in which the motions are exactly opposite to each other. Further, the mode of movement of the movable accessory is not limited to rotation and swing, and may be linear or curved movement (parallel movement; so-called slide movement), or a combination of rotation and parallel movement. But it's okay.

  Then, when the result of the reach is disengaged, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger taro C7 fails to raise the movable accessory 700 to the standing state is displayed, and the variable display game of the special figure is ended. . On the other hand, in the case of a big hit as a result of the reach, for example, an image (not shown) in which the tiger Taro C7 succeeded in raising the movable accessory 700 to the standing state is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, even in the case of a big hit, the image in which Torataro C7 has succeeded in raising the movable accessory 700 to the standing state is not displayed, and will be described suddenly from the state of FIG. 157 (c). You may shift to the state of FIG. 158 (a).

  Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (a) is an example of a blackout effect started after the state of FIG. 157 (c). As shown in FIG. 158 (a), a blackout image C20 that fills at least the entire main screen area with, for example, black is displayed. For example, all audio output is temporarily stopped, and a predetermined music or The sound effect begins to flow at a low volume and gradually increases. At this time, the entire screen 41a including the variable display area H1 of the decorative special figure may be filled with the blackout image C20 except for the fourth pattern. The color of the blackout image C20 is not limited to black, and may be dark blue or gray, for example. According to such a blackout effect, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether it is a big hit or not, even more, it may be a game machine failure, it is unclear what happened. , By raising the expectation and anxiety of the big hits of the player with a novel production, it is possible to realize an unprecedented entertainment.

It should be noted that this blackout effect is performed only when it is a big hit (or is performed with a high probability when it is a big hit), and it is a big hit (or its reliability) to the player by this effect. It may be suggested to enhance the excitement and joy of the player who becomes a big hit, but as a configuration that is performed with a predetermined probability even when it comes off, it gives the player a slight anxiety that it may be out, As a result, it may be possible to increase the joy in the event of a big hit.
In addition, in FIG. 158 (a), the movable accessory 700 is in a standing state, but during this blackout effect, the movable accessory 700 may be in a state of, for example, an angle of 40 degrees, or may fall substantially horizontally. You may have returned to the initial state.

  Next, the display example shown in FIG. 158 (b) is an example of a big hit notification effect (effect at the time of the stop display of the decorative special figure) started after the state of FIG. 157 (a). In this case, the movable accessory 700 is, for example, in a standing state, and the image of the rose C21 (interlocking image for the accessory, related image), which is the performance information related to the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700, is displayed on the screen 41a. Various displays will be displayed to celebrate and increase the joy of becoming a big hit. At this time, the rose flower (the real thing which is not the image) of the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700 and the screen 41a displaying the rose flower C21 which is the image are displayed so as to look like one painting as a whole. The effect is enhanced. Also, as the voice, for example, the music started to be reproduced in the state of FIG. 157 (a) is continuously output, but the music having a dark tone at the time of FIG. 157 (a) is changed to that of FIG. 157 (b). When the situation is reached, for example, the production changes to a bright and cheerful tone to celebrate the big hit. Further, at this time, in the variable display area H1 of the decoration special map, for example, a stop display is performed with a big hit pattern in which the decoration special map is "7, 7, 7" (all additional information is Torarou C7). At this time, the variable display area H1 may be enlarged and displayed so that the stop symbol of the decorative special figure is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, FIGS. 159 to 161 are examples of scenario tables for realizing the effect display (including the reach start effect) shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. The detailed description of the motion table used in this display example is omitted.
Of these, the upper part of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used in the scenario layer 0 for the background (in this case, for the display control of the sky C10 described above).
Next, the middle stage of FIG. 159 is a scenario table used for controlling the opening stage (1st) of the left pattern KTL and the like (including the above-mentioned ground C11, peripheral scenery C12, celestial body C13, etc.) in the scenario layer 1, and the lower stage of FIG. 159. The scenario table used in controlling the first half (2nd) of the left symbol KTL or the like in the scenario layer 1, and FIG. 160 is the scenario table used in the latter half (3rd) control of the left symbol KTL or the like in the scenario layer 1. Is.

Next, the first from the top of FIG. 161 (uppermost) is a scenario table used for controlling the opening (1st) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2, and the second from the top of FIG. 161 is the scenario layer. 2 is a scenario table used to control the first half (2nd) of the right symbol KTR, and the third from the top of FIG. 161 is a scenario table used to control the second half (3rd) of the right symbol KTR in the scenario layer 2. Is.
Further, the fourth from the top of FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for controlling the opening (1st) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3, and the fifth from the top of FIG. 161 is the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3. Is a scenario table used for the control of the first half (2nd) of FIG. 161 and the sixth from the top of FIG. 161 is a scenario table used for the control of the second half (3rd) of the middle symbol KTC in the scenario layer 3.
Numerical values such as wait time values and motion indexes in the tables shown in FIGS. 159 to 161 are merely specific examples for explanation, and are not necessarily the same as actual numerical values. The same applies to the tables in the other figures.

Each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 0; background) in the upper part of FIG. 159 will be described below.
In the first line (// 0), data of "motion 0 registration code" and "motion index No. (81)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (81) (display by the moving image or the still image of the opening and the first half of the sky C10) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (270)" data is set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time period (9 seconds) corresponding to 270 frames. This is for displaying the beginning and the first half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from the morning of FIG. 155 (b) to the night of FIG. 157 (a)).

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of "motion 0 registration code" and "motion index No. (82)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) in (82) (display by the moving image or the still image in the latter half of the sky C10) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (375)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time period (12.5 seconds) corresponding to 375 frames. This is for displaying the latter half of the sky C10 (display of the sky C10 from the night of FIG. 157 (b) to the state of FIG. 158 (b)). Note that the display of the sky C10 is hidden by the blackout image C20 at the time of FIG. 158 (a), but is not visible even at the time of FIG. 158 (b), for example, as the background of the rose C21. Good.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), "end code" and "NULL" data are set. As a result, the control in the scenario layer 0 is not performed and the display of the sky C10 disappears.

Next, each line of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the left pattern beginning part) in the middle of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of "motion 4 registration code" and "motion index No. (83)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display (display of the image (moving image or still image) representing the variable display area H1) by the motion table (not shown) of (83) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of "motion 3 registration code" and "motion index No. (84)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (84) (display of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 in the beginning and the first half of the moving image or still image) is started. In this motion table, the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 are controlled as different objects, for example.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of "motion 2 registration code" and "motion index No. (85)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (85) (display by the moving image or the still image of the opening and the first half of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), the data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (30)” are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (30) (variable display by the moving image or the still image of the opening stage of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.

Next, in the fifth line (// 4), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (30)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames. This is because the early stage presentation by each display started by the control of the scenario table up to this point is performed for the time.
Next, in the 6th line (// 5), the data of “variable scenario switching code” and “left symbol scenario 2nd” are set. As a result, the scenario is switched from the initial fluctuation to the first-half fluctuation based on the scenario table in the lower part of FIG. 159, for example.
Each image whose display has been started by controlling the scenario table up to this point is placed in the motion layer (display layer) corresponding to the motion number to determine the context (display priority) (larger motion number). The fact that the display is preferentially displayed as the front side is as described in FIG. 144 (the same applies to the scenario table described below). For example, since the variable display area H1 is displayed in motion 4 in the first row of the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 159, the empty C10 displayed in motion 0 in the first and third rows of the scenario table in the upper part of FIG. 159. Alternatively, the second and third lines of the scenario table in the middle of FIG. 159 gives priority display so that it can be seen in front of the ground C11, the surrounding scenery C12, and the celestial body C13 displayed in motion 3 or motion 2, and these images are displayed. Not hidden by.

Next, each row of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the first half of the left pattern) in the lower part of FIG. 159 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of "motion 5 registration code" and "motion index No. (31)" are set. As a result, the motion index number. Instead of the display by the motion table (not shown) in (30), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (31) (variable display by the moving image or the still image of the first half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), data of "motion 8 registration code" and "motion index No. (86)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (86) (variable display by the moving image or the still image of the character on the left side in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the third line (// 2), the data of "motion 9 registration code" and "motion index No. (87)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display of the motion table (not shown) of (87) (variable display of the right character in the main screen area by a moving image or a still image) is started.
That is, according to the second and third lines, the variable display in the front-rear direction in the left and right two columns in the main screen area of the character such as Torarou C7 described in FIG. 155 (c) and FIG. 156 is started. It

Next, in the fourth line (// 3), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (240)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (8 seconds) corresponding to 240 frames. This is because the first half of the presentation including the variable display of the left symbol in the variable display area H1 and the variable display of the character in the front-back direction in the main screen area is performed for the time.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), the data of the "variable scenario switching code" and the "left symbol scenario 3rd" are set. As a result, when there is reach, the scenario is switched from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation (reach action) based on the scenario table of FIG. 160, for example.

Next, each line of the scenario table (scenario layer 1; the latter half of the left pattern) of FIG. 160 will be described.
In the first line (// 0), data of "motion 8 registration code" and "motion index No. (88)" are set. As a result, the motion index number. Instead of the display by the motion table of (86), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (88) (stop display by the moving image or the still image of the left character in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in the second line (// 1), "motion 9 registration code" and "motion index No. (89)" data are set. As a result, the motion index number. Instead of the display by the motion table of (87), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) in (89) (stop display by the moving image or the still image of the character on the right side in the main screen area) is started.

Next, in the third line (// 2), data of "motion 3 registration code" and "motion index No. (90)" are set. As a result, the motion index number. Instead of the display by the motion table of (84), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (90) (display by the moving image or the still image in the latter half of the ground C11 and the peripheral scenery C12) is started.
Next, in the fourth line (// 3), data of "motion 2 registration code" and "motion index No. (91)" are set. As a result, the motion index number. Instead of the display by the motion table of (85), the motion index No. The display of the motion table (not shown) of (91) (display of the moving image or the still image of the latter half of the celestial body C13) is started.
Next, in the fifth line (// 4), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (30)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1 second) corresponding to 30 frames.
Here, according to the first to fifth lines, the display for notifying the reach occurrence described with reference to FIG. 157 (b) is performed for the specified time (1 second). At this time, the images of the dialogue C15 and the dialogue C16 described above are, for example, the motion index No. (88) and motion index No. In the motion table of (89), for example, it is controlled and displayed as an object separate from a character such as Torataro C7.

Next, in the 6th line (// 5), "stop symbol set code (left symbol)" and "NULL" are set. Thereby, the above-mentioned symbol stop processing is executed for the left symbol, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the decorative special figure is set.
Next, in the seventh line (// 6), the data of “motion 5 registration code” and “motion index No. (32)” are set. As a result, the motion index number. Instead of the display by the motion table (not shown) in (31), the motion index No. The display by the motion table (not shown) of (32) (stop display by the moving image or the still image of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) is started.
Next, in the eighth line (// 7), "motion 8 deletion code" and "NULL" are set. As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, the display in the motion 8 is not performed, and the display of the character on the left side (for example, “Torasuke C6”) in the main screen area disappears.
Next, in the ninth line (// 8), "motion 9 deletion code" and "NULL" are set. As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, the display in the motion 9 is not performed, and the display of the character on the right side (for example, "Torataro C7") in the main screen area disappears.

Next, in the 10th line (// 9), "role position code" and "role position number (4)" are set. The “accessory position code” is an operation code for instructing the setting change of the state of the movable accessory 700 (whether the initial state or the standing state) (that is, the movement (state change) of the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700). For example, "role position No. (9)" commands the standing state of the movable role 700, and "role position No. (4)" commands the state where the movable role 700 is at an angle of 40 degrees. Data. As a result, in the process corresponding to the "role position code" in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted with dashed lines in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable role 700 are slanted as shown in FIG. 157 (c). A control process for setting an angle of 40 degrees is executed.
As other data of the operand corresponding to the "role position code", there is "role position No. (0)" for instructing the initial state of the movable role 700, and further, the decoration unit 701 is in the initial state. "Position position No. (1)" for instructing a state displaced by an angle of 10 degrees from the initial state, and a state in which the decorative portion 701 is displaced by an angle of 20 degrees for an upright state from the initial state “Position position No. (2)”, “Position position No. (3)” for instructing a state in which the decorative portion 701 is displaced toward the standing state by an angle of 30 degrees from the initial state, and so on. Various types of commands for instructing the state of each angle between the initial state and the standing state may be set.

Next, in the 11th line (// 10), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (15)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time period (0.5 seconds) corresponding to 15 frames. This is because it waits for the movable accessory 700 to be in a state of an angle of 45 degrees from the initial state.
Next, in the 12th line (// 11), the data of "motion 8 registration code" and "motion index No. (92)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display of the motion table (not shown) of (92) (display of the linked image in the main screen area as a moving image or a still image) is started. The interlocking image is, for example, the image of the rope C17 described above or the tiger tallow C7 pulling the rope C17.
Next, in the 13th line (// 12), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (45)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1.5 seconds) corresponding to 45 frames.
In the scenario table, the code between wait time values and the wait time value (the opcode of the line between the line in which the constant wait code etc. is set and the line in which the constant wait code etc. is set next) Are all executed at the same time. For example, in the case of FIG. 160, constant weight codes, etc. are provided on the first line (// 0) to the fourth line (// 3) and the sixth line (// 5) to the tenth line (// 9). Since there is no line set for, the first line (// 0) to the fourth line (// 3) and the sixth line (// 5) to the tenth line (// 9) are all at the same time. To be executed.

According to the sixth to thirteenth lines described above, the reach action effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above (the effect in which the movable accessory 700 and the effect display of the main screen area are interlocked, and the variable display area H1 is left). The effect of reach action in which the symbol and the right symbol stop and the middle symbol changes) is performed for a total of 2 seconds.
Then, when the reach is released due to the presence of the reach, for example, after that, a stop display of the detached symbol or the like (not shown) is performed, and control for returning the movable accessory 700 to the initial state is performed. Is an example of a table that is selected when a big hit occurs, and thereafter control for a big hit is performed.

That is, in the next 14th line (// 13), "role position code" and "role position number (9)" are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the "role position code" in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted by the broken line in FIG. 105), the decorative portion 701 and the like of the movable accessory 700 are erected as shown in FIG. 158 (a). The control process for setting the state is executed.
Next, in the 15th line (// 14), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (45)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (1.5 seconds) corresponding to 45 frames.
According to the 14th to 15th lines described above, through the reach action effect shown in FIG. 157 (c) described above, the action of moving the movable accessory 700 to the upright state, and the movement of the Tiger Taro C7 ( Alternatively, an image (not shown) in which the movable character 700 pulls the movable accessory 700 with the rope C17 is displayed. The image in which this character pulls up the movable accessory 700 with the rope C17 is the motion index No. registered in the 12th line. It is controlled by the motion table of (92).

Next, in the 16th line (// 15), "motion 8 deletion code" and "NULL" are set. As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, the display in the motion 8 is no longer performed, and the display of the characters such as the rope C17 and the tiger taro C7 pulling the rope C17 in the main screen area disappears.
Next, in the 17th line (// 16), "motion 3 deletion code" and "NULL" are set. As a result, the above-described motion deletion processing is performed, the display in the motion 3 is not performed, and the display of the ground C11 and the surrounding scenery C12 disappears.
Next, in the 18th line (// 17), data of "motion 2 registration code" and "motion index No. (93)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. Instead of the display by the motion table of (91), the motion index No. The display of the motion table (not shown) of (93) (display of the blackout image C20 as a moving image or a still image) is started. By the new registration of the motion 2 on the 18th line, the display of the celestial body C13 (month) in the same motion 2 (that is, the display by the motion table of the motion index No. (91)) disappears.

Next, in the 19th line (// 18), the data of "voice setting code" and "sound No. (15)" are set. As a result, in the process corresponding to the "voice setting code" in the scenario analysis process described above (the process omitted by the dashed line in FIG. 105), the process for outputting the voice specified by the data of the operand is performed. Sound No. The data of the operand (15) is data that specifies the music or the sound effect in the blackout effect described above.
Next, in the 20th line (// 19), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (150)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (5 seconds) corresponding to 150 frames.
According to the 16th to 20th lines described above, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 158 (a) is performed.

Next, in the 21st line (// 20), the data of "motion 3 registration code" and "motion index No. (94)" are set. Thereby, the motion index No. The display of the motion table (not shown) of (94) (display of the rose C21 moving image or still image in the main screen area) is started.
Next, in line 22 (// 21), "constant wait code" and "wait time value (90)" are set. As a result, control progress of the scenario table is stopped for a time (3 seconds) corresponding to 90 frames.

According to the 21st to 22nd lines described above, the big hit notification effect shown in FIG. 158 (b) described above is performed for 3 seconds.
A line in which the "motion 2 deletion code" is set is inserted immediately before the 21st line, and the motion index No. The display of the motion table of (93) (display of the blackout image C20) may be erased. However, the display of the rose C21 (motion index No. (94) displayed in the motion table) in the motion 3 started on the 21st line is the entire image of the main screen area shown in FIG. 158 (b) ( In the case of displaying a plurality of roses and their backgrounds), the blackout image C20 is hidden and invisible due to the display in the motion 3, so that it is not particularly necessary to delete it. Further, in the case of this table example, the voice output set in the 19th line is continued even during the big hit notification effect, and this sound output enhances the effect of blessing the big hit.

Next, since the "end code" is set in the last 24th line (// 23), the control in the scenario layer 1 is not performed.
In addition, by the "end code" of the 24th line (// 23), the effect control by the scenario table for the target scenario layer ends, but a new scenario table is set thereafter, and It goes without saying that the production control is performed again.

Next, the first scenario table from the top of FIG. 161 (scenario layer 2; the right pattern beginning) will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration is made for the initial variable display of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1, the wait time value for that is set in the second line, and the scenario switching is performed in the third line. .
This is to perform the same control for the right symbol as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the middle of FIG.

Next, the second scenario table (scenario layer 2; the first half of the right symbol) from the top of FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, the registration for the first half of the variable display of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1 is registered, in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and in the third line, the scenario is switched. .
This is the same as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 (control for the first half variable display of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1), for the right symbol.

Next, the third scenario table (scenario layer 2; the latter half of the right pattern) from the top of FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
The wait time value for the character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set in the first line, the stop pattern of the right symbol KTR is set in the second line, and the third line is set. Then, the stop display of the right symbol KTR in the variable display area H1 is started, the wait time value for the stop display is set in the fourth line, and the control of the scenario layer 2 is finished in the fifth line.
This is the same as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 (control for display of the latter half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) for the right symbol.
According to the first to third scenario tables from the top of FIG. 161, which have been described above, the right side of the decorative special drawing in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. Display of symbols is realized.

Next, the fourth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle symbol early stage) from the top of FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration for the initial variable display of the middle pattern KTC in the variable display area H1 is performed, in the second line, the wait time value for that is set, and in the third line, scenario switching is performed. .
This is to perform the same control as the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in the middle part of FIG. 159 (control for the variable display of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1 at the beginning), for the medium symbol.

Next, the fifth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle pattern first half) from the top of FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, registration is performed for the first half of the variable display of the middle pattern KTC in the variable display area H1, the wait time value for that is set in the second line, and the scenario switching is performed in the third line. .
This is to perform the same control as the control of the left symbol (control for the first half variable display of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) by the scenario table shown in the lower part of FIG. 159 for the intermediate symbol.

Next, the sixth scenario table (scenario layer 3; middle symbol latter half) from the top of FIG. 161 will be briefly described.
In the first line, the wait time value for the character stop display (shown in FIG. 157 (b)) in the main screen area is set, and in the second line, the latter half fluctuation of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1. Registration for display (variable display of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 in the reach action shown in FIG. 157 (c) to FIG. 158 (a)) is performed, and in the third line, from FIG. 157 (c). The wait time value for the reach action shown in FIG. 158 (a) is set, the stop symbol of the middle symbol KTC is set in the fourth line, and the stop symbol of the middle symbol KTC in the variable display area H1 is displayed in the fifth line. The wait time value for the stop display is set on the 6th line, and the control of the scenario layer 3 is ended on the 7th line.
This is a control corresponding to the control of the left symbol by the scenario table shown in FIG. 160 (the control for the display of the latter half of the left symbol KTL in the variable display area H1) for the middle symbol. However, since the middle symbol is variably displayed (scrolling at a low speed) even during the reach action, the second and third lines are provided, which is different from the left symbol and the right symbol in this respect.
According to the fourth to sixth scenario tables from the top of FIG. 161, which have been described above, among the special decorations in the variable display area H1 in the series of effects shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above. Display of symbols is realized.

  Next, FIGS. 162 and 163 are modified examples of the series of effects (SD mode effect example) from FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 158 (b) described above. In this modification, a character such as Tiger Taro C7 appearing in the main screen area is not displayed as additional information of the decorative special figure in the variable display area H1 at the same time when the character appears in the main screen area. When a character such as Torataro C7 disappears from the main screen area, the display as the additional information in the variable display area H1 is resumed at the same time. For example, when the tiger tarou C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the main screen area as shown in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b), the tiger tarou C7 and the tiger lock C8 are displayed in the variable display area H1. Is controlled to disappear, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), when the tiger lock C8 disappears from the main screen area, the display of the tiger lock C8 in the variable display area H1 is controlled to resume. Also, as shown in FIGS. 162 (c), 163 (a), and 163 (b), when the tiger taroo C7 and the tiger cub C6 are displayed in the main screen area, the tiger in the variable display area H1 is displayed. The display of Taro C7 and Torasuke C6 is controlled so as not to be displayed, and when Torasuke C6 disappears from the main screen area as shown in FIG. 163 (c), the display of Torasuke C6 in the variable display area H1 restarts. Controlled to do so.

It should be noted that in the progression of the series of effects, FIG. 162 (a), FIG. 162 (b), and FIG. 162 (c) respectively correspond to the above-mentioned FIG. 155 (c), FIG. 156 (a), and FIG. 156 (c). It is a display example at the same timing. Similarly, FIGS. 163 (a), 163 (b), and 163 (c) are display examples at the same timings as those in FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b), and 157 (c) described above, respectively. is there.
According to this modification, when a character such as Torarou C7 appears (starts to be displayed) in the main screen area, as shown by a dotted line with an arrow in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (c), for example, When viewed, the character appears to jump out of the variable display area H1. Further, when a character such as Torataro C7 disappears from the main screen area (display end or is hidden by another image), it appears to the player that the character returns to the variable display area H1. As a result, a dynamic and novel effect is realized.

It should be noted that the dotted line with an arrow in FIG. 162 (a) and FIG. 162 (c) indicating that the tiger tallow C7 and the like jump out of the variable display area H1 is for the purpose of explanation and may not be actually displayed. However, it is also possible to display an image that expresses such an entry / exit of the character from the variable display area H1 to / from the main screen area in an easy-to-understand manner.
Further, the above-described modified example can be controlled by the scenario table or the motion table similarly to the specific examples described above, but the specific examples of these tables will not be described.

  Next, FIG. 164 is another modification of the series of effects (SD mode effect example) shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b). This modification is characterized by a mode of variable display of the character in the front-back direction in the main screen area and a mode of combination of the characters for notifying the reach occurrence. That is, in the display example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 156 (a), the characters arranged in a plurality of columns (in this case, two columns on the left and right sides) simultaneously advance to the front side. Not limited to. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), only the character on the left side is stopped and displayed on the front side, and only the character on the right side sequentially switches to appear on the back side and advances to the front side. This is a mode in which the variable display of the character is performed by (for example, running). The variable display of the character in the main screen area may be changed to such a mode on the way so that the variable display of the decorative special map is changed to the reach action (second half change) from the middle.

In this modified example, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 164 (b) and 164 (c), when the reach is present, the target character that will be a predetermined combination someday (in this case, for example, for the tiger lock C8, The same character) appears on the right side, such as tiger lock C8, advances toward the front side, and stops, whereby a reach occurrence notification is given. In this way, the combination of characters with reach (that is, the notification of the occurrence of reach) is similar to the combination of the symbols of the decorative special drawing that is a big hit, in a mode in which characters of the same type are aligned (grooves). It may be.
In any case, according to the effect example and the modified example, at the same time as the variable display of the decorative special map being performed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the variable display area H1, the variable display direction of the decorative special map is changed. Since a variable display (a variable display game that determines presence / absence of a reach from a player's perspective) of a character in a direction (front-back direction) that is different from the conventional one is performed in the main screen area, a dynamic and novel effect is realized.

Next, FIG. 165 is another modified example of the series of effects (SD mode effect example) shown in FIGS. 155 (b) to 158 (b) described above.
First, FIG. 165 (a) and FIG. 165 (b) are other examples of the reach occurrence notification effect shown in FIG. 157 (b), and poses of two left and right characters stopped and displayed on the front side ( The feature is that the postures such as limbs are not the same but different. In this way, a configuration that suggests (preliminary), for example, the reliability of a big hit after a reach action (or the reliability of a high probability state (probability change)) depending on the presence or absence of differences in the poses of the aligned characters and the content of the differences May be Note that FIG. 165 (a) shows a case where the predetermined combination that gives the reach occurrence notification is different, and FIG. 165 (b) shows a case where the predetermined combination that gives the reach occurrence notification is the same character.

Next, FIG. 165 (c) is an example of a special effect (a character-product interlocking effect with an upper movable accessory) which is performed in the variable display of the character in the front-rear direction performed in the main screen area described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (c), this special effect is, for example, a display mode in which a character on the left side (for example, tiger lock C8) that has moved to the front side has a predetermined item (for example, a rose flower; light emission effect information). Image (light emission interlocking image) is displayed, and simultaneously with the display of this light emission interlocking image, the left half of the upper movable accessory 801 emits light (for example, flashes at high speed). Although not shown, for example, when an image (light emission interlocking image) as a display mode having a predetermined item (light emission effect information) is displayed on the right character that has moved to the near side, this display and the upper side are performed simultaneously. The effect may be such that the right half of the movable accessory 801 emits light. Alternatively, although not shown, for example, when an image (light emission interlocking image) is displayed as a display mode in which both the left and right characters that have moved to the front side have a predetermined item (light emission effect information), this display At the same time, the entire upper movable accessory 801 may emit light. You may perform such special effects suitably. Also, this special effect may be performed as a notice effect that suggests (announces) some degree of reliability (reliability of reach, reliability of big hit, or reliability of high probability state (probability change)). it can.
Note that the specific example of FIG. 165 (c) is a display mode in which effect information (for example, a character such as the tiger lock C8) different from the identification information (design of the decorative special drawing) has a predetermined item, This is an example in which the mode (light emitting state) of the accessory changes in conjunction with the display of this display mode, but the invention is not limited to such a specific example. For example, when the display color, display size, display position, pose (hands and feet posture, etc.) of the character itself such as the tiger lock C8 becomes a specific display mode, the display is linked with the display of this specific display mode. The configuration (light emitting state, etc.) of the accessory may be changed. Further, the change of the aspect of the accessory that changes in association with the display mode of the effect information in this way is not limited to the change of the light emitting state of the accessory, as in the specific example shown in FIG. 163 (c) described above. In addition, the operating state and operating position of the accessory may be changed.

Next, FIG. 166 shows an effect of reducing an image in a predetermined area displaying an image including a decorative special figure (identification information) on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41 (including a mode of distorting). Is an example of. Note that, although FIG. 167 and subsequent figures also show various display examples on the display unit 41a of the display device 41, the same explanations and reference numerals in the drawings once illustrated may be omitted in the subsequent drawings.
First, FIG. 166 (a) is a display example in a state before a reduction effect (referred to as a reduction effect or a reduced display effect) is performed. In this case, the "left, middle, right" (KTL, KTC, KTR) of the large design of the decorative special drawing (hereinafter, referred to as a large decorative design in some cases) is greatly changed and displayed. The large decorative pattern means a normal decorative special figure, and is a name for distinguishing it from a small decorative pattern described later.

In FIG. 166 (a) and the like, what is indicated by a half line is an example of the outer edge of a region (visible region) of the display unit 41a that is not hidden by a role object or the like (center case 24, movable role objects 801, 802, 803, etc.). And, such a half line is not displayed. In this way, the visible area of the display unit 41a that can be actually viewed by the player is often limited, and the shape and size of the visible area vary depending on the model, and by the action of the accessory. It changes during the game.
In the example shown in FIG. 166 (a) and the like, a large decorative design (KTL, KTC, KTR) is displayed in a large size in the vicinity of the vertical center of the visible area, and a decorative small pattern is located at the vertical center of the left end of the visible area. Is displayed, the number of holdings is displayed at the upper left position of the visible area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed at the center position in the left-right direction of the upper edge of the visible area (for example, a countdown during time saving (normal power support state)). The display is held near the center of the lower edge of the visible area in the left-right direction, and the right-hand instruction is displayed at the upper right position of the visible area. There is a dialogue display for the production of "Search for Taro!" The display position of each object is an example, and various arrangements are possible. In addition, in the display example of FIG. 166 (a) and the like, the downward arrow “↓” shows a state in which the decorative large pattern or the decorative small pattern is scrolling downward and is displayed in a variable manner. The mode such as the direction of scrolling is not limited to this. For example, the decorative large pattern may be scrolled downward, while the decorative small pattern may be displayed in a variable manner by switching the spot, and the decorative large pattern may be scrolled in the left and right directions.

  Here, the hold display means the above-mentioned special map hold display (starting memory display of special map), and in this case, the circular image without filling (white painting) is the holding display of special drawing 1 and there is filling. The circular image (filled in black) is the reserved display of special figure 2, and the circular image surrounded by a square line that is filled in is the reserved display that displays the starting memory of the currently changing special figure 2 (variation). Medium pending display). In the example of FIG. 166 (a), since the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 1, a reservation display not surrounded by a square line (that is, a variable display) As the display of the starting memory in which the game is not executed), two circular images without filling are displayed and one circular image with filling is displayed. Further, in this case, the display of the pending change (the circular image surrounded by the square line) is displayed on the leftmost side, and the images of the pending displays are arranged from the left side in the order of execution of the variable display game. Then, the process of the holding shift of the above-mentioned special figure is performed in the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 receives a command (for example, a hold number command) from the game control device 100 indicating this, the effect control device. The hold display on the display unit 41a is also shifted by the control of 300 (that is, in this case, the display is switched so that one hold display image is moved to the left side). As a result of this shift, for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a) described later, the image pending during change (in this case, the image surrounded by the square line) is displayed immediately before the image (variable display). The game is not executed, the execution order of the variable display game is switched to the image of the next pending display, and the player is informed that the variable display game of the special figure corresponding to the next starting memory is started. Become.

Needless to say, the display mode of the hold display and the configuration of the array are not limited to this example, and various configurations are possible. In addition, in the display examples of FIG. 166 (a) and thereafter, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the starting prizes of the special maps 1 and 2 are alternately generated, and the special map variation display game for each starting memory is executed in the starting prize sequence, for example. The display example is based on the assumption that the above is performed, but the configuration and state are not limited to such.
For example, in the case of the board structure of the present embodiment described above, the player normally hits the game ball to the right by hitting the game ball right during the short time (normal electric power support state), and thus the player normally moves. Normally, only the starting memory of the special figure 2 is generated by the starting winning of the winning device 26. However, even in the case of the board configuration of the present embodiment described above, if a beginner player makes a left-handed hit during a time saving, the above-described function of the starting mouth distribution device 600 will cause Starting prizes are generated alternately. Further, in the case of the specific example of the special figure ordinary processing described in FIG. 28, the starting memory of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the starting memory of the special figure 1 (starting winning order is the first special figure 1 Even if there is a starting memory of special figure 2, if the starting memory of special figure 2 exists, the variable display game of the starting memory of special figure 2 (the starting winning order is the first in the starting memory of special figure 2) is executed first. It is a configuration), and such an aspect may be adopted.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 172 (c) described later, the reserved display regions (regions for performing reserved display) of the special maps 1 and 2 may be separated. When the prefetching effect described in step D185 or the like is performed, the hold display of the starting memory of the prefetching effect may be performed in a special mode (special color, shape, or animation).

Next, in the hold number display, the number of the hold number of the special figure 1 (for example, “2” in the case of FIG. 166 (a)) is displayed on the left part, and the number of the hold number of the special figure 2 (for example, “2” in the case of FIG. 166 (a)) is displayed. In the case of FIG. 166 (a), “1”) is displayed.
Next, the decorative small pattern is a pattern that is always visible even if the large decorative pattern becomes difficult to see or disappear in the effect image, and the special symbol is changing to the player. This is for making sure notification. In this case, the decoration small design is to display the designs corresponding to the left design, the middle design, and the right design of the large design in a small size in three columns vertically. For example, the design corresponding to the left design of the large design is displayed small at the top, the design corresponding to the middle design of the large design is displayed small, and the right design of the large design is displayed at the bottom. The pattern to be displayed is displayed in a small size. In addition, the decorative small pattern is controlled to start the variable display at the same time as the large decorative pattern, and when the stop of the large decorative pattern is fixed (when the combination of the symbols is fixed and the variable display game ends), the variable display ends. (That is, the decorative small pattern is displayed in a stopped state). Then, only when the decorative large pattern is fixed and stopped instead of being temporarily stopped, the variable display of the decorative small pattern is stopped, and the same pattern as the large decorative pattern is also displayed as the small decorative pattern (for example, FIG. 167 described later). As shown in (a), if the large decorative pattern is "9, 3, 4", the small decorative pattern is also stopped at "9, 3, 4"). Note that this decorative small design is different from the fourth design. The fourth symbol is omitted in FIG. 166 and the like.

Next, the number of fluctuations display is a number (“87” as an example in FIG. 166 (a)) indicating the number of fluctuations of the special figure until the time saving state (universal power support state) is completed. Each time the variable display game is executed (for example, when the variable display game of the special figure ends), the number is switched to a value smaller by one.
Next, the right-handing instruction display is, for example, as shown in the figure, displaying characters such as “right-handed! As described in step S355 and the like, in the case of the present embodiment, for example, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting, but during the time saving state, the first starting opening (special figure 1 start If there is a winning in the mouth 607) (that is, if the player is left-handed during the time saving state), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to give an instruction (warning) to instruct right-handing. The effect control device 300 performs this, and the display for that purpose is the right-hand striking instruction display. The right-handing instruction display may be always displayed in a state where right-handing should be performed (for example, during saving time).

Next, FIG. 166 (b) is a display example of a state (in the middle of reduction) after the effect of reduction is started. In this case, all the images (including the background image) displayed in the predetermined reduction target area indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Although the display effect is reduced (as one display panel becomes smaller), an example of a state in the middle thereof is shown in FIG. 166 (b).
The above-mentioned alternate long and short dash line is shown for the sake of explanation, and does not have to be actually displayed. Further, the reduction target area is not limited to the area indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 166 (a), but is an area including the display area of the decorative large pattern, and is the visible area described above (for example, in FIG. 166 (a)). The area is preferably wider than the area indicated by the half line. This is because, if a wide area including the visible area is a reduction target area, the effect to be reduced becomes a more dynamic effect.
Also, here, “reduction” refers to reducing the size of the image displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 on the display unit 41a, but the target image of the reduction target region is not distorted and is similar. The size of the target image in the reduction target region may be reduced while the size of the target image in the reduction target region is distorted. That is, “reduction” may be accompanied by image distortion (change in shape or aspect ratio).

  What is characteristic here is that the reduction ratio differs depending on the object. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (b) and FIG. 166 (c) to be described later, among the objects to be reduced, the character information such as the number of times of change display and the serif display is used for other objects (for example, large decorative patterns and background images). The reduction ratio (reduction ratio) is smaller than that of (1), and is displayed so as not to be excessively small. That is, the character information such as the display of the number of times of change and the notice of the dialogue is less likely to be reduced than the object such as a large decorative pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can keep the information such as the variation count display and the dialogue display in a state that the player can read while realizing the interesting display effect of reducing the variation count display and the dialogue display along with the decorative large pattern. . That is, there is an effect that a desired size can be held for each object while reducing the plurality of objects to realize a highly entertaining display effect.

In addition, such a display effect, for example, includes a variable display area of a decorative large pattern, in which a new background image is arranged and displayed on the back side of the background image when the effect is started, just before the effect is started. For all the images (excluding the images that are not subject to reduction) displayed in a predetermined region (for example, the region indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 166 (a)), the display size is changed at each frame period. This can be realized by performing control such that the direction is gradually reduced (however, the reduction rate differs depending on the object). A specific example of the flowchart of the control process will be described later.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 166 (b) and FIG. 166 (c) described later, a frame-shaped image (a rectangular frame-shaped image in the example of the figure) showing the outer edge of the entire image that is being reduced is displayed. May be. Note that there is sufficient difference in brightness, pattern, and color between the image to be reduced and the new background image that appears around it, and even if such a frame-shaped image is not displayed, the outer edge of the entire image to be reduced is displayed. When it is sufficiently visible to the player, such a frame-shaped image has little significance (the frame-shaped image does not necessarily have to be displayed).
In the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (a), the area to be reduced (the area surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line; the area to be reduced) is larger than the visible area indicated by the half line. Although it is a region, this is not necessarily the case, and a region smaller than the visible region may be reduced. However, by reducing a large area including a portion outside the visible area (in the extreme example, the entire display portion 41a may be used), a more dynamic display effect can be realized.

Next, FIG. 166 (c) is a display example of a state in which the effect of reduction is further advanced (more reduced state). In this case, the variable display of the special figure is continuously executed in the reduced area. In addition, the display angle of the reduced image is changed as compared with that before the reduction, so that the image is displayed as if it is tilted as a whole. In FIG. 166 (c), the reduced image is displayed so as to be tilted only in the direction of rotation along the display surface of the display unit 41a, but to be tilted in the front-rear direction (for example, toward the back side). You can also That is, the image may be reduced and displayed so that the image looks three-dimensionally (three-dimensionally).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), the decorative portion 701 of the movable accessory 700 operates in the rising direction toward the standing state, and is linked to this in the periphery of the reduced image (front side of the new background image). As described above, a plurality of images of the rose C21 (an interlocking image for the accessory, related images) of various sizes are displayed on the screen (display unit 41a), and a new development effect is started. In this case, as shown in the drawing, for example, an effect in which an image of the face of "tiger Taro" as the character C7 is displayed so as to be hidden in an image of any rose flower C21 is, for example, a notice effect (e.g., a big hit is possible). The performance is appropriately performed as a performance suggesting that the property is high. With such an effect, the player already has the expectation for a special effect that the area including the large decorative pattern is reduced, and further, the development effect performed around the reduced image further enhances the expectation. For example, if the image of "tiger Taro" as the character C7 is partially displayed somewhere during the above-described reduced display effect, for example, the possibility of a jackpot or the like subsequently increases. By controlling in this way, it is possible to perform a hot notice production that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

Here, the non-reduced images include information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small design, right-handing instruction display, etc. (even if the fourth design is included. Good) is included. By excluding these images (objects) from the reduction target, it is possible to sufficiently maintain the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holdings and the like) during the reduction effect.
According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a dynamic and highly entertaining effect that further enhances the player's expectation, and set objects that are not to be reduced as described above, and reduce objects that are to be reduced. As for the above, the following effects can be obtained by changing the reduction ratio.

  That is, when performing the effect of reducing the image, if all of the images are deformed at the same size, the essential information will not be visible to the player, which will adversely affect the game or make the player tired and uncomfortable. There is a risk of getting stuck. However, in this example, the information that is likely to affect the game is not reduced as a non-reduction target, and the reduction rate is reduced for the text information that is difficult to see even if the reduction target object is excessively reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing or missing the information and adversely affecting the game, and to suppress the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

  There may be various modes as to how the reduction effect executed as in the example shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and 166 (c) proceeds and ends thereafter. For example, a display effect may be executed in which the reduced image is further reduced and finally becomes so small that it cannot be seen, or the reduced image moves out of the visible area and disappears and ends. Alternatively, after the reduced image has been reduced to a certain extent, the variable display of the special figure is stopped after a jackpot or a misplacement in a state where the image is enlarged and then returned to a certain size. There may be modes.

Next, FIG. 167 is a modified example of the effect for reducing described in FIG. 166 (in particular, a modified example corresponding to FIG. 166 (c)).
First, FIG. 167 (a) is an example in which the display angles are made different between the reduced images. In this case, the reduced background image, the serif display, and the frame-shaped image are tilted (the display angle is changed) with respect to those before the reduction, while the decorative large pattern and the number of times of fluctuation display are not tilted. , The display angles are different. In this way, the display angle during or after the reduction may be different for each object, which can enhance the interest. It should be noted that the image to be reduced may be displayed in a state in which the image is three-dimensionally moved so as to be inclined also in the front-rear direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-rear direction.
Note that FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the variable display game of the special figure ends with disconnection, and the symbol combination “9, 3, 4” of the confirmed special figure is displayed for convenience of description. Immediately after this state, the number of fluctuations displayed is switched to a value smaller by one, a holding shift is performed to reduce the number of holdings, and the next fluctuation display game of special figure 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 167 (b) shows a contrast between the image of the area to be reduced and an image such as a new background located around the image of the area to be reduced in the reduced display effect described in FIG. 166. An example in which (for example, difference in brightness, difference in color, etc.) is provided will be shown. By providing the contrast in this way, the image to be reduced becomes easier to see, the display effect becomes more impressive, and the interest is enhanced.

  Next, in FIG. 167 (c), in the case of the reduced display effect described in FIG. 166, the image to be reduced is displayed semi-transparently, and a new background image or another effect image is displayed on the back side of the image to be reduced. An example is shown in which the is transparently displayed. In this case, for example, an image of a rose flower C21 for notice production and an image of the face of the "tiger Taro" of the character C7 displayed so as to be hidden in the image are displayed on the back side of the image of the reduced decorative large pattern or the like. It is displayed as if it were visible. Such an effect can enhance the interest.

Next, FIG. 168 is a display example of an effect of enlarging an image (referred to as an enlarging effect or an enlarging display effect) contrary to the effect of reducing the size described in FIG. 166. First, FIG. 168 (a) shows a state before enlargement (for example, a state in which a decorative large pattern is temporarily removed and temporarily stopped in a variable display game of one special map). The display is the same as that of FIG. 166 (a) described above except that the symbol is temporarily stopped and the number of holdings and the number of fluctuations are reduced by one. Here, the temporary stop is an operation in which, for example, the design is shaking without scrolling.
Next, in FIG. 168 (b), from the state of FIG. 168 (a), all the images (including the background image) displayed in, for example, the visible area of the display unit 41a except for the image that is not the enlargement target are predetermined. An example of an enlarged display effect in which the display is enlarged integrally (as one display panel becomes larger) over time is shown.

  What is characteristic here is that the enlargement ratio differs depending on the object. In the example shown in FIG. 168 (b), in the object to be enlarged, the character information such as the number of times of change display and the serif display has a smaller enlargement ratio than other objects (decorative large design etc.) and is larger than the other objects. Is displayed without being greatly enlarged. That is, the character information such as the display of the number of times of change and the notice of the dialogue is less likely to be enlarged than an object such as a large decorative pattern. For this reason, while realizing a highly entertaining display effect in which the display of the number of times of change and the display of words are expanded together with the large decorative pattern, the player can read the information while expanding the information such as the number of times of change and the words displayed. There is an effect that can be done.

Further, the non-enlargement image may include information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small design, right-handing instruction display (the fourth design may be included. ) Is included. By excluding these images (objects) from the enlargement target, the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holdings, etc.) can be sufficiently maintained during the enlargement effect, and these images can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the display from being complicated and difficult to see by enlarging the display.
According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a dynamic and highly entertaining effect that further enhances the player's expectation, and set an object that is not to be enlarged as described above, or an object to be enlarged. With respect to the above, the following effects can be obtained by changing the enlargement ratio.

  That is, when performing the effect of enlarging the image, if all the images are transformed at the same size, the essential information will not be visible to the player, which will adversely affect the game or make the player tired and uncomfortable. There is a risk of getting stuck. However, in this example, the information that is likely to affect the game is not expanded as a non-enlargement target, and the enlargement rate is changed for the text information that is difficult to see even if the enlargement target object is excessively enlarged. Since it is made small, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing or overlooking the information and adversely affecting the game, and to prevent the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

Moreover, in the enlargement effect of the present example, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the variation is displayed in the image in which the number “1” which is the enlarged decorative large pattern KTC (middle pattern of the special figure) is enlarged. Subsequent variable display (variable display after temporary stop) of the decorative large symbols KTL, KTC, KTR (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol of special figure) in the display game is performed. For this reason, even if the large decorative pattern is extremely enlarged (to the extent that it is out of the visible area of the display unit 41a), the subsequent variable display of the large decorative symbol is well visible to the player, and in the enlarged pattern. Since it is performed, there is an effect that the player is less likely to miss the subsequent variable display.
In addition, the above-mentioned effect of performing variable display of the symbol (inside) in the image of the enlarged symbol is a mode performed in the same variable display game as described above (that is, in the symbol to be enlarged as described above). The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the subsequent symbols are variably displayed. For example, when the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the decoration large pattern of the special figure 1 is enlarged, and the decoration large pattern of the special figure 2 is enlarged inside the image of the enlarged large decoration pattern of the special figure 1. In the aspect of performing the variable display of the special large figure of the special figure 2 on the contrary and enlarging the large decorative figure of the special figure 2 and displaying the variable large design of the special figure 1 inside the image of the large decorative figure of this special figure 2 which is enlarged. Good. Further, when displaying a general figure on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41, a mode of performing variable display of the pattern of the general figure in the image of the special figure to be enlarged, and the expansion of the general figure. It may be possible to perform a variable display of special symbols in the image of the symbols.

Next, in FIG. 168 (c), for example, the image of the rose flower C21 for effect and the image of the face of "Torataro" of the character C7 displayed so as to be hidden by the image are enlarged at the same time. A display example is shown in which a display effect is performed, and a variable display of a decorative large pattern is performed in these effect images that are further enlarged. Such an effect can enhance the interest.
Although not shown in the figure, in the enlarged display effect described above, the display angle may be different for each object during or after the enlargement of the image to be enlarged, as in the case of the reduced display effect described above. Can be increased. Further, also in the enlarged display effect described above, it is possible to display the image to be enlarged in a semi-transparent manner and display a new background image or another effect image in the back side of the image to be enlarged. . As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Next, FIG. 169 is an example of a flowchart for the above-described reduction effect, for example.
The above-described reduction effect and enlargement effect can also be performed by setting a dedicated scenario table or motion table for that purpose (for example, the rotation code described above can be used to change the display angle for each object). However, for example, the data of the display information area set by the scenario table or motion table that does not perform the reduction effect as it is (especially, the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display that determines the display position of the image, the display size of the image, etc., A direction (or a display angle) for reducing the Y coordinate of the display upper left point, the X coordinate of the display upper right point, the Y coordinate of the display upper right point, the X coordinate of the display lower left point, the Y coordinate of the display lower left point, for example, for each frame cycle. 169) shows a reduction effect control process which is an example of the control process of the effect control device 300 in that case.
This reduction effect control process is added, for example, between step D30 and step D31 in the main process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. 88, and the effect of step D31 is performed every frame period (for example, 1/30 second) described above. This is a process executed immediately before the display editing process.

When this reduction effect control process is started, as shown in FIG. 169, it is first determined whether reduction effect is being executed (step E201). If not, the process proceeds to step E202, and if it is being performed, the process proceeds to step E208. Here, it is determined that the reduction effect execution flag, which will be described later, is set, and it is determined that the reduction effect execution flag is being executed.
When the process proceeds to step E202, it is determined whether start / execution of reduction effect is set, for example, in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 99, FIG. 100), and if start / execution of reduction effect is not set, the process returns. If this process is ended and the reduction effect is started and executed, the process returns after executing steps E203 to E206 (that is, this process is ended).

Then, in step E203, a reduction effect in-execution flag is set, in step E204, for example, the value of the scheduled time of the reduction effect set in the variable effect setting process is set, and in step E205, a setting process for displaying a new background image. (For example, a process of preparing a scenario table for displaying a new background image and executing the above-mentioned scenario data setting process) is performed, and in step E206, the current background image (background image of the reduction effect) is set in a predetermined area. A setting process for changing the size of (the above-described reduction target area) is performed.
Note that, for example, after step E206 (before returning), there may be provided a step of performing a setting process for displaying the frame-shaped image that displays the outer edge of the entire shrinking image.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step E201 that the reduction effect is being executed and the process proceeds to step E208, the value of the reduction effect time is increased by one frame period (step E208), and then the value of the reduction effect time is set in step E204. It is determined whether the scheduled time has been reached (step E209). If not, the process proceeds to step E210 to advance the reduction effect.
When the process proceeds to step E210, the loop process of steps E210 to E213 is repeatedly executed for all display information areas of all motion management areas (that is, for all objects), and then the process returns.
In the above loop processing, it is determined whether the object is the reduction target (step E211), and if the object is not the reduction target, nothing is done and the loop processing is performed for the next object (next display information area), and the object is the reduction target. If there is, step E212 is executed.

In step E212, a setting process is executed for changing the data of the display information area for determining the display size, display position, and display angle of each object for the reduction effect by the reduction effect time at that time. "Change for the reduction effect time" means changing the data of the image (data of the display information area) so as to reduce the image by an amount corresponding to the passage of the reduction effect time, for example. For example, in the case where the image is simply reduced at a constant speed as the reduction effect time elapses and the size is reduced to 1/2 of the size before reduction when the scheduled time (for example, 4 seconds) is reached, for example, reduction effect At the time when the time is half of the scheduled time (for example, 2 seconds), it is necessary to change it so that it becomes, for example, 1/4 of the size before the reduction as the progress of the reduction. It means to change only by the amount.
When the above-mentioned loop processing is completed for all display information areas (at least for all displayed objects), the process returns via step E213.

In step E212, the data in each display information area is changed so that the reduction rate is different for each object as described above.
Further, in step E211, the object such as the hold display is determined not to be reduced as described above, but the new background image set to be displayed in step E205 is also determined not to be reduced.
Then, if it is determined in step E209 that the reduction effect time has reached the scheduled time and has timed up, the reduction effect execution flag is cleared to end the reduction effect (step E214), and then the process returns. This process ends).

  According to the reduction effect control process described above, the data in the display information area of each object set in the process up to step D30 in the main process (FIG. 88) is changed by a necessary ratio for each frame cycle. By doing so, the reduction effect as in the display example described above is realized. A display effect of enlarging an image is also possible by the same processing as the reduction effect control processing. For example, in step E212, the data in the display information area may be changed so as to enlarge the image.

Next, FIG. 170 is a display example of a hold display (starting memory display) by animation.
First, in FIG. 170 (a), the number of holdings is, for example, two (one for special drawing 1 and one for special drawing 2). (Holding display) is performed by the animation display (moving display, so-called movie may be used) in which the character) walks at the same position, and the animations of all the hold displays (in this case, hold while changing) are synchronized. This is an example of display that is being performed. The animation of the walking motion in this case is, for example, an image of a person walking on a running machine, and the walking motion is repeatedly executed without moving the person (without changing the display position of the center of the person). It is a thing. This animation display may be realized by expanding and reproducing what has been registered as moving image data, or the movement of a person (or character) walking is registered as a plurality of still image data, It may be realized by switching and displaying still images to be displayed for each frame (frame) from the registered still image data, as necessary, and displaying them as moving images to the player.

  Note that, in the display examples of FIG. 170 and subsequent figures, a person (or character) whose head portion is not filled (white-painted) represents the holding (starting memory) of the special figure 1 and the person (or character) ) The part with the fill of the head part (the black one) represents the holding (starting memory) of the special figure 2, and the image of the person (or character) surrounded by the square line is currently changing. It is a hold display (in-flight hold display) for displaying the starting memory in the middle. However, the configuration in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed separately and the configuration for displaying during suspension is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as shown in FIG. 172 (c) to be described later, the reserved display areas of the special maps 1 and 2 (areas for performing the reserved display) may be separated. Further, in the display examples of FIG. 170 and subsequent figures, a walking motion and a running motion of a person (or a character) are illustrated as an example of animation, but other various modes are possible. For example, there may be various movements such as a character dancing, a clock hand spinning around. In addition, the variable hold may be displayed differently from the normal hold display (display of start memory in which the variable display game is not executed).

  The characteristic of this display example is that in order to synchronize the animation of all the hold displays (in this case, including the changing hold), the image data of the preceding hold display (still for each frame (frame)) is displayed. The point is that the latest hold display is performed by copying image data or frame-by-frame (image data of each frame) obtained by expanding moving image data. In detail, for example, the image data of the earliest hold display is displayed for each frame (for each frame) among the holds that are displaying the animation to be synchronized, and the number of each hold is set as the subsequent hold display including the latest hold. That is, the setting process for displaying at the position corresponding to is executed at, for example, the hold shift. Here, "copy" means that the same image data is used for each frame (frame) as the preceding hold display, and the image data itself used for the preceding hold display is not always copied and used. However, the embodiment is not limited thereto. In addition, the preceding hold display that is the copy source disappears when the corresponding variable display game is executed, but the original image data is required every time the above setting process is performed (for example, hold shift). By newly setting accordingly, the image data of the copy source (the image data which is the source of the suspended display of the synchronized animation) can always be secured.

Due to this feature, there is, for example, a new start prize (special figure 2) in the state shown in FIG. 170 (a) (a state in which all of the hold display animations are synchronized), and a new hold display corresponding to the new start prize. (Latest hold display) is started, and even if the animation of this latest hold display is newly started from the beginning and is not synchronized with other hold displays as shown in FIG. 170 (b), By performing the setting process at the time of the hold shift, the hold displays of all the animations are synchronized as shown in FIG. 170 (c).
As a result, except for the time until a new start winning occurs and the next hold shift, the hold display of animations are all synchronized, and the effect of a hold display with a highly entertaining animation that does not feel strange to the player is realized. it can. That is, when an animation is executed as a hold display, there is a problem that if one hold display and another hold display are not synchronized with each other, the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. In addition, since the setting process is performed during the hold shift, at the start of the hold display of the latest hold corresponding to the new start winning, the hold display of the latest hold is executed from the beginning as illustrated in FIG. 170 (b). Thus, a state that is not synchronized with the hold display of the preceding hold may temporarily occur, but this is also a kind of effect and has the effect of improving the interest.

  It should be noted that the display example shown in FIG. 170 is a specific example in the case where the setting process is performed during the hold shift, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 173 (a). In FIG. 173 (a), what is described as the first hold (preceding hold) is one or more holds for which animation display has already been performed (may be during hold, but not during hold) However, the description of the second hold (latest hold) means a hold due to a newly generated start winning. In this case, it may be temporarily asynchronous immediately after a new start winning is generated, but at the time of the hold shift, the setting process of copying the image data of the animation of the preceding hold animation and displaying the animation of the latest hold is executed. Therefore, the latest hold is also synchronized after the hold shift.

However, the timing of performing the setting process is not limited to the hold shift. For example, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 173 (b), the setting process may be performed when the start winning is generated (that is, at the timing when a new hold display is started). In this mode, for example, like the display examples shown in FIGS. 171 (a) and 171 (b), the latest hold display corresponding to a new start winning is also synchronized from the beginning, which is more interesting. The effect can be realized by displaying the animation on hold.
Here, FIG. 171 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 170 (a) described above, and FIG. 171 (b) shows a pending display for the newly-started winning prize (special figure 2) from that state. It shows a state where the animation is started and executed in synchronization with the preceding hold display.

Further, the data to be copied in the setting process may be only an image having a motion related to the animation to be synchronized. For example, in the case of the hold display shown in FIG. 170, the image data of the head part of the person (or character) and the other parts (body and limbs) are separately controlled, and the moving body and limbs are controlled. Only the image data of the portion may be copied and synchronized, and the image of the head portion having no motion may be controlled to be selected and displayed at a predetermined position regardless of the preceding hold without copying. .
Further, in order to make the display mode such as the display color and size or the type of the character different between the held displays which are synchronized, the image data copied in the above setting process is not displayed as it is, but the data is processed. Alternatively, part of the data may be replaced (for example, replacement by the behavior described above), or may be partially overlapped with other image data for display.

  For example, FIG. 171 (c) is a modification of the display example of FIG. 171 (b). In the display example of FIG. 171 (c), with respect to the latest hold display, the image data is replaced or superposed so that the head of the walking character is visually recognized as an image of “tiger taro”, and the latest display is performed. As an on-hold display (for example, a special on-hold display as a look-ahead notice effect), an animation display in which "Torarou" walks is displayed. Even in this case, the same image data is used for at least the image of the torso and limbs of "Tora Taro" for each of the preceding pending display and each animation frame (for each animation frame) (that is, "copy" described above). By performing the above), it is possible to synchronize the motion of the animation (in this case, the walking motion) with the hold display of the preceding other than "Torataro". Although the case where the characters are different is shown, even if the display mode such as the display color and size (or the presence or absence of filling, the difference in the pattern, the presence or absence of the pattern, etc.) is different, it is also synchronized with the preceding pending display. Can be made.

  Note that FIG. 171 (c), unlike FIG. 171 (b), shows a state in which the symbol of the special figure is stopped (at the time when one special figure variable display game is finished), but this is the stop of the symbol. This is done for convenience only to illustrate and describe the condition somewhere. Similar to FIG. 171 (b), even when the special figure is displayed in a variable manner, the same hold display as in FIG. 171 (c) (a mode in which a part of the hold display is a special character different from others) or the like is possible. Needless to say. By the way, FIG. 171 (c) shows the moment when the variable display game of Toku-zu 1 that was being executed is finished, and immediately after this, the holding shift is performed and the number of holdings of Toku-zu 2 decreases by 1, The variable display game of the next special figure 2 will be started.

Next, FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b) are display examples in the case where the suspended display by the synchronized animation and the suspended display not synchronized are mixed.
First, FIG. 172 (a) illustrates the same state as that of FIG. 170 (a) (there are two holdings and a holding animation is displayed in synchronization with the walking motion).
172 (b) shows that when a start winning is newly generated in the state of FIG. 172 (a), and the hold display corresponding to this new start winning is a non-animated hold display (non-animated hold display), This is an example in which the above-mentioned copying is not performed, but only the latest hold display corresponding to the new start winning is displayed in a different mode with image data different from the preceding hold display. In this way, it is possible to mix the suspended display with the synchronized animation and the suspended display without the synchronization.
Although the figure shows a non-animated hold display, even if the latest hold display is an animation display, if the above hold display is an animation hold display that is not synchronized with the preceding hold display, No display is performed, and display is performed using image data different from the preceding hold display.

Next, FIG. 172 (c) is a display example in which the display area of the hold display is distinguished between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
In the case of FIG. 172 (c), there are two holding numbers in the special figure 1 and two holding numbers in the special figure 2, and the variable display game of the special figure 1 is being executed. At the center of the lower edge of the visible area of the display unit 41a, the display of the pending during change (in this case, the display of the pending during change of special figure 1) is executed, and the area on the left side of the pending during change of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold display is performed, and the hold display of special figure 2 is performed in the area on the right side of the variable hold. The special display 1 in the left-hand area is displayed as an animation in which a white-headed person walks in a rightward posture. It is being appreciated. In addition, as the reserved display of special figure 2 in the right area, an animation display in which a black-painted head person walks in a posture of heading to the left, in this case, two are synchronized side by side in correspondence with the number of reservations. Is being done. In the case of this example, animations are not synchronized between the pending display of special figure 1 in the left area and the pending display of special figure 2 in the right area.

In this way, the special display areas of the special display 1 and the special display 2 are distinguished from each other, and the same animation operation can be displayed in synchronization with each other. However, even when the special display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are divided into different display areas, the display is not limited to the example of FIG. 172 (c). It is also possible to display the animation operations in synchronization with each other even with the hold display.
In addition, when the display areas of the special display 1 and the special display 2 are divided as shown in FIG. 172 (c), when the variable display game ends and a special shift occurs for the special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, The reserved display of special figure 1 displayed on the left side is controlled so that the display position is sequentially changed to the right side toward the center, and the reserved display of special figure 2 displayed on the right side is directed toward the center. Thus, control is performed to the left adjacent to the display position so that the display position is sequentially changed. Specifically, in the case of the example of FIG. 172 (c), if the variable display game of the special figure 1 being executed is finished and the variable display game of the special figure 2 is next executed, the hold shift of the special figure 2 is performed. As a result, the reserved display of the special figure 2 that was displayed at the second position from the center in the area on the right side is displayed as if moving to the first position (position near the center). The hold display of the special figure 2 displayed at the first position seems to move to the middle pending change, and the position of the hold display is changed, and it changes while the variable display game of the next special figure 2 is being executed. It will be displayed as a medium hold.

Next, FIG. 174 is a hold effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the effect of the hold display shown in FIG. 170 and the like described above and FIG. 173 (a).
This hold effect setting process, for example, in both step D214 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) and step D218 (special figure 2 hold information setting process) in the single-shot command process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. 91, It is a process executed each time a hold number command is received from the game control device 100.

When this hold effect setting process is started, first, as shown in FIG. 174, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (that is, whether the variable display game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is being executed). If it is not being executed (step E221; NO), it is determined whether the number of holdings indicated by the latest holding number command received has increased from the last time (step E222).
If the number of holdings has not increased (step E222; NO), the number of holdings is 0 and there is no holding during change, and therefore the process returns (ends this processing). On the other hand, if the number of holdings increases (step E222; YES), a new holding display due to a new starting winning is to be executed. Therefore, performing a holding animation effect as the new holding display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether it is set in the setting process (step D405) or the prefetching symbol system command process (step D184) (step E223). Here, the hold animation effect means an effect of hold display by the animation shown in FIG. 170 and the like.

Then, if it is not set to perform the suspended animation effect as a new suspended display (step E223; NO), a setting process for displaying a non-animated suspended image in the suspended position is performed. (Step E224), and then returns. "Non-animated" means not an animation.
On the other hand, if it is set that the new animation is to be displayed as the pending animation effect (step E223; YES), the pending-moving image of the set animation (animation) is displayed at the pending-moving position. The setting process is performed (step E225), and then the process returns.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the step E221 is changing the special figure (step E221; YES), it is determined whether or not the number of holdings indicated by the received latest holding number command is larger than the previous number (step E227).
If the number of holdings increases (step E227; YES), a new holding display by a new start winning is to be executed. Therefore, performing a holding animation effect as the new holding display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not it is set in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol system command process (step D184) (step E228).

Then, if it is not set to perform the pending animation effect as a new pending display (step E228; NO), a setting process of displaying a non-animated pending image at a position corresponding to the pending number is performed ( Step E229) and then return. By the processing in step E229, the non-animated hold display as shown in FIG. 172 (b) is performed.
On the other hand, when it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E228; YES), the setting to display the hold image of the set animation (animation) at the position corresponding to the hold number. The process is performed (step E230), and then the process returns. Note that the processing in step E230 is not limited to the mode in which the same animation image as the preceding pending display is displayed, and an animation image in a mode different from the preceding pending display is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (c). You may set the display.

If the number of holdings has not increased as a result of the determination in step E227 (step E227; NO), it is determined whether the number of holdings indicated by the received latest holding number command has decreased from the previous time (step E232).
If the number of reservations has not decreased (step E232; NO), there is no change in the number of reservations, and the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, if the number of holdings has decreased (step E232; YES), it means that a holding shift has occurred. Therefore, the currently held pending image is erased, and the display positions of the remaining pending images are changed. A setting process for shifting the position to the middle hold position by one is performed (step E233), and then it is determined whether the received hold number command indicates the hold number is 0 (step E234).

If the number of holdings is 0 (step E234; YES), it means that only the holding during changing is performed, and therefore the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, when the number of reservations is not 0 (step E234; NO), it is necessary to display a reservation other than the change-on-hold. Therefore, the process returns after executing step E235.
In step E235, among the pending displays in which the animation to be synchronized is being executed (including the pending display in the present example), for example, the image of the earliest pending display is copied to include the latest pending display. The setting process for displaying as a hold display at the position corresponding to each hold number is executed. That is, for example, when the special map change ends from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) and the total number of holdings decreases from three to two (holding shift), for example, the earliest holding is displayed. The process of setting the remaining two pending displays by using the same image data for each frame (frame in this case) as the display (in this case, the pending display during change) is the process of step E235. . By the processing in step E235, all the pending displays are synchronized as shown in FIG. 170 (c), for example.

As described as Note 1) in FIG. 174, in the steps E224, E225, E229, E230, and E235, whether the hold display to be set for display corresponds to the special view 1 or the special view 2. Do it by distinguishing what you do. That is, if the pending display to be set for display corresponds to, for example, the special figure 1, the image having the characteristics of the special figure 1 (for example, the white-painted image described above) is set so as to be displayed separately.
Also, as described as Note 2) in FIG. 174, in step E233, the frame-shaped image surrounding the pending during change is not deleted.
Although not shown in the drawing, as described as Note 3) in FIG. 174, when the special figure fluctuation ends when the number of reservations is 0 (for example, when the determination result of step E222 is negative). ), The setting is made to delete the image pending change (image in the frame-shaped image).

Next, FIG. 175 is a hold effect setting process that is an example of a flowchart for realizing the effect of the hold display shown in FIG. 171 and the like described above and FIG. 173 (b).
The flowchart of the holding effect setting process shown in FIG. 175 is provided with step E230A instead of step E230 in FIG. 174 described above, and the other configuration is the same as the flowchart shown in FIG. 174 described above. That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 175, when the number of holdings increases during the special figure change and it is determined in step E228 that the holding animation effect is set, step E230A is executed and the process returns.

In step E230A, as the latest hold display determined to have the hold animation effect set, of the preceding hold displays that are currently displaying the animation to be synchronized (in this example, the changing hold display is also included) For example, the setting process of copying the image of the earliest hold display and displaying it at a position corresponding to the hold number of the latest hold display is executed. That is, for example, when there is a new start winning from the state shown in FIG. 171 (a) and the total number of holdings increases from 2 to 3 (that is, when there is a starting winning and a new holding display is started). In addition, the latest hold display that should be newly executed is also performed using the same image data for each frame (frame) as the first hold display (in this case, changing hold display) that is displaying an animation. The process set as above is the process of step E230A. By the processing in step E230A, the latest hold display is also synchronized from the beginning as shown in FIG. 171 (b), for example.
In addition, in the example of FIG. 170 and the subsequent figures described above, the mode in which the animation of the pending change is also synchronized has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described copy (for each frame (frame The same image data may be used for each time) to synchronize the animation, and the display during suspension during change may be separately controlled.

Next, FIG. 176 is a display example of a hold display (starting memory display) by an animation synchronized using a timer.
First, in FIG. 176 (a), the number of holdings is, for example, 2 (one for Toku-zu 1 and one for Toku-zu 2), and a person (or a predetermined character) including the pending display of the pending during change is displayed. In the display example, the animation is displayed as an animation (moving display) that walks along the inner circumference of the circle, and all the animations of the pending display (in this case, the floating pending) are synchronized. is there. This animation display may be realized by expanding and reproducing what is registered as moving image data, or by registering the motion of a person (or character) walking in a circle as a plurality of still image data. Alternatively, the registered still image data may be displayed by switching the still image to be displayed for each frame (for each frame) as needed, and the player may control the image so that it looks like a moving image.

  In the case of the display examples shown in FIG. 176 and subsequent figures, a person (or a character) whose head portion is not filled (white-painted) represents the hold (starting memory) of the special figure 1 and the person (or Characters whose heads are filled (black-painted) represent the hold (starting memory) of Toku-zu 2 and the image of the person (or character) surrounded by the square line is currently It is a hold display (display of hold during change) for displaying the starting memory during change. However, the configuration in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed separately and the configuration for displaying during suspension is not limited to such an aspect.

And, the characteristic of this display example is that in order to synchronize the animations of all the pending displays (in this case, including the pending during transition), the animations of all the pending displays are controlled by one same timer, the pending animation timer. Is the point that controls the progress of.
In detail, for example, in the case where the animation of the hold display is one cycle of 12 frames (that is, an animation that is decomposed into frames 1 to 12 and, for example, frame 12 is the first frame), for example, FIG. As shown in), it is determined that the value of one hold animation timer that increases sequentially is determined by periodically associating the frames of the hold display animation that should be sequentially displayed, and according to this relationship, all Controls the progress of the hold display animation.

  For example, in the case of the hold display A (low speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the value of the hold animation timer is 0, the frame 12 is displayed, and when the timer value is 4, the frame 1 is displayed and the timer 1 is displayed. When the value is 8, frame 2 is displayed ... (Omitted) ... When the timer value is 48, the frame returns to the beginning and frame 12 is displayed, and so on. The frames are determined so as to advance by 1, and in accordance with this relationship, the frames to be displayed are switched based on the increase of the same timer value, and the animation of the hold display proceeds. By the way, in the case of the hold display A (low speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), if the timer value of the hold animation timer is expected to increase uniformly as long as the timer operation of the hold animation timer continues, the timer value is divided by 48. When the remainder is calculated and the remainder is divided by 4, the integer value (value rounded down to the right of the decimal point) obtained as a result of this operation represents the frame number. If the generated integer value is 0, the frame number is frame 12.)

  Also, in the case of the hold display B (high speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the value of the hold animation timer is 0, the frame 12 is displayed, and when the timer value is 2, the frame 1 is displayed and the same timer is displayed. When the value is 4, frame 2 is displayed ... (Omitted) ... When the timer value is 24, the frame returns to the beginning and frame 12 is displayed, and so on. The frames are determined so as to advance by 1, and in accordance with this relationship, the frames to be displayed are switched based on the increase of the same timer value, and the animation of the hold display proceeds. By the way, in the case of the hold display B (high speed) shown in FIG. 179 (b), if the timer value of the hold animation timer increases uniformly as long as the timer operation of the hold animation timer continues, the timer value is divided by 24. When the remainder is calculated and the remainder is divided by two, the integer value (the value after the decimal point is rounded down) obtained as a result of this operation represents the frame number (however, the result If the generated integer value is 0, the frame number is frame 12.) For example, a program or a data table is described by using such a mathematical relationship, and the progress of animations of all the pending displays is controlled by one and the same pending animation timer according to the above relationships.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), the mode in which the increase of the frame number is slower than the increase of the timer value of the hold animation timer (basically, the frame number can be obtained by dividing the timer value by a predetermined number). However, in order to make the animation progress faster, the mode in which the frame number increases faster than the timer value of the hold animation timer (basically by multiplying the timer value by a predetermined number) Relationship in which the frame number can be obtained). For example, the control may be performed so that the frame number can be obtained by obtaining the remainder by dividing the calculation result obtained by multiplying the timer value of the hold animation timer by 2 or 3 times by 12. Alternatively, the increase of the timer value of the hold animation timer and the increase of the frame number may be the same mode (for example, the remainder in which the timer value is divided by 12 is the frame number as it is).

In any case, due to the above-mentioned characteristics, there is a new starting prize (special figure 2) in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a) (the state in which all the animations on hold are synchronized), which corresponds to the new starting prize. Even if a new hold display (latest hold display) is started, the animation of this latest hold display is also synchronized with other hold displays from the beginning as shown in FIG. 176 (b). This is because from the time when a new hold display is started, this new hold display is also controlled based on the hold animation timer described above, so the value of the hold animation timer at that time is 40 and other hold At the moment when the display (for example, the hold display A) is displaying the frame 10, the new hold display (for example, the hold display A) is also started from the frame 10 based on the timer value 40. is there. By the way, if the new hold display is controlled by another timer without performing such control, the new hold display starts from the first frame 12, and the next frame starts from the frame 1 to the next frame. 2, the display progresses, but with this, there is a lag with other pending displays and they are not synchronized.
However, with the configuration of this example, with the simple configuration using one timer, all the suspended display of the animation is synchronized from the beginning, and it is possible to realize the production of the suspended display with a highly entertaining animation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. . That is, when an animation is executed as a hold display, there is a problem that if one hold display and another hold display are not synchronized with each other, the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. In addition, since one hold animation timer manages all the hold display animations, control becomes easy.

  The operation of the hold animation timer and the like will be described here. FIG. 179 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the hold animation timer. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the hold animation timer stops, for example, the timekeeping operation during the customer waiting presentation, and performs the timekeeping operation when there is a start winning during the customer waiting presentation and the special figure variation starts, for example. Start anew. To newly start the time counting operation means to start the timer value from 0 and increase the timer value as time passes. If the configuration is such that the timing operation is newly started when there is a start winning during the customer waiting performance, then a new hold display (including the pending display during change) starts from the initial position (for example, frame 12 described above) from this time. Will be done. In this way, when the hold animation timer starts the time counting operation, the hold display may be set to be executed from a predetermined animation initial position (first frame).

  Note that FIG. 179 (a) illustrates a mode in which the time keeping operation of the hold animation timer is stopped at the start of the customer waiting effect, but the invention is not limited to this. The hold animation timer may stop the timekeeping operation at the time point, and the timekeeping operation may always be stopped during the special figure fluctuation stop. The flowchart of FIG. 180 described later has such an aspect. In addition, the hold animation timer may have a mode in which the timer operation is always continued without stopping, for example, during activation of the effect control device 300. Further, the value of the hold animation timer is not limited to the mode of continuously increasing, but may be a mode of returning to 0 when reaching a predetermined upper limit value and increasing from 0 again.

Next, FIGS. 177 and 178 show another display example of the hold display (starting memory display) by animation using a timer.
First, in FIG. 177 (a), even when there are a plurality of modes (types) of the pending display in which the cycle time of the animation operation is different (in other words, the apparent speed of the animation operation is different), the same The example of a display which shares a hold animation timer and controls all hold displays is shown. In this display example, the number of holdings is, for example, 3 (one for Toku-zu 1 and two for Toku-zu 2). Animation display of walking along the circumference (holding display A; one cycle is, for example, 4 seconds) or animation display in which a person (or a predetermined character) runs along the inner circumference along a circle (holding display B; one cycle is, for example, 2). This is a display example in which the hold display is performed by (seconds), and the animation of the hold display having the same cycle cycle time (in this case, the changing hold is also included) is synchronized. In this case, only the latest hold display is displayed on the high-speed hold display B, and all other hold displays (including the variable hold) are displayed on the low-speed hold display A and are synchronized.

  Then, even when there are a plurality of types of pending displays having different cycle times, the progress of all the pending display animations is based on the same pending animation timer according to the relationship shown in FIG. 179 (b) described above. With the configuration of controlling, the effect of facilitating the control can be obtained. As already described in the description of FIG. 179 (b), even if the same hold animation timer is used, the result of multiplying this timer value by a predetermined number or dividing this timer value by a predetermined number (that is, If the progress of the animation display frame is controlled based on the result of multiplication or division, the cycle time will be different (that is, the speed of animation movement will be different). Display control can be realized based on the same timer value.

Next, in FIG. 177 (b), in addition to the hold display of animation similar to the display example of FIG. 177 (a), animation display is performed as a notice effect display of variable display of a decorative large pattern (special figure). It is an example. In this case, both the left symbol and the right symbol of the large decorative symbol are stopped at "3", and only the middle symbol of the large decorative symbol is slowly changing, and the reach action is being executed. By the way, even in such a reach state, the decorative small designs are all displayed in a changing state. Then, as a special notice effect in the reach action, a large circle is displayed around the display position where the middle pattern of the large decorative pattern is variably displayed, and an animation display of the "tiger Taro" running along the inner circumference of this large circle Is being done. Then, the animation display in which this "tiger taro" runs is also controlled based on a common hold animation timer as in the case of the hold display B, for example.
In this way, it is possible to use a hold animation timer that is common with the hold display to control the effect display other than the hold display (such as the notice effect display of the variable display game). In addition, effects other than the hold display can be easily synchronized with or linked to the hold display.

Next, FIG. 178 is a display example in which a new hold display mode is displayed based on the same hold animation timer even if the hold display mode changes due to the effect mode switching.
First, in the display example shown in FIG. 178 (a), the number of holdings is 2 (1 special figure 1 and 1 special figure 2), for example, in the state where the effect of “mountain mode” is being performed, In the viewable area of the display unit 41a, a large background image of the mountain is displayed, for example, a production image (animation may be used) in which "Torarou" runs and climbs the mountain is displayed. Correspondingly, for example, the above-mentioned hold display B is executed. The progress of the hold display is controlled based on the one hold animation timer described above. 178 (a) shows the moment when the special figure is stopped at "9,3,4", and the decorative small pattern is also stopped at "9,3,4".

178 (b) is a display example of a state in which the production mode is switched after the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the production mode is switched to the "sea mode", and the next variable display game is started. is there. In this case, the number of reservations is 1 (1 for Toku-zu 1 and 0 for Toku-zu 2), and a large background image of the sea is displayed in the visible area of the display unit 41a. An image (may be an animation) for swimming is displayed, and as the hold display, the above-mentioned hold display B (however, not the person but the fish swims along the inner circumference of the circle) is displayed corresponding to the "sea mode". It is running. The progress of the hold display is continuously controlled before the effect mode is switched based on the one hold animation timer described above. That is, even if the mode of the hold display is switched by the effect mode switching, the hold display of the new mode after the effect mode switching is not executed from the first frame of the animation (for example, the first frame of the movie). Display starts from the frame corresponding to the value of the hold animation timer at that time based on the correspondence relationship described in FIG. 179 (b). Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect mode switching with easy control that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
As another aspect, when the effect mode is switched, the hold animation timer is cleared (reset), and the timing operation of the hold animation timer is restarted from 0, so that the animation of the hold display after the effect mode is switched to the first frame ( For example, it may be displayed from the first frame of the movie). In this case, the player can see the hold display in the new display mode corresponding to the new production mode after switching from the beginning, and in that respect, the production effect is enhanced.

Next, FIG. 180 is a holding effect setting process which is an example of a flowchart for realizing the effect of the hold display shown in FIGS. 176 to 178 described above.
This hold effect setting process, for example, in both step D214 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) and step D218 (special figure 2 hold information setting process) in the single-shot command process of the effect control device 300 shown in FIG. 91, It is a process executed each time a hold number command is received from the game control device 100.

When this hold effect setting process is started, first, as shown in FIG. 180, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (that is, whether the variable display game of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being executed). If it is not being executed (step E241; NO), it is determined whether the number of holdings indicated by the latest holding number command received has increased from the previous time (step E242).
When the number of holdings has not increased (step E242; NO), the number of holdings is 0 and there is no holding during change, and therefore the process returns (ends this processing). On the other hand, if the number of holdings is increased (step E242; YES), a new holding display by a new start winning is to be executed. Therefore, performing a holding animation effect as the new holding display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not it is set in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol system command process (step D184) (step E243). Here, the suspended animation effect means the effect of the suspended display by the animation shown in FIG. 176 and the like.

Then, if it is not set to perform the pending animation effect as a new pending display (step E243; NO), a setting process for displaying a non-animating pending image in the pending position is performed. (Step E244), and then returns. "Non-animated" means not an animation.
On the other hand, if it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E243; YES), the time keeping operation of the hold animation timer is started from 0 (step E245) and then the set animation ( A setting process is performed to display the image of the (holding) during the changing of (animation) at the position of the holding during changing based on the holding animation timer (step E246), and then returns. Here, "display based on the hold animation timer ..." means, for example, based on the relationship as shown in FIG. Means to advance the display.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the step E241 is changing the special figure (step E241; YES), it is determined whether or not the number of holdings indicated by the received latest holding number command is larger than the previous number (step E247).
When the number of holdings increases (step E247; YES), a new holding display by a new start winning is to be executed. Therefore, performing a holding animation effect as the new holding display is, for example, a variable effect. It is determined whether or not it is set in the setting process (step D405) or the look-ahead symbol system command process (step D184) (step E248).

Then, if it is not set to perform the pending animation effect as a new pending display (step E248; NO), a setting process for displaying a non-animated pending image at a position corresponding to the pending number is performed ( Step E249) and then return.
On the other hand, if it is set to perform the hold animation effect as a new hold display (step E248; YES), the hold image of the set animation (animation) is being displayed as an animation to be synchronized. Based on the hold animation timer that is the same as the hold, the setting process for displaying at the position corresponding to the hold number is performed (step E250), and then the process returns. The process of step E250 is not limited to the mode in which the same animation image as the preceding hold display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), an animation image of a different type from the preceding hold display is displayed. You may set the display.

If the number of holdings has not increased as a result of the determination in step E247 (step E247; NO), it is determined whether the number of holdings indicated by the latest received holding number command has decreased from the last time (step E252).
Then, when the number of holdings has not decreased (step E252; NO), there is no change in the number of holdings, and therefore the process returns without doing anything.
On the other hand, when the number of holdings has decreased (step E252; YES), it means that a holding shift has occurred. Therefore, the currently held pending image is erased, and the display positions of the remaining held images are changed. A setting process for shifting the position to the next middle position by one is performed (step E253), and then the process returns.
Here, in step E253, when the effect mode is switched, a process of changing the display mode of the hold display to a mode corresponding to the effect mode after the switching is performed. As a result, for example, the hold display mode is switched as shown in FIG. 178 described above.

Note that, as described as Note 1) in FIG. 180, in the steps E244, E246, E249, and E250, whether the pending display to be set for display corresponds to that of FIG. It distinguishes whether or not. That is, if the pending display to be set for display corresponds to, for example, the special figure 1, the image having the characteristics of the special figure 1 (for example, the white-painted image described above) is set so as to be displayed separately.
In addition, as described as Note 2) in FIG. 180, in step E253, the frame-shaped image surrounding the pending suspension is not deleted.
Further, although not shown in the drawing, as described as Note 3) in FIG. 180, when the special figure fluctuation ends when the number of reservations is 0 (for example, when the determination result of step E242 is negative). ), The setting is made to erase the pending-changing image (the image in the frame-shaped image) and the setting to end the timing operation of the holding animation timer.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 176 and the subsequent figures described above, the aspect in which the animation of the pending change is also synchronized has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be synchronized with each other, and the display of suspension during change may be separately controlled.
Further, in the above description, the explanation is made on the assumption that the control of the hold display is newly started at the time when there is a corresponding start winning prize. However, for example, on the display layer, the animation corresponding to the maximum hold number is displayed. Alternatively, the hold display may be always executed. For example, on the display layer, the number of animation hold displays that correspond to the maximum number of holds is always synchronized, and other images are displayed on the front side for the hold displays corresponding to more than the actual hold number. Then (or with the transparency of the hold display set to 100%), it is hidden so as not to be seen by the player, and when the number of pieces to be held displayed increases due to a start winning, the hiding is stopped (concealed) as necessary. Control may be performed so that the player actually sees the hold display by deleting the image or reducing the transparency of the hold display. In this case, the type of animation to be executed at the time of concealment is, for example, a specific basic type (for example, for special figure 1, low-speed hold display A), and when actually showing it, white painting to black painting is necessary. The display may be changed to the special display 2 for use, or the low speed hold display A may be changed to, for example, the high speed hold display B.

Next, FIGS. 181 to 183 are diagrams showing comparison of the jackpot expectation and the like depending on the mode of the suspension display of the special figure (decorative special figure reservation display) on the display unit 41a of the display device 41. It should be noted that the special display reservation display on the display device 41 or the like, that is, the special display reservation display for the player on the display device or the like that performs variable display of the decoration special display (display of starting memory of special drawing) is displayed. , Decoration special map reservation display. Note that the decorative special figure reservation display (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a reservation display) includes the display of the variable pending (also referred to as the pending) described above. Further, in the present application, an image displayed as such a hold display may be referred to as a hold image. In addition, the decoration special figure reservation display may be performed in a display area of another display means for a player different from the display device that performs variable display of the decoration special figure.
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, which will be described later, under the control of the effect control device 300, the decoration special figure reservation display mode (that is, the reservation image display mode) is a normal display mode and a change suggestion mode. , And special display modes can be changed. The normal display mode is a display mode that is neither a change suggestion mode nor a special display mode, and may be referred to as “normal hold”. The special display mode is, for example, a display mode (so-called blue hold, red hold, etc.) different from the normal display mode executed as the prefetching notice effect described above. Further, the change suggestion mode is a display mode for suggesting (or notifying) to the player that the normal display mode may change to the special display mode, and generally, the hold display blinks. It is a display mode that appears to the player as if the player is present, and is sometimes referred to as "blink hold". Further, the hold display in the special display mode described above may be referred to as “special hold” below. The blinking hold (change suggestion mode) may be changed to the special display mode after that, but may be returned to the normal hold (normal display mode) thereafter. Further, in the case of this example, the hold display of the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) is also used as a kind (or a part) of the above-mentioned look-ahead notice effect and the effect of the change notice (a notice to the changing game result that is not the look-ahead notice). Contribute to improving the interest of.

First, FIG. 181 is a specific example of a difference in setting of the big hit expectation degree or the like between blinking hold (change suggestion mode) and normal hold (normal display mode). Here, the setting means setting of data of programs and tables used for the above-described control processing of the effect control device 300 (the same applies to the settings of FIGS. 182 and 183).
In the present example, the jackpot expectation degree (also referred to as the probability that the result of the variable display game of the special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot reliability) due to the display mode of pending during change is displayed as a pending display as shown in the first line of FIG. 181. Is set to be higher in the case of normal hold than in the case of flashing hold. For example, from the player's point of view, if the pending change is blinking pending (for example, if the blinking is held at the start of the variation, or if the blinking is held after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation), the pending change is usually The probability that the changing display game during the change becomes a big hit is lower than that in the case of being on hold (for example, when it is normally held at the start of fluctuation, or when it is normally held after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation). The appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set to be different depending on the big hit determination result (the big hit determination result obtained by the command from the game control device 100). As a result, if the variable hold is blinking hold, it is less likely to be a big hit than the normal hold, and it is possible to obtain an effect that the distinction between the normal hold and the blink hold can be clarified.
Next, the ratio (probability) of temporarily disabling the hold display (particularly the display of the variable hold) for a special notice effect display (for example, a movie display of spar reach) is shown in the second line of FIG. 181. As described above, the hold display is set to be higher in the normal hold than in the blink hold. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, when the variable pending is flashing pending, the variable pending display is temporarily hidden (temporarily hidden) compared to the case where the variable pending is normal pending. In order to reduce the probability, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set differently according to the selection result of the effect contents. As a result, the blinking hold has a lower rate of being temporarily erased than the normal hold, and an effect such as a distinction between the normal hold and the blink hold can be obtained.

Next, the ratio (probability) of changing the hold display to the special display mode is lower in the case of the normal hold than in the case of the blink display of the hold display, as shown in the third line of FIG. 181. Is set to. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, it is set so that the flashing hold has a higher probability of changing to the special display mode than the normal hold. This is to correspond to the purpose of the blinking hold, that the blinking hold is to suggest (notice) the change of the hold display to the player.
Next, the appearance rate (probability of appearance) of the character performing the pending display change is lower in the normal pending status than in the flashing pending status, as shown in the fourth line of FIG. 181. Is set. For example, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set so that the appearance rate of the character that may change the hold display is higher in the blink hold than in the normal hold as seen from the player. The setting is different according to the selection result. This is also for the purpose of keeping the blinking.

  Next, the effect ratio of the character performing the pending display change to the pending display (for example, the probability that a character such as “Torataro” will execute an effect that acts on the pending display to change the pending display) is shown in FIG. As shown in the fifth line of, the setting is such that the normal display is lower than the flashing display in the normal hold. For example, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is such that the appearance rate of the effect in which the character acts to change the hold display is higher when the blinking hold is higher than the normal hold as seen from the player. The setting is different according to the selection result of. This is also for the purpose of keeping the blinking.

Next, the jackpot expectation in the hold display at the time of winning (starting winning) is lower in the case of the normal hold than in the case of the hold display being blinking hold, as shown in the sixth line of FIG. 181. Is set to. For example, from the player's point of view, if the hold display at the time of winning is blinking hold (that is, if the display mode of the first hold display of the starting memory caused by the start winning is blinking hold), The appearance rate of each display mode of the first hold display is set differently according to the big hit determination result so that the probability that the corresponding variable display game is a big hit is higher than when the hold display at the time point is the normal hold. It is said that. As a result, if the hold display at the time of winning is blinking hold, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than normal holding, and the effect of being able to clarify the distinction between normal holding and blinking holding is obtained. With this setting, the player feels experientially that the blinking hold at the time of winning is easier to hit than the normal hold at the time of winning. However, due to the setting of the first line in FIG. 181, if the blinking hold at the time of winning is continued as it is and remains blinking hold after shifting to the changing hold, the changing hold Since the probability of a big hit is smaller than in the case of normal hold, the player pays close attention to the effect of the hold display while wishing that the flashing hold at the time of winning will change (if possible, change to a special display mode) As a result, the interest in the game is improved.
It should be noted that the characteristics shown in the sixth line of FIG. 181 are not limited to the time when the start winning is achieved, and for example, at the time when the start winning is achieved, any one of until the standby hold displayed in the normal hold (normal display mode) is shifted to the variable hold. The configuration may be effective even when the flashing is changed to the hold (change suggestion mode) at the time point. With this configuration, when the standby hold changes from the normal hold to the blink hold, for example, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the normal hold remains. Therefore, the player also changes the blink hold after that ( If possible, the player will pay close attention to the effect of the hold display while wishing to change to the special display mode), and the interest of the game is improved.

Next, the overlapping appearance rate of other look-ahead notices including so-called gaze (the notice effect that does not result in a favorable situation for the player such as a big hit) (for example, when a sword is stuck in an image of the pending display that is not pending while changing) (Probability that the prefetching notice effect by the display effect different from the hold display itself appears in duplicate) is as shown in the 7th line of FIG. 181, when the hold display is the normal hold rather than the blink hold. It is set to be lower. For example, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display differs depending on the selection result of the effect contents, such that the blinking hold has a higher overlapping appearance rate of other look-ahead notices than the normal hold as seen from the player. It is set.
Next, the overlapping appearance rate of other relevant change notices including so-called gaze (for example, a notice effect by a different display effect from the hold display itself such as a sword sticking in the image of the hold display during change is duplicated. The probability of appearance) is set to be lower in the case of the normal hold than in the case of the hold display being blinking hold, as shown in the eighth line of FIG. 181. For example, the appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display depends on the selection result of the effect contents so that the blinking hold has a higher overlapping appearance rate of other fluctuation notices than the normal hold as seen from the player. The settings are different.

Next, the hold display change rate due to the threshold reaching after the predetermined event (for example, the probability that the hold display changes when the number of fluctuations (or the number of hold shifts) reaches a specified number) is on the 9th line in FIG. As shown, the corresponding hold display is set to be lower when the normal hold is set than when the corresponding hold display is blinking hold. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, the flashing hold is set to have a higher probability of being changed than the normal hold after, for example, a predetermined number of times of variation.
Next, the probability that the stop time of the decorative pattern (decorative special map) will be long in the variable display of the corresponding special pattern (for example, a variation pattern including a reach action, the stop display time of the decorative pattern is a normal variation pattern (for example, reach action). The probability that a variation pattern of a special figure that is longer than that of (not included) is selected when the corresponding hold display is normal hold rather than blinking hold, as shown in the 10th line of FIG. 181. It is set to be higher. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, when the variable hold is blinking hold, the stop time (stop display) of the decorative pattern (decorative special map) in the variable display being executed is higher than when the variable hold is the normal hold. The appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set differently according to the variation pattern (contents of the variation pattern command received from the game control device 100) so that the probability that the time becomes long becomes low. This setting also has the effect of clarifying the distinction between normal hold and blink hold.

Next, FIG. 182 shows a specific example of the difference in setting of the big hit expectation degree or the like between the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) and the special hold (special display mode). Note that the same description of the same items as those in the case of FIG.
First, as shown in the first line of FIG. 182, the jackpot expectation in the display mode of the variable hold is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the flashing hold mode. ing. This is to correspond to the purpose of the special display mode in which the hold display in the special display mode suggests (announces) the possibility of an advantageous state such as a big hit to the player.
Next, as shown in the second line of FIG. 182, the ratio of temporarily hiding the hold display (especially the display of the changing hold) for a special notice effect display is when the hold display is blinking hold. It is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the special display mode. As a result, the proportion of the flashing suspension disappearing temporarily becomes lower than that in the special display mode.

Next, the jackpot expectation in the hold display at the time of winning is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the case where the hold display is blinking hold, as shown in the third line of FIG. 182. Has been done. This is to correspond to the purpose of the special display mode.
Next, as shown in the fourth line in FIG. 182, the overlapping appearance rate of other prefetching notices including so-called gaze is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the hold display is blinking hold. Is set. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.
Next, the overlapping appearance rate of other fluctuation notices including so-called gasses is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the hold display is blinking hold, as shown in the fifth line of FIG. 182. Is set to. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.

Next, the hold display change rate due to the threshold reaching after the predetermined event is higher in the special display mode than in the case where the corresponding hold display is blinking hold, as shown in the sixth line of FIG. 182. Is set. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.
Next, in the variable display of the corresponding special map, the probability that the decoration pattern (decorative special map) is stopped for a longer time is longer than that in the case where the corresponding pending display is blinking pending, as shown in the 7th line of FIG. 182. The special display mode is set to be higher.

Next, the probability that the variation time of the decorative pattern (decorative special diagram) becomes long in the variable display of the corresponding special map (for example, a variation pattern including a reach action, the variation time of the decorative pattern is a normal variation pattern (for example, a reach action is included). (The probability that a special pattern variation pattern that is longer than that of the corresponding) is selected in the special display mode as compared with the case where the corresponding pending display is blinking pending, as shown in the eighth line of FIG. 182. It is set to be higher. For example, from the viewpoint of the player, when the variable pending is flashing pending, the variable time of the decorative pattern (decorative special figure) in the variable display being executed is longer than in the case where the variable pending is the special display mode. The appearance rate of each display mode of the hold display is set to be different depending on the variation pattern so that the probability of occurrence becomes low. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.
Next, the ratio (probability) of the display mode of the hold display returning to the display of the normal hold is the same in the case where the hold display is the blinking hold and the case where the hold display is the special display mode, as shown in the ninth line of FIG. 182. Or, they are set to be substantially the same.

  Next, the appearance rate of the character performing the pending display change and the effect rate of the character performing the pending display change on the pending display are as shown in the 10th and 11th lines of FIG. 182, respectively. The special display mode is set to be the same or higher than the special display mode. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

Next, FIG. 183 shows a specific example of the difference in setting the jackpot expectation and the like between the normal hold (normal display mode) and the special hold (special display mode). Note that the same description of the same items as those in the cases of FIGS. 181 and 182 described above will be omitted.
First, as shown in the first line of FIG. 183, the jackpot expectation in the display mode of the variable hold is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the normal hold mode. ing. This is to meet the purpose of the special display mode.
Next, as shown in the second line of FIG. 183, the rate at which the hold display (particularly the display of the hold during change) is temporarily hidden for a special notice effect display is when the hold display is the normal hold. It is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the special display mode. As a result, the rate of temporary disappearance of the normal hold becomes lower than that of the special display mode.

Next, as shown in the third line of FIG. 183, the jackpot expectation in the hold display at the time of winning is set to be higher in the special display mode than in the normal display. Has been done. This is to correspond to the purpose of the special display mode.
Next, as shown in the fourth line of FIG. 183, the overlapping appearance rate of other prefetching notices including so-called gaze is higher in the special display mode than in the normal display. Is set. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.
Next, as shown in the fifth line of FIG. 183, the overlapping appearance rate of other fluctuation notices including so-called gasses is higher in the special display mode than in the normal display. Is set to. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.

Next, in the variable display of the corresponding special figure, the probability that the stop time of the decorative pattern is long and the probability that the variable time of the decorative pattern is long are as shown in the sixth and seventh lines of FIG. 183, respectively. It is set to be higher in the case of the special display mode than in the case of the normal hold display. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.
Next, the appearance rate of the character performing the pending display change and the effect rate of the character performing the pending display change on the pending display are as shown in the 8th and 9th lines of FIG. 183, respectively. The special display mode is set to be higher than the special display mode. As a result, the player can empirically feel that the special display mode is more advantageous, the expectation for the special display mode is increased, and the interest is increased.

Next, FIG. 184 and FIG. 185 are diagrams showing specific examples of the hold display performed on the display unit 41 a (display area) of the display device 41. In addition, in FIG. 184 and subsequent figures, for convenience of explanation, only one of the special maps 1 and 2 can be given a starting winning, and only one of the special maps 1 and 2 is displayed for hold. The specific example of is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 184 and the subsequent figures, images such as, for example, the fourth symbol, which are not particularly related to the features of the invention, are omitted in the drawing. Further, in the following, an original hold (starting memory in which the variable display game is not executed) that is not the changing hold is sometimes referred to as a waiting hold in order to distinguish it from the changing hold. In the following, the pending image that is pending during change may be referred to as an image that is pending during fluctuation or an image that is pending during fluctuation, and the pending image may be referred to as an image during standby pending or an image pending during standby.
First, FIG. 184 (a) shows a state in which the second winning is held due to two start winnings during the special map change, and the holding display is performed at the lower edge of the visible area. In this case, the unfilled (white-filled) circular image surrounded by the quadrangular line is an image for the pending display (changing pending display) for displaying the starting memory of the currently changing special map. It is a hold image of middle hold). In this example, the display of the variable hold (also referred to as the hold) is displayed on the leftmost side, and the images of the hold displays (holding hold images) are arranged side by side from the left side in the execution order of the variable display game. ing. In this case, the first hold display (display of standby hold 1) arranged to the right of the changing hold is blinking hold, and the second hold display arranged to the right of it (wait hold 2). (Indication) is usually on hold. In this case, both the flashing hold and the normal hold are white-painted circular images, but in the case of the flashing hold, the brightness is generally lower than the normal hold image, and the normal hold image has a constant brightness, for example. On the other hand, the blinking hold is an image in which the player looks like blinking due to a change in brightness. The blinking hold is for indicating (preliminary) or notifying that the hold display may change, for example, by displaying such an image. If such blinking hold is displayed at the time of winning, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case of normal hold as described in the sixth line of FIG. 181, and the second hold of FIG. 184 (a) is held. As shown in the display, if the game is normally held at the time of winning, the jackpot expectation is lower than in the case of blinking hold.

  Next, FIG. 184 (b) is an example in which the changing hold is changed to the blinking hold from the state of FIG. 184 (a), and super reach is generated. As a notice effect for the super reach, for example, a movie in which Torarou runs around a fluctuating middle pattern is displayed. Such a notice effect is generally displayed in a large size by using the entire visible area (illustrated by a half line) of the display unit 41a, and therefore the hold display is temporarily hidden (when the player In some cases, it is difficult to see). However, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), when the variable pending is flashing pending, it is hidden as compared with the case where the variable pending is normal pending, as described in the second line of FIG. 181. The ratio controlled by (1) is low, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the ratio that the hold display is continued (is not temporarily hidden) is high.

  Next, in FIG. 184 (c), the variable display game ends when the state is changed from the state of FIG. 184 (b), the pending shift processing is performed, and the pending display on the display unit 41a shifts (that is, This is an example in which the display of each pending display is switched so that it appears to move to the left by one), and the variable display game of a new special figure corresponding to the new pending pending is started. In this case, the first standby hold before the shift shift was shifted to the variable hold, but remains blinking after being shifted to the variable hold. As described in the first line of FIG. 181, if the changing hold is a blinking holding effect pattern, the fluctuation started compared to the case where the changing hold is the normal hold. There is a high probability (probability) that the display game will be missed thereafter. However, in the case of the pattern in which the variable pending is changed from the flashing pending to another display mode before the variable display game ends, the probability of a big hit is higher than in the case where the flashing pending is kept, and especially in the special display mode. When changing, the probability of a big hit is significantly high as described in the first line of FIG. 183.

Next, FIG. 185 (a) shows a state in which the second winning is held due to two start winnings during the special figure variation, and the display portion 41a is visually recognized as in the state of FIG. 184 (a). The pending display is displayed at the lower edge of the feasible area. However, in this case, both the variable hold and the other hold (standby hold) are displayed in the normal hold mode (normal display mode).
Next, in FIG. 185 (b), a start winning is generated from the state of FIG. 185 (a), the number of pending displays of waiting pending changes to three, the pending pending change is changed to a special display mode, and the second waiting This is an example in which the hold is changed to the blink hold and the display of the character performing the hold change (for example, the display of the animation in which “Torataro” walks) is started. The appearance of the character performing the pending display change described in the fourth line of FIG. 181 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), and it does not matter whether or not the pending display is subsequently operated. There may be a production pattern that appears and then disappears without acting on the hold display. Note that, in the case of the pending display during change in the case of this example, as a special display mode, a circular image with filling (black painting), which is larger than the normal holding, is displayed. The special display mode is, for example, more flashy in size and color than the normally-held display, and is a mode in which the player can feel that it is special (high jackpot expectation), There can be various modes. The special display mode may be one type, but it is preferable that there are a plurality of types depending on the size, color, shape, pattern, etc., and the jackpot expectation degree is different for each type.

  Next, in FIG. 185 (c), a display that makes it appear that the character performing the hold change has changed to the special display mode by acting on the hold display of the second standby hold from the state of FIG. 185 (b) (for example, This is an example in which an animation display of "Torarou" jumping and riding on a circular image on hold is started. In this case, the second hold-hold display of the waiting hold acted by the character “Tora Taro” who performs the hold change is, for example, a striped pattern as a special display mode after “Tora Taro” jumps and gets on the top. It has been changed to a large circular image (which represents a ball in a ball ride), indicating to the player that the jackpot expectation is high. The action of the character performing the pending display change on the pending display described in the fifth line and the like of FIG. 181 is as shown in FIG. 185 (c), for example. It should be noted that this example is only an example, and there may be various modes such as the image of the character "sword" being stuck in the image of the hold display.

Next, FIGS. 186 to 188 are diagrams showing a specific example of a hold display including a move display described later at the time of a hold shift performed in the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41. 189 is a timing chart corresponding to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 186 to 188. In addition, in FIG. 186 and subsequent figures, for the sake of convenience of description, a specific display example is illustrated assuming that the visible region is the entire display unit 41a. Also, the dotted line with an arrow in the timing chart of FIG. 189 illustrates a state in which the standby hold display is moving in accordance with the hold shift.
First, FIG. 186 (a) shows a state in which there are three start winnings during the special figure variation and a third hold is generated (state shown by (T1) in FIG. 189), and mainly in the display section 41a. Each hold display is performed at each predetermined position on the lower edge. The hold display is not limited to the mode of being performed at the lower edge of the visible area of the display unit as described above, and may be performed at other positions as well. The display of (standby hold) is performed in different areas except during movement of the hold display position during the hold shift. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 186 (a), the standby-held images are displayed at predetermined positions at predetermined intervals so that images do not overlap between the standby-held images. Further speaking, when the images in the waiting and holding state adjacent to each other are stopped and displayed in the normal state (the state in which the moving display is not in progress due to the holding shift described later, which is also called the waiting state), the images do not overlap each other. In addition, the display position, shape, size, etc. are set. In this way, since the pending display of the floating pending and each standby pending is set so that the images do not overlap from the beginning, the display layer and display priority for displaying the pending pending floating and each standby pending in the control process. Since it is not necessary to consider the relationship of, the control becomes easy. Here, the stop display of the image of the hold display (hold image) means the hold display in the standby state (normal state) that is not in the moving display associated with the hold shift, and does not necessarily mean that the hold image is stopped. There is no limitation, and there may be movement such as shaking of the held image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), it is preferable that the display position of the pending suspension be farther than the display position of the pending suspension, as compared with the positional relationship between the standby suspensions. It is desirable that the image is also different from the image on standby. By doing so, even if the other image for indicating that the change is on hold is not displayed (for example, the rectangular line surrounding the display of the change on hold shown in FIG. 184 (a)), the change is on hold. The difference between waiting and holding can be clearly shown to the player. In the case of FIG. 186 (a), the image on hold display (holding image) is a white ellipse image, but as the holding image for the changing hold, a much larger elliptical image is displayed compared to the waiting hold. ing. Further, the display position of the pending change is at the left end of the display unit 41a, and is set in another area distant from the display area of the standby hold in the upper left direction.
Note that the ellipse shown by the dotted line in FIG. 186 (a) shows the predetermined display position when the fourth standby hold (standby hold 4) is displayed, and such a dotted line is actually Not displayed. However, as an effect or in order to show the upper limit number (for example, four) of the hold to the player, a display indicating such an unheld hold may be performed.
In addition, in the description of this example, the first standby hold displayed at the leftmost predetermined position among the standby holds (the hold in which the variable display game is executed next) is referred to as the standby hold 1, and similarly 2 The second may be referred to as standby hold 2, the third may be referred to as standby hold 3, and the fourth may be referred to as standby hold 4. Corresponding to this, for example, “holding display of waiting hold 1” in the timing chart of FIG. 189 means that the first waiting hold display state (described later) displayed at the leftmost predetermined position among the waiting holds. (Except during the movement display due to the hold shift).

  Next, in FIG. 186 (b), the variable display game is removed from the state of FIG. 186 (a), and the stop display of, for example, "848" is started as the stop symbol of the decorative special figure, and the display of the display unit 41a is started. For example, a display example of a state immediately before the shift of the hold display is started (a state shown by (T2) in FIG. 189) is shown. In this example, before performing the display for moving the position of the hold display with the hold shift, first, the hold display of the changing hold (the hold) corresponding to the change display is shown in FIG. 186 (b) (or FIG. As shown in 189), the non-display control is executed, and the standbys 1 to 3 are in the display state where they are displayed at the predetermined positions. This allows the player to clearly recognize that the variation of the special figure variation display game has ended, that one starting memory has been exhausted, or that the hold shift will be performed.

  Next, FIG. 186 (c) shows a state in which the display (movement display) in which the display position of the waiting and holding is moved from the state of FIG. 186 (b) is started with the holding shift (the state shown by (T3) in FIG. 189). ) Is illustrated. In this case, for example, animation display is performed in which the images of the standby displays of the standby blocks 1 to 3 all move to the left all at once. In addition, the ellipse shown by the dotted line in FIG. 186 (c) is the display position at the time of stop before each standby and hold image moves (that is, the normal state shown in FIG. 186 (a) (moving display accompanying hold shift). (A predetermined position in which each standby-holding image is displayed in a state in which is not performed) is illustrated for convenience of description, and is not necessarily displayed in practice (however, it is displayed as an effect). Good). In addition, the movement in the case where there are a plurality of waiting and holding in this way may be a mode in which they are simultaneously started at the same time, but the moving display is performed at a different timing or moving speed for each waiting and holding (for example, an animation in which the image on the holding display moves). Display) may be performed.

  Next, FIG. 187 (a) shows a state in which the start winning has occurred and the number of waiting on standby has become four (including (T4) in FIG. 189) from the state of FIG. 186 (c). The state shown) is illustrated. Since the fourth waiting hold newly generated by the start winning is the third waiting hold 3 after the shift, in the present example, the third predetermined position (waiting hold 3 is stopped and displayed in the normal state). Is displayed from the beginning (or is displayed once at the 4th predetermined position and then immediately moved to the 3rd predetermined position), and the advancement of the above-mentioned movement display of waiting and holding is performed. Depending on the situation, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), this fourth new image of waiting and holding and the image of the third waiting and holding (waiting and holding 3 before shift) that started moving display are displayed. The control is performed to display in a partially polymerized state (partially overlapped). In other words, in the shift from standby hold to standby hold, the subsequent standby hold displayed on the rear side can be moved to the front side even if the standby hold displayed on the front side is not hidden. At this time, even if the standby hold during the movement is partially the same as the other standby holds, the display configuration is such that the images are displayed in the overlapping state as they are. That is, the image of the waiting and holding that is being moved and displayed may partially overlap with the image of the other holding and holding. This also applies to the overlapping of the images held in standby in FIGS. 187 (b) and 187 (c) described later.

Next, in FIG. 187 (b), only the image of the third standby hold (standby hold 3 before shift) from the state of FIG. 187 (a) further moves to the left, and the second predetermined position (standby) The figure shows a state where the hold 2 has reached a predetermined position (stopped and displayed in a normal state) and stopped. This state is the state shown by (T5) in FIG. 189, and the movement of the image of the standby-holding 3 before the shift is completed, and the image of which the movement is completed is displayed at a predetermined position as a new image of the standby-holding 2. This is the state (that is, the state where the new suspension 2 movement is completed). Also in this case, depending on the progress status of the moving display of the previous waiting hold, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the image of this new waiting hold 2 (waiting hold 3 before shift) and the moving display are started. Control is performed to display the image of the second waiting hold (waiting hold 2 before shift) partially overlapped.
As shown in FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (c), by displaying the suspended images in a partially overlapped state, a dynamic, interesting and novel suspended display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, in FIG. 187 (c), only the image of the second standby hold (waiting hold 2 before shift) from the state of FIG. 187 (b) further moves to the left, and the first predetermined position (standby) The figure shows a state where the hold 1 has reached a predetermined position (stopped and displayed in a normal state) and stopped. This state is the state shown by (T6) in FIG. 189, and the movement of the image of the standby hold 2 before the shift is completed, and the image of which the movement is completed is displayed at a predetermined position as a new image of the standby hold 1. This is the state (that is, the state where the new suspension 1 movement is completed). Also in this case, depending on the progress of the moving display of the previous standby hold, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the image of this new standby hold 1 (standby hold 2 before shift) and the moving display are started. A control is performed to display the image of the first waiting hold (waiting hold 1 before shift) partially overlapped.

  Next, in FIG. 188 (a), only the image of the first waiting hold (waiting hold 1 before shift) from the state of FIG. 187 (c) is changed to the holding image while further moving to the left. FIG. 18 illustrates a state (a state indicated by (T7) in FIG. 189) in which a changing display (in this case, a small elliptic image for waiting and holding is enlarged and displayed) is started. Also in this case, depending on the progress of the changing display of the first standby hold, a new image of the standby hold 1 (waiting hold 2 before shift) and the image of the first standby hold may be displayed. Control for displaying in a partially polymerized state may be performed.

  Next, in FIG. 188 (b), only the image of the first waiting hold (waiting hold 1 before shift) from the state of FIG. 188 (a) further moves to the upper left, and changes to the holding image. , A state in which a predetermined position of the hold (a predetermined position at which the hold (changing hold) is stopped and displayed in a normal state) is reached and stopped is illustrated. This state is the state shown by (T8) in FIG. 189, and the next variable display of the decorative pattern (decorative special drawing) is started.

  In FIG. 189, the moving display of the image of each hold display accompanying the hold shift (as described above, the image of the standby hold 1 moves and becomes the hold, and the image of the standby hold 2 moves and the standby hold 1 moves. When all of the above) are completed (in the case of this example, the image of the waiting and holding 1 before the shift becomes the holding image and stops at a predetermined position), the next variation of the decorative pattern Although a mode in which the display is started is illustrated, the mode is not limited to this mode. Before the moving display is all finished, the decorative pattern stop time may be over and the next variable display may be started, or even after the moving display is all finished, the set decorative pattern stop time is over. When there is no such a structure, the next variable display of the decorative pattern may be started after the stop time ends. However, if the structure is such that the moving display is ended so that the next variable display of the decorative design is started at the time when the moving display is all finished or at a timing after that time, the player is on hold. It is easy to clearly recognize that the next variable display game has started based on the standby hold 1 before the shift (the hold after the shift).

  Next, in FIG. 188 (c), the image of the new waiting hold 1 (waiting hold 2 before shift) from the state of FIG. 188 (b) is displayed in a special display mode (in this case, a black star) FIG. 189 shows a state (state shown by (T9) in FIG. 189). In this case, since each hold display is stopped (normal state where the moving display is not being performed), some or all of the adjacent hold display images are changed to a special display mode as shown in FIG. 188 (c). Even in such a case, the display position, shape, size, etc. are set so that the images do not overlap each other. In this way, since the hold display of the standby hold is set so that it does not overlap while it is stopped, it is necessary to consider the relationship of the display layer and the display priority for the display of each standby hold during the moving display in the control process. Is eliminated and control becomes easier.

Next, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing another specific example of the movement display at the time of the hold shift performed in the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41.
First, FIG. 190 (a) shows a specific example in which the operation mode (for example, the orbit) of the movement display accompanying the hold shift is different between the hold and the standby hold. In this case, as shown by a line with an arrow in FIG. 190 (a), in the movement display from the waiting hold to the holding hold, for example, an arcuate trajectory that draws an upward convex arc (jumps up once). On the other hand, the display for moving from standby hold to standby hold is configured to move linearly. In this way, the player can clearly understand the distinction between the movement to the hold and the movement to the standby hold, and the display of the hold display is easy to understand. In addition, a dynamic, interesting and novel pending display is realized, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

  Next, FIG. 190 (b) shows a specific example in which the operation mode (for example, the orbit) of the moving display associated with the hold shift is different between the hold displays. In this case, as indicated by a line with an arrow in FIG. 190 (b), in the display for moving from the standby hold 1 to the hold, for example, the image of the hold display moves in an arcuate trajectory so as to draw the largest arc, In the moving display from the hold 2 to the standby hold 1, the same image moves, for example, to draw a circular arc of a medium size, and in the moving display from the standby hold 3 to the standby hold 2, the same arc is drawn, for example. The image is moved, and in the moving display from the standby hold 4 to the standby hold 3, the image is displayed so as to move linearly. When the operation mode in the move display is made different in each hold display in this way, the player can clearly understand the distinction between the move to the hold and the move to the wait hold, and what the wait hold is. You can easily understand the number of movements from the second. In addition, a dynamic, interesting and novel pending display is realized, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

  Next, in FIG. 190 (c), the operation mode (for example, the trajectory) of the movement display associated with the hold shift is the display mode of the hold display (normal display mode, change suggestion mode, special display mode, or any type of special mode). Specific examples that differ depending on the display mode) are shown. In this case, as shown by a line with an arrow in FIG. 190 (c), the image of the reserved display in the special display mode (for example, a star-shaped image) moves in, for example, an upward convex arcuate trajectory, The image in the hold display mode is displayed, for example, so as to move linearly. Although not shown in the figure, the operation mode of the hold display (display of blinking hold) of the change suggestion mode may be the same as the normal display mode or the special display mode, or any operation mode different from the normal display mode (for example, convex downward). It is also possible to adopt a mode of moving so as to draw an arc. When the operation mode in the moving display is made different from the display mode in the hold display in this way, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation and the like also by the operation mode in the moving display in the hold shift. it can. In addition, a dynamic, interesting and novel pending display is realized, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the operation mode of the movement of such a reserved image is not limited to a mode in which it is always constant according to the game state, and may be set to be different depending on the game state (for example, a difference in the effect mode). In this case, the player can grasp the game state in which he / she is staying (for example, in which effect mode he / she is staying) by merely looking at the operation mode of the movement of the above-mentioned reserved image.
Further, simply as a kind of so-called pre-reading notice, even if the display mode of the hold image is the same, the operation mode of the special moving display appears for some of the hold images, and is accompanied by the hold shift. The expected degree (probability) of being in a predetermined state (for example, a big hit state) may be suggested by the operation mode of moving display of the held image. For example, if the setting is such that the above-mentioned degree of expectation is low in the operation mode in which the movement display of the hold image moves linearly, and that the above-mentioned degree of expectation becomes high in the operation mode in which it moves in a circular arc shape so as to jump, The person pays close attention to the moving display of the held image while expecting the movement of the held image in an arc shape, and the interest can be improved by the held display.
Further, the operation mode of the moving display is not limited to the trajectory, and for example, the speed may be different. For example, a moving display from the standby hold to the holding display shows that the holding image moves at a remarkably slow speed, and a moving display from the standby hold to the standby hold displays such that the holding image moves at a relatively fast speed. It may be configured to do so (or vice versa). Even with this configuration, the player can clearly understand the distinction between the movement to the hold and the movement to the standby hold, and the display of the hold display is easy to understand, and a dynamic, interesting and novel hold display is realized. The interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 191 to FIG. 192 are diagrams showing specific examples of the hold display (the configuration in which the display data of the hold display is shared) performed on the display unit 41a (display area) of the display device 41. In the gaming machine of this example, the hold display of the hold and the hold display of the standby hold may display the same shape and the like but different sizes (vertical and horizontal sizes). In that case 191 to 192, the hold display is performed using at least one common display data stored and held in the ROM (for example, the image ROM 322 or the PROM 321 in FIG. 5) between the hold and the standby hold. The display data is the image data of a still image, the image data of a moving image, or the image data of a plurality of still images forming a series of animation. Note that the examples of FIGS. 191 to 192 described below exemplify a case in which, as the common display data, data of a size that can be used as it is as the display data of the pending display is stored.

  First, FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the first winning is generated due to one start winning during the special figure fluctuation, and each holding display is performed at each predetermined position of the display unit 41a. . As shown in the figure, as the control processing of such a hold display, as for the display of the variable hold (the hold), for example, the image data of the still image stored as the common display data is held as it is. It is realized by displaying it at a predetermined position of, and the display of waiting hold is realized by changing the display size of the image data stored as the common display data from the beginning (in this case, reducing it) and displaying it. is doing. Here, “display as it is” means to display without changing the display size of the image (display the image size stored as common display data as the display size). In this control process, specifically, for example, in step E224 in the flowchart of FIG. 174 described above, the common display data is set to be displayed at the holding position in the same display size, and in step E229 in the flowchart. This can be realized by changing the display size of the common display data and setting the display size to be displayed at a predetermined standby hold position (in this case, the first predetermined standby hold position). Here, the “as-is display size” means an image size stored as common display data.

Next, FIG. 191 (b) illustrates a state in which a start winning is generated from the state of FIG. 191 (a) and the number of waiting and holding is two. In this state, the display of the newly generated second waiting and holding is also changed from the beginning by changing the display size of the image data stored as the common display data as in the case of the first waiting and holding. It is realized by displaying (reduced in this case).
Next, in FIG. 191 (c), the start winning is generated again from the state of FIG. 191 (b), and the number of waiting and holding becomes three. The same image) is displayed. The display of the newly generated third standby hold in this state is performed by displaying the image data stored as the common display data at a predetermined position in the same display size as in the hold. Has been realized.

  Next, in FIG. 192 (a), an animation in which the image of the hold display of the third waiting hold is reduced from the state of FIG. 191 (c) is executed, and the normal wait shown in FIG. 191 (c) etc. is executed. The figure shows a state in which an image of the same size as the hold display is displayed as the third standby hold. In this way, for example, as a type of pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to display an animation in which an image of the same size as the hold is temporarily displayed as the standby hold and then the size is changed to the normal size. The control process therefor is, for example, a setting process of performing a display in which the image of the hold display changes from the size of the hold to the size of the standby hold in step E230 in the flowchart of FIG. The process of setting the stored scenario table that specifies the stored motion table for the scenario layer for hold display) may be performed.

  Next, in FIG. 192 (b), the start winning is generated again from the state of FIG. 191 (b), and the number of waiting and holding is three, and the same image (large size) as the holding is temporarily displayed as a display of the third waiting and holding. The same image) is displayed at a specific position different from the predetermined position. In the display of the newly generated third waiting hold in this state, similarly to the holding, the image data stored as the common display data is displayed at the specific position with the same display size. It is realized in.

  Next, FIG. 192 (c) illustrates a state in which an animation in which the image of the hold display of the third waiting hold is reduced and moved to a predetermined position from the state of FIG. 192 (b) is being executed. . In this way, for example, as a kind of pre-reading notice effect, a display is displayed in which the standby hold is temporarily displayed at a position different from the predetermined position, and then the display moves to the predetermined position, and the size of the hold display is increased at the same time as the movement to the predetermined position. It is also possible to display an animation in which the size changes from the same size as the hold to the normal size of the wait hold. As the control processing therefor, for example, a display in which the display position moves to a predetermined position while the image of the hold display changes from the hold size to the hold hold size in step E230 in the flowchart of FIG. 174 described above. The setting process to be performed (the process of setting a scenario table that specifies a motion table stored in advance for that purpose in the scenario layer for hold display) may be performed.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 191 to 192, in this example, common display data that can be directly used for one display is stored and held, and the other is displayed for the display of the hold and the standby hold. In this case, since the display size of the common display data is changed (vertical and horizontal sizes, or vertical or horizontal size is enlarged or reduced), the pending display is realized by the control process. It is possible to reduce the amount of display data to be stored and retained in half compared to the case where different display data are stored and retained, while realizing a variety of pending display effects, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of display data. . Further, as compared with the case where the hold image (holding during change) and the hold image of the standby hold are displayed in the same size, an interesting and novel hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 191 (c) and 192 (a) to (c), when the display size is changed after being displayed in the size of the common display data as it is, it is dynamic, interesting and novel. Hold display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.
Note that the common display data for the hold display is not limited to one, and when the form of the hold display image is changed depending on the effect mode, different display data is stored for each effect mode. Further, the above display example is an example in which common display data that can be used as it is as the hold is stored, but conversely, common display data that can be used as it is as the hold is stored and the hold is The common display data may be displayed by changing the size.

  In addition, as described above, when performing the hold display and the hold hold using the common display data, a function for changing the color of the image based on the stored display data at the time of display is provided. The color of the image of the common display data may be appropriately changed and displayed depending on the function. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make the color of the image displayed on hold different from the normal state (the state in which the prefetching notice effect is not performed) as the prefetching notice effect without increasing the storage capacity of the display data.

  Further, when a newly generated pending display is performed as in the display example shown in FIG. 192 or FIG. 192 described above, an image of the pending display previously displayed and made invisible (for example, the display layer on the front side). Nothing can be seen by covering it with another image or making it invisible by setting the transparency of the hold display image itself) can be seen at the timing when a new hold prize occurs and a new hold occurs. Setting to switch to (for example, changing the display layer that displays the image of the hold display to the front display layer, deleting another image covered by the front side, or the state where the transparency of the image of the hold display is visible) It is also possible to realize it by making a setting such as changing to. For example, in the case of performing the hold display shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b), a standby hold image in which common display data is reduced is displayed for all the standby holds (standby holds 1 to 4), for example, the front side. It keeps displaying at each predetermined position in an invisible state by another image (concealment image) displayed on the screen, and every time there is a start winning and the number of waiting hold increases, the corresponding waiting hold image is covered and hidden. The other image (concealment image) may be erased and switched to a visible state, and thereby a number of standby-held images corresponding to the number held may be displayed. Further, the display / non-display control of the image of the holding (holding during change) may be similarly performed.

Next, an inventive concept that can be extracted or developed from the above-described embodiments will be described below.
(Invention concept (1))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like and FIGS. 101, 145 to 149 and the like, the control means (production control device 300) for controlling the display device (display device 41) to perform the effect of the variable display game is provided. , A state in which the image of the identification information (for example, the numbers forming the pattern of the decoration special figure) and the image of the effect information (for example, a specific character (for example, the above-mentioned tiger taro C7) having a motif of an animal etc.) overlap (the display position is When performing an effect display with a (matching state), when the image of the effect information is displayed on the back side in the overlapping portion, the effect image (for example, a movie) including the effect information image and displayed on the entire screen is displayed. When the image of M1) is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information (for example, the image of the right pattern KTR or the like), and the image of the effect information is displayed as the front side in the overlapping portion, An image (for example, the image GM1) obtained by partially arranging the effect image on the back side of the image of the identification information and partially copying a portion of the effect image including the image of the effect information is the image of the identification information. It has the function of being placed on the front side.
Note that "arrange on the back side" means to display by arranging on a different display layer on the back side, and "arrange on the front side" means to arrange and display on a different display layer on the front side. Is. Here, the display layer is a layer (in this embodiment, for example, a motion layer) that determines the context (display priority) of whether to display the front side or the back side on the screen. Means

  As a result, a dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the front side and overlaps with the image of the identification information can be easily performed, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Moreover, the control of this effect is performed by keeping the effect image including the image of the effect information at the back side of the image of the identification information even if the front-rear relationship between the image of the effect information and the image of the identification information is different. Only when the image of information is displayed on the front side, an image obtained by partially copying a part (a plurality of parts) including the image of the effect information in the effect image is arranged on the front side of the image of the identification information. It can be realized by simple control. In addition, since only the part including the image of the specific effect information in the effect image to be arranged on the back side is arranged on the front side, at least a region other than the area overlapping the part including the image of the specific effect information. Is certainly visible, and there is an advantage that the image of the identification information (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is not unnecessarily obstructed by the image on the front side.

The inventive concept (1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
In the display area (screen) of the display means, when performing an effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information are at least partially overlapped,
When the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapped portion, an effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information,
When the image of the effect information is displayed on the front side in the overlapping portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, and a part including the image of the effect information in the effect image. A gaming machine having a function of arranging an image obtained by partially copying (a plurality of) images on the front side of the image of the identification information.
Here, the effect image may be a still image or a moving image (for example, an image of a predetermined frame of the moving image).
The effect image means an image when the effect image data (still image or moving image data) stored in a predetermined storage unit (image ROM 322 in this embodiment) is drawn as a whole. , Is not necessarily limited to the one displayed on the entire screen.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the control means (production control device 300) semi-transparents the image to be arranged on the front side of the image of the identification information (the image obtained by copying the portion of the production image including the image of the production information). Can be displayed as a shape. As a specific example, for example, it is possible to perform semi-transparent control using the effect code (effect 1 code, effect 2 code) of the motion table shown in the lower side of FIG. 149. Thereby, the visibility of the image of the identification information is secured to some extent even in a portion where the image arranged on the front side and the image of the identification information overlap, and the image arranged on the front side and the effect image arranged on the back side. And the image of the identification information and the like are overlapped with each other to change the color and density of the color of the image of the effect information and the identification information and the like, and the effect of increasing the interest is obtained.

The above configuration is expressed as the following as a subordinate concept (1-2) of the above-mentioned invention concept (1).
The control means is
An amusement machine having a function of arranging an image obtained by copying a portion including the image of the effect information in the effect image on the front side of the image of the identification information as a semi-transparent image.

The background of the above inventive concept (1) will be described below.
Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine having a display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information and capable of generating a state advantageous to a player in accordance with a result of the variable display game is available. Are known.
In this type of gaming machine, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192622, various effects including a notice indicating the result of the variable display game are provided as effects during the variable display game. The display device or the like is used.
By the way, in this type of gaming machine, the effects are diversified, but for example, more dynamic and entertaining effects are required.
The invention concept (1) and the like of the present application have been made in order to solve the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a high interest in games, and this object is realized.

(Invention concept (2))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D434 and the like, and in FIG. 145, FIG. 146, FIG. 148, FIG. 150, and FIG. The means (production control device 300) has an image of identification information (for example, numbers forming the pattern of the decoration special figure) and production information (for example, a specific character having an animal or the like as a motif (for example, the above-mentioned tiger taro C7)). When performing an effect display with a state where and overlap, when an image of the effect information is displayed on the back side in the overlapped portion, an effect image (for example, an image of the movie M1) including the image of the effect information is identified. Arranged on the back side of the image of the information, when displaying the image of the effect information as the front side in the overlapped portion, while arranging the effect image on the back side of the image of the identification information, It has the ability to place the serial presentation image on the front side of the image identification information as the semi-transparent.

  As a result, a dynamic effect in which the image of the specific effect information is switched to the back side or the front side and overlaps with the image of the identification information can be easily performed, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. Moreover, the control of this effect is performed by keeping the effect image including the image of the effect information at the back side of the image of the identification information even if the front-rear relationship between the image of the effect information and the image of the identification information is different. Only when the information image is displayed on the front side, it is possible to realize by the easy control that the effect image is semi-transparent and is arranged on the front side of the image of the identification information. In particular, since the image cutting work (work for partially copying) as in the above-mentioned inventive concept (1) does not occur, the processing load of the control means can be reduced. Also, since the effect image is semi-transparent to be arranged on the front side, the visibility of the image of the identification information (and other images arranged on the back side including the identification information) is also secured. it can. Moreover, the effect image (including the effect information image) and the color of the effect information (including the effect information image) and the effect information that are arranged on the front side and the effect image and the identification information image that are arranged on the back side overlap each other. It is possible to obtain the effect that the concentration is changed and the interest is increased.

The inventive concept (2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
In the display area (screen) of the display means, when performing an effect display in which the image of the identification information and the image of the effect information different from the identification information are at least partially overlapped,
When the image of the effect information is displayed as the back side in the overlapped portion, an effect image including the image of the effect information is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information,
When the image of the effect information is displayed on the front side in the overlapped portion, the effect image is arranged on the back side of the image of the identification information, and the effect image is translucent to identify the identification information. A game machine having a function of arranging on the front side of an image.

(Invention concept (3))
In the present embodiment, as described in step D444, etc., FIG. 102, FIG. 155 (b) to 157 (b), FIG. 159 to FIG. 161 etc., the identification information (eg, “1” to A plurality of pieces of presentation information (for example, a character such as “tiger taro” which is set for each piece of identification information and is different for each piece of identification information) that is not “9” is identified on the screen 41a of the display unit (display device 41). Displayed in an area different from the variable display (main screen area), and the mode or result of the variable display game of the special figure (presence or absence of reach action in this embodiment) depending on the combination of the displayed performance information among the plurality of performance information. ) Notification effect (for example, an effect that notifies the occurrence of reach) can be executed. Thereby, compared with the case where the notification effect is performed by the identification information and the additional information added to the identification information (for example, the character added for each number of the decorative special drawing), the appearance rate as a stop symbol is low. Information and the like can also be made to appear in the notification effect, and an easy-to-understand and dynamic effect can be made, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
A plurality of effect information that is not the identification information is displayed in an area (a plurality of locations) different from the identification information display area where the identification information is variably displayed in the display area (screen) of the display unit, and the plurality of effect information is displayed. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a notification effect that informs or suggests (announces) the mode or result of the variable display game by a combination of the displayed effect information.
The effect information may or may not be used as additional information added to the identification information.
The "identification information display area" corresponds to the variable display area H1 described above, and the "area different from the identification information display area" corresponds to the main screen area described above.

The background of the above inventive concept (3) will be described below.
Conventionally, for example, as a notification effect for notifying the occurrence of reach, that disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-136516 is known. This is to execute the reach occurrence notification effect in a notification mode according to the type of the attached character when the reach state occurs during execution of the variable display of the effect symbols (variable display of identification information). Specifically, as described in, for example, FIG. 102 and paragraph 0453 of the publication, the type of attached character (additional information) added to the stop pattern (eg, “1”, “2”) in the reach state. If the character is a male character, "Double reach!" Is displayed, and if the character is a female character, "Double reach!" Is displayed to provide a reach occurrence notification effect.

  As described above, in the conventional notification effect, the character for the notification effect (effect information) is arranged around the identification information (for example, “1”, “2”, etc.) forming the decorative special figure and is integrated with the identification information. Since it is displayed only as an image of additional information that is variably displayed (or stopped), there are the following problems. That is, for example, since there is a considerable difference in the appearance rate between the types of symbols displayed as stop symbols in the reach state (that is, the types of identification information), symbols with a low appearance rate (for example, the probability variation symbol "7") There is a problem in that the player rarely sees the notification effect of the attached character added to. In addition, there is a problem that characters (effect information) other than the additional information cannot be seen. Further, since the image of the character related to the notification effect is only displayed integrally with the identification information as additional information, there is a problem that the content of the notification effect is difficult to understand. For example, in the case of the specific example of the above publication, the player may misunderstand that the display "Double reach!" Corresponds to the female character, and the type of character to which the notification effect display corresponds. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the effect contents.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect information that is not the identification information is displayed in an area different from the variable display of the identification information, and a notification effect that gives notification or suggests (preliminary) is performed by a combination of the displayed effect information. Therefore, production information having a low appearance rate as a stop symbol (for example, a character such as “Torataro C7” used as additional information of the probability variation symbol “7” having a low appearance rate) can also be made to appear in the notification production. The production information that is not the additional information of the decorative special figure can be made to appear, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced and the user-friendly and dynamic notification production can be performed. In particular, as in the present embodiment (FIG. 156, etc.), a variable display area H1 for performing variable display of identification information is arranged in the corner of the screen 41a, and the remaining area in the screen is larger than the variable display area H1. Is a mode in which the effect information for the notification effect is displayed in a large area (main screen area), it becomes possible to make the notification information more dynamic and easier to understand.
The subordinate concept (3-2) of the above inventive concept (3) is expressed as follows.
The control means is
In the notification effect, an identification information display area for performing variable display of the identification information is arranged at a corner of the display area (screen), and the remaining area in the display area is larger than the identification information display area. A game machine characterized by displaying the effect information in a large area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 157 (c) and the like, a movable accessory (for example, movable accessory 700) that can move with respect to the display screen 41a of the display device 41 is provided. The effect control device 300, which is the control means of the above, produces an image of the effect information that changes in association with the operation of the movable accessory (for example, the image of the rope C17 described above, and an image in which this rope C17 is pulled by the tiger tiger C7; It has a function of displaying a (linked image) on the display screen 41a. As a result, it becomes possible to perform an effect related to the character product and the display, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game.

The above configuration is represented as below as a subordinate concept (3-3) of the above-mentioned inventive concept (3).
A movable accessory capable of moving with respect to the display area (screen) of the display means,
A game machine characterized in that the control means has a function of displaying an image of the effect information (the interlocked image) that changes in association with the operation of the movable accessory in the display area of the display means.

  Further, the movable accessory 700 of the present embodiment, when viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player), has the display screen 41a so that at least the decorative portion 701 (the main portion that produces the effect) covers a part of the display screen 41a. In-screen arrangement state (corresponding to the standing state or a state of standing up diagonally) located on the front surface of the display screen and an outside-screen arrangement position where the whole or substantially the whole including the decoration portion 701 does not cover the front surface of the display screen 41a. It is possible to move to a state (corresponding to the initial state). Thus, when performing the effect of operating in conjunction with the interlocking image, by placing the accessory 700 in the screen arrangement state, the main part of the accessory 700 is surely positioned within the player's visual field. Thus, the player can be surely shown the effect linked with the display of the movable accessory. Further, when the movable accessory and the linked image are not interlocked with each other, if the accessory 700 is placed outside the screen, the view of the player who is paying attention to the display screen 41a is not obstructed. The display effect using the entire display screen 41a can be shown to the player.

The above configuration is expressed as the following as a subordinate concept (3-4) of the above-mentioned inventive concept (3).
The movable accessory, when viewed from the front, has an in-screen arrangement state in which at least a main part for performing an effect is located on the front surface of the display region so as to cover a part of the display region, and the whole or a substantial part including the main part. A game machine characterized by being movable to an outside-screen arrangement state in which the whole is located in a place not covering the front surface of the display area.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 165 (c) and the like, the effect control device 300 that is a control means is provided with a light emitting accessory (for example, an upper accessory 801) separately from the display device 41. As the image of the effect information, a light emission interlocking image (an image of a character such as a tiger holding a predetermined item) including predetermined light emission effect information (for example, a rose flower which is a predetermined item) is displayed in the main screen area. , Has a function of causing the accessory to emit light in synchronization with the display of the emission-linked image. As a result, the effect produced by the emission of the accessory is interlocked with the display of the effect information by the display means, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The above configuration is expressed as the following as a subordinate concept (3-5) of the above-mentioned inventive concept (3).
In addition to the display means, an accessory capable of emitting light is provided,
The control means displays a light emission interlocking image including predetermined light emission effect information as an image of the effect information, and has a function of causing the accessory to emit light in synchronization with the display of the light emission interlocking image. Machine.

(Invention concept (4))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 146 (b), FIG. 146 (c), and the like, the identification information (for example, the numbers “1” to “9”) forming the decoration special map and this identification information are used. It is possible to temporarily change the effect information and give a confidence (preliminary notice) in correspondence with the positional relationship of the display position with the effect information (for example, a character such as “Tora Taro”) that does not exist. For this reason, it is possible to provide a novel and dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game.

The inventive concept (4) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
During the variable display game, not only the identification information but also the production information other than the identification information is displayed in the display area (screen) of the display unit, and the display position relationship between the identification information and the production information is changed. Is possible and
In the effect display, when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, a change in a display state or a display mode of an image displayed in the display area including at least the effect information is generated. Is possible,
A gaming machine having a configuration capable of suggesting a mode of the variable display game that progresses thereafter, or a result of the variable display game that is fixed after that, depending on the presence or absence of the change in the effect display or the mode.
Here, the effect information may be used as additional information added to the identification information, or may not be the additional information.
In addition, the “impossible configuration” means a configuration in which a so-called notice can be given, and for example, the probability of occurrence of each of the various aspects of the variable display game that has been selected by a lottery and may progress thereafter ( Probability of lottery) (specifically, for example, setting of the type of data table used for lottery (for example, the advance notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is changed before the lottery. This is a configuration in which different settings are made depending on the presence or absence or the mode. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict to some extent the mode of the variable display game that is likely to proceed thereafter, based on the presence or absence of the change or the mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The same can be said for the “suggestable configuration” of the result of the variable display game to be confirmed thereafter. For example, the table used for the lottery for determining the presence or absence of the change or the mode (for example, the notice distribution table) has already been set. A configuration that is set in a table having different contents according to the determined result of the variable display game (for example, in the case of a big hit, a table with a relatively high probability that the change is selected is used, In such a case, a table with a relatively high probability that no change will be selected is used, and thus, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur due to the execution of the effect with change. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the result of the variable display game, which is highly likely to be fixed thereafter, from the presence or absence of the change or the mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

Note that the change may be, for example, a change in a character mode (display color, display size, etc.) as the effect information, or a change in character type as the effect information. However, the change may be such that the character serving as the effect information disappears, or the entire image including the character serving as the effect information may be blackened (blacked out). Further, the change is a temporary one that occurs when the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information is in a predetermined positional relationship, and returns to the state before the change when it disappears from the predetermined positional relationship. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may occur in which the display positional relationship between the identification information and the effect information becomes a predetermined positional relationship, and once changed, the changed state may be maintained thereafter.
Further, the predetermined positional relationship may be a state in which the display positions are close to each other within a predetermined distance, a state in which the display positions match at least in part (a state in which the displays overlap at least in part), or a display As a position range, one may be completely in the other image.

(Invention concept (5))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154 and the like, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity and to suggest the reliability by providing a time difference in the same movie to be overlapped or forming a symmetrical image. For this reason, it is possible to provide a novel and dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game.

The inventive concept (5) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
During the variable display game, in the display area (screen) of the display means, it is possible to execute an effect display by a moving image in which the display position of the effect information other than the identification information changes, and
In the effect display, it is possible to display a plurality of the same moving images by superimposing them on the front and back of the screen with a difference in reproduction timing or inversion state.
According to the presence or absence of the difference in the reproduction timing or the reversal state in the effect display, or a mode, the mode of the variable display game that progresses thereafter, or the result of the variable display game that is fixed thereafter can be suggested. And a gaming machine.
The effect information may or may not be used as additional information added to the identification information.
In addition, the “impossible configuration” means a configuration in which a so-called notice can be given, and for example, the probability of occurrence of each of the various aspects of the variable display game that has been selected by a lottery and may progress thereafter ( The probability of being drawn (specifically, for example, the type of the data table used in the lottery (for example, the type of the notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is the difference before the lottery. This is a configuration in which different settings are made depending on the presence or absence or the mode. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict to some extent, for example, the mode of the variable display game that is likely to proceed thereafter from the presence or absence of the difference or the mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The same can be said for the “impossible configuration” of the result of the variable display game to be confirmed thereafter. For example, a table used in the lottery for determining the presence or absence of the difference or the mode (for example, the notice distribution table) has already been set. A configuration in which a table having different contents is set according to the determined result of the variable display game (for example, in the case of a big hit, a table with a relatively high probability that the difference is selected is used, In such a case, a table having a relatively high probability that no difference is selected is used, and thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur due to execution of the effect with the difference. ). With this configuration, the player can empirically predict, to some extent, the result of the variable display game, which is highly likely to be fixed thereafter, based on the presence or absence of the difference or the mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Invention concept (6))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the additional information added to the identification information of the decorative special figure and displayed in a variable manner integrally (added to the numbers or the like which are the symbols of the decorative special figure). It is possible to execute effect display in which the character) jumps out from the identification information display area (variation display area H1) where the identification information is changed and displayed to the main screen area. Is absent (the display of the additional information integrated with the identification information disappears and disappears), and the identification information in which the additional information is not popped out is variably displayed with the additional information added. The additional information is not limited to the SD mode, and the additional information pops out to produce some effect. For this reason, it is possible to provide a novel and dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the additional information that has popped out is absent in the identification information display area (is not displayed), the specific additional information is popping out, and the type of the additional information that is popping out becomes clearer and more interesting, Easy to understand production can be realized.

The inventive concept (6) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
During the variable display game, the variable display of the identification information is executed in the identification information display area set in a part of the display area (screen) of the display unit, and the variable display is added to the identification information and integrally displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect display in which the added information that has been moved from the identification information display area to the outside of the identification information display area.

Further, the subordinate concept (6-2) of the above-mentioned inventive concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means is
At the time of the effect display, the additional information moved from the identification information display area is prevented from being displayed in the identification information display area, while the additional information not moved from the identification information display area is identified by the identification information. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of performing variable display integrally with corresponding identification information in an information display area.
Further, the subordinate concept (6-3) of the above-mentioned inventive concept (6) is expressed as follows.
The control means is
In the effect display, the identification information display area is arranged in a corner of the screen, and the additional information is displayed in a remaining area in the screen having a larger area than the identification information display area. A gaming machine characterized by.

(Invention concept (7))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 155 (b) to FIG. 157 (b) and the like, it is possible to notify or suggest the time change or the end of the period by displaying a background with a change indicating the passage of time. That is, the control means (effect control device 300) scrolls the first parameter (road and surrounding scenery) indicating the passage of time on the screen 41a of the display device (display device 41) during the variable display game of the special figure, for example. It is possible to display a background having a change including an image of a state of moving forward) and a second parameter (an image of a state of changing in the morning, day, evening, and night), and it is possible to express the passage of time by displaying the background. At the same time, for example, the end of the predetermined period (for example, the reach occurrence notification effect period) can be notified or suggested by changing the second parameter in conjunction with the end of the predetermined period during the variable display game. For this reason, it is possible to provide a novel and dynamic effect and improve the interest of the game. In this embodiment, instead of simply expressing the passage of time or the end of the period by one type of parameter (changing image), the passage of time is represented by two types of parameters, and the period end is represented by one of the parameters. Since this suggests, complex, interesting and dynamic productions are possible.

The inventive concept (7) having the above structure is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
In the display area (screen) of the display means, a changing background including a first parameter and a second parameter indicating the passage of time can be displayed, and the second parameter is changed in association with the end of a predetermined period of the effect. A gaming machine characterized by being able to inform or suggest the end of the predetermined period by doing so.
The background with the change may be displayed during the variable display game or may be displayed during a period when the variable display game is not in progress. The period during which the variable display game is not in progress is, for example, a state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit state) or a state before the start of the variable display game (so-called customer). There is a wait state. Further, the background with the change is not limited to the one displayed in the display layer for the background.

(Invention concept (8))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) and the like, the occurrence of a reach or a big hit is determined depending on whether or not there is a difference in the form (pose, etc.) when the characters are displayed together. It is possible to make a suggestion (preliminary notice) of reliability etc. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (8) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
During the variable display game, it is possible to execute effect display in which a plurality of effect information that is not the identification information is displayed at a plurality of locations on the display area (screen) of the display means, and the effect information displayed at the plurality of locations is displayed. A game machine characterized by being capable of suggesting a mode of the variable display game that progresses thereafter, or a result of the variable display game that is decided after that, depending on whether or not there is a difference in form.
The effect information may or may not be used as additional information added to the identification information.
In addition, the “impossible configuration” means a configuration in which a so-called notice can be given, and for example, the probability of occurrence of each of the various aspects of the variable display game that has been selected by a lottery and may progress thereafter ( (Probability of lottery) setting (specifically, for example, setting of the type of data table used in lottery (for example, the advance notice distribution table used in steps D426 and D429 described above)) is the effect before the lottery. This is a configuration in which different settings are made according to the presence or absence of a difference in the form of information or the form. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict to some extent the mode of the variable display game that is likely to proceed thereafter, based on the presence or absence or mode of the mode of the effect information, and the interest of the game is enhanced. . The same can be said for the “suggestable configuration” of the result of the variable display game to be confirmed thereafter. For example, a table used in a lottery for determining the presence or absence of the difference in the form of the effect information or the mode (for example, the advance notice distribution). The table is set in a table having different contents depending on the result of the variable display game that has already been determined (for example, in the case of a big hit, the probability that the difference in the form of the effect information is selected is A relatively high table is used, and when there is a deviation, a table with a relatively high probability that no difference in the form of the effect information is selected is used, whereby, for example, there is a difference in the form of the effect information. This is a configuration that can suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur due to performance execution. With this configuration, the player can empirically predict to some extent the result of the variable display game that is highly likely to be determined later, based on the presence or absence of the difference in the form of the effect information or the mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced. .

(Invention concept (9))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 163 (c) and FIG. 165 (c), the effect information (for example, a character such as the tiger lock C8) different from the identification information (the design of the decorative special drawing) is displayed in a predetermined display mode. (Display color, display size, display position, pause, whether or not a predetermined item is held) , The operating state, the operating position, etc.) can be changed, and the effect can also be used to give a hint (reminder) of reliability such as reach occurrence or a big hit. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (9) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
In addition to the display means, there is an accessory that can change the mode (light emitting state, operating state, operating position, etc.),
The control means is
It is possible to perform effect display in which effect information other than the identification information is displayed in the display area (screen) of the display unit, and the aspect of the accessory is changed in association with the effect information display aspect in the effect display. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of making it.
The effect information may or may not be used as additional information added to the identification information.

(Invention concept (11))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 166 and FIG. 167, it is possible to reduce the images of a plurality of objects including the decorative large pattern of the special figure, and in this effect, if the reduction ratio is different for each object. It is possible to As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Moreover, there is an effect that a required size can be held for each object. In addition, the information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small design, right-handing instruction display, etc. (4th design may be included) is excluded from reduction targets. Thus, the notification function of these images (function of notifying the player of the number of holdings and the like) can be sufficiently maintained during the reduction effect. That is, the information that is likely to affect the game is excluded from the reduction target and is not reduced. In addition, even if the object to be reduced is too small, it is difficult to see it. Since the value is made smaller, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying or missing the information and adversely affecting the game, and to suppress the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

The inventive concept (11) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display means (for example, the display device 41) capable of displaying the variable display game in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and the control means (for example, the production control device 300) for controlling the display means are provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine that can generate a state advantageous to the player when is the predetermined result,
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information (for example, a large decorative pattern) displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is reduced,
As the reduced display effect, it is possible to execute an effect with a different reduction rate for each object.
Alternatively, the above configuration is represented as below as the inventive concept (11a) and the inventive concept (11b).
(Invention concept (11a))
The display means (for example, the display device 41) capable of displaying the variable display game in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and the control means (for example, the production control device 300) for controlling the display means are provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine that can generate a state advantageous to the player when is the predetermined result,
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which an image of a target region including a range in which the identification information (for example, a decorative large pattern) is displayed in the display region (display unit 41a) of the display unit is reduced,
In the reduced display effect, among the plurality of objects displayed in the target area, only the object to be reduced is reduced, and the object other than the reduced object is not reduced.
(Invention concept (11b))
As the reduced display effect, it is possible to execute an effect with a different reduction rate for each object to be reduced, the game machine.
The identification information includes the first identification information to be reduced (for example, a large decorative pattern) and the first identification in a normal state (a state in which no special display such as the reduced display effect is performed). Second identification information (displayed at a different position as a different object) that is displayed separately from the first identification information so that it is displayed smaller than the information and is always visible to the player (for example, decoration small pattern) ) And the object other than the reduction target includes at least the second identification information.

(Invention concept (11-1))
Also, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the display angle during or after the reduction of the image to be reduced in the reduced display effect may be changed to a different angle for each object. Can be increased. It should be noted that the image to be reduced may be displayed in a state in which the image is three-dimensionally moved so as to be inclined also in the front-rear direction, and the display angle may be different for each object including the change in the display angle in the front-rear direction. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-1) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target region including the range in which the identification information is displayed in the display region (display unit 41a) of the display unit is reduced.
As the reduced display effect, an effect in which the display angle of the image to be reduced is different for each object can be executed.

(Invention concept (11-2))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (b), between the image of the area to be reduced and the image such as a new background located around the image of the area to be reduced during the reduced display effect. It is possible to provide a contrast (for example, difference in brightness, difference in color, etc.). By providing the contrast in this way, the image to be reduced becomes easy to see, and the display effect becomes more impressive. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target region including the range in which the identification information is displayed in the display region (display unit 41a) of the display unit is reduced.
When executing the reduced display effect, a contrast (for example, a difference in brightness, a difference in color, etc.) is provided between the image to be reduced and the background image located around the area where the image to be reduced is displayed. A game machine characterized by being able to execute a provided effect.

(Invention concept (11-3))
Also, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 167 (c), the image to be reduced is displayed semitransparently during the reduced display effect, and a new background image or another effect is provided behind the image to be reduced. It is possible to perform a display in which the business image can be seen through. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
It is possible to execute a reduced display effect in which the image of the target region including the range in which the identification information is displayed in the display region (display unit 41a) of the display unit is reduced.
When executing the reduced display effect, it is possible to display an image to be reduced semi-transparently, and to perform an effect in which the background image or another effect image can be seen through on the back side of the image to be reduced. A gaming machine to do.

(Invention concept (11-4))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 168, it is possible to perform an effect in which the images of a plurality of objects including the large decorative pattern of the special figure are enlarged, and in this effect, the enlargement ratio can be made different for each object. It is possible. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Moreover, there is an effect that an appropriate size can be maintained for each object. In addition, information that may affect the game, specifically, the above-mentioned hold display, hold number display, decorative small design, right-handing instruction display, etc. (the fourth design may be included) is excluded from expansion targets. As a result, the notification function of these images (the function of notifying the player of the number of holdings and the like) can be sufficiently maintained during the expansion effect. That is, the information that is likely to affect the game is not expanded as an expansion target and is not expanded. In addition, even if the expansion target object is excessively expanded, it is difficult to see the character information (for example, a serif display and a fluctuation count display). Since the value is made smaller, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying or missing the information and adversely affecting the game, and to suppress the player from feeling tired or uncomfortable.

The inventive concept (11-4) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display means (for example, the display device 41) capable of displaying the variable display game in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and the control means (for example, the production control device 300) for controlling the display means are provided, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine that can generate a state advantageous to the player when is the predetermined result,
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information (for example, a large decorative pattern) displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is enlarged,
As the enlarged display effect, it is possible to execute an effect having a different enlargement ratio for each object.

(Invention concept (11-5))
Further, in the present embodiment, the display angle during or after enlargement of the image to be enlarged in the enlarged display effect may be different for each object, which can enhance the interest. Note that the enlarged image may be displayed in a state of moving in a three-dimensional manner so as to be tilted in the front-rear direction, and the display angle may be different for each object, including the change in the display angle in the front-rear direction. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-5) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is enlarged.
As the enlarged display effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which a display angle of an enlarged image is different for each object.

(Invention concept (11-6))
Further, in the present embodiment, during the enlarged display effect, the image to be enlarged can be displayed in a semi-transparent manner, and a new background image or another effect image can be displayed transparently on the back side of the image to be enlarged. It is possible. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-6) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object including the identification information displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is enlarged.
In the case of the enlarged display effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the image to be enlarged is displayed semitransparently and a background image or another effect image can be seen through on the back side of the image to be enlarged. Machine.

(Invention concept (11-7))
In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and 168 (c), in the enlarged display effect, an effect of variably displaying the decorative large pattern (identification information) in the image to be enlarged is performed. Is possible. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (11-7) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A display means capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a control means for controlling this display means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine that can generate various states,
The control means is
It is possible to execute an enlarged display effect in which the image of the target object displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display unit is enlarged.
In the enlarged display effect, it is possible to execute an effect of variably displaying the identification information in an enlarged image.

(Invention concept (12))
In addition, in the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 170, FIG. 171, and the like, when performing the animation display (moving display) as the hold display, the image data of the preceding hold display (data of a still image for each frame of animation) Alternatively, it is possible to copy the image data for each frame of the animation obtained by expanding the moving image data) and perform the subsequent pending display including the latest pending display. In other words, it is possible to execute the subsequent pending display by using the same image data for each preceding animation and each animation frame (for each animation frame). As a result, all the suspended display of animation is synchronized, and it is possible to realize the effect of the suspended display by animation, which is highly entertaining and does not make the player feel uncomfortable. That is, when an animation is executed as a hold display, there is a problem that if one hold display and another hold display are not synchronized with each other, the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (12) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball into the starting area) is made. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, an animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
When a plurality of start memories for executing the animation display occur, the image data of the animation display of the start memory (preceding hold) corresponding to the start winning is copied for each frame of the animation (that is, each frame of the animation). However, using the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame as the animation display of the previous start memory), the animation display of the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) is performed. Machine.
Here, the subsequent start memory (subsequent hold) includes at least the latest start memory (latest hold) corresponding to a new start winning.
Further, “copying the image data of the animation display of the previous starting memory for each frame of the animation and performing the animation display of the subsequent starting memory using the copied image data” means, for example, moving image data. When performing the animation display using the above, “the same image based on the image data for each frame of the animation developed from the predetermined moving image data for the animation display of the previous starting memory is displayed in the display area It is displayed at the position where the animation of the starting memory is displayed, and at the same time, is displayed at the position where the animation of the starting memory is displayed. ”

(Invention concept (12-1))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 170, it is possible to copy the image data of the preceding hold display from the time of the hold shift and perform the subsequent hold display including the latest hold display. As a result, except for the time until a new start winning occurs and the next hold shift occurs, all the hold displays of animation are synchronized (see FIG. 170 (c)), which is comfortable and entertaining for the player. It is possible to realize the effect of an animation hold display. That is, when an animation is executed as a hold display, there is a problem that if one hold display and another hold display are not synchronized with each other, the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Since the copy is performed from the hold shift time, at the start of the hold display of the latest hold corresponding to the new start winning, the hold display of the latest hold is executed from the beginning as illustrated in FIG. 170 (b). Then, a state that is not synchronized with the hold display of the preceding hold occurs temporarily, but this also has the effect of improving the interest as a kind of production.

The inventive concept (12-1) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball into the starting area) is made. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, an animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The starting memory means stores the starting memories in order of occurrence,
The variable display game control means executes the variable display game corresponding to the oldest starting memory (starting memory for the earliest starting prize) among the starting memories stored in the starting memory means. , A configuration for performing a shift process (so-called pending shift process) for moving up the remaining starting memory ranks one by one,
The effect control means,
During the execution of the animation display of the previous starting memory (preceding hold) corresponding to the previous starting winning, it is the subsequent starting memory (subsequent holding) corresponding to the new starting prize and should be the starting memory for displaying the animation. Occurs, the animation display of the subsequent starting memory is once started from the beginning regardless of the previous starting memory, and from the time when the shift process is performed thereafter, the previous starting memory (preceding hold) is displayed. The image data of the animation display is copied for each frame of the animation (for each frame of the animation), and the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame (for each frame) as the animation display of the previous start memory) is copied. A game machine characterized by using the animation display of subsequent starting memory (subsequent hold).

(Invention concept (12-2))
In addition, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 171, the image data of the preceding hold display is copied from the time of the new start winning (the time of starting the animation display of the subsequent hold), and the subsequent hold including the latest hold display. It may be configured to perform the hold display of. With this configuration, all the suspended display of animation is synchronized from the beginning (see FIG. 171 (b)), and it is possible to realize the effect of the suspended display by the animation, which has no discomfort for the player and is entertaining. That is, when an animation is executed as a hold display, there is a problem that if one hold display and another hold display are not synchronized with each other, the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In this case, in particular, the effect of displaying the animation is high because all the suspended displays of animation are synchronized from the beginning.

The inventive concept (12-2) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball into the starting area) is made. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, an animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
During the execution of the animation display of the previous starting memory (preceding hold) corresponding to the previous starting winning, it is the subsequent starting memory (subsequent holding) corresponding to the new starting prize and should be the starting memory for displaying the animation. Occurs, the image data of the animation display of the previous starting memory (preceding hold) is copied for each frame of the animation (for each frame of the animation) from the start of the animation display of the subsequent starting memory. The animation display of the subsequent starting memory (subsequent hold) is performed using the copied image data (that is, the same image data for each frame (frame) as the animation display of the previous starting memory). And a gaming machine.

(Invention concept (13))
In addition, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, in order to synchronize the animations of all the hold displays (in this case, hold while changing), one hold timer is the same timer, It is possible to control the progress of the hold display animation. Due to this feature, for example, there is a new starting prize (special figure 2) in the state shown in FIG. 176 (a) (the state in which the animations of the holding display are all synchronized), and a new holding display corresponding to the new starting prize. Even when (latest hold display) is started, the animation of this latest hold display is also synchronized with other hold displays from the beginning as shown in FIG. 176 (b). As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In particular, with this configuration, with a simple configuration using one timer, all the suspended display of the animation is synchronized from the beginning, and it is possible to realize the production of the suspended display by the animation that is interesting and has no discomfort to the player. That is, when an animation is executed as a hold display, there is a problem that if one hold display and another hold display are not synchronized with each other, the player may feel uncomfortable, but this can be solved. In addition, since one hold animation timer manages all the hold display animations, control becomes easy.

The inventive concept (13) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball in the starting area) has occurred. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, an animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
There is one starting memory animation timer (holding animation timer) which is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and the starting memory animation timer is constantly updated while at least one of the animation displays is being executed. Thus, when there are a plurality of the starting memories for holding and performing the animation display, the progress of the animation display of the plurality of starting memories is managed by the starting memory animation timer.
Here, "managing the progress of the animation display of a plurality of starting memories by the starting memory animation timer" means, for example, that a frame in the middle of the animation display of the preceding starting memory (a frame after the first) is displayed. When a subsequent starting memory due to a new starting winning occurs during execution, the animation display of the following starting memory is based on the value of the starting memory animation timer in which the timekeeping operation is already in progress, and the first frame ( This means that the animation display is started and progressed from a frame (frame after the first frame) that is after the frame (frame after the first frame) by a time corresponding to the value of the timer.
The start memory animation timer (hold animation control timer) can also be called a start memory animation control timer (hold animation control timer). Also, the starting memory animation timer (holding animation timer) may be a mode in which it is constantly updated (always keeps the time counting operation) without starting memory (holding), as described in FIG. 179 (a). When there is no storage (holding) (that is, when the number of holdings is 0), updating may be stopped (time counting operation is stopped).

It should be noted that, in the animation display, a plurality of modes having different animation display speeds (apparent speeds of motions of animation images) (when the range of motions in which the animation makes one round are the same, in other words, a plurality of times of one cycle period are different) Of the plurality of modes), the progress may be managed by one starting memory animation timer. For example, as described with reference to FIG. 177 and FIG. 179 (b), in a specific mode (type), the frame switching of the animation display is performed at a speed corresponding to the change in the value of the starting memory animation timer on a one-to-one basis. For other modes (for example, the above-mentioned hold display A and hold display B) in which the speed of the animation display is different from that of the specific mode by advancing (frame advance), the speed difference in the speed of the start memory animation timer is changed. Corresponding one-to-one with a change in a value (for example, a value calculated by multiplication or division by a predetermined number) multiplied by a corresponding coefficient (for example, 1/2, ¼, 2, 3, ...) By advancing the frame switching (frame advance) of the animation display at a speed, one timer (starting memory animation) can be used for a plurality of modes with different animation display speeds. It may be configured to implement in Activation Timer).
The inventive concept (13b) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The animation display has a plurality of modes with different animation display speeds (or cycle time),
The effect control means,
By advancing the animation display of each mode based on a value obtained by multiplying the value of the startup memory animation timer by a coefficient as necessary, one start memory animation is also provided for a plurality of modes having different animation display speeds. A game machine characterized by managing progress by a timer.

(Invention concept (13-1))
Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 178, even if the hold display mode is changed by the effect mode switching, a new hold display mode can be displayed based on the same starting memory animation timer (hold animation timer). Is. The progress of the hold display is continuously controlled based on one hold animation timer before the effect mode is switched. That is, even if the mode of the hold display is switched by the effect mode switching, the hold display of the new mode after the effect mode switching is not always executed from the first frame of the animation (for example, the first frame of the movie). The display is started from the frame corresponding to the value of the hold animation timer at that time, based on the correspondence relationship described in FIG. 179 (b). Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect mode switching with easy control that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. As a result, a novel and dynamic effect can be provided, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (13-1) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball in the starting area) has occurred. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, an animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The animation display is
The display mode or animation operation differs depending on the production mode,
The effect control means,
It has one starting memory animation timer (holding animation timer) for managing the progress of the animation display, and the starting memory animation timer is continuously updated even when the mode is switched to start a new effect mode. The game machine is characterized in that the progress is managed by the starting memory animation timer even for the animation display newly held corresponding to a new effect mode when the mode is switched.
Here, "to manage the progress of the animation display newly started corresponding to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching by the start memory animation timer" corresponds to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching, for example. For the animation display that is newly started, based on the value of the start memory animation timer in which the timekeeping operation is already in progress, unless the value of the timer specifies the first frame, the first frame (first This means that the animation display is started and progressed from a frame (frame after the first frame) after the frame corresponding to the value of the timer.

(Invention concept (13-2))
As another mode of the animation display at the time of mode switching, as described with reference to FIG. 178 (b), the startup memory animation timer is cleared (reset) at the time of mode switching, that is, the startup memory at the time of mode switching. With a configuration in which the timekeeping operation of the animation timer is started from the beginning, the progress of the animation display is managed by the starting memory animation timer that started the timing operation from the beginning, and the animation display is started from the beginning when the mode is switched. It may be. In this case, the player can see the hold display in the new display mode corresponding to the new production mode after switching from the beginning, and in that respect, the production effect is enhanced. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (13-2) having the above configuration is represented as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball in the starting area) has occurred. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
As a start memory display (so-called hold display) in the display area corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means, an animation at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the start memories. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing display in the display area,
The effect control means,
It has one starting memory animation timer (holding animation timer) that is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and when the mode is switched to start a new effect mode, the starting memory animation timer is cleared to start the timing operation from the beginning. A game machine characterized in that the progress of the animation display, which is started and newly started corresponding to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching, is managed by the start memory animation timer.
Here, "to manage the progress of the animation display newly started corresponding to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching by the start memory animation timer" corresponds to a new effect mode at the time of mode switching, for example. This means that the animation display that is newly started is started from the first frame (first frame) and proceeds based on the value of the startup memory animation timer that is cleared (reset).

(Invention concept (13-3))
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 177 (b), in addition to the suspension display of the animation, for example, when the animation display is performed as the notice effect display accompanying the variable display of the decorative large pattern (special figure), The animation display of the effect related to this variable display is also controlled based on the common hold animation timer.
In this way, a configuration in which the hold animation timer common to the hold display is used for controlling the effect display other than the hold display (such as the notice effect display of the variable display game) may be performed. Also, it becomes possible to easily synchronize or interlock effects other than the hold display with the hold display, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The inventive concept (13-3) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on the display area (display section 41a) of the display means on condition that a start winning (winning of a game ball in the starting area) has occurred. A gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of a display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage means (game control device 100) for extracting the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the start winning and storing it as the start memory of the variable display game;
If there is a start memory stored in the start storage means, control for executing the corresponding variable display game from the one having won the start prize is performed, and the control is executed in response to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control to erase one starting memory corresponding to the variable display game,
A performance display (for example, a notice performance display) related to the variable display of the identification information can be executed in the display area, and a start-up by the display means corresponding to the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means can be performed. As a memory display (so-called hold display), an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an animation display at a plurality of positions (a plurality of positions in the display area) according to the number of the starting memories in the display area. ,,
The effect control means,
A game characterized by having one starting memory animation timer (holding animation timer) that is a timer for managing the progress of the animation display, and managing the progress of at least a part of the effect display by the starting memory animation timer. Machine.

(Invention concept (14))
Next, in the game machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIGS. 181-185, in the hold display on the display means for the player (for example, the display device 41), the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode. (Normal hold), change suggestion mode (flashing hold), and special display mode (special hold) can be used for any one of a plurality of display modes, and the jackpot expectation degree due to the pending during change (special figure) The probability that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit) is higher in the case of the normal hold than in the case of the pending display of the variable hold as shown in the first line of FIG. 181. It is set. As a result, if the variable hold is blinking hold, it is less likely to be a big hit than the normal hold, and it becomes possible to clarify the distinction between the normal hold and the blinking hold, making it easy to understand the degree of expectation in the hold display mode. In addition to being able to be performed, the contents of the effect in the hold display mode (that is, the display mode of the hold image) are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the jackpot expectation in the hold display at the time of winning is set to be lower in the normal hold than in the blink display, as shown in the sixth line of FIG. 181. There is. As a result, if the hold display at the time of winning is blinking hold, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot than normal hold, and the distinction between normal hold and blinking hold can be made clearer and the degree of expectation in the hold display mode can be easily understood. In addition to being able to do so, the contents of the effect in the hold display mode can be diversified and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. As described above, with this setting, the player feels experientially that the blinking hold at the time of winning is easier to hit than the normal hold at the time of winning, but the first line in FIG. 181 described above. Because there is a setting of, if the blinking hold at the time of winning is continued as it is and remains blinking hold even after shifting to the changing hold, it is a big hit compared to the case of normal holding in the changing hold. Since the probability of playing is small, the player will pay attention to the effect of the hold display while wishing that the flashing hold at the time of winning will change (if possible, change to a special display mode) after that, which improves the fun of the game. To do.
As described above, the characteristic shown in the sixth line of FIG. 181 (that is, the characteristic that the big hit expectation is higher in the case of blinking hold than in the case of normal hold) is not limited to the start winning point, For example, when the start winning award is changed, the standby hold displayed in the normal hold (normal display mode) is changed to the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) at any time before shifting to the changing hold. The same effect can be obtained in this case as well.

Further, the ratio of temporarily hiding (temporarily hiding) the hold display is higher in the case of the normal hold than in the case of the blink display of the hold display, as shown in the second line of FIG. 181. Is set to. As a result, the percentage of blink hold that disappears temporarily becomes lower than that of normal hold, and this feature also makes it possible to clarify the distinction between normal hold and blink hold, and to continue to display the blink hold that the player is watching. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.
It should be noted that conventionally, the blinking hold (change suggestion mode) has only a role of suggesting a hold change, and there is no difference in the big hit expectation degree or the like between the blinking hold and the normal hold. Therefore, for the player who focuses on the big hit, the blinking hold itself (blinking hold without changing to special hold, or blinking hold before changing to special hold) is a display mode of a hold display that does not make much sense. There is a problem that it leads to a decline in the interest of the game. However, in this example, as described above, the jackpot expectation degree and the rate of temporarily hiding are made different from those of the normal hold, so that the above problem is solved.

The basic form of the inventive concept (14) having the above configuration is expressed as follows, for example.
A variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (starting winning; winning of the game ball in the starting area). Yes, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores it as the start memory of the variable display game.
Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing control for executing the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means,
A pending image corresponding to the starting memory is provided to a player for the pending holding, which is the starting memory during execution of the variable display game, and the waiting pending, which is the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed. A production control means (production) capable of executing control of a hold display displayed in a display area (a display area which can be visually recognized by the player and is preferably watched by the player, for example, a display section 41a for displaying a variable display game, and so on). And a control device 300),
The effect control means,
The display mode of the reserved image includes a special display mode (special hold), a change suggesting mode suggesting a change to the special display mode (flashing hold), and a normal display different from the special display mode and the change suggesting mode. It is possible to have any one of a plurality of display modes including a mode (normally held),
The case in which the pending image in the changing pending state is a normal display mode corresponds to the pending image in the changing pending state, rather than the case in which the pending image in the changing pending state (that is, the changing pending image) is in the change suggesting mode. A gaming machine, characterized in that the expectation that the special game state will occur as a result of the variable display game is set to be high.
Here, “the variable display game corresponding to the variable hold is more appropriate when the variable hold is in the normal display mode than when the variable hold is in the change suggestion mode. As a result of the above, it is set that the degree of expectation that the special game state will occur is high ", for example, when the changing pending is flashing pending from the viewpoint of the player (for example, flashing pending at the start of fluctuation. If there is, or if blinking is held after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the holding during change is normally held (for example, if it is normally held at the start of fluctuation, or if it is normally held after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation) The jackpot determination result (the jackpot determination result that can be understood by a command from the game control device 100) is set so that the variation display game during the change has a lower chance of being a jackpot. ) Incidence of each display mode as pending vary depending on which means that there is a different set.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 1 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (14) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
The display mode of the reserved image includes a special display mode (special hold), a change suggesting mode suggesting a change to the special display mode (flashing hold), and a normal display different from the special display mode and the change suggesting mode. It is possible to have any one of a plurality of display modes including a mode (normally held),
In the case where the pending image in the changing pending state or the waiting pending state is in the normal display mode, rather than the case in which the pending image in the changing pending state or the waiting pending state (that is, the changing pending image or the waiting pending image) is in the change suggesting mode. Is set so that the ratio of temporarily hiding the held image during the execution of the variable display game is higher.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 2 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (14) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
The display mode of the reserved image includes a special display mode (special hold), a change suggesting mode suggesting a change to the special display mode (flashing hold), and a normal display different from the special display mode and the change suggesting mode. It is possible to have any one of a plurality of display modes including a mode (normally held),
The special game state is a result of the variable display game corresponding to the standby hold when the hold image of the standby hold is in the change suggestion mode, as compared with the case where the hold image of the standby hold is in the normal display mode. A gaming machine characterized by being set to have a higher expectation of occurrence.
Here, the phrase "the standby hold" may be limited to "the standby hold when the execution condition is satisfied (at the time of winning the start)".
The features of Modifications 1 and 2 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (14) may be combined with the basic form of the above-mentioned inventive concept (14), and by combining them, the effect is enhanced as described above.

(Invention concept (15))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIG. 186 to FIG. 189, the pending images of the pending pending and the pending pending have different forms such as size and shape, and at least the pending pending and the pending pending are changed. Stop display is performed in different areas so that overlapping of held images does not occur (for example, changing hold is performed at display positions that are far apart from the display position interval between standby hold), and stop display between standby hold The sizes, shapes, and display positions of the hold images of the standby hold are set so that the hold images of No. 1 do not overlap. Further, the moving display for moving the position of the hold display in accordance with the hold shift (display for moving the hold image) is configured to be executed after hiding the variable hold before the hold shift. In addition, moving display from standby hold to standby hold makes it possible to move the image of the standby hold on the rear side to the front side even when the image of the standby hold on the front side is not hidden, and The hold image of the hold may partially overlap with other hold images of the standby hold.

As a result, even if the hold images of each standby hold may be overlapped during the moving display, they do not overlap while the variable hold and each standby hold are stopped and displayed, and the moving display is performed from the state without overlap, It is not difficult for the player to understand the hold display, and the relationship between the display layer and the display priority for the display of the variable hold and each waiting hold in the control process (which one is displayed as the front side when the images overlap) It becomes unnecessary to consider (relationship) and control becomes easy. In addition, since the held images that did not overlap during the stop display may overlap during the moving display, it is possible to produce a dynamic, interesting and novel pending display, which improves the enjoyment of the game.
In addition, during the hold shift, the moving display of the standby hold is started after deleting the changing hold, so that the change of the special figure change display game is completed, one start memory is exhausted, or the hold is stopped. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the shift will be performed.
In addition, the display area of the pending image of the variable pending and the standby pending is different, and the size or shape of the pending image of the floating pending and the pending pending are different, so that the difference between the pending pending and the pending pending is different. There is an effect that can be clearly shown to the player.

  It should be noted that, in the past, the pending images of the variable pending and the standby pending were arranged close to each other, and the shapes such as size and shape were similar, so that it was not easy to distinguish between them. Further, for example, when an effect that makes a part of the standby hold conspicuous, such as enlarging and displaying a part of the standby hold while the standby hold is being stopped, when the hold images of the adjacent standby holds overlap, for example, In order to avoid a problem in which one reserved image overlaps with the reserved images on both sides and is obscured by the reserved images on both sides and becomes almost invisible, a display priority is set for each of the reserved images for each standby hold (for example, for variable display). It is necessary to set the display priority order in the order of execution), which causes a problem of control load. However, in the present example, as described above, the standby images are not overlapped during the stop display, so the above problem is solved.

The basic form of the inventive concept (15) having the above configuration is expressed as follows, for example.
A variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (starting winning; winning of the game ball in the starting area). Yes, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores it as the start memory of the variable display game.
The control for executing the variable display game is performed based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, and the order of the start memory (the order of the start winnings or the variation is performed corresponding to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing a hold shift to advance the order in which the display games are executed)
A pending image corresponding to the starting memory is provided to a player for the pending holding, which is the starting memory during execution of the variable display game, and the waiting pending, which is the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing control of the hold display displayed in the display area,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a moving display (a display including a frame (frame) that displays a state in the middle of movement, the same applies below) in which the hold image of the standby hold moves to the predetermined display position of the hold image in the previous order with the hold shift. And
In the normal state where the moving display is not performed, each reserved image is displayed at a predetermined display position of each reserved image that does not overlap each other,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a display in which the respective reserved images overlap each other during execution of the moving display.
Further, the basic form of the inventive concept (15) having the above configuration can also be expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
A start storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of information regarding the execution of the variable display game as a start storage based on the establishment of the execution condition;
Variable display game control means for performing control for executing the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means,
And a production control means capable of executing control for displaying a reserved image corresponding to the starting memory,
The variable display game control means,
When a plurality of starting memories are stored in the starting storage means, a holding shift is performed to advance the execution order of the starting memories in correspondence with the execution of one of the variable display games,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a moving display in which the hold image corresponding to the start-up memory that advances the execution order with the hold shift is moved to the display position corresponding to the execution order after the advance,
In the standby state in which the moving display is not executed, the respective held images do not overlap each other, and are displayed at the display positions of the respective held images,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a display in which the respective reserved images overlap each other during execution of the moving display.
It should be noted that, in the moving display, as in the display example described above, the hold image of the standby hold (standby hold 1) having the first rank is moved to the predetermined display position of the changing hold and the next holding image of the changing hold. May be included.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 1 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (15) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
A game machine characterized in that, when the moving display is started with the holding shift, the pending image of the pending pending change before the holding shift is hidden before the start of the moving display.
Note that the non-display means that the image data is erased from the virtual drawing space (frame buffer of the VDP 312), the transparency of the image is increased, or the image is covered with another image whose display priority is higher. This means making the player invisible.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 2 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (15) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
At least in the normal state in which the moving display is not performed, the pending image of the variable pending is displayed in a display area different from the pending image of the standby pending (preferably larger than the interval between the display positions of the standby pending). A game machine characterized by displaying pending during change at a display position away from each other.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 3 of the above-mentioned invention concept (15) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
At least in the normal state in which the moving display is not performed, an image having a size or form (shape, color, pattern, brightness, etc.) different from that of the hold image of the standby hold is displayed as the hold image of the changing hold. A gaming machine characterized by that.
The features of Modifications 1 to 3 of the above inventive concept (15) may be combined with the basic form of the above inventive concept (15), and by combining them, the effect is enhanced as described above.

(Invention concept (16))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIG. 190, there may be a case where the operation mode of moving display of the reserved image has a characteristic, and each has the following effects.
First, if the operation mode (for example, the orbit or the moving speed) of the movement display accompanying the hold shift is different between the variable hold and the standby hold, the player moves to the variable hold and the standby hold. The distinction between movements can be clearly understood, and the presentation of the hold display is easy to understand.
Next, regarding the movement display from the standby hold to the standby hold, if the operation mode of the movement display (for example, the orbit, the moving speed, etc.) is different for each of the standby hold, the player determines the number of the standby hold. You can easily figure out from which to move.
Next, depending on the display mode of the held image (normal display mode, change suggestion mode, special display mode, or which type of special display mode), the operation mode of the moving display (for example, trajectory, moving speed, etc.) With different configurations, the player can recognize the difference in the jackpot expectation and the like also by the operation mode of the movement display of the hold shift.
Next, the operation mode of the movement display may be configured to be different according to the game state (for example, the difference in the effect mode). In this case, the game state in which the player is staying (for example, in which effect mode is stayed) It is possible for the player to know just by looking at the operation mode of the movement of the held image.
In any of the above configurations, a dynamic, interesting and novel pending display is realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

The basic form of the inventive concept (16) having the above configuration is expressed as follows, for example.
A variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (starting winning; winning of the game ball in the starting area). Yes, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores it as the start memory of the variable display game.
The control for executing the variable display game is performed based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, and the order of the start memory (the order of the start winnings or the variation is performed corresponding to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing a hold shift to advance the order in which the display games are executed)
A pending image corresponding to the starting memory is provided to a player for the pending holding, which is the starting memory during execution of the variable display game, and the waiting pending, which is the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing control of the hold display displayed in the display area,
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
A gaming machine, characterized in that an operation mode of the movement display can execute the movement display that is different between the movement to the suspension while changing and the movement to the standby.
Note that the movement to the variable hold is an operation of moving the hold image of the standby hold (standby hold 1) having the first rank to the predetermined display position of the variable hold and becoming the next held image of the variable hold. means. Further, the movement to the standby hold means the movement from the standby hold to the immediately preceding standby hold, and for example, the held image of the standby hold (waiting hold 2) with the second rank is the standby image with the first rank. This means an operation of moving to a predetermined display position of hold (standby hold 1) and becoming a hold image of the next hold hold 1.

Further, the characteristic portion of the modification 1 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (16) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the operation mode of the movement display can execute the movement display which is different for each of the waiting holdings (for example, depending on the order of waiting holdings).

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 2 of the above inventive concept (16) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
A gaming machine, wherein the moving display can be executed in different operation modes depending on the display mode of the hold image.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 3 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (16) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
With the hold shift, the hold image of the standby hold, it is possible to execute a move display to move to a predetermined display position of the previous hold image in the order,
A game machine characterized in that the movement display can be executed in different operation modes depending on a game state (for example, a difference in effect mode).
The features of Modifications 1 to 3 of the above inventive concept (16) may be combined with the basic form of the above inventive concept (16), and by combining them, the effect is enhanced as described above.

(Invention concept (17))
Next, in the gaming machine of the specific example, as described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 192, the common display data stored and held in the ROM (for example, the image ROM 322 or the PROM 321 in FIG. 5) is used to hold and wait during change. There may be a configuration in which a hold display of the hold is performed. For example, display data that can be used as it is as display data for any one of the pending display during changing and the pending display is stored and held as common display data, and for the one holding display, the image of the common display data remains unchanged. It is realized by displaying (that is, without changing the size), and the other hold display is realized by changing (reducing or enlarging) the display size of the image of the common display data from the beginning or after starting the display. .
The other hold display is realized by temporarily displaying the image of the common display data as it is at a specific position (a display position different from the predetermined display position), and then changing the display size and moving to the predetermined display position. There may be a configuration that does.
As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data to be stored and retained to half as compared with the case of storing and retaining different display data for both the variable suspension and the standby suspension, while realizing a variety of suspension display effects. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of display data. Further, the image of the hold display (that is, the hold image) is different between the changing hold and the waiting hold by changing the display size, so that the player can easily distinguish between them. In addition, particularly when the display size is changed after the common display data is displayed as it is, a dynamic, interesting and novel pending display is realized, which further enhances the enjoyment of the game.

  It should be noted that, in the past, the pending images of the variable pending and the standby pending were arranged close to each other, and the shapes such as size and shape were similar, so that it was not easy to distinguish between them. Then, it is possible to make the display size different to clarify the distinction between the pending pending and the pending pending, but if the configuration is such that separate display data is used to display them, these separate display data It was necessary to keep each memory. Therefore, particularly when there are a large number of pending change patterns, it is necessary to store both the enlarged version data and the reduced version data for each pattern, which causes a problem that the storage capacity increases. However, in this example, as described above, the display data is shared between the variable hold and the standby hold, so that the above problem is remarkably improved.

The basic form of the inventive concept (17) having the above configuration is represented as follows, for example.
A variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed in the display area (display unit 41a) of the display means can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (starting winning; winning of the game ball in the starting area). Yes, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result,
A start storage unit (game control device 100) that extracts the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game based on the establishment of the execution condition and stores it as the start memory of the variable display game.
The control for executing the variable display game is performed based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, and the order of the start memory (the order of the start winnings or the variation is performed corresponding to the execution of one of the variable display games. Variable display game control means (game control device 100) for performing a hold shift to advance the order in which the display games are executed)
A pending image corresponding to the starting memory is provided to a player for the pending holding, which is the starting memory during execution of the variable display game, and the waiting pending, which is the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing control of the hold display displayed in the display area,
The effect control means,
The display data that can be used without changing the image size as the display data of any one of the pending image of the variable hold or the standby hold is stored and held as common display data,
The one reserved display is executed by displaying the image of the common display data as it is (that is, the image size stored as the common display data).
The other pending display of the variable pending or the standby pending can be executed by changing and displaying the display size of the image of the common display data from the beginning or after the display is started.
Further, the basic form of the inventive concept (17) having the above configuration can also be expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Start storage means for storing information on execution of the variable display game as start storage based on establishment of the execution condition;
And a production control unit capable of executing control of a hold display for displaying a hold image corresponding to the starting memory,
The effect control means,
As the holding image, a changing holding image corresponding to the starting memory during execution of the variable display game and a waiting holding image corresponding to the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed can be displayed. And
The display data of any one of the changing hold image or the standby hold image is stored and held as common display data,
The one reserved image is displayed in the image size stored as the common display data,
The other pending image of the changing pending image or the standby pending image is displayed by changing the image size stored as the common display data to a display size corresponding to the other pending image. Amusement machine.

Further, the characteristic part of the modification 1 of the above-mentioned inventive concept (17) is expressed as follows.
The effect control means,
The display data that can be used without changing the image size as the display data of any one of the pending image of the variable hold or the standby hold is stored and held as common display data,
The one pending display is executed by displaying the image of the common display data as it is as the image size stored as the common display data,
The other pending display of the variable pending or the standby pending can be executed by changing the image size of the common display data to the display size corresponding to the other pending image after starting the display,
In the other hold display, it is possible to display the image of the common display data at a specific position different from the predetermined display position at the beginning (at the display start time), and then move the image to the predetermined display position while changing the image size. A gaming machine characterized by being present.
In addition, the hold display using the common display data as described above may be performed without fail when performing the hold display, but is performed only in a specific game state (for example, a specific effect mode) and other A mode that is not performed in the gaming state may be used. In the above description of the inventive concept, "executable" means that such an embodiment may be executed.

Next, modified examples of the inventions of the present application will be described.
First, the effect display (effect display in which the image of the identification information of the variable display game and the image of the effect information at least partially overlap each other) in the invention concepts (1) and (2) is not limited to the reach start effect. For example, it may be performed as an effect before the reach is started (the first half of the decoration special map), may be performed as an effect during the reach action after the start of the reach, or may be displayed while waiting for the customer to be displayed. May be directed.

Further, the effect display (notification effect by combination of the effect information different from the identification information) in the inventive concept (3) is not limited to the presence or absence of the reach action, and informs the branch destination (transition destination) of the subsequent effect flow or game flow. Alternatively, it may be suggested. For example, the effect display may be performed as a part of the reach action, and may function as a notice effect indicating the development destination of the reach effect thereafter.
In addition, the effect information displayed in the effect display in the inventive concepts (3) and (8) is not two (two places) but three or more (three or more) are displayed, and the effect displayed at these three or more places. It may be a mode of notifying or suggesting the presence / absence of the reach action based on a combination of information or a difference in form. For example, like the design of the decorative special drawing, the effect information may be displayed in each of the left, right, and middle three columns.
In addition, the display of the effect information in the effect display in the inventive concepts (3) and (8) may include a variable display in which the type of the displayed effect information changes, or a mode in which this variable display is not included (for example, Alternatively, it is possible to stop and display the type of the effect information that has started to be displayed without changing.

Next, the applicable range of the invention described in the present application will be described.
(1) The gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment, and can be applied to the enclosed ball type gaming machine even when the game is played using the gaming balls.
(2) Further, the present invention is not limited to a game machine using a game ball, but may be applied to a so-called pachi-slot machine (rotating drum type slot machine game machine) or the like that uses coins (or medals) to play a game. You can
(3) The display device such as the display device for decorative special drawing is not limited to the display device using liquid crystal, and is also displayed, for example, an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper. Any member can be used as long as the content can be changed and rendered.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
4 Front frame (main frame, game frame)
5 glass frame (front frame)
9 Performance buttons (operating means)
9a Touch panel (operating means)
11 Fire control handle (operation section)
11a Touch switch (contact detection means)
12a Upper speaker (production means)
12b Lower speaker (production means)
14 Logo display part 16 Ball lending button 20 Game board 26 Ordinary variable winning device (Ordinary electric accessory: Hoden)
26a Start winning opening (second starting opening, starting area)
26b Opening / closing member (opening / closing door, starting opening / closing means, starting area opening / closing means)
27 Variable prize winning device (special variable prize winning device)
27a Special winning opening 27b Opening / closing member (opening / closing door)
32 universal figure starting gate 35 collective display device (display means, special figure display means, general figure display means)
41 display device (production means, display means, special figure display means, general figure display means)
41a Display unit (display screen, display area)
42 Board decoration device (direction means)
43 Frame decoration device (direction means)
44 Board production device (production means)
55 external information terminal board 100 game control device (control device, control means)
101 gaming microcomputer 101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 1st starting opening switch (starting opening 1 switch)
121 Second starting port switch (starting port 2 switch)
122 Gate Switch 123 Winning Hole Switch 124 Big Winning Switch 126 Magnetic Sensor 127 Board Radio Sensor 200 Payout Control Device 211 Glass Frame (Front Frame) Opening Detection Switch 212 Front Frame (Main Body Frame) Opening Detection Switch 300 Performance Control Device (Control Device) , Control means)
311 CPU
311a RAM
312 VDP
321 PROM
322 image ROM
326 RAM
327 FeRAM (backup memory)
338 Volume SW
339 LED for setting confirmation
500 power supply device 600 starting port distribution device 607 special figure 1 starting port (first starting port, starting area)
608 Special figure 2 starting port (second starting port, starting area)
700 movable accessory 701 decorative portion 801 upper movable accessory (movable accessory, light-emitting accessory)
802 Left side movable accessory (movable accessory)
803 Right side movable accessory (movable accessory)
H1 variable display area (identification information display area)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition,
Starting storage means for storing information about the execution of the variable display game as a starting storage based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and storing a predetermined number as an upper limit.
And a production control means capable of executing control for displaying a reserved image corresponding to the starting memory,
The effect control means,
As the holding image, it is possible to display a changing holding image corresponding to the starting memory during execution of the variable display game and a standby holding image corresponding to the starting memory for which the variable display game is not executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

Images